Emonitor

USER’S GUIDE

PUBLICATION EMONTR-UM001D-EN-E–March 2013

Supersedes Publication EMONTR-UM001C-EN-E
 Contact Rockwell Customer Support Telephone — 1.440.646.3434
Online Support — [Link]

Copyright Notice © 2013 Rockwell Automation Technologies, Inc. All rights reserved.
This document and any accompanying Rockwell Software products are copyrighted by Rockwell Automation, Inc. Any
reproduction and/or distribution without prior written consent from Rockwell Automation, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Please refer to the license agreement for details.
Trademark Notices Allen-Bradley, ControlLogix, Datapac, Emonitor, Enwatch, eProcedure, FactoryTalk, Logix5000, Logix5550,
MicroLogix, MotorMonitor, PlantLink, PLC-2, PLC-3, PLC-5, Rockwell, Rockwell Automation, Rockwell Software,
RSLinx, RSLogix, RSMACC, RSNetWorx, RSView, Studio 5000, and XM are trademarks of Rockwell Automation,
Inc.

Any Rockwell Automation software or hardware not mentioned here is also a trademark, registered or otherwise, of
Rockwell Automation, Inc.

Other Trademarks ActiveX, Microsoft, Microsoft Access, SQL Server, Visual Basic, Visual C++, Visual SourceSafe, Windows, Windows
ME, Windows NT, Windows 2000, Windows Server-, Windows XP, Windows 7, and Vista are either registered
trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Adobe, Acrobat, and Reader are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the
United States and/or other countries.
Oracle is a registered trademarks of Oracle Corporation.
ControlNet is a registered trademark of ControlNet International.
DeviceNet is a trademark of the Open DeviceNet Vendor Association, Inc. (ODVA)
All other trademarks are the property of their respective holders and are hereby acknowledged.

Warranty This product is warranted in accordance with the product license. The product’s performance may be affected by system
configuration, the application being performed, operator control, maintenance, and other related factors. Rockwell
Automation is not responsible for these intervening factors. The instructions in this document do not cover all the
details or variations in the equipment, procedure, or process described, nor do they provide directions for meeting every
possible contingency during installation, operation, or maintenance. This product’s implementation may vary among
users.
This document is current as of the time of release of the product; however, the accompanying software may have
changed since the release. Rockwell Automation, Inc. reserves the right to change any information contained in this
document or the software at anytime without prior notice. It is your responsibility to obtain the most current information
available from Rockwell when installing or using this product.

Emonitor version 3.60

ii Modified: April 5, 2013 12:15 pm

Contents

1 • Overview 1
Welcome to Emonitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Contact Us . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

2 • Navigating Emonitor 5
Start Emonitor and log in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Emonitor Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Set the screen refresh rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Shortcut keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Menu Command Shortcut Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Spreadsheet Shortcut Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Hierarchy Pane Shortcut Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Location and Measurement Definition Pane Shortcut Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Window and Pane Shortcut Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Plotting Shortcut Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Using Toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Customize toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Toolbar buttons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Using Spreadsheets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Move the cursor in a spreadsheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Add a new row to a spreadsheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Enter values in a spreadsheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Select values in a spreadsheet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Change the column width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Select rows to delete or copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Paste a row into a spreadsheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Change spreadsheet columns in a pane or window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Working with windows and panes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Select a window or pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Split a window or pane into two panes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Change a pane type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Close a pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Resize a pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Maximize a pane. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Change the window or dialog font . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Save the windows in the workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

iii
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

Saving and Recalling Panes in a View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Save panes in a view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Recall a view in a new Database or Plot window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Recall a view in an open window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Delete a view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

3 • Quick Start 25
Setting up your database. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Add a machine to the database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Set up locations for a machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Set up measurements for the location. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Fill in all the locations for a machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Set up your Emonitor Online system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Set up Emonitor Scheduler to import the data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Using your Emonitor system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Create a list by tagging measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Load a list to a portable data collector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Unload a list from a portable data collector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
View alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Acknowledge alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Change the refresh rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Display reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Display trend plots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Display spectrum plots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

4 • Understanding the Database 39

Overview of the Emonitor Database. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Understanding the Emonitor Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Understand the Hierarchy Tree. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Understand Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Understand Measurement Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Understand Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Understand Archive Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Understanding Frequency Items and Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Database Window Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Edit Information in the Database Dialogs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Hierarchy Tree Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Use Multiple Databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Move in the Database Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Undo Changes to the Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Find and Replace Information in the Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

iv
 • • • • •
Contents

Delete Information in the Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Select Database window fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

5 • Setting up the Database 59

Overview of Setting up Your Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Editing Criticality and Measurement Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Edit Equipment Criticality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Edit Measurement Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Select Frequency and Phase Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Edit Enumerated Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Adding Machinery to Your Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Edit the Number and Names of Hierarchy Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Add a Plant to the Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Edit Information for a Hierarchy Item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Add Component Information for a Hierarchy Item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Add MIMOSA Information for a Hierarchy Item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Use Templates to Add Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Copy Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Manually Add Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Fill in the Information for a Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Copy Information for a Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Copy to Multiple Locations in a List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Delete Information for a Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Record Information in the Hierarchy Notebook. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Working with Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Create and Save a Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Paste a Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Adding Calculated Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Understand Calculated Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Understand Calculated Measurement Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Create Calculated Measurement Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Edit Interpolation Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Update Calculated Measurement Definitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Editing Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Edit Band Filter Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Edit Component Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Edit Collection Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Edit Lubricant Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Edit Storage Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Edit Transducers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Save and Restore Specification Libraries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

v
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

Editing Equipment Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Add and Edit Equipment Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Using Inspection Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

6 • Setting Up Lubricants 103

Overview of Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Setting up a Lubricant Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Add Lubricant Specifications to the Lubricant Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Use Lubricant Specifications for Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Load dVA Viscosity Specifications to the PCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Use the Viscosity Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Storing Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Store MSDS Files as ActiveX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Store MSDS Information in Lubricant Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Storing Ferrographic Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Importing Oil Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Set the Oil Import Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Import Oil Data from a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Schedule Oil Data Import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

7 • Using Lists 117

Overview of Lists in Emonitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Working with Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Display a List in the List Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Clear the Current List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Create a List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Create New List Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Filter Lists by Type or Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Recall an Existing List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Edit a List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Undo Changes to a List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Save a New or Modified List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Change List Type or Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Review and Change List Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Delete a List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Using Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Use Quickload Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Use Lists for Data Collection and Data Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Use Lists for Plots and Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

vi
 • • • • •
Contents

8 • Using Alarms 131

Overview of Alarms in Emonitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Setting Up Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Edit Severity Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Select an Alarm Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Edit an Alarm Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Add Magnitude Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Types of Magnitude Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Add Spectrum Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Types of Spectrum Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Add Band Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Types of Band Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Add Time Waveform Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Types of Time Waveform Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Use Category Variables in Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Use Band Sets and Band Variables in Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Creating Alarm Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Use Secondary Sorting for Alarm Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Limit Data for Alarm Statistics with the Archive Filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Exclude Data Outliers from Alarm Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Generate Alarm Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
How Emonitor Calculates Alarm Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Using Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Use Alarms in Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Use Alarms with Plots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Use Alarms in Data Collection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Update Alarm Severities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Displaying Alarm Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Display the Current Alarm Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Display Alarm Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Display the Unacknowledged Alarm Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Update Alarm Status Indicators after Unload or Import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Acknowledge an Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Displaying Alarm Events in the Alarm Event Log. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Display the Alarm Event Log Pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Select the Alarm Events and Columns to Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Acknowledge Alarms in the Alarm Event Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Add a Note to an Alarm Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Display the Data for an Alarm Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Work with Alarm Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

vii
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

9 • Loading and Unloading a Data Collector 165

Overview of Loading and Unloading a Data Collector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Loading a Data Collector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Select the Current Data Collector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Set Up the Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Set Up the Data Collector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Set the Load Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Connect and Prepare the Data Collector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Select the Lists to Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Load a List into the Data Collector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Collecting Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Unloading a Data Collector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Set Unload Options and Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Unload Data from the Data Collector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Unload Unscheduled Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Change the Destination for Unscheduled Measurements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Assign Collection Spec to Unscheduled Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Store Unscheduled Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Manually Adding and Editing Archive Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Manually Enter Data for a List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Enter and Edit Archive Data in the Archive Data Pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Store Archive Image Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Store ActiveX Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Select the Quality Stamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Select Archive Data Storage Flags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Copy and Paste Data in the Archive Data Pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Export archive data to Microsoft Excel Spreadsheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Importing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Set the Import Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Import the data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Import ActiveX data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Edit EDI files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Schedule Data Import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Displaying System Events in the System Event Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Enable and Disable system event logging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Display the System Event Log Pane. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Select the Events and Columns to Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Work with System Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

viii
 • • • • •
Contents

10 • Using Plots 199

Overview of Plots in Emonitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Displaying Plots and Images in Plot Windows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Open a Plot Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Select Different Plots and Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Save a Plot Definition as the Default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Copy Plots and Images to the Clipboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Print Plots and Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Displaying a Plot Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Display a Plot Pane Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Display a Plot Legend Pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Select colors and fonts for the Plot Legend Pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Changing the Appearance of Plots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Use Plot Regions to Change the Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Change the Plot Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Change the Plot Colors and fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Change the Plot Cursor Type and Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Change the Plot Number Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Change the Plot Point and Line Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Change the Archive Data Storage Flag from a Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Display Alarms on a Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Display and Hide the Plot Grid Lines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Display Notes and Inspection Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Enter and Edit Notes on a Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Working with Trend Plots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Compare Trends in an XY Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Display Curve Fits on Trend Plots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Synchronize the X Axis in Trend Plots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Use Frequency Trend and Band Frequency Trend Plots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Working with Spectrum Plots. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Display Bearing Cursors for a Particular Bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Change the Stored Operating Speed in a Spectrum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Display and Hide the Band Overall Amplitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Change the Units in a Spectrum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Display Spectra in a Spectrum Map Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Compare Spectra in a Spectrum Difference/Ratio Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Label a Frequency in a Spectrum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Label the Highest Peaks in a Spectrum Plot. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Lock the Frequency Cursors Together . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Working with Image and ActiveX plots. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Display Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

ix
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

Display ActiveX Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

Selecting Data for Plotting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Limit Plot Data with the Archive Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Unlink a Plot from other Windows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Overlay data in a Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Use Pane Locking with Plots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Plot Data from the Database Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Plot Data from the Measurement Definition Pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Plot Data from the List Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Plot Data from the Report Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Use the Remote Control with Plots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

11 • Using Reports 241

Overview of Creating and Printing Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Printing and Viewing Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Limit Report Data with the Archive Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Change the Report Number Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Print or Display a Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Automatic Reports after Unloading/Importing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Use Reports to Navigate through the Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Export a Report to Another Application. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Creating Custom Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Create a New Report Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Add Date-Time and Special Codes to Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Edit a Report Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Delete a Report Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Change the Appearance of Plots in Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

12 • Identifying Diagnostic Frequencies 253

Overview of Identifying Diagnostic Frequencies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Setting Up Frequency Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Add Frequency Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Connect Frequency Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Types of Frequency Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Use the Speed Reference Frequency Item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Edit Frequency Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Delete Frequency Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Use Frequency Outputs to Define Machine Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Identifying Frequencies in Plots and Reports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Identify Frequencies in Plots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Identify Frequencies in Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268

x
 • • • • •
Contents

13 • Asset Health Management 269

Overview of Asset Health Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Setting Up Gateways and Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Set Up Work Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Configure Gateways . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Set Up Your Email Software as the MAPI Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Set Up Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Manually Analyzing Data and Creating Work Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Manually Create an Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Manually Create Work Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Automatically Analyzing Data and Creating Work Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Create a diagnosis specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Assign a diagnosis specification to an asset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Evaluate an assigned diagnosis specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Using Rule Sets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Rule Set window description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Rule Set toolbar buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Create a rule set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Assign a rule set to an asset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Evaluate an assigned rule set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Manually evaluate a rule set for any asset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
View Analyses and Advisories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Tracking Work Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
View Work Request Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Manually Update Work Requests. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Verify the Completed Work Request . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

14 • MIMOSA Import and Export 297

Overview of MIMOSA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Setting Up the Emonitor Database for MIMOSA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
MIMOSA Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Set Up the Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Exporting and Importing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Set the MIMOSA Configuration Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Export Data to MED Files or MIMOSA Tables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Import Data from MED Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Resolve Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302

xi
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

15 • Using Emonitor Web 303

Loading and Unloading Data with Emonitor Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Add an Emonitor Web User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Create an Emonitor Web List Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Create and Save Emonitor Web Load Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Update Emonitor Web Webload files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Collect data with Emonitor Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Process Emonitor Web Unload files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306

16 • System Management 307

File Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Back up Emonitor Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Execute Database Script Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Remove Old Data from the Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Remove Measurement Definitions from the Database. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Data Mover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Export Emonitor Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Import Emonitor Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Scheduler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Create a Scheduled Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Manually Launch a Scheduled Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
View and Edit Scheduled Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Online Import Event parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
ActiveX Import Event parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
XM/DYN Online Data Import Event parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Logix Online Data Import Event parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Storage Limit Updater parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Intelligent Advisory Evaluator parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Calculation Updater parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Alarm Severity Status Updater parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Data Harvester Import Event parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Data Mover Event parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
User Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Set Up the Emonitor Administrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Add a New User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Add an Emonitor Web User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Require User Login . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Use the Current Login when Changing Databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Change Your Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Remove a User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322

xii
 • • • • •
Contents

Glossary 323

Index 355

xiii
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

xiv
1 Overview
Welcome to Emonitor
Emonitor® provides complete data management for predictive maintenance services. The
Windows® interface allows you to perform all your predictive maintenance tasks quickly
and easily using a convenient graphical format.
The following features are available in all versions of the Emonitor software, unless other-
wise noted. With Emonitor you can:
 Learn about Emonitor and its functions with the demonstration plant and Quick Start
steps.
 Set up the database to model your machinery and processes and hold the data you col-
lect in your Predictive Maintenance program. You can use templates containing infor-
mation about different types of machinery to quickly set up your database.
 Create calculated measurements. These are measurement definitions created by defin-
ing mathematical operations on one or more measurement definitions—such as find-
ing a pressure differential by subtracting one pressure from another.
 Set up lists for data collection and reports.
 Load one or more lists into a data collector for collection.
 Unload data from a data collector into the database.
 Import data from an external file of data into the database.
 Create alarms from statistical analysis of the data.
 Generate reports of the data, including reports of measurements that exceed alarms.
You can also create your own custom reports.
 Display plots of the data, including trend, spectrum, frequency trend, time waveform,
spectrum map, polar, unit, and XY plots.
 Create and use spectrum and band alarms.
 Create frequency items for equipment that generates vibration, and then use the fre-
quency outputs to help diagnose vibration problems (Factory and Enterprise bundles).
 Create analyses of problems, consisting of a description of the cause of the problem,
and advisories describing the work to correct the problem. You can also use the Intel-
ligent Advisory™ function to automatically create advisories from diagnosis specifi-
cations (Factory and Enterprise bundles) or rule sets (Enterprise bundle).

1
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

 Set up one or more gateways. Gateways allow you to create work requests from advi-
sories and send them by email (Factory and Enterprise bundles). You can also send
work requests to an external Computerized Maintenance Management System
(CMMS) or Enterprise Asset Maintenance (EAM) system (Enterprise bundle).

Terms used in this manual

Emonitor The Rockwell Software program that includes the

ability to display plots and alarms, create lists and
reports, and manage the database. It also allows
you to store asset health information for your
machinery.
Emonitor system The hardware and software components that make
up the Emonitor condition monitoring system.
Emonitor software The programs that are part of the Emonitor condi-
tion monitoring system. This includes the Emonitor
program itself, and the supporting programs like
Scheduler.

Contact Us

Phone Support Programs

CONTACTING ROCKWELL AUTOMATION TECHNICAL SUPPORT
If you cannot find the answer to your question using any of the resources suggested above,
contact Rockwell Automation Technical Support by one of the following methods:

TELEPHONE SUPPORT
1-440-646-3434
Support staff are available Monday through Friday from 8 AM to 7 PM Eastern Standard
Time (North America only), except during holidays.

2
 • • • • •
1 • OVERVIEW

WHEN YOU CALL

When you call, please be at your computer and be prepared to give the following
information:
 The product serial number - you can find this number in the Help About dialog box.
 The product version number
 The type of hardware you are using
 The exact wording of any messages that appeared on your screen
 A description of what happened, and what you were doing when the problem occurred
 A description of how you tried to solve the problem
You might also be required to provide information about any product updates that are
installed on your computer.

THE ROCKWELL AUTOMATION SUPPORT WEB SITE

The Rockwell Automation support web site includes comprehensive searchable databases
of support information for all Rockwell Automation products. It also includes online
support, software utilities and downloads, case studies, and literature.
The support web site is located at:
[Link]
The Rockwell Automation Knowledgebase is a searchable database of technical notes and
frequently asked questions updated daily by our support specialists. The Knowledgebase
is available from the Rockwell Automation support page.
To open the Knowledgebase:
On the Rockwell Automation support page, click Knowledgebase or go to
[Link]

3
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

4
2 Navigating Emonitor
Start Emonitor and log in
Start Emonitor
Click the Start button, then select Programs > Rockwell Software > Emonitor >Emon-
itor

Log In
If Emonitor is set up to require logging in, the program displays the Log In dialog. Enter
your user name and password.
 You can also log in using your user name by selecting File > Log In after Emonitor
starts.
 You can change to a different database by clicking Change DB.
 For multi-user (network) versions of Emonitor, you may need to perform additional
steps to log in to your database. If necessary, contact your System Administrator for
more information.

Do not select the ISLAND database. This database is not compatible with Emonitor, and will
cause Emonitor to lock up.

Log Out
You can log out of Emonitor without exiting the program. Select File > Log Out.

5
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

Emonitor Window

The Emonitor window consists of the following parts.

Title bar
The title bar contains the name of the program, including the particular version of your
Emonitor program.

Menu bar
The menu bar contains the menu commands. You can highlight a command and press F1
for more information.

Toolbar
Most of the functions of Emonitor can be accessed via the Menu bar or by clicking a tool-
bar button. As you move the mouse over the toolbar buttons, a tool-tip serves tells you the
function of the button.
 You can customize, show, and hide toolbars. See “Using Toolbars” on page 14.
 For a description of toolbar buttons, see “Toolbar buttons” on page 15.

Workspace
The workspace contains the Database, List, Plot, and Report windows.
The workspace is larger than can be shown on the screen at one time. When you move a
window beyond the edge of the visible workspace, scroll bars appear. These scroll bars let
you view the rest of the workspace.

6
 • • • • •
2 • Navigating Emonitor

To save the current workspace

Emonitor can save the arrangement of windows on the workspace when you exit the
program. Select File > Save Workspace on Exit. A checkmark appears next to the
command when it is active.

On a multi-user version of Emonitor, the program stores the workspace for each different
user. When you start Emonitor, it restores the workspace stored for your user name.

To restore the workspace

If File > Save Workspace on Exit is checked when you exit Emonitor, then Emonitor
restores the workspace the next time you start the program.
If the Log In dialog appears when you start Emonitor, make sure that you select
Restore user workspace. If you do not select this check box, Emonitor does not
restore your workspace.

Status bar
The status bar appears at the bottom of the Emonitor window. It displays a brief, context
sensitive help message. The help message depends on the current state of the program. It
also displays the target date time, the database, the user name, and the number of measure-
ment definitions if you have a point-limited system.

State Status bar message

Highlight a menu name Describes the highlighted command. Pressing F1
or command displays help for the command.
Mouse pointer over a but- Describes the action of the button under the pointer.
ton on a toolbar
None of the above. “Press F1 for help.” Pressing F1 displays help for
whatever window or pane is active. If Emonitor is
the active window, F1 displays the first help topic.

You can hide and show the status bar with View > Status Bar.

Set the screen refresh rate

You can set the rate at which Emonitor redraws the screen to show any new data from the
database. You may want Emonitor to automatically refresh the screen if you have a multi-
user or Emonitor Online System. Automatically refreshing the screen shows the latest
information.
1. Select Setup > Options > General.

7
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

2. Under Background and screen refresh rate, set the Refresh rate. You can also dis-
able automatic screen refreshing.

This sets the refresh rate for both the Emonitor screen and alarm status information. The
alarm status information is only important if you use the alarm status indicators

A good default value for the refresh rate is one minute. For Emonitor Online Systems,
increasing the refresh rate time:
 Can improve performance
 Increases the length of time between screen updates with new data
Even if you disable the automatic screen refresh, Emonitor still redraws the screen with
new information when:
 You unload a data collector.
 You import data using Tools > Data Import.
 You move to a different item in the Hierarchy Tree, location, or measurement defini-
tion pane.
 You click the Refresh button or press F5.

Shortcut keys
Shortcut keys allow you to quickly execute commands by pressing key combinations.

Menu Command Shortcut Keys

Use these key combinations to execute commands without having to open a menu to
select the command.

Action Keys
Undo changes to the current list Ctrl+Y
Cut current selection to Clipboard (List win- Ctrl+X
dow only)
Copy current selection to Clipboard Ctrl+C
(Database and List windows only)
Paste contents of Clipboard Ctrl+V
(Database and List windows only)
Find items in the database Ctrl+F

8
 • • • • •
2 • Navigating Emonitor

Action Keys
Tag items for a list Ctrl+T
Recall a saved list Ctrl+R
Save a list Ctrl+S
Archive filter settings Ctrl+A
Load/unload a data collector Ctrl+L
Manually enter data for a list Ctrl+E
Update Quickload load files Ctrl+U
Generate alarm statistics Ctrl+G
Build a custom report Ctrl+B
Refresh the Emonitor screen F5
Perform an analysis on a machine Ctrl+N

Spreadsheet Shortcut Keys

Use these key combinations to perform actions in a spreadsheet.

Action Keys
Move the cursor one cell in any direction Arrow keys
Move to the first column in a row Home
Move to the last column in a row that has data End
Move to the first column in the first row in the Ctrl+Home
spreadsheet
Move to the last column in the last row in the Ctrl+End
spreadsheet that has data
Move down one page in the spreadsheet PgDn
Move up one page in the spreadsheet PgUp
Move right one page in the spreadsheet Ctrl+PgDn
Move left one page in the spreadsheet Ctrl+PgUp
Select the current row in the spreadsheet Shift+Spacebar
Extend the selection of cells Shift+arrow keys

9
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

Action Keys
Delete the contents of the selected cells Delete
Edit the currently cursored cell, or select from Enter then Alt+Down
a list of choices for the cell (edit mode) Arrow
Delete the contents of the current cell when in F2
edit mode
Select today’s date in a date cell if in edit F3
mode
Pop up a calendar in a date cell if in edit mode F4
Select an item in a list Arrow keys
Undo the changes to the current cell, exit edit Esc
mode
Keep changes to the current cell, exit edit Enter
mode
Toggle the value in a cell (toggle field) Enter
Tag/untag the measurement definitions for the Enter when the cursor is
current list (Location and Measurement Defi- on the Tag column of a
nition spreadsheets only) row

Hierarchy Pane Shortcut Keys

Use these key combinations to perform actions with the Hierarchy Tree in the Hierarchy
pane.

Action Keys
Select an item in the Tree Arrow keys
Expand a selected branch one level Ctrl++ on the numeric
keypad
Collapse a selected branch Ctrl+- on the numeric
keypad
Completely expand a closed branch Ctrl+* on the numeric
keypad
Edit the name of the selected item Enter
Delete the selected item Delete

10
 • • • • •
2 • Navigating Emonitor

Action Keys
Add a new item to the Tree Insert
Move the selected item (up, down) Ctrl+Up Arrow,
Ctrl+Down Arrow
Move the selected item (in, out) Ctrl+Left Arrow,
Ctrl+Right Arrow
Tag all the measurement definitions for the + on the numeric keypad
selected item
Untag all the measurement definitions for the - on the numeric keypad
selected item
Undo changes to the Tree Ctrl+Z
Copy the current item to the Clipboard Ctrl+C
Paste the contents of the Clipboard into the Ctrl+V
Tree

Location and Measurement Definition Pane Shortcut Keys

Use these key combinations to perform actions in the Location and Measurement Defini-
tion pane.

Action Keys
Move the selected row (up, down) Ctrl+Up Arrow,
Ctrl+Down Arrow

See also “Spreadsheet Shortcut Keys” on page 9.

Window and Pane Shortcut Keys

Use these key combinations to perform actions in a window or pane.

Action Keys
Move to the next window Ctrl+F6
Move to the next pane in a window F6
Move to the next control in a window, pane, Tab
or dialog

11
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

Action Keys
Move to the previous control in a window, Shift+Tab
pane, or dialog
Move to the next tab in a tabbed dialog Ctrl+Tab
Move to the previous tab in a tabbed dialog Shift+Ctrl+Tab
Open the Control menu for the active Data- Alt+Hyphen
base, Report, List, or Plot window when the
window is active
Close a Database, Report, List, or Plot win- Ctrl+F4
dow
Switch among the active Database, Report, Alt+Shift+F6
List, or Plot window and/or the hierarchy
notebook
Display the popup menu for the current selec- Shift+F10
tion (same as right-clicking on the selection)

Plotting Shortcut Keys

Use these key combinations to perform actions in a Plot window.

Action Keys
Move to the previous/next point Left, Right Arrows
Move to the previous/next point (fast cursor) Shift+Left, Shift+Right
Arrows
Move to the next/previous plot region Tab, Shift+Tab
Activate the current plot region Spacebar
Toggle plot grids on/off G
Toggle display of text and inspection codes N
on/off
Toggle the linear curve fit on/off in trend plots C
Begin the curve fit from the cursored point in F
trend plots
Toggle the power curve fit on/off in trend W
plots

12
 • • • • •
2 • Navigating Emonitor

Action Keys
Move the cursor between the trend and the Ctrl+Up Arrow
curve fit lines in trend plots
Move the cursor back to the trend line in trend Ctrl+Down Arrow
plots
Display the next/previous measurement in the Up Arrow,
archive data for this measurement definition Down Arrow
Display the most recent (latest) measurement Home
in the archive data for this measurement defi-
nition
Display the first (earliest) measurement in the End
archive data for this measurement definition
Display the next/previous location in the data- PgDn, PgUp
base
Display the next/previous location in the cur- Shift+PgDn,
rent list Shift+PgUp
Display the next/previous measurement defi- Ctrl+PgDn,
nition in the database Ctrl+PgUp
Display the next/previous measurement defi- Shift+Ctrl+PgDn,
nition in the current list Shift+Ctrl+PgUp
Zoom in (enlarge) an image + on the numeric keypad
Zoom out (reduce) an image - on the numeric keypad
Fit an image to the plot pane Enter
Toggle between fine and normal cursor mode F
in spectrum, spectrum map, and time wave-
form plots
Toggle between peak and normal cursor mode K
in spectrum, spectrum map, and time wave-
form plots
Toggle between harmonic and normal cursor H
types in spectrum, spectrum map, and time
waveform plots.
Toggle between sideband and normal cursor S
types in spectrum, spectrum map, and time
waveform plots

13
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

Action Keys
Toggle the frequency tracking cursor on/off in T
spectrum map plots
Show or hide the Bearing Selector dialog to B
choose a specific bearing and display the bar-
ing cursor in spectrum plots.
Store operating speed at cursor as the operat- Ctrl+I
ing speed for the measurement (spectrum plot
only)
Define and store operating speed at cursor as Ctrl+O
number of orders (spectrum plot only)

Using Toolbars
Emonitor displays the toolbar for a window when you open the window. Each toolbar
contains buttons that execute commands that are specific to the corresponding window
(for example, the Plot toolbar for the Plot window). In addition, you can display the
Remote Control as a toolbar. Emonitor has the following toolbars.
 Main: Main Emonitor toolbar that has buttons for the main windows and commands.
 List: List window commands
 Plots: Plot window commands
 Reports: Reports window commands
 Database: Database window commands
 Programs: Buttons that run other Emonitor programs (Scheduler, Calculation
Updater, Data Mover, …)
 Remote Control: Buttons for navigating through the database (useful when viewing
plots)
There are also two toolbars that allow you to recall saved views and report descriptions.
These are the Saved Views and Saved Reports toolbars.
 Saved Views: Buttons for recalling saved Database, List, and Plot window views.
 Saved Reports: Buttons for running saved report descriptions on the current list.

Customize toolbars
Toolbars contains the buttons that give you quick access to commands, views, and report
descriptions.

14
 • • • • •
2 • Navigating Emonitor

To show and hide a toolbar

You can hide a toolbar so that it does not appear when you open the window.
1. Open the desired window to display the toolbar (a Plot window for the Plots toolbar).
2. Select View > Toolbars. Check marks appear next to the displayed toolbars.
3. Click the name of the toolbar to show or hide the toolbar.

To move a toolbar
You can drag a toolbar to a different location on the screen. If you release the toolbar on
an edge of the workspace, it “docks” itself to the side of the workspace. You can also
make a “floating toolbar” by releasing the toolbar anywhere on your screen.

To customize the buttons on a toolbar

1. Select View > Customize Toolbars.
2. Select the toolbar you want to change and click Customize.
3. Select the buttons to add to or remove from the toolbar. Only buttons that apply to the
toolbar are available. You can also add separators between buttons.

Toolbar buttons
Toolbar buttons appear on the Emonitor window toolbars. You can hide and customize
toolbars. See “Using Toolbars” on page 14.

Open the Database window and select the view or

pane.

Open the List window.

Open the Reports dialog and select the report(s) to dis-

play or print.

Open a Plot window and select the view or type of

plot.

Open the Load/Unload dialog.

15
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

Open the hierarchy notebook.

Display the Data Import dialog.

Toggle the archive filter on (pushed in) or off.

Maximize (zoom) the active Database or Plot pane to

the size of the window (pushed in). Restore a zoomed
pane to its original size.
Copy the currently selected item, report, or Plot win-
dow to the Clipboard.

Cut the currently selected locations in the List window

to the Clipboard.

Paste the contents of the Clipboard into Emonitor at

the cursor.

Select and paste a template at the current cursor loca-

tion in the Database window.

Tag the currently selected item in the Database win-

dow. This adds the item’s measurement definitions to
the current list.
Untag the currently selected item in the Database win-
dow. This removes the item’s measurement definitions
from the current list.
Print the contents of the active Plot or Report window
to the current printer.

Print the contents of the active Report window to a

file.

Link (pushed in) or unlink the active plot window to

the Database and List windows.

Lock the current plot pane to the displayed measure-

ment unit/filter combination.

16
 • • • • •
2 • Navigating Emonitor

Label the closest frequency output at the cursor in a

spectrum plot (Factory and Enterprise bundles).

Label all the frequency outputs in a spectrum plot,

according to the data options for the plot (Factory and
Enterprise bundles).
Lock (pushed in) or unlock the frequency cursors
together in spectrum and spectrum map plots in a win-
dow.
Perform an analysis on a machine (Factory and Enter-
prise bundles).

Refresh the Emonitor display.

Using Spreadsheets
Spreadsheets operate as a combination of text boxes and list boxes, arranged into rows
and columns. The top row of a spreadsheet is the header, and contains the names of the
columns. The List window, and most of the panes in the Database window contain spread-
sheets. In addition, spreadsheets appear in some dialogs. This is a part of the Measurement
Definition spreadsheet from the Database window:

Move the cursor in a spreadsheet

Notice that the cursor highlights the cell in the first empty row of the column. You can
move the cursor in two ways:
 Move the cursor to a cell by clicking the cell.
 Move the cursor to a cell by pressing the arrow keys.

17
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

Add a new row to a spreadsheet

Move to the blank row at the bottom of the spreadsheet. Note that for the Archive Data
pane, the blank row is at the top of the spreadsheet, not the bottom. Then enter or select
values for each of the cells in the new row.

Enter values in a spreadsheet

The Name field in the Measurement Definition spreadsheet is a text box.
To enter text, move the cursor to the cell and type the text directly into the cell.
To edit existing text, move the cursor to the cell and do one of the following:
 Double-click the cell. The cursor changes to a vertical bar so you can edit the text.
 Press Enter. This highlights the contents of the cell. Press the Left Arrow key to
change the cursor to a vertical bar so you can edit the text.

Select values in a spreadsheet

The Data Type field in the Measurement Definition spreadsheet is a list box. You can
open the list box in a cell in the Data Type column in two ways:
 Double-click the cell.
 Move the cursor to the cell with the arrow keys and press Enter.
Then select a value by clicking it, or by using the arrow keys to select the value and press-
ing Enter.

Change the column width

To change the width of a column, move the mouse pointer to the line between the two col-
umn headers. The pointer changes shape, as shown below. Drag the line to change the
width of the column to the left of the line (Collection column in this example).

18
 • • • • •
2 • Navigating Emonitor

Emonitor does not automatically save the changed columns. You can save changes in the col-
umn width by saving the current view. Select View > Save View. You can also change the col-
umn width for spreadsheets in the Database and list windows with View > Pane Options.

Select rows to delete or copy

To perform operations on a row or rows of cells, you must first select the row(s). You can
copy rows from spreadsheets in windows only, and not from spreadsheets in dialogs.
1. Select the row or rows. Do one of the following:
 Move the spreadsheet cursor into the row to select the row. To select two or more
rows, drag over a cell in the first row, then drag down the column. When you
release the mouse button, Emonitor highlights the selected rows.
 Hold down the Shift key and press the Up or Down Arrow key to select multiple
rows:

Note that if you want to delete one or more rows, you must select two cells in a row
before pressing Delete:

19
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

2. Perform the desired action:

 To delete the selected rows, press Delete.
 To copy the selected rows to the Clipboard select Edit > Copy, or press Ctrl+C.
Use Edit > Copy with Data if you want to include the archive data as well.

Emonitor copies all the frequency items at one time from the Frequency Item pane. You can-
not copy just one or some of the Frequency items (Factory and Enterprise bundles).

Paste a row into a spreadsheet

You can paste rows into spreadsheets in windows only, and not into spreadsheets in dia-
logs. Note that you cannot paste a row from one type of spreadsheet into another. For
example, you cannot paste a row from the Location pane into the Alarm pane. To paste a
row from the Clipboard:
1. Move to the pane containing the spreadsheet where you want to paste the new row or
rows from the Clipboard.
2. Select Edit > Paste, or press Ctrl+V.

Change spreadsheet columns in a pane or window

You can change the columns that appear in a spreadsheet in a window or a pane. Emonitor
allows you to do the following in the List window and the Location, Measurement Defini-
tion, Auto Advisory, Frequency Item, Frequency Output and Alarm panes in the Database
window:
 Select the fields from the database to appear in the spreadsheet.
 Define the header that appears at the top of each column.
 Define the width of each column.
 Select the justification (position) for the text in the column (right, centered, or left jus-
tified).
If you want to keep the changes to the column definition, you must save the changes as
part of a view. See “Save panes in a view” on page 23. You can then recall the view with
the new column definition any time that the window is open. Note that you cannot change
the columns in the Archive Data pane.

You can also change the column width by dragging the line between column headers in the
spreadsheet.

1. Click the pane or window to select it.

20
 • • • • •
2 • Navigating Emonitor

2. Select View > Pane Options. The current column definition appears in the Pane
Options dialog.
3. Change the column definition.

If you want to keep the changes to the column definition, you must save the changes as part of a
view. You can then recall the view with the new column definition any time that the window is
open. See “Saving and Recalling Panes in a View” on page 22.

Working with windows and panes

Panes are subdivisions of a window, and the panes always fill the window. You can split
the Database window and Plot windows into two or more panes. You can also split a Data-
base or Plot pane into two panes. Finally, you can save an arrangement of panes in a win-
dow as a view.

Select a window or pane

 To select a window, click anywhere in the window or press Ctrl+F6 until the window
is active.
 To select a pane in the active window, click anywhere in the pane or press F6 until the
pane is active.

Split a window or pane into two panes

Splitting a window or pane allows you to see two or more panes at the same time, without
having to change to a different view. This is helpful when you want to create your own
views.
1. Select the window or pane.
2. Select View > Split Horizontal or View > Split Vertical. This opens the Change
Pane dialog.
3. Select the new pane type in the Change Pane dialog.

Change a pane type

1. Select the pane.
2. Select View > Change Pane.
3. Select the pane type in the Change Pane dialog.

21
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

Close a pane
1. Select the pane.
2. Select View > Close Pane.

Resize a pane
1. Move the mouse pointer to the edge of the pane. The mouse pointer changes to a dou-
ble-headed arrow.
2. Drag the edge to resize the pane.

Maximize a pane
1. Select the pane.
2. Select View > Zoom.
3. To restore the pane to its previous size, select View > Zoom.

Change the window or dialog font

You can change the font and font size of the text that appears in the Emonitor program
windows and dialogs.
1. Select Setup > Fonts, then select the desired command.
2. Select the font characteristics in the Font dialog.

Save the windows in the workspace

After you have arranged one or more windows in the Emonitor workspace, you may want
to save that arrangement. Then when you start Emonitor again, the program displays the
same windows in the same arrangement. The same is true for the display and arrangement
of toolbars.
To save the arrangement of windows, make sure File > Save Workspace on Exit is
selected before you exit Emonitor (a check mark appears next to the command). Emonitor
automatically restores the saved workspace when you start the program.

If you must log in when you start Emonitor, make sure that Restore user workspace is selected
in the Log In dialog. Otherwise, Emonitor does not restore your saved workspace.

Saving and Recalling Panes in a View

You can save an arrangement of panes in a window as a view. This allows you to select
which panes appear in the Database window or a Plot window. Saving a Plot view saves

22
 • • • • •
2 • Navigating Emonitor

the current settings for the plots, including cursor options, axis options, and plot data
options. Saving a Database or List view also saves the current column definitions for the
spreadsheets in the window.

Save panes in a view

1. Click the window to select it.
2. Select View > Save View.
3. Enter the name for the view in the Save Current View dialog. You can also define a
shortcut key combination for the view.
The shortcut key allows you to recall the saved view by pressing the shortcut key
combination when the window is open. You must use a combination of keys that
includes the Ctrl or the Alt key. For example, press Ctrl+3 when the cursor is in the
Shortcut key box. Also, be careful not to use a shortcut key combination that is
already defined in Emonitor. See “Shortcut keys” on page 8.

Recall a view in a new Database or Plot window

1. Open the Database window or a Plot window. Emonitor displays the Select View dia-
log.
2. Select the view from the list of views.

You can also assign a button on the Saved Views toolbar for a view, then click that button to
recall that view. “Using Toolbars” on page 14.

Recall a view in an open window

1. Click the window to select it.
2. From the View menu, select the view from the list of views at the bottom of the menu.

You can also press the shortcut key combination for the view to recall the view. The shortcut keys
for the views are listed at the bottom of the View menu next to the view name.

You can also assign a button on the Saved Views toolbar for a view, then click that button to
recall that view. See “Using Toolbars” on page 14.

23
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

Delete a view
You can delete a view once you no longer need it. Note that you cannot delete a plot view
that is used in a report.

You cannot recall a view after it is deleted.

1. If you want to delete a Database window view, open the Database window. If you
want to delete a Plot window view, open a Plot window. Emonitor automatically dis-
plays the Select View dialog.
2. Select the view from the list of views, and click Delete.
3. You can then select a different view, or click Cancel to close the dialog.

24
3 Quick Start
Setting up your database
The steps in this section show you how to add a machine to the database, how to set up
location for measurements, and how to set up measurement definitions.

You can substitute a machine from your plant for the one in the example. When you are done,
you can delete or keep the machine that you added to the database.

Add a machine to the database

step 1
This step shows you how to add a new plant, train, and machine to the database.
1. Start Emonitor.
2. Open the Database window by selecting Window > Database and selecting the Data-
base Setup view in the Select View dialog. The view shows the Hierarchy pane on the
left and the Location pane on the right.

You can click in a pane, then press F1 for a description of the pane.

3. To add a new plant, select the disk icon in the Hierarchy pane, and press Insert. Your
cursor appears in a box next to a new hierarchy item at the bottom of the Hierarchy
tree.

4. Type in the name of your new plant. For example, type Plant A, and press Enter.
5. Press Insert again to add a new hierarchy item. Type in the name of your new train.
For example, type Area 41, and press Enter.

25
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

6. Press Ctrl+Right Arrow to move the new train under the plant.

7. Press Insert again to add a new machine under the new train, and type in the name of
your new machine. For a motor-pump combination, type Tank #1, and press Enter.
8. Press Ctrl+Right Arrow to move the new machine under the new train. You now
have the hierarchy set up for your new machine.

Set up locations for a machine

step 2
This step shows you how to add measurement locations for the new machine.
1. Select the Tank #1 machine in the Hierarchy pane. You may have to click the + signs
to expand the plant or train so you can see the machine.
2. In the Location pane (next to the Hierarchy pane) there are several columns that
describe the measurement. Double-click in the Location ID column and type
Mtr-OB-Vert (for motor-outboard in the vertical direction).
3. Press Tab or double-click in the Position column, and enter 1.
4. Press Tab or double-click in the Direction column, and select Vertical.
5. Press Tab or double-click in the Category column, and select the Standard Machine
category. Notice that Emonitor puts default values in some of the other fields.
6. Press Tab or double-click in the RPM column, and type the running speed of the
motor. For this example, type 1800.

26
 • • • • •
3 • Quick Start

7. Press Tab or double-click in the Description column and type a short description if
desired.

Set up measurements for the location

step 3
This step shows you how to add measurement definitions for the new machine.
1. Change to the Measurement view of the database. Select View > Measurement. This
view shows the Hierarchy, Location, and Measurement Definition panes.
2. Select the Tank #1 machine in the Hierarchy pane. You may have to click the + signs
to expand the Plant or Train so you can view the Machine.
3. Double-click in the Data Type column in the Measurement Definition pane. Select
Magnitude for the Data Type.
4. Emonitor automatically names the measurement definition “None Mag” meaning a
magnitude measurement with no units. You can edit the Name now or later if desired.
5. Press Tab or double-click in the Units column. Select g’s (acceleration) for the Units.
6. Press Tab or double-click in the Collection column. Select STD 50 Orders for the col-
lection specification.
7. You can right-click the STD 50 Orders collection specification and select Edit to see
the parameters for the collection specification.
8. Press Tab or double-click in the Storage column. Select Always/2 Years for the stor-
age specification. Again, you can right-click and select Edit to see that this saves this
measurement on any condition (alarm or not) for two years.
9. Press Tab twice or double-click in the Filter column. Select Smart HP for the mea-
surement filter. This allows Emonitor to select the appropriate high pass filter for your
particular data collector, saving you collection time.

The Active column is set to Yes, which means the measurement definition is active, and can
be loaded and unloaded using a data collector.

Smart filters
Emonitor supports several “smart” measurement filters.
 RSS Overall: Select the digital overall filter in the data collector if available.
 Smart HP: Select the appropriate high pass filter for your data collector. This can
reduce data collection time by eliminating the lowest frequencies if they are not
needed for the measurement.

27
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

 RSS Smart HP: Select the appropriate digital high pass filter in digital filtering is
available in your data collector.

Fill in all the locations for a machine

step 4
This step shows you how to add additional locations and measurement definitions for the
new machine. The easiest way to add measurement definitions to the rest of the locations
on your machine is to copy and paste the completed location. It might be helpful to see
“Overview of the Emonitor Database” on page 39 to visualize the items that are cut and
pasted with each action.
1. Select the Pump #1 machine in the Hierarchy pane.
2. In the Location pane, select a cell by clicking in it. You do not have to select all the
cells to copy the entire row.
3. Select Edit > Copy.
4. Select Edit > Paste. The new location is pasted in the row directly below the current
row. All the measurement definitions for the location are pasted into the Measurement
Definition pane.
5. Double-click in the Location ID column and change the name of the measurement
location to Mtr-IB-Vert (for motor-inboard, measurement in the vertical direc-
tion).
6. Select Edit > Paste again.
7. Double-click in the Location ID column and change the name of the measurement
location to TANK (for a condition inside the tank). Change the Direction column to
None.
You have now created three locations, each with a single vibration measurement defi-
nition. For the motor locations, the vibration measurement is correct. For the TANK
location, however, the measurements should be for pressure and temperature.
8. Select the TANK location in the Location pane.
9. In the Measurement Definition pane, change the first measurement definition to make
it a pressure measurement. Set Data Type to Numeric, Collection to Manual Entry,
Units to PSI, and Filter to None. Finally, change the Name to PSI Numeric.

You must change the Data type and Collection before you can select PSI for the Units.

10. Select a cell in the PSI Numeric measurement definition by clicking in it.

28
 • • • • •
3 • Quick Start

11. Select Edit > Copy.

12. Select Edit > Paste. This pastes a copy of the PSI Numeric measurement definition.
13. Change the pasted measurement definition. Set Name to Deg F Numeric, and Units to
deg. F.
You now have two measurement locations with one measurement definition each, and a
third location with two measurement definitions. This means you have four measurement
definitions for that machine. If you want to continue adding to your database you can sim-
ply copy and paste locations, bringing the measurement definitions with them. For exam-
ple, you might want to add a location and measurement definitions to measure vibration
on the gearbox. You can also copy and paste the entire machine; for example, if you have
other similar motors and pumps. Using this method is a quick and easy way to fill in your
machines and your database.
For more information, see “Adding Machinery to Your Database” on page 63.

Set up your Emonitor Online system

step 5
If you are using an Emonitor Online system, you must set up the Emonitor Online soft-
ware in addition to your data collection instruments.
You use the Online Data Console to manage the various programs in an Emonitor Online
system (including the Enwatch/6600 Online Data, XM/DYN Online Data, Logix Online
Data). Refer to the Emonitor Online Getting Results Guide and the Online Data Manage-
ment Console help file (Programs > Rockwell Software > Emonitor > Help > Online
Data Management Console) for information on setting up and managing an Emonitor
Online system.
The Emonitor Online system gathers data from transducers connected to XM modules,
Logix controllers, 6600 monitors, or Enwatch units and stores it in the Emonitor database.
You map the measurements from each transducer to a specific location in the Emonitor
database.
For example, these are the steps to acquire data from online instruments and define where
to store the data in the Emonitor database.
1. Use the Emonitor program to create a location and one or more measurement defini-
tions for each transducer.
2. Start the Online Data Management Console and log in.
3. Use the Online Data Management Console to create a new data source.

29
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

4. Edit the data source configuration. For most data sources, this configures the instru-
ments used to collect the data, defines the data to acquire from the instruments, maps
the data to measurement definitions in the Emonitor database, and defines the data
acquisition interval.
5. Close the data source program, and use the Online Data Management Console to start
data acquisition defined in the data source configuration.

The steps to set up data acquisition from online instruments and external OPC sources are
[Link] These steps are described in detail in the Emonitor Online Getting Results Guide
and the online help for the Online Data Management Console.

Once you begin acquiring data and storing it in the database, you use the Emonitor pro-
gram on the Viewing Station computer to view and analyze the data.

Set up Emonitor Scheduler to import the data

step 6
The Emonitor Online system stores the acquired data in unload files. The data from the
unload files is then imported into the Emonitor database by the Emonitor Scheduler ser-
vice.
The Scheduler service runs in the background, and watches for unload files. When new
unload files are created, the Scheduler service imports the data from the unload files into
the Emonitor database. The Scheduler service typically runs on the Unload Station
computer in an Emonitor Online [Link] Emonitor Scheduler service is disabled by
default. In order to launch (run) scheduled tasks, including importing data, you must
enable the Scheduler service.
To start the Scheduler service
1. Click Start > Control Panel > Administrative Tools > Services.
2. Select Services (local) in the left side of the Services window.
3. Select SchedulrSvc in the right side of the Services window.
4. The SchedulrSvc Startup Type should be Automatic. If it is Manual or Disabled,
right-click on SchedulrSvc and select Properties. In the Properties dialog box, set
Startup Type to Automatic, and then click OK.
5. The SchedulrSvc Status should be Started. If it is Stopped, right-click on
SchedulrSvc and select Start.

We strongly recommend that you leave the Startup Type for the SchedulrSvc as “Automatic”
in the Services console. This starts the Scheduler service automatically when Windows
starts.

30
 • • • • •
3 • Quick Start

The [Link] file, located in the Emonitor program directory on the Unload Station com-
puter, defines the unload file directory. Make sure this file has the correct unload file directory
in the DataFileDir and DataFiles path (in the Source section). Scheduler uses these entries to
monitor the Enwatch/6600 Online Data unload files. Use a text editor to view or edit the odon-
[Link] file.

1. Start the Scheduler program (Start > Programs > Rockwell Software > Emonitor >
Utilities > Scheduler).
2. Click Add, or select Edit > Add Profile.
3. Enter the Event Profile Name. For data import, enter
Online Import Event.
4. You can enter notes about the profile as well. Select Enable profile for scheduling.
Click Next to display the Response tab.
5. Select the way the event is to be scheduled. For the Online Import Event:
a. Select Scheduled time/date and File change notification. Click Settings to dis-
play the File Change Notification dialog.
b. For the Online Import Event, click Add File.
c. For the Online Import Event, select the UD directory under your program direc-
tory. In the File name box, enter *.ulf. This tells Scheduler to look for unload files
in the unload directory. Click Open.
d. The unload files show in the Monitored Files list. Click OK to continue.
e. Click Next to continue.
6. Click Add Event in the Events tab.
7. Enter the Executable file and the Command line.
 Executable file: C:\Program Files\Rockwell Software\Emonitor\[Link]
 Command line: C:\Program Files\Rockwell Software\Emonitor\[Link]
8. Choose Next to continue.
9. Choose the Date and Time you want to launch the Profile. Then click Finish.
For more information, see the online help for the Emonitor Scheduler.

Using your Emonitor system

The steps in this section show you how to create a list of measurement definitions, load
and unload the list from a data collector, and view the data after unloading.

31
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

Create a list by tagging measurements

step 1
Once you have added several machines in your database, you can create a list of the mea-
surements you want to collect with your portable data collector. You can later use this
same list for collecting data, creating reports, and viewing data.
1. Select List > Clear Current List. You may want to get in the habit of using this com-
mand before working on any new list so you know the current list is empty.
2. Open the Database window by selecting Window > Database and selecting the Mea-
surement view in the Select View dialog.
3. In the Hierarchy pane, select the machine that you want to include in the list.
4. Select List > Tag Current Item to tag all locations and measurement definitions for
the current machine.
5. If you want to add additional measurements from another machine, simply select the
measurement definition or location and tag it using the same method. A small tag icon
appears next to the tagged items. Notice that the measurement definitions for each
location have tags beside them as well.

You can tag calculated measurement definitions, but you cannot load them to a data collector.
For more on calculated measurements, see “Adding Calculated Measurements” on page 79.

6. You can view the list in the List window. Select Window > List. Select the Standard
List view in the Select View dialog. This view shows the information for each loca-
tion in the current list.
7. Save the current list. Select Save > List.
8. Enter a list name in the Save List dialog and select a list type. Also, set the due date
and the interval for collection if you want to schedule it for collection. If you plan to
use this list for data collection, select Quickload as the Load file type, and then select
one or more data collectors. Quickload lists save time in loading the list. See “Use
Quickload Lists” on page 126. Click OK to save the list when all the settings are cor-
rect.
For more information, see “Working with Lists” on page 117.

32
 • • • • •
3 • Quick Start

Load a list to a portable data collector

step 2
1. You load a list to your data collector before collecting data. For more information on
using Emonitor with your particular data collector, click the Help menu and then click
the data collector name to display the online [Link] the data collector to the
computer and prepare the data collector for loading.
2. Select Tools > Load/Unload.
3. If you have not yet set up the COM port, click the large Set Up Computer button in
the Load/Unload dialog. Select the serial port on your computer that you attach to
your data collector. Click OK.
4. Click the large Set Up Collector button to select the current data collector if the pic-
ture does not show your data collector. Double-click on the Current column next to
your data collector name to change it to Yes, then click OK.
5. The cable connect icon appears after you have properly connected and set up the data
collector.

You can click the Load Options button to select some options, such as initializing the data
collector prior to loading. Only those options supported by the current data collector are avail-
able.

6. Select the list you want to load under List name in the Load/Unload dialog. You can
change which lists appear by clicking Filter.
7. Click the red Load button to load the list to the data collector. This button points from
the computer button to the data collector button.
8. Emonitor automatically builds the load file, updates the statistics, and loads the list to
the data collector. If you are using Quickload lists, it simply loads the Quickload file
(if available).
9. After loading is complete, disconnect the data collector from the computer and collect
your data. Refer to your data collector documentation for more information.
For more information, see “Loading a Data Collector” on page 165.

Unload a list from a portable data collector

step 3
After you collect your data, you can unload it to your Emonitor database.

33
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

1. Connect the data collector to the computer and prepare the data collector for unload-
ing.
2. Select Tools > Load/Unload.
3. Connect and set up the data collector using the same settings as when you loaded the
list. The cable connect icon appears in the Load/Unload dialog.

You can click the Unload Options button to select some options, such as clearing the list
after unloading. Only those options supported by your data collector are available.

4. Select the list you want to unload under List name. You can change which lists appear
by clicking Filter.
5. Choose the blue Unload button to unload the list from the data collector. This button
points from the data collector to the computer.
6. Emonitor automatically transfers the data and updates the database.
7. After unloading is complete, disconnect the data collector from the computer.
For more information, see “Unloading a Data Collector” on page 172.

View alarms
step 4
The alarm display in the Database window shows you the measurement definitions and
locations in alarm. It also displays the alarm severity based on the colors you choose for
the severity. Before you can display and hide alarm indicators you must select the correct
pane. Remember, if you change views, the new view may not have the same options you
selected. You can save a view with the alarm display options and recall it later. See “Sav-
ing and Recalling Panes in a View” on page 22.
These steps show how to display the alarm status indicators for a Database window pane.
1. Select the pane where you want to display the indicators. In this example, select the
Location pane.
2. Select View > Pane Options.

34
 • • • • •
3 • Quick Start

3. Select Show current alarm severity in the Pane Options dialog to display the alarm
status indicators. Select Show unacknowledged alarm severity to show unacknowl-
edged alarm severity. Select both options if you want both indicators displayed.

4. Click OK to close the Pane Options dialog. The alarm status indicators appear in the
Location pane if any measurements for those locations are in alarm.
5. You can refresh the alarm status indicators in the Database window. Select Tools >
Alarm Severities > Refresh Display.
For more information, see “Displaying Alarm Status” on page 154.

Acknowledge alarms
step 5
You can acknowledge an alarm to indicate that someone has seen the alarm and knows the
measurement is in alarm. Emonitor shows a colored circle next to the item that is in alarm.
The circle indicates that the item is in alarm, and the color indicates the current severity of
the alarm. The row also shows a highlighting color, called a severity bar. The bar can be
the same color as the circle, or different, if the alarm has been acknowledged. This section
tells you how to acknowledge an alarm.

1. Click the desired pane in the Database window (Hierarchy, Location, or Measurement
Definition).
2. Right-click the desired row or item and select Acknowledge Alarm Status. The row
returns to the normal background/foreground colors of the pane.

35
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

For more information, see “Acknowledge an Alarm” on page 160.

Change the refresh rate

step 6
The refresh rate is the rate at which Emonitor redraws the screen with new information
from the database.
1. Select Setup > Options > General.
2. Select the General tab on the General Options dialog.
3. Select Enable automatic screen refresh, and then enter the Refresh Rate.
4. Click OK.
For more information, see “Set the screen refresh rate” on page 7.

Display reports
step 7
After collecting and unloading your data, you can generate reports of the data.
1. Select Window > Reports.
2. Select a list as the source for the report under Report from in the Print Reports dia-
log.
3. Select the report descriptions to print or preview for Report description.
4. Click Preview to view the reports on screen, or click Print to send the reports directly
to the printer.
5. If you have a Database window open when you preview a report on screen, you can
click data in the report to select that measurement in the Database window. The Report
window cursor turns into a hand to indicate where you can click. Clicking data in the
report selects that measurement in List and Plot windows as well.
For more information, see “Printing and Viewing Reports” on page 241.

Display trend plots

step 8
Plots provide a powerful, graphical method for examining and analyzing your data. There
are many different types of plots in Emonitor, and each type of plot has a specific use. For
magnitude and process measurement definitions, trend plots display the trend of a mea-
surement over time.

36
 • • • • •
3 • Quick Start

1. In the Database window, select the magnitude or process measurement definition that
you want to view in a plot.
2. Select Window > Plots

Select Open a window for each location in list in the Select Plot View dialog to display
multiple trend plots, one for each location in the current list. This allows you to compare data
at different locations.

3. Select the Trend view in the Select Plot View dialog, then click OK.
4. You can use the Remote Control toolbar to move through locations in the database.
Select View > Toolbars > Remote Control.
5. Click the < and > buttons to move forward or backward in the database at different
levels. For example, you can move backward through the data history to view changes
in your data.
6. You can also right-click a measurement definition in the Database window and select
Show Data to quickly display an Active Measurement plot of the data.
For more information, see “Working with Trend Plots” on page 217.

Display spectrum plots

step 9
You can display a spectrum plot for further analysis.
1. In the Database window, select a spectrum measurement definition that you want to
view in a plot.
2. Select Window > Plots

Select Open a window for each location in list in the Select Plot View dialog to display
multiple spectrum plots, one for each location in the current list. This allows you to compare
data at different locations.

3. Select the Spectrum view in the Select Plot View dialog, then click OK.
4. You can use the Remote Control toolbar to move through locations in the database.
Select View > Toolbars > Remote Control.
5. Click the < and > buttons to move forward or backward in the database at different
levels. For example, you can move backward through the data history to view changes
in your data.
6. You can right-click and drag on the spectrum plot to zoom an area of interest. You can
double-click the X or Y axis to change the plot. You can use the arrow keys to move

37
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

the cursor along the X axis. To show alarms, select Plot > Options and click the
Alarms tab.
7. You can also right-click a measurement definition in the Database window and select
Show Data to quickly display an Active Measurement plot of the data.
For more information, see “Working with Spectrum Plots” on page 221.

38
4 Understanding the Database
Overview of the Emonitor Database
Before you can begin to use Emonitor for predictive maintenance, you must first under-
stand how Emonitor displays and stores information. To help you understand the database,
this chapter uses examples from the Emonitor POWER STATION demonstration plant.
As you read through this information, you may want to follow along in the Emonitor soft-
ware.
The Emonitor POWER STATION demonstration plant uses three levels in the database
hierarchy (Plant, Train, and Machine) as shown to the left.
Your Emonitor installation may use as many as six levels, or as few as one. The following
illustration shows the relationship between different parts of the database. Your version of
Emonitor may not use all the parts shown below.

39
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

Understanding the Emonitor Database

The Emonitor database contains the information on the machinery in your predictive
maintenance program. It also holds all the archive data you have collected and stored in
the Emonitor database. Before you begin to add your machinery to the database, you must
first understand a little about the way Emonitor works. Then you can add your plant and
machinery quickly and easily.
The database is organized into several parts, each part with its own pane in the Database
window. The panes are linked to display related information. For example, when you
select a machine in the Hierarchy pane, the other panes show the database setup and data
for that machine. The Database window panes are listed below, and then described in
more detail in the rest of this set of topics.
 The Hierarchy pane displays all the machinery in your predictive maintenance pro-
gram. The Hierarchy Tree is a graphical representation of the database hierarchy. It
can have up to six hierarchy levels.
 The Location pane displays the locations for measurements; for example, motor out-
board horizontal. Locations usually include a position and direction for a measure-
ment on a machine. You can add a location at any hierarchy level in the Hierarchy
Tree.
 The Measurement Definition pane displays the measurement definitions that control
how you make and store the measurements at a location.
 The Alarm pane displays the alarms that define the safe limits for a measurement
definition.
 The Archive Data pane displays stored archive measurement data for a measurement
definition.

40
 • • • • •
4 • Understanding the Database

 The Advisory pane displays information for advisories created for components and
machines (Factory and Enterprise bundles).
 The Intelligent Advisory Assignment pane displays the Intelligent Advisory assign-
ments for components and machines (Factory and Enterprise bundles).

There are two other panes for frequency items (Factory and Enterprise bundles).
 The Frequency Item pane displays the frequency items that you use to model
sources of vibration in your machinery. Emonitor calculates frequency outputs from
these frequency items, which you can then use the help analyze vibration spectra.
 The Frequency Output pane displays the frequency outputs that Emonitor calculates
from the frequency items.

41
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

Understand the Hierarchy Tree

The Hierarchy Tree represents the equipment in your plant. As an example, look at the
POWER STATION demonstration plant included in Emonitor. To display the POWER
STATION plant:
1. Select Window > Database.
2. Select the Hierarchy Tree view in the Select View dialog.

If the Database window is already open, click the window to select it, then select View > Hier-
archy Tree.

The POWER STATION demonstration plant uses three hierarchy levels: Plant-Train-
Machine.

Plant Train Machine

POWER STATION Area 2 Level 3 PA FAN #1
MBFP S&S #1

The Hierarchy Tree for the POWER STATION demonstration plant reflects this structure.

You can define up to six hierarchy levels. You can use the following characteristics to
define an item in the Hierarchy Tree:
 Name: The name for the item (for example, PA FAN #1).
 Parent: The item in the tree from which the current item descends. In the POWER
STATION plant, Area 2 Level 3 is the parent of both PA FAN #1 and MBFP S&S #1.
 Hierarchy level: The level for the item in the Hierarchy Tree. In the POWER STA-
TION Hierarchy Tree, Area 2 Level 3 is at the Train, and PA FAN #1 is at the Machine
level.
 Equipment criticality: The relative importance of a piece of equipment. This is based
on factors such as the cost to repair the equipment, availability of spare parts, and so
on. Note that the equipment criticality appears only in the Hierarchy dialog. See “Edit
Information in the Database Dialogs” on page 50.

42
 • • • • •
4 • Understanding the Database

 Hierarchy image: The picture associated with this item. The Hierarchy image is
optional.
 MIMOSA: The Segment ID and the Segment type apply only to installations using
MIMOSA data transfer procedures. If you do not use MIMOSA functions at your
plant, then you can ignore these fields.
Remember that you can change the alarm and statistics information that appears in the
Hierarchy pane with View > Pane Options.

Because Emonitor does not support any MIMOSA standards for oil data, this may not be useful
to you when setting up for oil analysis. The information is included so that you can set up your
database for MIMOSA compliance from the beginning.

Understand Locations
A location indicates a place where you want to collect data. Often it refers to an actual
place where you attach a transducer or read a value. To display the Hierarchy and Loca-
tion panes:
1. Select Window > Database.
2. Select the Database Setup view in the Select View dialog.

If the Database window is already open, change the view by selecting View > Database
Setup.

What can I view and edit for locations?

 Location ID: The identification for the location
 Position: The place on the machine for the measurements
 Direction: The direction for the measurement (vertical, horizontal, axial, none)
 Category: The group of related equipment to which this machine belongs
 Machine speed: The operating speed of the machine. The machine speed can be
defined by the output of a frequency item (Factory and Enterprise bundles). For more
information, see “Use Frequency Outputs to Define Machine Speeds” on page 264.
 Barcode: The bar code for this location
 Description: A description for the location
 MIMOSA: The Measurement location type applies only to installations using
MIMOSA data transfer procedures. If you do not use MIMOSA functions at your

43
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

plant, then you can ignore this field. For more information, refer to the section on
“MIMOSA Import and Export”.

Because Emonitor does not support any MIMOSA standards for oil data, this may not be use-
ful to you when setting up for oil analysis. The information is included so that you can set up
your database for MIMOSA compliance from the beginning.

Remember that you can change the columns and the column headers that appear in the
Location pane with View > Pane Options.
In the POWER STATION demonstration plant, the PA FAN #1 machine has five loca-
tions:

Train Machine Locations

Area 2 Level 3 PA FAN #1 MTR-OB-HORIZ
MTR-OB-VERT
MTR-IB-HORIZ
MTR-IB-VERT
MTR-IB-AXIAL
FAN-IB-HORIZ
FAN-OB-HORIZ

Each location specifies a position and direction for one or more measurement definitions.
Emonitor displays the locations in the Location pane of the Database window.
You can use a location to record data for any hierarchy level in the Hierarchy Tree. For
example, if you wanted to record the ambient temperature in an area that contained sev-
eral machines, you could add a location to Area 2 Level 3 in the database.

Train Machine Location

Area 2 Level 3 AMBIENT TEMP
PA FAN #1 MTR-OB-HORIZ
MTR-OB-VERT
…

44
 • • • • •
4 • Understanding the Database

Understand Measurement Definitions

Measurement definitions define how to collect and store measurements. To display the
Hierarchy, Location, and Measurement Definition panes:
1. Select Window > Database.
2. Select the Measurement view in the Select View dialog.

If the Database window is already open, change the view by selecting View > Measurement.

Remember that you can change the columns and the column headers that appear in the
Measurement Definition pane. See “Change spreadsheet columns in a pane or window”
on page 20.

What can I view and edit for measurement definitions?

 Data type: Type of measurement (magnitude, spectrum, time, numeric, calculated,
image, …)
 Measurement units: Units for the measurement (g’s, temperature, mm, …)
 Collection specification: Parameters for the measurement (transducer type, window
factor, signal detection, resolution, …)
 Measurement filter: Filter applied when collecting the measurement. This may be a
band filter (band pass, high pass, low pass) or other filter (overall, high frequency, …).
 Storage specification: Length of time to keep the measurement in the database
 Active: Whether the measurement definition is active or not
 Tier: Whether the data for this measurement definition is to be excluded from cate-
gory alarm statistics and alarm status indicator calculations.
 User Def 1, User Def 2: Text fields that you can use to enter additional information.
These fields can appear in reports.
Remember that you can change the columns and the column headers that appear in the
Measurement Definition pane with View > Pane Options.
In the POWER STATION demonstration plant, the PA FAN #1 machine, MTR-OB-
HORIZ location has four measurement definitions:

Measurement
Machine Location Definition
PA FAN #1 MTR-OB-HORIZ Magnitude IPS

45
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

Measurement
Machine Location Definition
Spectrum IPS
Magnitude g’s
Spectrum g’s

These define the measurements at the location. You can add one or more measurement
definitions to any location in the database. If you want to record data at a location, you
must add at least one measurement definition.

Understand Alarms
An alarm defines a safe level for a value recorded at a measurement definition. A mea-
surement is “in alarm” when the value for the measurement goes beyond the alarm. For
example, you could add a constant alarm to a measurement definition at 0.2 ips to warn
you if the measurement goes beyond that value.
1. Select Window > Database.
2. Select the Alarms view in the Select View dialog.

If the Database window is already open, change the view by selecting View > Alarms.

What can I view and edit for alarms?

 Alarm severity: Relative degree of danger or importance for the alarm
 Alarm method: Type of alarm (constant, statistical, baseline, …)
 Alarm definition: Values used for the alarm, such as an alarm at 0.3
 Active: Whether the alarm is active or not
 Trigger: Whether this alarm gets loaded into the data collector when you load the
measurement definition
Remember that you can change the columns and the column headers that appear in an
Alarms pane with View > Pane Options.

46
 • • • • •
4 • Understanding the Database

In the POWER STATION demonstration plant, the PA FAN #1 machine, MTR-OB-

HORIZ location, Magnitude ips measurement definition has five alarms:

Measurement
Definition Alarms
Magnitude ips Warning Mag Constant
Critical Mag Constant
Warning Mag Stat. Indicator
Warning Mag Percent Change
Warning Mag Baseline

These define the alarms for the measurement definition. You can add one or more alarms
to any measurement definition in the database. When you move from one measurement
definition to another, Emonitor automatically displays the corresponding alarms in the
Alarm pane. For more on alarms, refer to the section on “Using Alarms”.

Understand Archive Data

Archive data consists of all the measurement data that you have stored in the Emonitor
database. Each measurement definition has its own set of archive data. To display the
Archive Data pane:
1. Select Window > Database.
2. Select the Data History view in the Select View dialog.

If the Database window is already open, change the view by selecting View > Data History.

What can I view and edit for archive data?

 Measurement date: For data collected with a data collector, this is the date the data
was collected according to the date stamp in the data collector. It is not the date the
data was unloaded into Emonitor.
 Measurement time: For data collected with a data collector, this is the time the data
was collected according to the time stamp in the data collector.
 Storage flag: Identifies the type and quality of a measurement (baseline, archive, …)
 Quality stamp: The quality of the measurement.

47
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

 Maximum amplitude: You can edit this only for magnitude or process measurement
definitions. For a magnitude measurement, this is the measured value. For a spectrum
measurement, this is the highest peak in the spectrum.
 Machine speed: You can view and edit this only for spectrum and time measurement
definitions.
 Phase: You can edit this only for magnitude measurement definitions.
 Image file: You can edit this only for archive data image measurement definitions.
Remember that you can change the columns and the column headers that appear in an
Archive Data pane with View > Pane Options.
You can manually add archive data for numeric, magnitude, and enumerated measurement
definitions, and delete archive data for all types of measurement definitions. You can also
view plots and images of archive data, or create reports of archive data. See the sections
on “Plots” and “Reports”.

Understanding Frequency Items and Outputs

Frequency items (Factory and Enterprise bundles) define equipment components that gen-
erate one or more frequency outputs. A frequency output is a vibration at a particular fre-
quency. For example, a motor or a fan generates a frequency equal to running speed, plus
a number of other frequencies. To display the Frequency Item and Output panes:
1. Select Window > Database.
2. Select the Frequency Setup view in the Select View dialog.

If the Database window is already open, change the view by selecting View > Frequency
Setup.

What can I view and edit for frequency items?

 Frequency item description: Text that describes the frequency item
 Frequency item type: Kind of component or frequency item (motor, bearings, con-
stant, harmonic, …)
 Frequency item definition: Values used in describing the frequency item, such as the
construction and geometry of a bearing
 Valid locations: Locations on the machinery for this frequency item
 Active: Whether the frequency item is active or not
 Search tolerance: Search bandwidth defined as a percentage of the frequency, used
when matching spectral peaks with frequency items

48
 • • • • •
4 • Understanding the Database

 Order reference: Defines one frequency item in a set of frequency items as the first
order for the machinery
Remember that you can change the columns and the column headers that appear in the
Frequency Item or Frequency Output pane by selecting View > Pane Options.
Each frequency item specifies a source for one or more frequency outputs. The frequency
items appear in the Frequency Item pane. Emonitor automatically calculates the frequency
outputs from the frequency items. The frequency outputs appear in the Frequency Output
pane. For more information, see the section on “Identifying Diagnostic Frequencies”.
You can use a frequency item to define the output frequencies for any hierarchy level in
the Hierarchy Tree. In the POWER STATION demonstration plant, the PA FAN #1
machine has the following frequency items:

Frequency Item
Machine Description Type
PA FAN #1 Motor Speed Speed Reference
Motor Harmonics Harmonic
Belt Belt
Blade Pass Multiply
Fan Harmonics Harmonic
Mtr OB Bearing Bearing
Mtr IB Bearing Bearing
Fan IB Bearing Bearing
Fan OB Bearing Bearing

Database Window Operations

Basic database operations include opening a database, moving around and selecting items,
undoing changes to the database, as well as finding, replacing, and deleting information.
For more information on adding and editing equipment in your database, the section on
“Setting up your database”. See the topics under “Navigating Emonitor” for directions on
topics such as moving windows, splitting windows into panes, enlarging panes, and clos-
ing windows and panes.

49
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

Edit Information in the Database Dialogs

The panes in the Database window make it easy to view, add, and edit items in your data-
base. The Database panes, however, may not show all the information for an item. If you
need to display more information about a particular item, you can open a Database dialog.
The advantage to a Database dialog is that it displays all the information for an item at one
time. For example, the Hierarchy dialog shows the equipment criticality, which is not
shown in the Hierarchy Tree.
The disadvantages of the Database dialogs are:
 They can show only one item at a time.
 You cannot add a new item.
 You cannot use Edit > Copy, Edit > Paste, or Edit > Paste Template.
The Database dialogs are linked to the Database window. If you move to a different item
in the Database window, the Database dialog updates to show the same item. If you wish,
you can leave the Database dialogs open since Emonitor allows you to work in other win-
dows without closing the dialogs.

To open a Database dialog

Select the corresponding command from the Setup menu.

Dialog Command
Hierarchy Hierarchy
Location Location
Measurement Definition Measurement

To view and edit data with the Database dialogs

1. Select the item in the Database window.
2. Open the appropriate Database dialog.
3. View or edit the information in the dialog.

50
 • • • • •
4 • Understanding the Database

Hierarchy Tree Operations

This section describes the ways that you can add, change, move, or delete items in the
Hierarchy Tree. Click a task to display the steps.

To select an item or branch

You must select an item or branch before performing any operations on it. Do one of the
following:
 Click the item or branch to select it.
 Move the highlight to the item or branch with the Up Arrow, Down Arrow, PgUp,
PgDn, Home, or End keys.

To expand a branch
Expanding a branch allows you to see the items descending from the branch. Do one of
the following:
 Double-click the branch.
 Click the + (plus) symbol to the left of the branch.
 Select the branch and press Ctrl++ on the numeric keypad to expand one level.
 Select the branch and press Ctrl+* on the numeric keypad to completely expand a
closed branch.

To collapse a branch
Collapsing a branch hides all the items descending from the branch. Do one of the follow-
ing:
 Double-click the branch.
 Click the - (minus) symbol to the left of the branch.
 Select the branch and press Ctrl+ – on the numeric keypad.

To add a new item

1. Select an item at the same hierarchy level as you want for the new item.

51
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

2. Press Insert. Emonitor adds the new item.

3. Type the name for the new item and press Enter.

To rename an item
1. Select the item.
2. Press Enter.
3. Type the new name for the item and press Enter.
Pressing Esc before you press Enter undoes the name change.

To delete an item

Unless you have selected Enabled for Undo capability in Setup > Options > General dialog,
you will not be able to bring back an item from the Hierarchy Tree after you delete it. For more
information, see “Undo Changes to the Database” on page 55. Note that deleting an item in the
Hierarchy Tree deletes all the locations, measurement definitions, alarms, and archive data for
the item.

1. Select the item.

2. Press Delete. This also deletes all items descending from the deleted item.

To move an item to a different hierarchy level

Select the item to move and press:
 Ctrl+Left Arrow to move the item to the next higher hierarchy level (move to the left
in the Hierarchy Tree).
 Ctrl+Right Arrow to move the item to the next lower hierarchy level (move to the
right in the Hierarchy Tree).
 You can also drag the item to a new place in the Tree.

To move an item up or down

Use this only to move an item from one branch to another. Select the item to move and
press:
 Ctrl+Up Arrow to move the item up in the Tree at the same hierarchy level.
 Ctrl+Down Arrow to move the item down in the Tree at the same hierarchy level.
 You can also drag the item to a new place in the Tree.

52
 • • • • •
4 • Understanding the Database

To copy an item from the Tree

Do any one of the following:
 Right-click the item to copy and select Copy.
 Select the item and press Ctrl+C.
 Select the item, then select Edit > Copy or Edit > Copy with Data (if you want to
include the archive data).

To paste an item into the Tree

Select the location in the Tree for the new item and do any one of the following:
 Right-click the Tree where you want to paste the item and select Paste.
 Press Ctrl+V.
 Select Edit > Paste.

To display the alarm status indicators

The alarm status indicators show the alarm severity for the measurement definitions asso-
ciated with the item in the Hierarchy Tree.
1. Click the Hierarchy pane to make it active.
2. Select View > Pane Options.
3. Select the desired options to control the display of alarm severity information.
See “Displaying Alarm Status” on page 154 for details.

Use Multiple Databases

Emonitor allows you to have more than one database. For example, you may want to keep
the information for two separate plants in different databases.

To create a new database

Contact Customer Support for information on creating additional databases. See “Contact
Us” on page 2.

To open a database
Emonitor automatically opens the same database that was open when you last exited the
program. To open a different Emonitor database, select File > Change Database.

53
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

Emonitor closes the current database and restarts with the selected database.

This may only apply to the single-user version of Emonitor. For multi-user systems, please con-
tact your database administrator for information on how to open a database.

To close a database
Emonitor automatically closes the current database when you:
 Exit the program
 Open a different database

Move in the Database Window

One of the most powerful features of the Emonitor Database window is the ability to rap-
idly move around in the database. This feature allows you to know exactly where you are
in the database, while viewing your database setup, archive data, plots, and reports. There
are four ways to move around in the Database window: the mouse, the Remote Control
toolbar, the keyboard, and Edit > Find.

You can also use a report to move around in the database. See “Use Reports to Navigate
through the Database” on page 244.

To move using the mouse

The easiest way to move is to use the mouse to click the items in the Database panes. The
first time you click a pane, you make that pane the active pane. Note that the border of the
active pane is a different color from the borders of other panes.
You can then click a particular item or row in that pane. If you click an item in the Hierar-
chy Tree, Emonitor highlights the selected item. If you click a row in one of the Database
spreadsheets, Emonitor draws a small arrow in the first column of the current row in the
spreadsheet.

To move using the Remote Control toolbar

The Remote Control toolbar allows you to move through the database and the current list
by clicking the buttons of the Remote Control toolbar. Select View > Toolbars > Remote
Control.

54
 • • • • •
4 • Understanding the Database

To move using the keyboard

You can use the keyboard to move in the database. F6 moves to the next pane, making that
the active pane. The arrow keys let you move around within a pane. For example, you can
use the Down Arrow to move to the next location in the Location pane. For more infor-
mation see these topics:
 “Window and Pane Shortcut Keys” on page 11
 “Hierarchy Pane Shortcut Keys” on page 10
 “Spreadsheet Shortcut Keys” on page 9

To move using the Find command

You can use the Find command from the Edit menu to find and display an item in the
Hierarchy Tree, a location, a measurement definition, a frequency item, or an alarm. See
“Find and Replace Information in the Database” on page 56.

Undo Changes to the Database

Emonitor allows you to undo most changes that you make to the database. If you make a
mistake, you can then reverse the changes. You can undo changes you make to the data-
base, if the following conditions are true:
1. Select Setup > Options > General. Enabled must be selected for Undo capability in
the General tab of the dialog.
2. You have not exited Emonitor and then started the program again.
3. You have a single-user version of Emonitor. Note that for multi-user versions of
Emonitor, Edit > Undo Database can only undo delete operations.
To undo the most recent change to the database, select Edit > Undo Database. Each time
you select this command, you undo the most recent change. The number of changes you
can undo depends on the complexity of the changes, but you can usually undo at least one
change.

The name of the Undo Database command changes depending on the last operation. For
example, it becomes Undo Delete after deleting an item.

Changes that you can undo include:

 Any changes you make through the Database window, or Database dialogs including
deleting, copying, pasting, pasting a template, and replacing.
 Other changes to data in the database, such as unloading data from a data collector.
Note that this erases the data from the database, as though you had not unloaded the
data.

55
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

Changes that you cannot undo include:

 Any changes you make with the commands that do not use the Database window.
Examples are: deleting a collection specification, adding a new user, changing the
communication parameters for the computer or a data collector, and so on.
 Global changes you make with Edit > Replace or Edit > Delete. If you click Replace
All or Delete All for either command, Emonitor cannot undo the changes.

Find and Replace Information in the Database

You can find and display any information in the database with Edit > Find. Emonitor can
search the database for an item in the Hierarchy Tree, a location, a measurement defini-
tion, a frequency item, an Intelligent Advisory assignment, an alarm, or archive data. You
can specify one or more search conditions to narrow down the search. You can also find
and change information with Edit > Replace.

To find items in the database

1. Select Window > Database and select a view.
2. Select Edit > Find.

You can leave the Find dialog open while you work in Emonitor.

3. Select the type of item you want to find, and enter the search conditions. Note that you
can search for items in the Hierarchy Tree by choosing either the hierarchy level or by
choosing Name in the Column field. In many cases, using Name is much faster than
using the hierarchy level.
4. Click Find Next to locate the next item in the database that matches the search condi-
tions.
5. Repeat step 4 to locate the next item in the database that matches the search condi-
tions.

To replace items in the database

Unless you have selected Enabled for Undo capability in the Setup > Options > General dia-
log, you will not be able to undo a replace operation with Edit > Undo Database. Note that for
multi-user versions of Emonitor, Edit > Undo Database can only undo delete operations (not
replace operations). Also, if you click Replace All, you cannot undo the replace all operation in
any version of Emonitor.

1. Select Window > Database and select a view.

56
 • • • • •
4 • Understanding the Database

2. Select Edit > Replace.

You can leave the Replace dialog open while you work in Emonitor.

3. Select the type of item you want to find, and enter the search conditions. Note that you
can search for items in the Hierarchy Tree by choosing either the hierarchy level or by
choosing Name in the Column field. In many cases, using Name is much faster than
using the hierarchy level.
4. Select the Replace field, and enter the New value for that field.
5. Click Find Next to locate the next item in the database that matches the search condi-
tions. Then click Replace to replace the value in the field you chose in step 4.
6. Repeat step 5 to locate the next item in the database that matches the search condi-
tions.
You can also replace the value in the Replace field for all items matching the search con-
ditions by choosing Replace All instead of Find Next.

Delete Information in the Database

You can delete any information in the database with Edit > Delete. Emonitor can search
for and delete an item in the Hierarchy Tree, a location, a measurement definition, a fre-
quency item, an Intelligent Advisory assignment, an alarm, or archive data. You can spec-
ify one or more conditions to narrow down the information to delete.

Unless you have selected Enabled for Undo capability in the General Options dialog, you will not
be able to undo a delete operation with Edit > Undo Database. Also, if you click Delete All, you
cannot undo the delete all operation in any version of Emonitor.

1. Select Window > Database and select a view.

2. Select Edit > Delete.

You can leave the Delete dialog open while you work in Emonitor.

3. Select the type of item you want to delete, and enter the search conditions.
4. Click Find Next to locate the next item in the database that matches the search condi-
tions. Then click Delete to delete the information.
5. Repeat step 4 to locate the next item in the database that matches the search condi-
tions.

57
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

You can also delete all items matching the search conditions by choosing Delete All
instead of Find Next.

Select Database window fonts

You can change the fonts in the Database window with Setup > Fonts > Database Win-
dow Fonts.

58
5 Setting up the Database
Overview of Setting up Your Database
This set of topics describe the steps for setting up your Emonitor database. They include
adding a new plant, as well as adding machinery, measurement locations, measurement
definitions, and alarms.
Before you can begin to use Emonitor for predictive maintenance, you must first set up
your database. The database contains all the predictive maintenance information for your
equipment, including:
 The machinery in the database, which is displayed in the Hierarchy Tree
 The locations, descriptions, and alarms for measurements on the machinery
 The data from measurements, called archive data
You can use templates to set up your machinery, or you can manually add machines. You
can also edit, copy, paste, and move information in the database. Finally, you can create
calculated measurement definitions. These are created by defining mathematical opera-
tions on one or more measurement definitions—such as finding a pressure differential by
subtracting one pressure from another.
Emonitor lets you create specifications that you can apply to measurement definitions. A
specification is a group of related characteristics that you can set up once and then apply
many times. There are several types of specifications: transducer, collection, storage, band
filter, and component. A storage specification, for example, determines how long Emoni-
tor stores a measurement in the database.
In addition, you can group equipment into categories. Categories allow you to generate
statistics for groups of similar equipment. You can then use the statistics to create statisti-
cal alarms for equipment in the category.
Finally, you can create sets of frequency items for your equipment (Factory and Enterprise
bundles). Emonitor can calculate frequency outputs from the frequency items, which can
help you in identifying the source of a particular vibration frequency. Frequency items are
covered in the sections on “Identifying Diagnostic Frequencies”.
For an example of a Emonitor setup, look at the POWER STATION demonstration plant
included in the Emonitor database. You can browse through the POWER STATION to get
a better idea of how you could set up your own machinery. In addition, the Emonitor Get-
ting Results Guide describes the process of adding a machine to the database.

59
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

The steps for setting up your database are listed below. They are described in more detail
in the rest of the chapter.

If your plant uses the MIMOSA standards for data exchange, please refer to the section on
“MIMOSA Import and Export” before setting up your database.

1. Review the default criticality levels and measurement units.

The equipment criticality level indicates the relative importance of a piece of equipment.
You can use the default equipment criticality levels included in Emonitor, or change them
to match your current system. The measurement units determine which units appear in
Emonitor. You can choose English or Metric units, or both. You can also create user-
defined units for your particular needs.

2. Add your plant to the database.

The Emonitor database allows you to define up to six hierarchy levels to describe your
plant and machinery. Once you choose the number of hierarchy levels, you can then name
each of the levels. For example, the POWER STATION demonstration plant included
with Emonitor uses three hierarchy levels: Plant - Train - Machine. After choosing the
number of hierarchy levels, you can add your plant to the database.

3. Add your machines to the database

You can add a machine, or copy and paste an existing machine. You can also create tem-
plates of existing machines so that you can quickly add similar machines to the database.
Templates include the locations, measurement definitions, frequency items, intelligent
advisory assignments, and alarms for a machine. When you paste the template into the
Hierarchy Tree, you automatically add all the required information. You can also define
components for each machine and track them as assets.

4. Review and edit the specifications and inspection codes

In setting up your database, you can use the specifications included with Emonitor, or you
can edit them to fit your needs. The same is true for the inspection codes that Emonitor
loads into the data collector, and checks when importing data.

Editing Criticality and Measurement Units

There are several steps before you begin adding machinery to the Emonitor database.
These steps set up the equipment criticality levels and the default measurement units that
you use when adding machines. You can also add to, or edit, these values after adding
machinery to the database.
1. Review the default equipment criticality levels with Setup > Options > Equipment
Criticality. You can edit the default equipment criticality descriptions to customize
them for your particular setup.

60
 • • • • •
5 • Setting up the Database

2. Review the default measurement units with the Setup > Units > Standard Units. You
can edit the default standard units, or you can define new units with Setup > Units >
User-Defined Units.
3. Review the default enumerated measurement units with Setup > Units > Standard
Enumerated Units. You can edit the default enumerated units, or you can define new
units with Setup > Units > User-Defined Enumerated Units.

Edit Equipment Criticality

Equipment criticality is a relative measure of the importance of a machine or other equip-
ment in the database hierarchy. The equipment criticality level you select for a machine
may depend on:
 The cost of downtime for this machine (lost production)
 The rate of failure of the machine
 The cost to repair the machine
 Availability of spare parts
 Danger to personnel in case of failure
Emonitor comes with default equipment criticality levels; however, you may want to
change the descriptions for the levels to suit your own needs. You can also save the
machine criticalities in a specification library. See “Save and Restore Specification
Libraries” on page 98 for more information.

To edit equipment criticality levels

Select Setup > Options > Equipment Criticality.

The order of the equipment criticality levels is important. A criticality level of 1 is always more crit-
ical than a criticality level of 2, regardless of the description.

To edit criticality level for an item in the Hierarchy Tree

1. Select Window > Database.
2. Select the Hierarchy Tree view, or click New and select the Hierarchy view in the
Change Database Pane dialog.
3. Select the item in the Hierarchy Tree by clicking it.
4. Select Setup > Hierarchy to select an equipment criticality level for the item (Item
tab).

61
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

Edit Measurement Units

Emonitor includes a complete set of standard English and Metric measurement units. In
addition, you can do all of the following:
 Select the units you want to see in lists of available units
 Enter a custom default scale and dB reference for each unit
 Create new, custom units to meet your particular needs
 Create and use enumerated units
 Save user-defined units in a specification library. See “Save and Restore Specification
Libraries” on page 98 for more information.

To select the units

1. Select Setup > Units > Standard Units or User-defined Units.
2. Select the unit you want, and click Edit.
3. Select the Preferred check box in the Edit Standard Unit dialog. Only Preferred
units are available when setting up measurement definitions.
4. Click OK.
5. Repeat steps 2 though 4 until you have chosen all the units you want to appear in
Emonitor.

To edit a standard or user-defined unit

1. Select Setup > Units > Standard Units or User-Defined Units.
2. Select the unit you want, and click Edit.
3. Edit the fields for the unit in the Edit Standard Units or Edit user-defined Units dia-
log.
4. Click OK.
5. Repeat steps 2 though 4 until you have made the desired changes to the standard units.
Create a new custom unit
1. Select Setup > Units > User-Defined Units.
2. Click New.
3. Enter the information for the new unit in the New user-defined Unit dialog.
4. Click OK.

62
 • • • • •
5 • Setting up the Database

5. Repeat steps 2 through 4 until you have entered all the new user-defined units.

Select Frequency and Phase Units

You can select the frequency and phase units that appear throughout Emonitor. For phase
you have a choice of degrees or radians. For frequency, you have a choice of CPM (cycles
per minute, also known as RPM) or Hertz.
1. Select Setup > Options > General. Click the Database tab.
2. Select the frequency and phase units you want to appear in Emonitor.

Edit Enumerated Units

Emonitor allows you to create and use enumerated units. An enumerated unit is a unit
defined as a series of integers (negative, zero, or positive) with associated text strings (as
in -1=UNKNOWN, 0=OFF, 1=ON).
There are standard enumerated units included with Emonitor. You can also create user-
defined enumerated units.
 Select Setup > Units > Standard Enumerated Units to view, select, or edit standard
enumerated units.
 Select Setup > Units > User-Defined Enumerated Units to view, select, or edit stan-
dard enumerated units.
For more information, see “Edit Measurement Units” on page 62.

Adding Machinery to Your Database

After you have edited the equipment criticality and measurement units, you can begin to
add your machinery to the Emonitor database. The steps below are described in more
detail in the rest of this section. You must do two things before you can add your first
machine to the Emonitor database:
1. Edit the number and names of hierarchy levels. This determines how many levels you
can have in the Hierarchy Tree.
2. Add your plant to the database. The Emonitor database comes with two plants already
defined: POWER STATION and UNSCHEDULED. To add your own machinery, you
must first add a new plant.
After adding your plant to the database, you can begin adding machines. There are three
ways to add a machine:
 You can paste a template into the database, using your own, or a default template.
Using templates is the fastest way to set up your database, because they can include

63
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

the locations, measurement definitions, Intelligent Advisory assignments, frequency

items, and alarms for the machine.
 You can copy and paste an existing machine to quickly add similar machines to the
database.
 You can manually add a machine to the database. In this case, you add the machine,
then fill in the locations, measurement definitions, and alarms for the machine. You
can also copy and paste existing locations, measurement definitions, Intelligent Advi-
sory assignments, frequency items, and alarms into the new machine.
When you add a new machine, you may need to add, delete, or edit locations, measure-
ment definitions, Intelligent Advisory assignments, frequency items, and alarms for the
new machine. In addition, you can add information about the machine to the hierarchy
notebook. You can also select a hierarchy image to associate with the machine. These
tasks are described in this set of topics. Frequency items are described in the section
“Identifying Diagnostic Frequencies”.

Edit the Number and Names of Hierarchy Levels

Before you can enter your machinery into the Emonitor database, you must decide the
number and names of the hierarchy levels in the database. You may, for example, use
three hierarchy levels to organize equipment into Plant, Area, and Machine levels. Emon-
itor allows you to have up to six hierarchy levels.
1. Select Setup > Options > General, then click the Database tab.
2. Enter the number of hierarchy levels in the Number of levels box. You can add more
levels later. For instance, you can change a hierarchy from Area - Train - Machine to
Plant - Area - Train - Machine.
3. For each level, enter a name in the Name column. Remember that Level 1 is the low-
est level in the database hierarchy. If you leave the name blank, Emonitor assigns the
level a default name (“Level X” where X is the level number). If you want to name to
be blank, enter a space for the name.

You cannot have fewer levels than currently exist in the Hierarchy Tree. If there are three lev-
els in the Tree, you cannot set the number of levels to two. You can rename the hierarchy lev-
els later if necessary.

For example, if you want a hierarchy of Plant - Area - Train - Machine, use the follow-
ing names:

Level Name
1 Machine

64
 • • • • •
5 • Setting up the Database

Level Name
2 Train
3 Area
4 Plant
5
6

Add a Plant to the Database

You add a new plant to the database by adding a new item to the Hierarchy Tree. Then you
can add new areas, machine trains, and machines under the new plant.
Add a new plant to the database
1. Select Window > Database. Select the Database Setup view in the Select View dia-
log.
2. Select the disk icon at the top of the Hierarchy Tree and press Insert. Emonitor adds
the new plant to the bottom of the Tree. You can use Ctrl+Up or Down Arrow keys to
move the new plant. You can also change the order of plants later.
3. Type a name for the new plant (up to 32 characters) and press Enter.
4. Select Setup > Hierarchy to select an equipment criticality level and enter a descrip-
tion for the new plant (Item tab).
Add other hierarchy levels under the new plant
1. Select the new plant and press Insert. Emonitor adds the new item below the selected
plant, at the same hierarchy level.
2. Type the name for the new item (up to 32 characters) and press Enter.
3. Use Ctrl+Left or Right Arrow keys to move the new item to a different hierarchy
level if necessary. Use Ctrl+Up or Down Arrow keys to move the new item higher or
lower in the Tree. See “Understand the Hierarchy Tree” on page 42 for details.
4. Select Setup > Hierarchy to select an equipment criticality level and enter a descrip-
tion for the new item (Item tab).

65
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

For example, if your hierarchy levels are Plant - Train - Machine, you could add the
following Plant and Trains:

Plant Train
PLANT #1 TRAIN #1
TRAIN #2

5. Add the new plant and name it PLANT #1.

6. With PLANT #1 still highlighted, press Insert to add a new item below PLANT #1.
7. Type the name the new item (TRAIN #1), and press Enter.
8. Press Ctrl+Right Arrow to move it under PLANT #1.
9. With TRAIN #1 still highlighted, press Insert to add a second new item below
PLANT#1.
10. Type the name for the second new item (TRAIN #2) and press Enter. The Hierarchy
Tree for the plant should look like this:

Edit Information for a Hierarchy Item

When you add a plant, machine, or component to the Hierarchy Tree, you can also give it
a name, description, and equipment criticality level. The equipment criticality level indi-
cates the relative importance (the relative cost of failure) of a piece of equipment.
Change the name of an item
 Select the item. Press Enter, type in the new name, and press Enter when done.
 Esc undoes the changes to the item name before you press Enter.
Change the description, criticality, or image
1. Select the item.

66
 • • • • •
5 • Setting up the Database

2. Select Setup > Hierarchy and make the desired changes (Item tab).

To change the available equipment criticality levels, select Setup > Options > Equipment
Criticality.

The hierarchy image is a picture associated with a machine or some other item in the Hierar-
chy Tree. If you then make a template of the machine, Emonitor includes the hierarchy image
in the template.

Add Component Information for a Hierarchy Item

You can define the individual components in a machine. Components are based on com-
ponent specifications. Components are required to perform an analysis on a machine, use
work tracking, and send advisories. For more information on components and asset infor-
mation, refer to the section on “Asset Health Management”.
1. Select the item in the Hierarchy Tree.
2. Select Setup > Hierarchy to select the desired component specification and enter the
name and the asset information for each component (Component tab).

To change the available component specifications, select Setup > Component. You can edit
or delete custom asset information with Setup > Asset Info.

Add MIMOSA Information for a Hierarchy Item

You can define the MIMOSA service segment information for an item in the Hierarchy
Tree. For more information on MIMOSA, refer to the section on “MIMOSA Import and
Export”.

At the time of the creating of this help file, lubricant-specific interfaces for MIMOSA were not sup-
ported in Emonitor, so this may not be useful to you when setting up for oil analysis. The informa-
tion is included so that you can set up your database for MIMOSA compliance from the
beginning.

1. Select the item in the Hierarchy Tree.

2. Select Setup > Hierarchy to enter the MIMOSA information for the machine
(MIMOSA tab).

Use Templates to Add Machines

Pasting a template into the Hierarchy Tree is the easiest way to add a machine to your
database. A template contains all the information required to set up an entire machine or
component, including the locations, measurement definitions, Intelligent Advisory assign-
ments, frequency items, and alarms. You can use the templates included with Emonitor, or
you can create your own templates.

67
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

See “Working with Templates” on page 76 for more information on creating and pasting
templates.

Copy Machines
Copying and pasting a machine in the Hierarchy Tree has the advantage of also copying
all the locations, measurement definitions, Intelligent Advisory assignments, frequency
items, and alarms for the original machine. Copying an item in the Hierarchy Tree also
copies all the items descending from the copied item. This means that you can copy sev-
eral machines at once by copying the parent of the machines. For example, suppose your
database hierarchy levels are Plant - Train - Machine, and you have two identical Trains
in your Plant (East Tower and West Tower). You could add the “East Tower” Train and its
machinery to the database, and then copy it to add the “West Tower” Train to the database.
You can also create a machine template. Creating a template is similar to copying an item
in the Hierarchy Tree, except that you copy the information to a file that you can paste
into the Hierarchy Tree later. See “Working with Templates” on page 76 for details.
1. Select Window > Database. Select the Database Setup view in the Select View dia-
log.
2. Select the item to copy in the Hierarchy Tree. If the selected item is the parent of other
items in the Tree, Emonitor copies the items descending from the selected item as
well. For example, if you select an item at the Train level, Emonitor copies the Train
and all its associated machines.
3. Select Edit > Copy, or press Ctrl+C to copy the item to the Clipboard.
4. Select the item in the Tree where you want to paste the new item.
5. Select Edit > Paste, or press Ctrl+V to paste the contents of the Clipboard into the
Tree.
Emonitor pastes the item below the selected item, at the same hierarchy level.
6. Use Ctrl+arrow keys to move the pasted item to the correct location in the Hierarchy
Tree if necessary. See “Understand the Hierarchy Tree” on page 42 for details.
7. If you want to rename the pasted item, press Enter. Type the new name (up to 32 char-
acters) and press Enter again.
8. Select Setup > Hierarchy to change the equipment criticality level or the description
for an item (Item tab).

Manually Add Machines

Manually adding a machine to the database is slower than copying an existing machine or
pasting a machine template. It may, however, be the only way to add a specialized

68
 • • • • •
5 • Setting up the Database

machine, or a machine for which you have not created a template. After you manually add
the first machine, you can copy it to add other machines of the same type. You can also
create a machine template. For more on templates, see “Working with Templates” on page
76 for details.
There are several steps to manually add a machine. Most machines include the same mea-
surements at different locations. For example, the measurement definitions for the inboard
and outboard motor bearings in the horizontal and vertical directions may be identical. In
general, it is fastest to set up the basic measurement definitions and alarms at one location
first. Then you can use Edit > Copy and Edit > Paste to set up the rest of the locations for
the machine.
Add a machine to the Hierarchy Tree
1. Select Window > Database. Select the Alarms view in the Select View dialog.
2. Move to the item in the Hierarchy Tree for the new machine, and press Insert to add
the new machine below the selected item.
3. Type the name for the new machine (up to 32 characters) and press Enter.
4. Use Ctrl+arrow keys to move the new item to the correct location in the Hierarchy
Tree. See “Understand the Hierarchy Tree” on page 42 for details.
5. Select Setup > Hierarchy to select an equipment criticality level and enter a descrip-
tion for the new item (Item tab).
Add the first location, measurement definition, and alarms
1. With the new machine still selected, move to the Location pane by pressing F6 or by
clicking the pane.
2. Enter or select the information for the first location.
3. Move to the Measurement Definition pane by pressing F6 or by clicking the pane.
4. Enter or select the information for the first measurement definition.
5. Move to the Alarm pane by pressing F6 or by clicking the pane.
6. Enter or select the information for the alarms for the first measurement definition.

Remember that you can change the columns and the column headers that appear in the
Location and other panes by selecting View > Pane Options. you could also change to a dif-
ferent view by selecting the view from the View menu.

You can move a location or a measurement definition up or down in the spreadsheet by

pressing Ctrl+Up Arrow or Ctrl+Down Arrow.

Fill in the rest of the locations, measurement definitions, and alarms

69
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

1. Fill in the rest of the measurement definitions for the first location. Use Edit > Copy
and Edit > Paste to copy measurement definitions where possible. Copying a mea-
surement definition also copies the alarms for that measurement definition.
2. Fill in the rest of the locations. Use Edit > Copy and Edit > Paste to copy locations
where possible. Copying a location copies the measurement definitions and alarms for
that location.

Fill in the Information for a Machine

At any point, you can add additional locations, measurement definitions, and alarms. The
steps to add a location, measurement definition, or alarm are identical. In all three cases,
you add a new row to the corresponding spreadsheet. For more information on spread-
sheets, see “Using Spreadsheets” on page 17. For more information on alarms, refer to the
section on “Using Alarms”. For instructions on manually adding archive data, see “Manu-
ally Adding and Editing Archive Data” on page 183.
Add a location, measurement definition or alarm
1. Select Window > Database. Select a view in the Select View dialog that shows the
panes you need.
2. Select the desired item in the Hierarchy Tree, then select the correct location or mea-
surement definition.
3. Move to the first empty row at the bottom of the spreadsheet. For example, to add a
new location, move to the last location in the spreadsheet by pressing Ctrl+End. Then
press the Down Arrow to move to the first empty row.
4. Enter or select values for the new location, measurement definition, or alarm.
5. Emonitor saves the changes when you press Enter or move off the cell in the spread-
sheet.
Edit a location, measurement definition or alarm
1. Find the location, measurement definition, or alarm you want to change. You can do
this in one of two ways:
 Use the mouse or the arrow keys to select the correct item in the Hierarchy Tree,
and then select the desired location, measurement definition, or alarm in the corre-
sponding spreadsheet.
 Select Edit > Find to find and display the location, measurement definition, or
alarm.

70
 • • • • •
5 • Setting up the Database

2. Edit the information in the spreadsheet. You can not edit Data Type or Units in the
Measurement Definition spreadsheet when archive data already exists for the mea-
surement definition.
You can also use Edit > Replace to change values for one or more locations without hav-
ing to locate the values individually.

Remember that you can change the columns and the column headers that appear in a pane by
selecting View > Pane Options. you could also change to a different view by selecting the view
from the View menu.

Copy Information for a Machine

Copying and pasting a location, measurement definition, or alarm can help with setting up
your database if you have many similar machines. When you copy a location, you also
copy the measurement definitions and alarms for that location. Similarly, when you copy a
measurement definition, you copy the alarms for that measurement definition.

You can copy the same measurement definitions or alarms to multiple locations in a single oper-
ation with Edit > Paste into List. See “Copy to Multiple Locations in a List” on page 72.

You can also create location, measurement definition, and alarm templates. Creating and
pasting a template is similar to copying, except that you save the information to a file. You
can paste a template back into the database later. See “Working with Templates” on page
76 for details.
Copy a location, measurement definition, or alarm
1. Select Window > Database. Select a view in the Select View dialog that shows the
panes you need.
2. Find the location, measurement definition, or alarm you want to copy. You can do this
in two ways:
 Use the mouse or the arrow keys to select the correct item in the Hierarchy Tree,
and then select the location, measurement definition, or alarm in the correspond-
ing spreadsheet.
 Select Edit > Find to find and display the location, measurement definition, or
alarm.
3. Select the row in the spreadsheet by moving the spreadsheet cursor into the row with
the mouse or the arrow keys. You only need to select one cell in a row to copy the
entire row. You can extend the selection by dragging down across two or more rows,
or by pressing Shift+Down Arrow keys.

71
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

4. Select Edit > Copy, or press Ctrl+C to copy the selected item(s) to the Clipboard. If
you want to include the archive data with the measurement definitions, use Edit >
Copy with Data.
Paste the copied location, measurement definition, or alarm
1. Select the item in the Hierarchy Tree for the new location, measurement definition, or
alarm.
2. Move to the spreadsheet where you want to paste the new row or rows.
3. Select Edit > Paste, or press Ctrl+V to paste the row(s). Emonitor adds the pasted
rows at the bottom of the spreadsheet.
4. Edit the pasted row(s) if necessary.

Remember that you can change the columns and the column headers that appear in a pane
by selecting View > Pane Options. you could also change to a different view by selecting the
view from the View menu.

Copy to Multiple Locations in a List

Use Edit > Paste into List to copy:
 One or more locations to multiple items in the Hierarchy Tree (there must already be
at least one location in each of the target items in the Tree).
 One or more measurement definitions to multiple locations.
 One or more alarms to multiple measurement definitions.
Edit > Paste into List differs from Edit > Paste in that Paste into List allows you to
copy the contents of the Clipboard to ALL of the Hierarchy Tree items, locations or mea-
surement definitions in the current list. For example, you can create one measurement def-
inition at a location, create a list of ten other locations, then copy the measurement
definition to all those locations. Refer to the section on “Using Lists” for more informa-
tion on lists.
Copy items to the Clipboard
1. Select Window > Database. Select a view in the Select View dialog that shows the
panes you need.
2. Find the location, measurement definition or alarm you want to copy. Multiple copied
items must be from the same parent. For example, multiple measurement definitions
must be from the same location. You can copy items in two ways:
 Use the mouse or the arrow keys to find the correct item in the Hierarchy Tree,
location, measurement definition, or alarm spreadsheets.

72
 • • • • •
5 • Setting up the Database

 Select Edit > Find to find and display the location, measurement definition, or
alarm.
3. Select the row in the spreadsheet by moving the spreadsheet cursor into the row with
the mouse or the arrow keys. You only need to select one cell in a row to copy the
entire row. You can extend the selection by dragging down across two or more rows,
or by pressing Shift+Down Arrow keys.
4. Select Edit > Copy, or press Ctrl+C to copy the selected item(s) to the Clipboard.
Paste the copied items
1. Add the target Hierarchy Tree items, locations, or measurement definitions to the cur-
rent list. You can recall an existing list, or create a new list. See “Working with Lists”
on page 117 for details.
2. Select Edit > Paste into List. You do not have to move to the correct spreadsheet
before choosing the command. Emonitor uses the Hierarchy Tree items, locations, or
measurement definitions in the current list.
3. Edit the pasted row(s) if necessary.

Remember that you can change the columns and the column headers that appear in a pane
by selecting View > Pane Options. you could also change to a different view by selecting the
view from the View menu.

Delete Information for a Machine

You can delete locations, measurement definitions, and alarm. For instructions on deleting
archive data, see “Manually Adding and Editing Archive Data” on page 183.

Unless you have selected Enabled for Undo capability in the Setup > Options > General dia-
log, you will not be able to bring back a location, measurement definition, or alarm after you
delete it. For more information, see “Undo Changes to the Database” on page 55.

Deleting a location deletes all the measurement definitions, alarms, and archive data for the loca-
tion. Deleting a measurement definition deletes all the alarms and archive data for the measure-
ment definition.

You can use Edit > Delete to delete items that match a set of conditions.

1. Select Window > Database. Select a view in the Select View dialog that shows the
panes you need.

73
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

2. Find the location, measurement definition, or alarm you want to delete. You can do
this in two ways:
 Use the mouse or the arrow keys to select the correct item in the Hierarchy Tree,
and then select the location, measurement definition, or alarm in the correspond-
ing spreadsheet.
 Select Edit > Find to find and display the location, measurement definition, or
alarm.
3. Select the row in the spreadsheet by dragging across the two cells in the row, or by
pressing Shift+Spacebar to select the entire row. You can extend the selection by
dragging down across two or more rows, or by holding down the Shift key and press-
ing the Up or Down Arrow key.
4. Press Delete.

Record Information in the Hierarchy Notebook

The hierarchy notebook allows you to record information about machinery in your data-
base. This may include machine condition, maintenance history, or observations about the
machine. Each notebook entry has a date and time, so that you can add entries for specific
dates and times.

To add a new entry to the notebook

1. Select Window > Database. Select the Database Setup view in the Select View dia-
log.
2. Select the item in the Hierarchy Tree for which you want to record information.
3. Select Tools > Notebook. The dialog displays the notebook entry for the item closest
to the target date time.
4. Click New to add a new entry. Emonitor uses the target date time as the default for the
new entry.
5. Edit the date and time for the entry if desired, and type in the new entry.

To edit an entry in the notebook

1. Select Window > Database. Select the Database Setup view in the Select View dia-
log.
2. Select the item in the Hierarchy Tree for which you want to edit information.
3. Select Tools > Notebook.
4. Click Previous or Next to display the desired notebook entry.

74
 • • • • •
5 • Setting up the Database

5. Edit the notebook entry. You can also change the date and time.
6. Click Save, Previous, Next, or New to save the edited entry.

To cut, copy, and paste text from the notebook

1. Select (highlight) the text you want to cut, copy, or paste in the notebook.
2. Use the following keys to perform the action. Edit > Cut, Edit > Copy, and Edit >
Paste do not work in the hierarchy notebook.

Action Keys
Select text to copy or cut Shift+arrow keys
Copy selected text to the Clipboard Ctrl+Insert
Cut selected text to the Clipboard Shift+Delete
Paste the contents of the Clipboard Shift+Insert
into the notebook

To delete a notebook entry

1. Select Window > Database. Select the Database Setup view in the Select View dia-
log.
2. Select the item in the Hierarchy Tree for which you want to delete information.
3. Select Tools > Notebook.
4. Click Previous or Next to display the desired notebook entry.
5. Click Delete.

To copy information from the notebook to a word processor

1. Copy the information from the hierarchy notebook to the Clipboard (see “Cut, copy,
and paste” above).
2. Open the word processor.
3. Select the Paste command in your word processor to paste the text into the document
in the word processor.

To print information from the notebook

1. Copy the information from the hierarchy notebook to a document in a word processor
(see “Copy information from the notebook to a word processor” above).

75
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

2. Print the document from the word processor.

You can also include the information from the hierarchy notebook in a report. Refer to Chap-
ter 11 “Using Reports” on page 241.

Working with Templates

Templates are like building blocks for setting up your Predictive Maintenance system
database. Templates contain the detailed information needed to add an entire machine to
the database. For example, Hierarchy templates contain the information needed to set up
individual pieces of equipment or components. Location templates contain information
for one or more locations, all the measurement definitions for each location, and alarms
for those measurement definitions. In addition, the Hierarchy, Location, and Measurement
Definition templates can contain archive data for each of the measurement definitions in
the template. You can use Location, Measurement Definition ([Link].), Alarm, Diagno-
sis, Frequency Item, and Archive Data (Archive) templates to fill in additional informa-
tion.
The following table lists the types of templates.

Type of template Contains information for

Alarm Alarm setup for one or more alarms
Archive Archive data
Intelligent Advisory Intelligent Advisory assignments for a machine
(Factory and Enterprise bundles)
Frequency Item Frequency item (Factory and Enterprise bundles)
Hierarchy Hierarchy level setup for a machine
Component specification and asset information
for that machine
Frequency items for that machine
Intelligent Advisory assignments for that machine
Locations for measurements for that machine
Measurement definitions for each location
Alarms for each measurement definition
Location Location setup for one or more measurement loca-
tions
Measurement definitions for each location
Alarms for each measurement definition

76
 • • • • •
5 • Setting up the Database

Type of template Contains information for

Measurement Defini- Measurement definition setup for one or more
tion ([Link].) measurement definitions
Alarms for each measurement definition

You can create and save your own templates. You can also save specification libraries
with templates.

Templates include archive data by default. If you do not want to include archive data when you
create a template, you must clear the Archive data checkbox in the Template Options dialog.

Create and Save a Template

Once you have begun to set up your database, you can create custom templates for your
equipment. For example, you can create a template for a certain kind of motor not
included in the standard templates. You can then paste your template into the Hierarchy
Tree in the Database window wherever you want it to appear in your database.

To create a custom template

1. Select the item(s) in the Database window pane. For example, to create a location tem-
plate, select the location or locations you want to include in the template. Emonitor
includes the measurement definitions and alarms for the location(s) automatically
when you create the location template.
2. Select Edit > Create Template.
3. In the dialog, select or type a file name for the new template in the File name box.
Emonitor automatically adds the correct file name extension.
4. Type a description for the template in the Description box.
5. Click Options to select the data and specifications to include in the template.
Clear Archive data if you do not want to store the archive data from the database with
the new template. Archive data includes the inspection codes stored with the archive
data. For Hierarchy templates, archive data includes the hierarchy notebook entries in
the template. Click OK when done.
6. Select a directory in which to save the template in the Save in box.

77
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

7. Click Save to create the new template.

You cannot select more than one item in the Hierarchy Tree at a time. You can, however,
select multiple rows for a template in the Location, Measurement Definition, Intelligent Advi-
sory, or Alarm spreadsheet. For a Frequency Item template, Emonitor includes all the fre-
quency items from Frequency Item spreadsheet.

To add a picture (bitmap) for the template

In addition to the Description in the Create Template dialog, you can use a bitmap as a
picture for the template.
1. Create a bitmap using the Windows Paint or other graphics program. The bitmap must
have the same file size and format as the bitmaps for the existing Emonitor templates.
2. Save the bitmap in the same directory as the template, using a matching file name. The
file name extension for the bitmap must be BM?, where you replace ? with a letter
indicating the type of template (Hierarchy, Location, Measurement definition, Alarm,
Frequency item, iNtelligent advisory, or archiVe).
For example, if you create a hierarchy template with the name [Link], then
you must name the corresponding bitmap [Link] and save it in the same
directory.

Paste a Template
You can build an entire equipment database by pasting templates into the Database win-
dow. You can also use Location, Measurement Definition ([Link].), Alarm, Diagnosis,
Frequency Item, and Archive Data (Archive) templates to fill in additional information.

It takes longer to create and paste templates if you select Enabled for undo capability in the
Setup > Options > General dialog. See “Undo Changes to the Database” on page 55.

1. Select Window > Database. Select the Database Setup view in the Select View dia-
log.
2. To paste a template into the Hierarchy pane, select an item in the Hierarchy Tree at the
same hierarchy level as you want for the pasted template. To paste a template into a
Database window spreadsheet, click in the spreadsheet to make it active. Emonitor
adds items from the pasted template to the bottom of the spreadsheet.
3. Select Edit > Paste Template.
4. Select the template from the Paste Template dialog. The File Name box shows the
template names that match the pane you selected in step 2. Click the template name to
view the Description and picture for a template.
5. Click Options to select the data and specifications to include from the template.

78
 • • • • •
5 • Setting up the Database

Clear archive data if you do not want to include archive data from the template. By
default, if the template includes archive data, that data is copied from the template to
your database. Click OK when done.
6. Click OK. Emonitor pastes the template below the selected item in the Hierarchy
Tree, or as the last row in the spreadsheet.
7. If you pasted the new item into the Hierarchy pane, use Ctrl+arrow keys to move the
new item in the Hierarchy Tree. See “Understand the Hierarchy Tree” on page 42 for
more information.
8. If you want to rename the pasted item, press Enter. Type the new name for the item
(up to 32 characters) and press Enter again.
9. If you want to change the equipment criticality level or the description for the pasted
item, select Setup > Hierarchy. Select a criticality level and enter a description for
the new item.

Adding Calculated Measurements

Calculated measurements allow you to mathematically combine two or more pieces of
data to create computed data. For example, you could calculate the pressure difference
between two different places in a process by subtracting one pressure from the other. The
variety of math functions available for calculated measurements allows you to find almost
any value from one or more measurement definitions.

What terms are used when describing calculated measurements?

expression A mathematical operation that is performed on one or

more operands. Some simple expressions are: a+b,
Sqrt(a), Max(a,b). An expression can also be a
constant value (4 or Pi())
functions Functions are mathematical operations. In addition to
the functions listed in the Expression Setup dialog, you
can use any of the standard math operators (+, -, /, *, ^).
Note that function names are case-sensitive.

79
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

parameters Parameters are placeholders for operands in a function.

They show you the number and type of operands you
must use in a function. For example, the parameter for
the square root function Sqrt() is flt1, indicating that
the first and only operand must be a floating-point num-
ber. The parameter types are:
(none) - the function does not take any parameters (Pi,
for example)
avgtype - the averaging type for a spectrum
compspec - the function takes a complex spectrum
date - the function takes a date value
flt - the function takes a floating point number value
int - the function takes an integer value
spec - the function takes a spectrum
speclines - the number of lines in a spectrum
str - the function takes a text string in quotes
time - the function takes a time value
vect - the function takes a vector value
wave - the function takes a time waveform
window - the window function for a spectrum
result The data type of the result of the function.
operands Operands represent the data. Usually an operand is a
measurement definition, although it can be a string,
other type of data, or even another function. For exam-
ple, suppose “a” is a process measurement definition in
the expressions Max(a, 4, Pi( )). For each archive
data value in “a”, the expression returns the largest value
of (the archive data point, the number 4, and the number
3.14159...).
The only restriction on an operand is that it must contain
the correct data type defined by the parameters for the
function.
Operands can be incremented. For example, for each
archive data value, the expression a+a[-1] adds the
current value to the previous value. a+a[+1] adds the
current value to the next value. a+a[b] adds the cur-
rent value to the baseline value.

80
 • • • • •
5 • Setting up the Database

master operand This is the controlling data for the calculated measure-
ment definition. The expression is performed for each
master operand archive data point. If the expression can
be evaluated for each data point, the number of calcu-
lated points is equal to the number of master operand
data points.
time alignment Time alignment controls whether the expression is eval-
uated based on the time between the master operand and
another operand in the expression.
For expressions with a single operand, the time align-
ment is ignored.
For expressions with an incremented operand (a+a[-
1]), the incremented data point (a[-1]) must fall
within the time alignment of the non-incremented oper-
and (a).
For expressions with multiple operands, the master oper-
and must fall within the time alignment of each of the
other operands.
constraints Constraints give you additional control over the calcu-
lated results. The constraint can be based on one of the
operands, or it could be a separate measurement defini-
tion. For example, you could add a constraint so that the
recorded machine speed must be within a set speed
range. In that case, the expression is only evaluated
when the machine speed falls within the constraint
range.

Understand Calculated Measurements

When you set up a calculated measurement, you first create a measurement definition
with the Calculated data type. Then you define an expression that performs some opera-
tion on one or more operands depending on their time alignment and possibly one or
more constraints. The result is a new set of archive data for the calculated measurement

81
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

definition. For example, the expression a+2 adds 2 to each piece of archive data for the
selected measurement definition.

 The archive date and time for the calculated value is the same as that for the master
operand.
 The archive quality stamp for the calculated value is the same as the quality stamp for
the operand (if only one operand). If there are multiple operands, the calculated qual-
ity stamp is the same as the worst quality stamp for the operands in the expression.
You can create a calculated measurement definition using any spectrum, time waveform,
magnitude, numeric, calculated, or enumerated measurement definitions for operands.

You can include calculated measurement definitions in a list, but Emonitor does not load them to
a data collector. You cannot use Tools > Manual Entry to add data for a calculated measure-
ment definition.

Understand Calculated Measurement Operators

You can create expressions using the standard math operators to add, subtract, multiply,
divide, raise to a power, and change the sign of numbers. In some cases, expressions can
include operators of different data types (adding a floating point number to a spectrum, for
example). The table below shows the valid combinations. Those shown as N/A are not
valid.

82
 • • • • •
5 • Setting up the Database

Magnitude and process measurements

Float Vector Date/Time Enumerated

Float Float (* / + - ^)
Vector Vector Vector
Date/Time Timestamp (+ - float N/A Timestamp (+ -
seconds) Timestamp)
Enumerated Float (* / + - ^) N/A N/A Enumerated (+ -)

The following table shows how some variable types are combined in mathematical opera-
tions.

Float+Vector v(magnitude)=v(magnitude)+scaler
v(phase)=v(phase)
Vector+Float Same as above
Vector-Float v(magnitude)=v(magnitude)-scaler
v(phase)=v(phase)
Float-Vector N/A
Float*Vector v(magnitude)=v(magnitude)*scaler
v(phase)=v(phase) if scalar is positive, else
v(phase)=v(phase+180 degrees) if scalar is negative
Vector*Float Same as above
Vector/Float v(magnitude)=v(magnitude)*1/scaler
v(phase)=v(phase) if scalar is positive, else
v(phase)=v(phase+180 degrees) if scalar is negative
Float/Vector N/A
Vect1+Vect2 If one or both vectors have no phase, assume zero phase
Result(ampl)=SQRT((Vect1(mag)*Cos(Vect1(phase))+
Vect2(mag)*Cos(Vect2(phase))^2)+
(Vect1(mag)*Sin((Vect2(phase))+
Vect2(mag)*Sin(Vect2(phase))^2))

83
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

Result(phase)=ATan((Vect1(mag)*Cos(Vect1(phase))+
Vect2(mag)*Cos(Vect2(phase)))/
(Vect1(mag)*Sin((Vect2(phase))+
Vect2(mag)*Sin(Vect2(phase))))
Vect1-Vect2 If one or both vectors have no phase, assume zero phase
Result(ampl)=SQRT((Vect1(mag)*Cos(Vect1(phase))+
Vect2(mag)*Cos(Vect2(phase))^2)+
(Vect1(mag)*Sin((Vect2(phase))+
Vect2(mag)*Sin(Vect2(phase))^2))
Result(phase)=ATan((Vect1(mag)*Cos(Vect1(phase))+
Vect2(mag)*Cos(Vect2(phase)))/
(Vect1(mag)*Sin((Vect2(phase))+
Vect2(mag)*Sin(Vect2(phase))))

Spectrum and waveform measurements

Float Vector Enumerated Spectrum Waveform

Spectrum Float (* / + - ^) Vector Spectrum Spectrum N/A
(each line
* / + - ^)
Waveform Float N/A Waveform N/A Waveform
(each sample
* / + -)

The following table shows how some variable types are combined in mathematical opera-
tions.

Spectrum (* / + - ^) Float Spectrum highest peak amplitude is obtained as a float and

combined with float as appropriate.
Waveform (* / + - ^) Float Waveform highest peak amplitude is obtained as a float and
combined with float as appropriate.
Spectrum (* / + - ^) Vector Spectrum overall amplitude is combined with vector magni-
tude. Phase is assumed from vector.

84
 • • • • •
5 • Setting up the Database

Spectrum (* / + - ^) Enumer- Enumerated is converted to float, then combined with spec-

ated trum.
Waveform (* / + - ^) Enumer- Enumerated is converted to float, then combined with spec-
ated trum.

Additional notes
 Units are ignored for all calculations, and the numbers are treated as scalers (except
for phase). You can add a measurement in g’s to a measurement in mils, although the
result may not be useful.
 If you attempt to use a spectral frequency that is not in the frequency range of the mea-
surement, the calculation fails; for example, finding the amplitude at 20,000 Hz from a
spectrum with frequency range of 0-10,000 Hz.
 Emonitor can performing operations on 2 spectrum measurements only if the number
of spectral lines are the same in both spectra. Emonitor ignores the frequency ranges
of the spectra.

Create Calculated Measurement Definitions

Calculated measurements are defined by selecting the Calculated data type for a new mea-
surement definition. The Calculated Points Wizard steps you through the process of creat-
ing a new calculated measurement. You can create a calculated measurement definition
using data from any measurement definition except image and ActiveX data types.
1. Select Window > Database. Select the Measurement view in the Select View dialog.
2. Select the desired item in the Hierarchy Tree, then move to the desired location.
3. Move to the first empty row at the bottom of the measurement definition spreadsheet.
4. Select Calculated as the Data Type for the new measurement definition. This starts
the Calculated Point Wizard. Click Next to begin creating the expression for the cal-
culation.
5. You can type the expression directly into the dialog, or create it by double-clicking
functions and operators in the list. For example, you could simply type a+b for the
expression, then click Next.

Function names are case-sensitive, and must be entered in exactly the same way as they
appear in the list of functions. See the Emonitor online help for function descriptions.

85
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

6. Continue through the Wizard to build your expression.

Press F1 to display the online help explaining functions, parameters, and operators in more
detail.

7. When you are done, Emonitor displays the expression in the Expression Setup dia-
log.
If you are satisfied with the expression, click OK to close the dialog. If you edit the
calculated measurement definition, Emonitor takes you directly to this dialog without
using the Wizard.

Edit Interpolation Tables

Some of the functions available for calculated measurements use an interpolation table.
An interpolation table allows you to predict a dependent value (pressure, distance, …) if
you know the independent value (temperature, speed, …). To define the table, you must
know at least two pairs of values (the dependent and the independent pairs) and assume
that the rate of change between values is constant.
For example, in a sealed bottle, the pressure is dependant on the temperature. Raise the
temperature, and the pressure goes up as well. Pressure is the dependant variable, and
temperature is the independent variable. By entering pairs of pressure and temperature in
an interpolation table, you enable Emonitor to predict the pressure at any given tempera-
ture (assuming the pressure increases linearly with temperature).

You can save interpolation tables in a specification library. See “Save and Restore Specification
Libraries” on page 98 for more information.

To create a new interpolation table

1. Select Setup > Interpolation.
2. Click New to display the New Interpolation Table dialog.
3. Enter a name for the new interpolation table, and then enter the Column names and
pairs of values.

To edit an existing interpolation table

1. Select Setup > Interpolation.
2. Select the interpolation table you want to edit.
3. Click Edit to display the Edit Interpolation Table dialog.

86
 • • • • •
5 • Setting up the Database

4. Enter the new values for the interpolation table.

You cannot change the name of the interpolation table.

To copy an interpolation table

1. Select Setup > Interpolation.
2. Select the interpolation table you want to copy.
3. Click Copy to display the Copy Interpolation Table dialog.
4. Enter a new name for the interpolation table, then enter the new values for the interpo-
lation table.

You cannot save the new interpolation table with the same name as the original interpolation
table.

To delete an interpolation table

Once you delete an interpolation table, you cannot bring it back.

1. Select Setup > Interpolation.

2. Select the interpolation table you want to delete.
3. Click Delete.

You cannot delete an interpolation table that is used in an existing calculated measurement defi-
nition.

To use an interpolation table

An interpolation table is used when evaluating a calculated measurement definition that
uses an interpolation function. For example, the expression
Interpolated(10, "Temperature/Pressure")
returns the pressure value from the Temperature/Pressure table when the temperature is
10. You can also use an operand in the expression:
Interpolated(a, "Temperature/Pressure")

The name of the interpolation table must be in quotes, and is case sensitive. In other words,
“temperature/pressure” does not match the “Temperature/Pressure” interpolation table.

87
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

Update Calculated Measurement Definitions

Emonitor automatically updates calculated measurement definitions after unloading or
importing data. However, in other cases, such as manually entering new data, you must
update the calculated measurements. You can do any of the following to update the calcu-
lations.
 Right-click the calculated measurement definition, then select Process > Calculations
or Process > All.
 Right-click the location, then select Process > Update Calculations or Process > All.
 Right-click the item in the Hierarchy Tree, then select Process > Update Calcula-
tions or Process > All.

For a location, selecting All causes Emonitor to update all the alarm severities after it per-
forms all calculations for measurement definitions under that location. For an item in the Hier-
archy Tree, selecting All causes Emonitor to update all the alarm severities and evaluate all
Intelligent Advisory assignments after it performs all calculations for measurement definitions
under that item.

Editing Specifications
Specifications simplify setting up your database by allowing you to create and save a set
of parameters for collecting and storing measurements. For example, you can set up spec-
ifications for your transducers including the name and base unit.
Once you have defined a specification, you can use it in creating a measurement defini-
tion. For example, you can create three different storage specifications:
 Store this measurement when it exceeds an alarm.
 Collect and store this measurement every six months even if measurements never
exceed an alarm.
 Store the measurement for 1 year.
You can also save a set of specifications in a specification library. There are several kinds
of specifications in Emonitor.

Specification Defines for a measurement definition

Band filter The band filter used when collecting a measurement
Component The component name and type
Collection How to collect the measurement, including the
transducer specification

88
 • • • • •
5 • Setting up the Database

Specification Defines for a measurement definition

Lubricant New oil specifications for viscosity and manufac-
turer's information. Becomes a category selection
for a location
Storage When to collect the measurement and how long to
store it
Transducer The transducer name, and base unit

Edit Band Filter Specifications

You can use a band filter specification as part of a measurement definition to define the
kind of filter to use to collect a measurement. There are three types of band filters:
 High pass filter (low cutoff)
 Low pass filter (high cutoff)
 Band pass filter (low and high cutoff)
In addition, there may be other filters that are specific to your data collector. Refer to your
Data Collector User's Guide for details.

To create a new band filter specification

1. Select Setup > Band Filter.
2. Click New.
3. Enter a name for the new band filter in the New Band Filter Specification dialog, and
then enter or select the other characteristics for the band filter specification.

To edit an existing band filter specification

An easy way to edit a band filter is to right-click the filter in the Measurement Definition pane and
select Edit Filter.

1. Select Setup > Band Filter.

2. Select the band filter you want to edit.
3. Click Edit.
4. Enter or select the new characteristics for the band filter specification.

You cannot change the name of the band filter specification.

89
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

To copy a band filter specification

1. Select Setup > Band Filter.
2. Select the band filter specification you want to copy.
3. Click Copy.
4. Enter a new name for the band filter specification, then enter or select the new charac-
teristics for the band filter specification.

You cannot save the new band filter specification with the same name as the original band filter
specification.

To delete a band filter specification

Once you delete a band filter specification, you cannot bring it back.

1. Select Setup > Band Filter.

2. Select the band filter specification you want to delete.
3. Click Delete.

You cannot delete a band filter specification that is used in an existing measurement defini-
tion.

To use a band filter specification

A band filter specification is part of a measurement definition. To apply a band filter spec-
ification to a measurement definition, select the band filter specification when adding or
editing a measurement definition (Filter column in the Measurement Definition pane).

Edit Component Specifications

Emonitor allows you to set up and use components to capture asset nameplate informa-
tion. It also allows you to associate the component with problem diagnoses and work
requests. Components are based on component specifications, and a component can be
considered a part of a machine. For example, a primary air fan might consist of three com-
ponents: a fan, a motor, and a gearbox. Emonitor comes with a full set of components
specifications already defined, but you can edit them or add new ones. For more informa-
tion on using components, refer to the section on “Asset Health Management”.

To create a new component specification

1. Select Setup > Component.
2. Click New.

90
 • • • • •
5 • Setting up the Database

3. Enter a name for the new component specification in the New Component dialog, and
then enter or select the type for the component specification.

To edit an existing component specification

1. Select Setup > Component.
2. Select the component specification you want to edit.
3. Click Edit.
4. Enter or select the new type for the component specification.

You cannot change the name of the component specification.

To copy a component specification

1. Select Setup > Component.
2. Select the component specification you want to copy.
3. Click Copy.
4. Enter a new name for the component specification, then enter or select the new type
for the component specification.

You cannot save the new component specification with the same name as the original com-
ponent specification.

To delete a component specification

Once you delete a component specification, you cannot bring it back.

1. Select Setup > Component.

2. Select the component specification you want to delete.
3. Click Delete.

You cannot delete a component specification that is used in an existing component.

To use a component specification

A component specification defines the parts of a machine. To use a component specifica-
tion, select the desired item in the Hierarchy Tree. Select Setup > Hierarchy. Then on the
Component tab, select the component specification when adding or editing a machine.
The Component tab allows you to record additional information on your machinery. You

91
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

can also link components to a CMMS or AIM system. For more information, refer to the
section on “Asset Health Management”.

Edit Collection Specifications

A collection specification is part of a measurement definition and defines how to collect a
measurement. It includes the following:
 transducer type
 lines of resolution
 window factor
 collect phase data? check box
 signal detection
 order normalize? check box
 order normalization
 number of averages
 minimum frequency
 type of averaging
 maximum frequency
 % overlap when averaging
 center frequency

Select Tools > Active Collectors and select the correct data collectors. This ensures that
Emonitor shows the correct selections available for your data collectors.

To create a new collection specification

1. Select Setup > Collection.
2. Click New.
3. Enter a name for the new collection specification in the New Collection Specification
dialog, and then enter or select the other characteristics for the collection specifica-
tion.

92
 • • • • •
5 • Setting up the Database

To edit an existing collection specification

An easy way to edit a specification is to right-click the specification in the Measurement Definition
pane and select Edit Collection.

1. Select Setup > Collection.

2. Select the collection specification you want to edit.
3. Click Edit.
4. Enter or select the new characteristics for the collection specification.

You cannot change the name of the collection specification.

To copy a collection specification

1. Select Setup > Collection.
2. Select the collection specification you want to copy.
3. Click Copy.
4. Enter a new name for the collection specification, then enter or select the new charac-
teristics for the collection specification.

You cannot save the new collection specification with the same name as the original collec-
tion specification.

To delete a collection specification

Once you delete a collection specification, you cannot bring it back.

1. Select Setup > Collection.

2. Select the collection specification you want to delete.
3. Click Delete.

You cannot delete a collection specification that is used in an existing measurement defini-
tion.

To use a collection specification

A collection specification is part of a measurement definition. To apply a collection speci-
fication to a measurement definition, select the collection specification when adding or

93
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

editing a measurement definition (Collection column in the Measurement Definition

pane).

Edit Lubricant Specifications

A lubricant specification includes the specifications for viscosity and manufacturer's
information. After you define a lubricant specification, you can use it as an equipment cat-
egory, and set alarms based on category variables. See “Use Lubricant Specifications for
Alarms” on page 104.

To create a new lubricant specification

1. Select Setup > Lubricants.
2. Click New.
3. Enter the name for the lubricant and any other information that you want to store in
the New Lubricant Specification dialog.

Any viscosity information you enter is loaded to the PCM as new oil specifications for the dVA to
use.

To edit an existing lubricant specification

An easy way to edit a specification is to right-click the specification in the Location pane and
select Edit Category.

1. Select Setup > Lubricants.

2. Select the lubricant specification you want to edit.
3. Click Edit.
4. Enter or select the new characteristics for the lubrication specification.

You cannot change the name of the lubrication specification.

To copy a lubricant specification

1. Select Setup > Lubricants.
2. Select the lubricant specification you want to copy.
3. Click Copy.

94
 • • • • •
5 • Setting up the Database

4. Enter a new name for the lubricant specification, then enter or select the new charac-
teristics for the lubricant specification.

You cannot save the new lubricant specification with the same name as the original lubricant
specification.

To delete a lubricant specification

Once you delete a lubricant specification, you cannot bring it back.

1. Select Setup > Lubricants.

2. Select the lubricant you want to delete.
3. Click Delete.

You cannot delete a lubricant that is used as a category in an existing location.

To use a lubricant specification

A lubricant specification is used as the category in a location. When you add a new lubri-
cant, you are adding a new category. See “Use Lubricant Specifications for Alarms” on
page 104 for more information. You set the equipment category for a location in the Loca-
tion pane of the Database window (Category column).
A viscosity calculator is available in the lubricant specification dialog box. You can enter
any temperature and the calculator will use the 40C and 100C viscosity measurements to
calculate the viscosity at that temperature.

Edit Storage Specifications

A storage specification is part of a measurement definition and defines when to collect
and store a measurement.

One of the uses of storage specifications is that they allow you to define the length of time a
measurement stays in the database. This lets you remove old data automatically, without having
to manually clean out your database. For more information on removing old data, see “Remove
Old Data from the Database” on page 308.

To create a new storage specification

1. Select Setup > Storage.
2. Click New.

95
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

3. Enter a name for the new storage specification in the New Storage Specification dia-
log, and then enter or select the other characteristics for the storage specification.

To edit an existing storage specification

An easy way to edit a specification is to right-click the specification in the Measurement Definition
pane and select Edit Storage.

1. Select Setup > Storage.

2. Select the storage specification you want to edit.
3. Click Edit.
4. Enter or select the new characteristics for the storage specification.

You cannot change the name of the storage specification.

To copy a storage specification

1. Select Setup > Storage.
2. Select the storage specification you want to copy.
3. Click Copy.
4. Enter a new name for the storage specification, then enter or select the new character-
istics for the storage specification.

You cannot save the new storage specification with the same name as the original storage spec-
ification.

To delete a storage specification

Once you delete a storage specification, you cannot bring it back.

1. Select Setup > Storage.

2. Select the storage specification you want to delete.
3. Click Delete.

You cannot delete a storage specification that is used in an existing measurement definition.

96
 • • • • •
5 • Setting up the Database

To use a storage specification

A storage specification is part of a measurement definition. To apply a storage specifica-
tion to a measurement definition, select the storage specification when adding or editing a
measurement definition (Storage column in the Measurement Definition pane).

Edit Transducers
Emonitor allows you to set up and use a variety of transducer with your data collectors.
After you define a transducer specification, you can use it as part of a collection specifica-
tion.

To define a transducer specification

1. Select Setup > Transducers.
2. Click New.
3. Enter the name for the transducer in to display the New Transducer dialog, and select
a base unit for the transducer.

To edit the calibration for a transducer

1. Select Setup > Calibration.
2. Select a data collector from the Collector drop down list. Each collector has its own
set of transducers.
3. Move to the transducer’s name in the Transducer name column.
4. Fill out the rest of the values for the transducer.
5. Repeat for each different transducer that you have for that data collector.

To delete a transducer specification

Once you delete a transducer specification, you cannot bring it back.

1. Select Setup > Transducers.

2. Select the transducer you want to delete.
3. Click Delete.

You cannot delete a transducer that is used in an existing collection specification.

97
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

To use a transducer specification

The transducer specification is part of a collection specification. You select the transducer
specification when you create or edit a collection specification. See “Edit Collection
Specifications” on page 92 for more information.

Save and Restore Specification Libraries

You can save and restore specification libraries in Emonitor. This allows you to:
 Back up the specifications from your database.
 Copy specification libraries from one computer to another.
 Store specifications, report descriptions, and much more in a specification library.

Emonitor saves or restores all of a selected specifications in the current database. For exam-
ple, you cannot choose which storage specifications to save or restore.

To save a specification library

1. Select Edit > Save Spec. Library.
2. Select the specifications you want to save in the library.
3. Enter a description for the library in the Description box.
4. Click Save as to enter a name for the library.
5. Enter the name for the library in File name box.
6. You can then store the library file as a backup, or copy it to another computer.

To restore a specification library

1. Select Edit > Restore Spec. Library.
2. Click Browse to display the available specification libraries.
3. Select the specifications library you want to restore and click Open.
4. Emonitor displays the available specifications in the library. Select the specifications
you want to restore from the library.
Emonitor does not restore any specifications that already exist. For example, Emonitor
restores transducer base units only if the transducer name in the specification does not
already exist in the database.

98
 • • • • •
5 • Setting up the Database

Editing Equipment Categories

Emonitor allows you to group similar equipment or lubricants into categories. For exam-
ple, you might use the following categories and lubricants:
 Precision motors
 Vertical pumps - vertical direction
 Vertical pumps - radial direction
 Standard motors
 Spindles
 MobilGear SHC XMP 320
Once you have set up a category, you can use that category to create alarms for the equip-
ment or lubricants in several ways:
 You can use statistics from measurements on the equipment in the category to set an
alarm level. For example, you might create an alarm at 50% above the average cate-
gory value, and then apply that alarm to all equipment in the category.
 You can use category variables to change the alarm levels for all the equipment in the
category. For example, you might initially decide that you want to set a warning alarm
for all equipment in the category at 0.3. You can create a category variable LO
ALARM equal to 0.3, and then create a magnitude constant alarm to warn you when-
ever the value exceeds LO ALARM. If you later decide to change the warning alarm
to 0.25, all you have to do is to change the category variable.
 You can save the categories in a specification library. See “Save and Restore Specifi-
cation Libraries” on page 98.
For more information on categories and alarms, see “Use Category Variables in Alarms”
on page 138 and see “Setting Up Alarms” on page 131.

Add and Edit Equipment Categories

A category is a grouping of similar equipment. Once you create a category, you can use
category statistics, band variables, and category variables to define alarms for equipment
in the category.

To create a new category

You can create a new category either by defining a new category or by defining a new
lubricant specification. For more information on lubricant specifications, see “Edit Lubri-
cant Specifications” on page 94.

99
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

1. Select Setup > Category.

2. Click New.
3. Enter a name for the new category in the New Category dialog.
4. Click Configure to set up the units, signal detection, and measurement filter, for the
category (Units tab). Then click OK.
5. Enter the category variables and band variables for the first unit-filter pair. Then click
Next Unit and enter the variables for that unit-filter pair. Repeat until you have filled
out the variables for each of the unit-filter pairs.

The Secondary Sorting tab of the Category Configure dialog is described in the section on
Alarms. See “Use Secondary Sorting for Alarm Statistics” on page 142.

To edit an existing category

An easy way to edit a category is to right-click the category in the Location pane and click Edit
Category.

1. Select Setup > Category.

2. Select the category you want to edit.
3. Click Edit.
4. Enter or select the new characteristics for the category.

You cannot change the name of the category.

To copy a category
1. Select Setup > Category.
2. Select the category you want to copy.
3. Click Copy.
4. Enter a new name for the category, then enter or select the new characteristics for the
category.

You cannot save the new category with the same name as the original category.

100
 • • • • •
5 • Setting up the Database

To delete a category

Once you delete an equipment category, you cannot bring it back.

1. Select Setup > Category.

2. Select the category you want to delete.
3. Click Delete.

You cannot delete a category that is used in an existing location.

To use a category
You set the equipment category for a location in the Location pane of the Database win-
dow (Category column). This allows you to use different categories for different loca-
tions on the same machine, since a location is defined by the combination of position and
direction on the machine.
For example, you could have one category for all measurements on one type of machin-
ery. Alternatively, you could have one category for one kind of measurements in the hori-
zontal direction, and one for measurements in the vertical direction.

Using Inspection Codes

Inspection codes have three uses in Emonitor:
 Some data collectors allow you to store one or more inspection codes with a measure-
ment. The inspection code documents the operating condition of the machinery. Sam-
ple inspection codes are “Machine Normal”, “Not Operating”, and “Low Oil Level.”
 Emonitor loads the inspection codes into the data collector when you load a list for
data collection, and unloads the inspection codes with the measurement data.
 Files containing data that you import into Emonitor may include inspection codes.
Setting up inspection codes before you import data allows Emonitor to check for
matching inspection codes in the data file. Emonitor can then assign data with an
imported inspection code to the correct level in the database.
You can also save the inspection codes in a specification library. See “Save and Restore
Specification Libraries” on page 98 for more information.
The number and length of inspection codes in depend on the active data collectors
selected with Tools > Active Collector.

101
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

To add or edit an inspection code

1. Select Setup > Options > Inspection Codes.
2. Edit the inspection codes, or add additional inspection codes to the end of the list. The
number and length of the inspection codes you can load into a data collector depend
on the particular data collector.

To delete an inspection code

Once you delete an inspection code, you cannot bring it back.

1. Select Setup > Options > Inspection Codes.

2. Select (highlight) the inspection code you want to delete by either:
 Double-clicking the inspection code
 Using the arrow keys to move to the inspection code and pressing Enter.
3. Press Delete to delete the selected inspection code.

102
6 Setting Up Lubricants
Overview of Lubricants
Before you can use Emonitor to collect and store data on your lubricants and other fluids,
you should create a lubricant library. The lubricant library contains all the information on
the lubricants, conveniently stored in Emonitor.

Setting up a Lubricant Library

You should gather all the new oil specifications for viscosity for each of your lubricants
from the manufacturers, then enter it in the lubricant library.
The required fields are cSt@40C, cSt@100C and Specific Gravity. These fields are also
used for the Viscosity Calculator. See “Use the Viscosity Calculator” on page 106.

More on using lubricant specifications with the PCM

These fields are loaded to the PCM and used with the dVA for comparison to the tested
lubricant.
You can enter decimal values in the lubricant library in the host software. However, the
values that are loaded to the PCM are rounded. The cSt@40C and cSt@100C values are
rounded to the nearest ones place, and the Specific Gravity value is rounded to the near-
est hundreth. So, if you enter 230.12 for cST, the value that is loaded to the PCM is 230. If
you enter 0.8519 for specific gravity, the value that is loaded to the PCM is 0.85.
In the PCM, the lubricant library for the route (list) is not viewable. It is stored in the route
file, and the PCM currently has no method to display the specs loaded from the host soft-
ware. The specs are used to compare to the tested fluids, but you cannot view them once
they are loaded. Any specs that you view are from the PCM, not loaded from Emonitor.
To use these specifications in your measurement definition, choose the lubricant name in
the Category column when you set up the measurements. Remember that the category is
part of the location, and is applied to all measurement definitions under that location.

Add Lubricant Specifications to the Lubricant Library

1. Select Setup > Lubricants.
2. To define a new lubricant specification, click New.
3. Fill in the information for the lubricant.

103
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

The new lubricant will be added to the list of lubricant specifications, creating your lubri-
cant library. For information on editing, copying, and deleting lubricant specifications, see
“Edit Lubricant Specifications” on page 94.

Use Lubricant Specifications for Alarms

Lubricant specifications become categories that can be used to set alarms for many mea-
surement definitions. An example is included in the demonstration data. This section
shows you how the lubricant specifications and categories are related and can be used for
setting up alarms. See “Edit Lubricant Specifications” on page 94 for more information on
adding lubricants to the database.
The entered values become a new oil specification, so that you can compare the viscosity
of used oil to the new oil viscosity values.

The viscosity information in the lubricant specifications is loaded to the dVA.

This illustration shows the matching category. Notice the HI ALARM1 and LOW
ALARM1 values. These values can be used for alarm definitions on that particular unit. In
this example, the unit is cSt@40C. To add more units click Configure. See “Use Category
Variables in Alarms” on page 138 for more detailed information.

The following illustration shows the location set up with the Mobilgear SHC XMP 320
category. Any measurement definition with this category uses the category variables for
alarms.

104
 • • • • •
6 • Setting Up Lubricants

You can then use the category variable in one or more magnitude constant alarms. If you
want to change the alarm value for all measurements using that variable, simply change
the HI ALARM1 value in the category. Emonitor applies the new value to all measure-
ments using the Mobilgear SHC XMP 320 category.

Load dVA Viscosity Specifications to the PCM

The viscosity information for that lubricant is loaded to the PCM for comparison to the
test oil when running a dVA test. This information is loaded automatically as a new lubri-
cant specification. However, route-based oil specifications are not viewable in the PCM.
The dVA program in the PCM allows you to compare your viscosity test results to an
lubricant specification. The program compares the tested viscosity to what the viscosity
should be for your oil at the test temperature. The program also indicates the percentage
difference from the oil specification viscosity value. The results indicate the tested oil is
lower than specification with a minus sign (e.g. -7.6%). Test viscosities that are higher
than specification are indicated by a positive number (e.g. 10.5%).
The valid ranges for each viscosity value are as follows:
Specific Gravity: 0.500–1.200.
In the lubricant library, there is no limit on the decimal places, although three or four
should be sufficient. However, these values are rounded to the nearest hundredths place
when loaded to the PCM. If you enter 0.9465, the value that is loaded to the PCM is 0.95.
cSt@40C: 1–5000 centistokes (cSt).
You can enter decimal places in this field, however, these values are rounded to the near-
est whole integer when loaded to the PCM. If you enter 365.4, the value that is loaded to
the PCM is 365.
cSt@100C: 1–the cSt@40C value.
If you try to enter a number that is higher than the cSt@40C value, an error message
appears. You can enter decimal places in this field, but the value is rounded to the nearest
whole integer when loaded to the PCM.
The viscosity ranges for the dVA fall into two ranges, low and high. The low range is from
0 to 460 cSt. The high range is from 460 cSt to 9999 cP. The reason for having the upper
limit in centipoise (cP) instead of cSt is the cSt upper limit is determined by dividing the
cP viscosity value by the specific gravity you enter. To determine your upper limit in cSt,
divide 9999 by the test specific gravity and the result is the upper cSt limit.

105
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

When you create the measurement locations that you load to the dVA, choose the lubri-
cant specification as the Category, as shown below.

The PCM asks about the new oil specs comparison. After you press [1] Low Visc Test or
[2] High Visc Test to begin a viscosity test at the dVA Main Menu, the program asks if
you want to compare your test result to the oil specs.

Choose [1] Yes to compare your test results to the loaded values you entered in the lubri-
cant specification.
In the PCM, the lubricant library for the route (list) is not viewable. It is stored in the route
file, and the PCM currently has no method to display the specs loaded from the host soft-
ware. Any specs that you view are from the PCM, not loaded from Emonitor.

Use the Viscosity Calculator

You can use the viscosity calculator to determine the viscosity of the lubricant at any
given temperature based on the viscosity in centistokes (cSt@40C and cSt@100C values).
This viscosity calculator uses the calculations found in the ASTM publication, “Standard
Viscosity-Temperature Charts for Liquid Petroleum Products,” D-341-93 (rev 1998). It
offers an estimate of theoretical kinematic viscosity changes over temperature. It simu-
lates using a Rafuttus plot to draw a straight line and finding the point along the line based
on the temperature entered. This information can be helpful when selecting filters for a
particular fluid system running at a specific temperature. Remember that this is calculat-
ing kinematic viscosity, with the results in cSt.
These calculations are accurate to results of 2 cSt. If the resulting viscosity value is going
to be less than 2 cSt, the calculator gives an error message.

106
 • • • • •
6 • Setting Up Lubricants

Note that this calculator is only designed for use in a temperature range in which the fluid
is still a homogeneous liquid. In other words, do not enter a temperature that is out of the
range of the fluid’s use.
If you are using the PCM using the dVA, the viscosity results that you get may not match
the viscosity calculator exactly because the PCM uses specific gravity values in the calcu-
lation, and specific gravity varies with temperature. The PCM uses a calculation for cSt
that assumes that the specific gravity value is at the measured temperature.
Published specific gravity values from manufacturers are often at 40C or 60C, not ambi-
ent temperature (25C). So, if you enter a published specific gravity value instead of mea-
suring the specific gravity of the sample at ambient temperature, the value may be
different than the theoretical value in Emonitor.

To use the viscosity calculator

1. Select Setup > Lubricants.
2. Click New or Edit to open the dialog that contains the viscosity calculator. The vis-
cosity calculator is located at the bottom of the dialog box.

3. Under Viscosity calculator, enter the desired temperature in degrees Celsius that you
want to know the viscosity. To convert from degrees Celsius to degrees Fahrenheit,
use the following equation.
°Fahrenheit = 9/5 (°Celsius) + 32
4. Click Calculate. If the specifications for the lubricant are correct, the correct viscosity
value appears next to the cSt label.

Storing Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS)

There are two basic methods for storing Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) information
using Emonitor. One method is to use the ActiveX data type to store copies of your MSDS
files. Another method of storing a reference to the MSDS is through the lubricant specifi-
cation. This section shows you each method.

107
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

Store MSDS Files as ActiveX

The ActiveX data type allows you to store either links to document files or actual docu-
ment files. This example uses an MSDS saved as Microsoft Word.

You can also link to .htm or .html documents; however, that document type is only displayed as
an icon in Emonitor, not as the complete document.

To insert MSDS files into your database

1. Select Window > Database. Select the Data History view in the Select View dialog.
2. In the Location pane, choose the location where you want to put the new measurement
definition. In the Measurement Definition pane, double-click in the Data Type col-
umn and select ActiveX. You do not have to fill in Units or Collection, but you should
select a storage specification in the Storage column.
3. Double-click in the first empty row in the Archive Data pane. Or, click the first row,
then select Edit > Insert Object.
4. Click Browse to select the MSDS file you want to store in the Emonitor database.

If you link the file by selecting Link, changes you make to the information in Emonitor are
saved in the original file, and changes you make to the original file appear Emonitor when
you open the document. If you clear the Link check box, you are embedding the actual file.
When you embed the file, changes you make to the file in Emonitor do not appear in the orig-
inal, and changes to the original do not appear in the Emonitor embedded file.

5. Enter a Description of the file.

To view the MSDS ActiveX document

You use a Plot window to view the MSDS file.

The fastest way to do this is to right-click on the ActiveX measurement definition and select
Show Data. The ActiveX document appears in a new plot window.

1. Click on the desired ActiveX measurement definition, then select Window > Plot.
2. Select the Active Measurement view in the Select View dialog.
The Plot window is simply an image of the document, until you activate it.
3. To edit the MSDS file, double-click in the plot window. This action places the Word
Formatting toolbar in the Emonitor toolbar, and allows you to edit the document.

Word does not let you scroll through the document using scroll bars on the side of the plot
window. Instead, you must place your text cursor, then use the arrow keys or Page Up and
Page Down keys.

108
 • • • • •
6 • Setting Up Lubricants

Store MSDS Information in Lubricant Specification

You can use the Additional Information field in the lubricant specification dialog to
store MSDS information. For example, you could enter an internet URL to an MSDS into
the lubricant specification under Additional information. You cannot click directly on
the link to get to the page, but you can easily copy and paste it into your internet browser.
You could also put in the 800-numbers for safety or reference information.

Storing Ferrographic Images

The image data type in Emonitor can be used to store ferrographic image files that you
receive from a lab or that you create yourself. This section shows you how to use the
image data type specifically for ferrographic images, and how to display them on screen.

Supported graphic file formats

There are twenty supported graphic file formats for Emonitor. This table shows you the
file extension and the file format. These are the file formats you should use for your ferro-
graphic images.

File Extension File Format

.AVI Windows AVI (Note that only the first frame of the
AVI file is displayed.)
.AWD Microsoft FAX format
.BMP Bitmap format
.CMP LEAD 1-bit compression format

109
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

File Extension File Format

.CUR Cursors
.EPS Encapsulated PostScript format
.ICO Icons
.JPG, .JPEG JPEG format
.MAC MacPaint
.MSP Microsoft Paint
.PCD Kodak PhotoCD format
.PCT Macintosh PICT format
.PCX PCX format
.PNG Portable Network Graphics format
.PSD Photoshop format
.RAS Sun raster format
.TGA Truevision TARGA format
.TIF, .TIFF Tagged Image File Format
Note: LZW-compressed TIF files are not supported by
Emonitor because they require a patent license from
Unisys Corp.
.WMF Windows Meta File format
.WPG WordPerfect graphic format

To insert image data into the database

1. Select Window > Database. Select the Data History view in the Select View dialog.
2. In the Location pane, choose the location where you want to put the new measurement
definition. In the Measurement Definition pane, double-click in the Data Type col-
umn and select Image. You do not have to fill in Units or Collection, but you should
fill in the Storage column.
3. Double-click the first empty row in the Archive Data pane.

110
 • • • • •
6 • Setting Up Lubricants

4. Select the ferrographic image file to store in the Emonitor database in the Image Data
dialog. The supported image types are listed above under “Supported graphic file for-
mats”.

If you select Use file time stamp, Emonitor marks the archive data with the time/date of the
file itself. If you clear Use file time stamp, Emonitor uses the current time/date for the file.

5. Click OK. The file type appears in the archive data pane. In the Description column,
enter a description of the contents of the file.

To view the ferrographic image

Emonitor displays ferrographic images in Plot windows.

The fastest way to do this is to right-click on the ferrographic Image measurement definition and
select Show Data. The ActiveX document appears in a new Plot window.

1. Click on the desired ferrographic Image measurement definition, then select Window
> Plot.
2. Select the Active Measurement view.
See “Display Images” on page 227 for information on enlarging and reducing images on
the screen.

To view multiple ferrographic images

When you view a ferrographic image in a Plot window, that image is linked to the archive
data image in the database. If you select a different image, the second image replaces the
first image in the Plot window.
If you want to display more than one image at a time, you must unlink the Plot window
from the current database item.
1. To unlink a plot, select Plot > Linked to clear the checkmark next to the command.
When a Plot window is not linked to the database, the title bar says “Plot Window -
Unlinked.”
2. Select the second ferrographic image in the Database window, then open a second Plot
window. Emonitor displays both images, each in its own Plot window.

Importing Oil Data

Emonitor allows you to import data from an external file into the Emonitor database. This
allows you to import your oil laboratory data from your in-house or out-of-house lab.

111
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

Supported oil laboratory file formats

Emonitor supports many different laboratory file formats. This table shows the oil labora-
tories that are supported at the time of publication. If you would like to request an addition
to the labs that are already supported, contact your Rockwell Automation sales representa-
tive for pricing.

Supported Oil Laboratory File Extension with Wildcards

ALS Brisbane *.*
Analyst Inc *.oil
Castrol - US *.csv
Castrol - UK *.*
CSI Oil *.*
Entek enLab *.oil, *.o01, *.o02, etc.
Herguth *.txt
Insight Services *.wpa
ITS - UK *.its
Mobil *.csv
National Tribology *.oil *.o01, *.o02, etc.
Oilcheck Australia *.txt
Petroleum Analytical *.oil
Predict *.oil, *.o01, *.o02, etc.
Polaris *.*
Prodata Australia *.txt
Shell Malaysia *.oil
Shell New Zealand *.sha
Swansea *.oil
Techenomics *.txt
Wearcheck Laboratories - UK *.dat

112
 • • • • •
6 • Setting Up Lubricants

Emonitor treats imported data the same way as numeric measurement data. When you
import the data, Emonitor sets up the necessary items in the Hierarchy Tree, the locations,
and the numeric measurement definitions. After importing the data, you can:
 Set up alarms for the imported data
 View trends in the data using plots
 Print reports on the data using reports
Emonitor also tries to match any inspection codes in the imported data to those you create
using Setup > Options > Inspection Codes. See “Using Inspection Codes” on page 101.

Set the Oil Import Options

The oil lab import options allow you to choose how to store invalid or zero-value data, as
well as to choose the unload reports you want Emonitor to automatically run after import-
ing the data.
1. Select Tools > Data Import.
2. Click Options in the dialog box to display the Data Import Options dialog.
3. Select the desired import options.

Import Oil Data from a File

You can import data from one or more files either on your computer’s hard drive, a net-
work hard drive, a floppy disk, or any other source that Windows can recognize. There are
two steps when importing data from a file:
1. Selecting the source file containing the data.
2. Importing the data.
Emonitor also tries to match any inspection codes in the imported data to those you create
using Setup > Options > Inspection Codes. If it finds a matching inspection code,
Emonitor stores it according to the hierarchy level that you set up for the inspection code.
If Emonitor does not find any matching inspection codes, it assigns the inspection codes
from the data file at the location level. See “Using Inspection Codes” on page 101 for
details.

To select the source file containing the data

1. Select Tools > Data Import.

113
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

2. Click Set Up Import.

3. You may be able to limit the display of data files for some file types in the Browse
Files for Data Import dialog. You do this by selecting the oil analysis laboratory in
the Files of type box.
4. Select the file or files containing the data. You can directly select multiple files, or you
can use wildcards in the File name field to select multiple files. Wildcards are special
characters that you can use to substitute for other characters. Using the ‘*’ substitutes
for any series of letters, spaces, or numbers.
5. Click Open.

To import the data from the selected file(s)

1. Select Tools > Data Import.
2. Click the Import button.
3. Emonitor attempts to import the data from the file.
4. Emonitor then checks the import options in the Data Import Options dialog and per-
forms any selected functions. These include:
 Either store or ignore invalid and zero-value data.
 Print selected unload reports for the imported data.

Schedule Oil Data Import

You can schedule data import so that Emonitor regularly checks for, and automatically
imports, data files. You must do two things before scheduling data import:
 Set the data import options. See “Set the Oil Import Options” on page 113.
 Choose the type of data file to import. See “Import Oil Data from a File” on page 113.

114
 • • • • •
6 • Setting Up Lubricants

Emonitor saves the import options and the type of data file with the schedule for data
import.

The Scheduler service must be running if you want to use scheduled data import. This service is
disabled by default and must be manually enabled. For more information, refer to the Scheduler
help file (Start > Programs > Rockwell Software > Emonitor > Help > Scheduler Help).

To schedule oil data import

 You can use the Emonitor Scheduler to import data once or on a regular schedule.
Refer to the Help for the Emonitor Scheduler for more information (Start > Pro-
grams > Rockwell Software > Emonitor > Help > Scheduler Help). Use the Sched-
uler to view, edit, or delete schedules for data import.
To start the Scheduler, click the Start button on the Windows taskbar, then select Pro-
grams > Rockwell Software > Emonitor > Utilities > Scheduler.
 You can also set up multiple schedules for a data import with the Emonitor Scheduler
program.

To cancel data import

To cancel scheduled data import, you must run the Scheduler program.
1. Start Scheduler. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar, then select Programs
> Rockwell Software > Emonitor > Utilities > Scheduler.
2. In the Scheduler window, select the profile called Data Import Task. If there are two
or more Data Import Tasks, select the first one.
3. Click Delete.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you have deleted all the Data Import Tasks.
5. Close the Scheduler program.

115
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

116
7 Using Lists
Overview of Lists in Emonitor
Lists provide you with a powerful tool for organizing measurement definitions. You can
use lists to:
 Load selected measurement definitions into a data collector.
 Manually enter data into the database.
 Display data on various types of plots.
 Select data for reports.
 Select locations for which you want to paste copied measurement definitions, or mea-
surement definitions for which you want to paste copied alarms.
Emonitor allows you to easily create, save, and recall lists. You can view and edit a list in
the List window. You work with the current list by adding (tagging) or removing (untag-
ging) measurement definitions.

Although a list contains measurement definitions, the List window displays only the locations for
those measurement definitions. You can tag one, some, or all the measurement definitions at a
location for a list. You can also customize the List window view to show just the information you
need.

Working with Lists

Lists in Emonitor are useful for organizing locations and measurement definitions. Instead
of searching through the database for measurement definitions each time you want to load
to a data collector or view a report, you can create and save a list.
The topics in this section describe how you can display, create, save, recall, edit, and
delete lists. You display a list in the List window. You can also combine lists to create a
new list.
The next section, “Using Lists” on page 126, shows you how you can use lists to organize
locations and measurement definitions for data collection, plots and reports, and manual
data entry.

Display a List in the List Window

The List window allows you to view information about the locations in the current list.

While a list contains a set of measurement definitions, the List window only shows the locations
for those measurement definitions.

117
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

To display the current list in the List window

1. Select Window > List.
2. Select a list view in the Select View dialog or click New to open the List window with
all the available columns displayed.

To display the alarm status indicators

The alarm status indicators show the alarm severity for the measurement definitions in the
current list.
1. Click the List window to make it active.
2. Select View > Pane Options.
3. Select the desired options that control the display of alarm severity information.
See “Displaying Alarm Status” on page 154 for details.

To create a new List window column definition

1. Click the List window to make it the active window.
2. Select View > Pane Options. The current column definition appears in the Pane
Options dialog.
3. Modify the column definitions in the spreadsheet.

To save a list column definition as a view

Select View > Save View to save a List view. See “Save panes in a view” on page 23.

To recall a list view

 To recall a view when you open the List window, select the view in the Select View
dialog.
 To recall a view into the open List window, select the view from the list of views at the
bottom of the View menu.
See “Recall a view in an open window” on page 23.

You can also assign a button on the Saved Views toolbar for a view, then click that button to
recall that view. See “Using Toolbars” on page 14.

To change the List window fonts

You can change the fonts in the List window with Setup > Fonts > List Window Fonts.

118
 • • • • •
7 • Using Lists

Clear the Current List

Select List > Clear Current List to clear the current list. This command removes all the
tagged measurement definitions from the list.

If you want to recall the current list, you must save it before you clear it. Unless you save a list,
you cannot recall it later.

If you want to save the current list before you clear it, use List > Save. This allows you to
save the current list with a name, so that you can recall it later. See “Save a New or Modi-
fied List” on page 124 for details.

Create a List
You can create a new list by adding (tagging) measurement definitions to the current list.
When you tag a measurement definition, Emonitor displays a picture of a tag next to it in
the Measurement Definition pane of the Database window.

To add all the measurement definitions for a machine

Tagging an item in the Hierarchy Tree tags all the measurement definitions descending
from the item. This adds all the measurement definitions to the current list.

An easy way to tag a machine is to right-click the machine and select Tag.

1. Select Window > Database. Select a view that includes the Hierarchy Tree.
2. Select the item in the Hierarchy Tree.
3. Select List > Tag Current Item, or press + on the numeric keypad.
4. To untag all the measurement definitions for the hierarchy level, select List > Untag
Current Item, or press - on the numeric keypad.

To add all the measurement definitions for a location to the list

Tagging a location in the Location pane tags all the measurement definitions attached to
that location.
1. Display the Location pane in the Database window.
2. Move to the desired location.
3. Do one of the following:

119
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

 Select List > Tag Current Item.

 Double-click the second column of the Location pane. A picture of a tag appears
in the column.
 Move to the second column of the Location pane with the arrow keys, and press
Enter.
4. To untag all the measurement definitions for a location, repeat step 3 on a tagged loca-
tion. You can also select List > Untag Current Item.

To add individual measurement definitions to the current list

1. Display the Measurement Definition pane in the Database window.
2. Move to the desired measurement definition.
3. Do one of the following:
 Select List > Tag Current Item.
 Double-click the second column of the Measurement Definition pane to tag the
measurement definition. A picture of a tag appears in the column.
 Move to the second column of the Measurement Definition pane with the arrow
keys, and press Enter to tag the measurement definition.
4. To untag a measurement definition, repeat step 3 on a tagged measurement definition.
You can also select List > Untag Current Item.

To add measurement definitions using a tag condition

You can change a list by adding or removing measurement definitions using a set of con-
ditions. For example, you could add all the measurement definitions for a machine that are
in the axial direction (or that use a particular lubricant specification).
1. Select List > Tag Items for List.
2. Select an existing tag condition from the Tag condition list, or create a new set of tag
conditions.
3. Click Append, Retain, or Remove.
 Append adds the measurement definitions that match the tag conditions to the end
of the current list. Measurement definitions that are already in the current list are
not added to the current list a second time.
 Retain deletes from the current list any measurement definitions not matching
the tag conditions.

120
 • • • • •
7 • Using Lists

 Remove deletes from the current list any measurement definitions matching the
tag conditions.
4. You can undo the last change to the current list by selecting List > Undo List.

To save a tag condition

You can save a tag condition so that you can use it again in the future. To save the tag con-
dition, enter a name for the tag condition in the Tag Items for List dialog and click Save.

To delete a tag condition

Once you delete a tag condition, you cannot bring it back.

1. Select List > Tag Items for List.

2. Display the tag condition by selecting it from the Tag condition list.
3. Click Delete to delete the tag condition.

Create New List Types

List types allow you to organize your lists. When you save a list, you can give it a list
type. Then you can use the list filtering features in Emonitor to display only some types of
lists. See “Save a New or Modified List” on page 124 for more information.
1. Select Setup > Options > List Types.
2. Click New to add a new list type.
3. Enter the name for the new list type and press Enter.
You can also edit an existing list type or delete a list type. You cannot delete a list type that
is used for a list.

Filter Lists by Type or Assignment

You can limit the display of lists in dialogs by filtering the lists by list type or list assign-
ment.
1. In any list dialog, click Filter to display the Filter Lists dialog.
2. Select the list types and assignments to display, then click OK.
Emonitor only shows the lists that match the selected list filter characteristics.

If you are using Emonitor Web, you may want to create a list type specifically for Webload lists
(see “Create New List Types” on page 121). You may also want to create a regular Emonitor user
name corresponding to each Emonitor Web user (see “Add a New User” on page 319).

121
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

Recall an Existing List

You can recall an existing list and use it as the current list. You can also combine lists to
create a new list. To recall an existing list:
1. If you want to begin with an empty list, select List > Clear Current List. This
removes all measurement definitions from the current list.
2. Select List > Recall.
3. Select one or more lists in the Recall List dialog by clicking the list name. You can
also use the arrow keys to move to a list name and press the Spacebar to select it.
Emonitor highlights the lists you select.
You can also recall a list by selecting a Condition. The tag conditions are the same as
the ones created with List > Tag Items for List. Note that you cannot use tag condi-
tions containing list-type columns (List Name through Collection Code). See “Create
a List” on page 119 for more information.
4. Click Recall, Append or Retain.
 Recall replaces the current list with the recalled list.
 Append adds the measurement definitions in the selected list(s) to the end of the
current list. Measurement definitions that appear in both the current and a selected
list are not added to the current list a second time.
 Retain deletes from the current list any measurement definitions not in the
selected list(s).
5. You can undo the last change to the current list by selecting List > Undo List.

Edit a List
Once you create or recall a list, you can then modify the list to add, remove, or reorder
locations in the current list. Note that you cannot add the same measurement definition to
the list twice. If a measurement definition already exists in a list, Emonitor does not add it
to the list again.

You can also change the list type or list assignments. See “Change List Type or Assignment” on
page 124.

To select locations in the List window

To select (highlight) one or more rows in the List window, do one of the following:
 Drag over two or more cells in the row to select the row. To select two or more rows,
drag over a cell in the first row, then drag down the column. When you release the
mouse button, Emonitor highlights the row or rows.

122
 • • • • •
7 • Using Lists

 Hold down the Shift key and press the Spacebar to select all the cells in the row. Con-
tinue to hold down the Shift key and press the Up or Down Arrow key to select mul-
tiple rows.

To reorder locations in a list

1. Select Window > List. Select a view in the Select View dialog to display the current
list.
2. Select the locations in the current list you want to move.
3. Select Edit > Cut or press Ctrl+X to move the selected locations to the Clipboard. If
you want to delete the selected locations from the list, press Delete.
4. Move the cursor to the new place in the list by clicking in that row in the List window.
Emonitor puts the pasted locations after the current location. Select Edit > Paste (or
Ctrl+V) to paste the locations from the Clipboard back into the list.

To combine existing lists to create a new list

You can combine lists by appending a list to the current list with List > Recall. See
“Recall an Existing List” on page 122.

Remember to save the list after making changes if you want to use the list in the future.

Undo Changes to a List

You can undo changes to the current list with Edit > Undo List. Each time you select this
command, Emonitor reverses one change to the current list. Note that this feature is not
connected to the ability to undo changes to the database (see “Undo Changes to the Data-
base” on page 55).
For instance, suppose you perform the following sequence of steps on the current list:
1. Add five locations to the current list by tagging a machine (Machine #1) in the Hierar-
chy Tree.
2. Remove one location (location 1) from the current list.
3. Remove a second location (location 2) from the current list.
You can then undo the changes to the current list by selecting Edit > Undo List. Note that
the command name changes to match the last operation (as in Undo List Cut).
1. The first time you select Edit > Undo List, Emonitor restores location 2 to the current
list.

123
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

2. The second time you select the command, Emonitor restores location 1 to the current
list.
3. The third time you select the command, Emonitor removes all the locations you added
by tagging Machine #1.

Save a New or Modified List

Once you have created or modified the current list, you may want to save it so that you
can use the list in the future. You can also make any list a Quickload list, which can save
you time when you load the list into a data collector. See “Use Quickload Lists” on page
126 for more information.

Do not use “All” as a list name. “All” is reserved for certain operations such as updating the alarm
severity status or calculated measurements from the command line or through the Scheduler.

1. Select List > Save.

2. Enter or select the properties for the list, including the name, list type, assignment, due
date and collection interval.
3. Select the type of load file (QuickLoad, Webload).
If you plan to use this list for local data collection, saving it as a Quickload list can
save you time when loading the list into the data collector. If you plan to use the list
with Emonitor Web, save it as a Webload list.
4. Select the data collectors for the load file. Select one or more data collector names.
5. Enter the instructions you want to appear on the data collector screen while collecting
data for this list (if the data collector supports this feature).

Change List Type or Assignment

When you save a list, you give it a list type and can assign it to a Emonitor user name. If
you want to change the list type and list assignment, follow these steps.
You must have Supervisor or Administrator access rights to edit list properties.

Emonitor Web Load/Unload users do not appear for list assignment. See “Add an Emonitor Web
User” on page 304.

1. Select List > Edit.

You can filter the display of lists by clicking Filter. See “Filter Lists by Type or
Assignment” on page 121.
2. Select the list you want to edit, then click Properties.

124
 • • • • •
7 • Using Lists

3. Select the new properties, and then click OK.

Review and Change List Schedules

You can review the scheduled data collection dates for lists with List > List Scheduler.
You can also change the data collection schedule for lists, and print the list schedule.

To review scheduled list collection dates

1. Select List > List Scheduler.
2. Click Options to open List Scheduler Options dialog. Set the options to the desired
date range and other properties of the List Scheduler display. The options also control
the appearance of the list schedule when you click Print.

To copy the list schedule to the Clipboard

You can copy the contents of the List Scheduler spreadsheet to the Clipboard. This allows
you to copy the list schedule into another application such as a word processor.
1. Select List > List Scheduler.
2. Click Copy in the List Scheduler dialog. Emonitor copies the list schedule with tab
characters between the columns.

To print the list schedule

1. Select List > List Scheduler.
2. Click Options to open the List Scheduler Options dialog to set the printer options.
Click OK when done.
3. Click Print in the List Scheduler dialog. Emonitor prints the list schedule to the cur-
rent printer.

To change the collection schedule for a list

You must have Supervisor or Administrator access rights to change a list schedule.

1. Select List > List Scheduler.

2. If the list does not appear in the spreadsheet, click Options to open the List Scheduler
Options dialog. Select the correct List type and Assigned to to display the desired
list.
3. Select the list by clicking anywhere in the row in the List Scheduler spreadsheet.
4. Click Schedule to open the List Schedule dialog. This allows you to change the
schedule for the selected list.

125
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

Delete a List
You can delete one or more lists with List > Delete.

You must have Supervisor or Administrator access rights to delete lists created by others. Oper-
ator rights only allow you to delete lists you created.

Once you delete a list, you cannot bring it back. Note that deleting a list does not delete the loca-
tions and measurement definitions in the list from the database.

1. Select List > Delete.

2. Select one or more lists by clicking the list name. You can also use the arrow keys to
move to a list name and press Spacebar to select it. Emonitor highlights the lists you
select.

You can filter the display of lists by clicking Filter. See “Filter Lists by Type or Assignment” on
page 121.

3. Click Delete.

Using Lists
This section describes the procedures for using lists in Emonitor. This includes creating
Quickload lists for data collection. Quickload lists allow you to build load files when the
computer is not in use. This section also covers using lists for data collection, plots, and
reports.
The topics in the previous section, “Working with Lists” on page 117, describe how you
can display, create, save, recall, edit, and delete lists. They also describe how to display a
list in the List window.

Use Quickload Lists

Quickload lists are a special type of list. Emonitor creates a load file from a list before it
loads the list into a data collector. Building the load file may take some time, depending
on the size of the list. Instead, you can build load files from Quickload lists anytime, then
load them directly into the data collector without waiting.
You can save any list as a Quickload list. When you save the list, you simply select one or
more data collectors for the list. You can then build load files for each data collector at any
convenient time.

126
 • • • • •
7 • Using Lists

To create a Quickload list

When you save a list with List > Save, simply select the Quickload load file type. Emoni-
tor saves a separate Quickload load file for each of the selected data collectors for that list.

To select the directory for Quickload load files

You can select the directory in which Emonitor stores the Quickload load files.
1. Select Setup > Options > General. Click the Load / Unload tab.
2. Click Change in the General Options dialog.
3. Select the directory for the Quickload load files.

To build new load files for Quickload lists

1. Select Tools > Update Quickload Files.
2. Select the data collectors and lists for which you want to update the Quickload load
files.

You can filter the display of lists by clicking Filter. See “Filter Lists by Type or Assignment” on
page 121.

Emonitor builds new load files for each selected list for each selected data collector. Note
that this may take some time. You may want to do this while you are away from your com-
puter, or overnight, depending on the size of your lists.

To load a Quickload list into a data collector

Select Tools > Load / Unload, and select one or more lists to load into the data collector.
Emonitor checks each load file against the Quickload list to make sure that the load file is
up to date. If you change any of the following, Emonitor rebuilds the load file before load-
ing it into the data collector:
 Measurement definitions in the list
 Inspection codes
 Locations in the list
 Hierarchy level of items in the Hierarchy Tree that affect measurement definitions in
the list
 Collection specification of any measurement definition in the list
 If you select any of the check boxes under Override collect on alarm in the Load
Options dialog.

127
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

The following items also affect the load file; however, changing them does not cause
Emonitor to rebuild the load file before loading it into the data collector. You must use
Tools > Update Quickload Files to rebuild the load file before loading if you change any
of these:
 Measurement filter in a measurement definition in the list
 Storage specification of a measurement definition in the list
 The trigger status of an alarm, since the trigger status determines whether Emonitor
loads an alarm to the data collector
 The baseline measurement in the archive data for a measurement definition

Use Lists for Data Collection and Data Entry

Lists in Emonitor allow you to save selected groups of measurement definitions. You can
use saved lists without having to recreate them each time. A list defines the measurements
you want to make when you collect data.

You can include calculated measurement definitions in a list, but Emonitor does not load them to
a data collector. You cannot use Tools > Manual Entry to add data for a calculated measure-
ment definition.

To use lists for data collection

Select Tools > Load / Unload to select one or more lists to load to the current data collec-
tor. You can create Quickload lists to save time when loading the list into the data collec-
tor. See “Use Quickload Lists” on page 126 for more information.
For loading and unloading lists over the Internet with Emonitor Web, see “Loading and
Unloading Data with Emonitor Web” on page 303.

To use lists for manual data entry

Select Tools > Manual Entry to select a list for manual data entry. This saves you from
having to locate each of the measurement definitions separately. See “Manually Adding
and Editing Archive Data” on page 183 for more information.

Use Lists for Plots and Reports

You can use lists to select the data to view in plots or in reports. For example, you can cre-
ate a report containing only the data from measurement definitions in a list.

You can use the Remote Control toolbar to move through the list and Plot windows. See “Use the
Remote Control with Plots” on page 239.

128
 • • • • •
7 • Using Lists

To use lists for plotting

You can recall a list for plotting. This allows you to view plots of archive data (including
archive data images) without having to search through the database to find each measure-
ment definition.
1. select Window > List. Select a view in the Select View dialog.
2. Recall a saved list with List > Recall. You could also create and use a new list. See
“Create a List” on page 119.
3. Select Window > Plots to open a Plot window, and select the type of plot to display.
4. Select Window > Tile Horizontal or Window > Tile Vertical to display both the List
and Plot windows.
5. Select a location in the List window. The Plot window updates to display the first plot
for the location—unless you have locked the plot pane to a particular measurement or
unit/filter combination. See “Use Pane Locking with Plots” on page 233.

To open a Plot window for each location in the list

You can open multiple Plot windows at the same time, with one window for each location
in the current list. Use these steps to open a window for each location in the current list.
1. Select Window > Plots.
2. Select Open a window for each location in list in the Select Plot View dialog.

To use lists in reports

You can use a list to define a set of locations and measurement definitions for a report.
1. Select Window > Reports.
2. Select a list from the Report from drop-down in the Print Reports dialog.
3. Select one or more report descriptions in the dialog by clicking the description, or by
moving to the description and pressing Spacebar.
4. Set the other options in the dialog.
5. Click Preview to display the report in a Report window. If you select more than one
report description, Emonitor displays each report in its own Report window.
6. Click Print to send the report or reports to the current printer.

You can click on the data in a report to move to that measurement definition in the List win-
dow and any Plot windows. See “Plot Data from the Report Window” on page 238.

129
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

For information on viewing data with the Emonitor Web Client, see the online help file for
the Emonitor Web Client.

130
8 Using Alarms
Overview of Alarms in Emonitor
Alarms in Emonitor are powerful and flexible. An alarm lets you know when the condi-
tion of a piece of equipment changes, possibly going beyond the limit of safe or recom-
mended operation. Emonitor lets you:
 View alarms in the Alarm pane of the Database window.
 View the alarm status indicators in the Database and List windows.
 Set multiple alarms for any measurement definition.
 Define and apply different alarm severity levels for alarms.
 Create constant, indicator, and statistical alarms for spectrum, time waveform, magni-
tude and process measurements.
 Create alarms based on the statistical values generated from measurements in an
equipment category.
 Use secondary sorting of category alarms by position, direction, or by association with
up to four process measurements.
You can use alarms in several ways:
 To show when a measurement is in alarm. Emonitor can load alarms to many data col-
lectors as part of a list of measurement definitions for data collection. The data collec-
tor can then alert you when a measurement exceeds an alarm.
 To determine when to collect and store a measurement. You can create a storage spec-
ification to store a measurement only when a measurement for the location exceeds an
alarm.
 To select measurements in alarm for a report. A report of measurements in alarm is
called an exception report.
In addition, you can display alarms on plots, and use Plot > Options to select the alarms
you want to see on a plot.

Setting Up Alarms
Emonitor allows you to create and apply different types of alarms to different types of
measurement definitions.
 Magnitude alarms alert you to a change in a magnitude or process measurement.

131
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

 Spectrum alarms alert you to an amplitude change at a spectral line for a spectrum
measurement. Spectrum alarms are also called narrowband alarms.
 Band alarms alert you to a change within defined frequency bands for a spectrum
measurement. The category for the measurement definition's location includes the
band set that defines the frequency bands. In addition, you can create a Band Constant
alarm for individual measurement definitions.
 Time waveform alarms alert you to a change in a time waveform measurement.
You can create new alarms, copy existing alarms, or paste alarm templates into the Alarm
pane. These are the steps for setting up alarms, described in detail in the rest of this sec-
tion:
1. Define the alarm severity levels for your Emonitor system with Setup > Options >
Alarm Severity.
2. Select a measurement definition in the Database window for which you want to create
an alarm.
3. Select the alarm method in the Method column of the Alarm pane.
4. Edit the alarm definition by popping up the Definition dialog. You can include cate-
gory variables and band variables in the alarm definition.

Edit Severity Levels

Severity indicates the degree of danger associated with an alarm. An example of a list of
severities from mildest to the worst is: Low Warning, High Warning, Low Danger, High
Danger, Critical. You can edit the indicators and descriptions for alarm severity levels in
Emonitor, and use them in two ways:
 To select the severity levels of alarms you want to see on plots.
 To create reports sorted by the greatest alarm severity level of the measurement.
You can save the alarm severities in a specification library. See “Save and Restore Speci-
fication Libraries” on page 98 for more information.

To change the indicators or the descriptions for alarm severities

Tip: An easy way to change an alarm severity is to right-click in the Severity column
of the Alarm pane and select Edit Severity.
1. Select Setup > Options > Alarm Severity.
2. Change the indicator for the severity level by double-clicking the Indicator column.
This displays the Select Severity Indicator dialog, which allows you to select a color
for the indicator. Alarms appear on plots in the same color as their indicator.

132
 • • • • •
8 • Using Alarms

3. Edit the Description for the severity level. The order of the alarm severities is impor-
tant. An alarm severity level of 6 is always more severe than an alarm severity level of
5, regardless of the description.

To to select a severity level for an alarm

1. Select the Alarm view in the Database window.
2. Select a measurement definition in the for which you want to create an alarm.
3. Move to the Severity column in the Alarm pane, and double-click or press Enter to
select from a list of available alarm severities.
4. Click an alarm severity, or use the arrow keys to select a severity and press Enter.

Select an Alarm Method

The alarm method is the type of alarm you want to apply to a measurement definition. The
data type of the measurement definition determines your choice of alarm methods. For
example, you can only select a magnitude alarm method for a magnitude measurement
definition.
1. Select the Alarm view in the Database window.
2. Select a measurement definition in the Database window.
3. Move to the Method column in Alarm pane, and double-click or press Enter to select
from a list of available alarm methods.
4. Click an alarm method, or use the arrow keys to select a method and press Enter.

Edit an Alarm Definition

The alarm definition sets the values for the alarm method. For example, the alarm defini-
tion for a magnitude constant alarm allows you to set the following:
 Constant Value: Threshold of the alarm, at or beyond which the measurement is in
alarm
 Type of Data: Type of data for the alarm (magnitude or phase data)
 Type of Alarm: Direction of the alarm (above the constant value, or below the con-
stant value)
1. Select the Alarm view in the Database window.
2. Select a measurement definition in the Database window.
3. Move to the Definition column in the Alarm pane, and double-click or press Enter to
display the alarm definition dialog.

133
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

4. Edit the alarm definition.

The alarm definition appears in the Definition column of the Alarm pane.

Add Magnitude Alarms

Magnitude alarms alert you when a magnitude or process measurement reaches or goes
beyond a limit you define for the measurement definition. You can set up one or more
magnitude alarms of different types for each measurement definition. In addition, you can
select an alarm severity level for each alarm, allowing you to rank alarms based on their
relative importance.
For example, you might define three alarms for a measurement definition:
 Warning alarm at 50% above the baseline measurement
 Critical alarm at 100% above the baseline measurement
 Warning alarm for an increase in the measurement of 10% or more since the last mea-
surement
The Magnitude Alarm pane in the Database window allows you to add, edit, and delete
magnitude alarms. To add an alarm, you add a new row to the Alarm spreadsheet.
1. Select Window > Database. Select a view in the Select View dialog that includes the
Measurement Definition and Alarm panes.
2. Select a measurement definition.
3. Click in the last row in the Alarm spreadsheet.
4. Enter or select the information for the new alarm.
See “Fill in the Information for a Machine” on page 70 for information on adding, editing,
copying, and deleting alarms. You can also create and paste alarm templates. For more
information, see “Working with Templates” on page 76.

Types of Magnitude Alarms

There are many different magnitude alarms that you can apply to magnitude and process
measurement definitions. You can use the different alarm types (called alarm methods) to
create alarms to exactly fit your needs. In most cases, you can set the alarm on either the
magnitude or the phase of the measurement.
Please note the following about alarms:
 For peak and statistical alarms, you may need to use Tools > Generate Alarm Statis-
tics to create or update the peak and statistical values for the alarms. See “Generate
Alarm Statistics” on page 145 for more information.

134
 • • • • •
8 • Using Alarms

 For indicator alarms, Emonitor automatically calculates the statistics before applying
the alarm, so that you do not have to use Tools > Generate Alarm Statistics.
To find our more about specific alarms, refer to the Emonitor online help.

Add Spectrum Alarms

Spectrum alarms allow Emonitor to alert you when a spectrum measurement reaches or
goes beyond a limit you define for the measurement definition. Spectrum alarms allow
you to create an alarm to monitor the change at each spectral line in the measurement. You
can set up one or more different spectrum and band alarms for each spectrum measure-
ment definition. In addition, you can select an alarm severity level for each alarm, ranking
the alarms based on their relative importance.
For example, you might define three alarms for a spectrum measurement definition:
 Warning alarm at 50% above the baseline measurement at any spectral line
 Critical alarm at 100% above the baseline measurement at any spectral line
 Warning alarm at a 10% increase in the value of the measurement at any spectral line
since the last measurement
The Spectrum Alarm pane in the Database window allows you to add, edit, and delete
spectrum alarms. To add an alarm, you add a new row to the Alarm spreadsheet.
1. Select Window > Database. Select a view in the Select View dialog that includes the
Measurement Definition and Alarm panes.
2. Select a measurement definition.
3. Click in the last row in the Alarm spreadsheet.
4. Enter or select the information for the new alarm.
See “Fill in the Information for a Machine” on page 70 for information on adding, editing,
copying, and deleting alarms. You can also create and paste alarm templates. For more
information, see “Working with Templates” on page 76.

Types of Spectrum Alarms

There are several different types of spectrum alarms that you can apply to spectrum mea-
surement definitions. A spectrum alarm allows you to set an alarm level for each spectral
line in the spectrum. In effect, the spectrum alarm is a spectrum that separates safe and
unsafe operating conditions. You can use the different alarm types (called alarm methods)
to create spectrum alarms to exactly fit your needs.
Please note the following about alarms:

135
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

 For peak and statistical alarms, you may need to use Tools > Generate Alarm Statis-
tics to create or update the peak and statistical values for the alarms. See “Generate
Alarm Statistics” on page 145 for more information.
 Emonitor generates only 1600 line spectrum alarms for spectra with more than 1600
lines.
 For indicator alarms, Emonitor automatically calculates the statistics before applying
the alarm, so that you do not have to use Tools > Generate Alarm Statistics.
To find our more about specific alarms, refer to the Emonitor online help.

Add Band Alarms

Band alarms allow Emonitor to alert you when a spectrum measurement in a defined fre-
quency band reaches or goes beyond a limit you define for the measurement definition.
You can monitor either the band maximum amplitude, or the band sum for each frequency
band.
You can set up one or more band and spectrum alarms of different types for each spectrum
measurement definition. In addition, you can select an alarm severity level for each alarm,
ranking the alarms based on their relative importance.
For example, you might define three band alarms for a spectrum measurement definition:
 Warning alarm at 50% above the baseline measurement in any frequency band
 Critical alarm at 100% above the baseline measurement in any frequency band
 Warning alarm at a 10% increase in the value of the measurement in any frequency
band since the last measurement
The Spectrum Alarm pane in the Database window allows you to add, edit, and delete
band alarms. To add an alarm, you add a new row to the Alarm spreadsheet.
1. Select Window > Database. Select a view in the Select View dialog that includes the
Measurement Definition and Alarm panes.
2. Select a measurement definition.
3. Click in the last row in the Alarm spreadsheet.
4. Enter or select the information for the new alarm.
See “Fill in the Information for a Machine” on page 70 for information on adding, editing,
copying, and deleting alarms. You can also create and paste alarm templates. For more
information, see “Working with Templates” on page 76.

136
 • • • • •
8 • Using Alarms

Types of Band Alarms

There are many different types of band alarms that you can apply to spectrum measure-
ment definitions. A band alarm allows you to set an alarm for each frequency band
defined in the band set for the category. In addition, you can set the alarm in each band on
either the band maximum amplitude, or on the band sum. Finally, you can create a band
alarm for a single spectrum measurement definition that is not based on the category.
You can use the different band alarms, in combination with spectrum alarms, to create
alarms for spectrum measurement definitions to exactly fit your needs. Please note the fol-
lowing about alarms:
 For peak and statistical alarms, you may need to use Tools > Generate Alarm Statis-
tics to create or update the peak and statistical values for the alarms. See “Generate
Alarm Statistics” on page 145 for more information.
 For indicator alarms, Emonitor automatically calculates the statistics before applying
the alarm, so that you do not have to use Tools > Generate Alarm Statistics.
To find our more about specific alarms, refer to the Emonitor online help.

Add Time Waveform Alarms

Time waveform alarms alert you when a time waveform measurement reaches or goes
beyond a limit you define for the measurement definition. You can set up one or more
time waveform alarms of different types for each measurement definition. In addition, you
can select an alarm severity level for each alarm, allowing you to rank alarms based on
their relative importance.
For example, you might define alarms for a measurement definition:
 Warning alarm above a certain constant amplitude
 Critical alarm above a higher constant amplitude
The Time Waveform Alarm pane in the Database window allows you to add, edit, and
delete time waveform alarms. To add an alarm, you add a new row to the Alarm spread-
sheet.
1. Select Window > Database. Select a view in the Select View dialog that includes the
Measurement Definition and Alarm panes.
2. Select a measurement definition.
3. Click in the last row in the Alarm spreadsheet.
4. Enter or select the information for the new alarm.

137
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

See “Fill in the Information for a Machine” on page 70 for information on adding, editing,
copying, and deleting alarms. You can also create and paste alarm templates. For more
information, see “Working with Templates” on page 76.

Types of Time Waveform Alarms

There are two types of time waveform alarm that you can apply to time waveform mea-
surement definitions. You can use the alarm (called an alarm method) to create time
alarms to fit your needs.
To find our more about specific alarms, refer to the Emonitor online help.

Use Category Variables in Alarms

Category variables allow you to have much greater control over alarms in Emonitor.
These variables allow you to change the level of one or more alarms for an entire equip-
ment category by changing the value of the variable only once. Similarly, band alarms use
band variables instead of category variables. See “Use Band Sets and Band Variables in
Alarms” on page 140.
Categories can either be for equipment types, or for lubricants. With Emonitor, you can
set up lubricant specifications that are used as categories. Any machine with that lubricant
can have a matching category based on the lubricant specification. See “Use Lubricant
Specifications for Alarms” on page 104 for more information.
For example, assume that you have set up constant alarms for magnitude or process mea-
surement definitions for thirty identical motors. Initially, you decide to use a value of 0.2
ips for your warning alarm, and 0.3 ips for your danger alarm. Assume you use the Stan-
dard Motor category for all locations for the motors.
After using Emonitor for several months, you discover that the constant alarm levels are
too high. You decide to adjust them to set the warning alarm at 0.15 ips and the danger
alarm at 0.20 ips. If you did not use category variables, you would have to change the
alarm levels for each of the magnitude constant alarms for each motor. This could take a
significant amount of time.
Suppose, instead, you used the category variable LO ALARM1 for the warning alarm
value, and HI ALARM1 for the danger alarm value. You could then simply change the
values for the category variables LO ALARM1 and HI ALARM1 in the Standard Motors
category for matching Units and Filter (ips units, no filter). Emonitor then automatically
changes all alarms in that category that use the LO ALARM1 and HI ALARM1 category
variables for measurement definitions with that combination of units and measurement fil-
ter.

138
 • • • • •
8 • Using Alarms

It is important to note that you must use the correct combination of units and measurement
filter for the category when changing category variables. Emonitor only changes alarms
for measurement definitions in that category that match the unit and measurement filter.

To set the value for a category variable

One easy way to edit a category variable is to right-click the category in the Location pane and
select Edit. You could also right-click the alarm definition in the Alarm pane and select Category.

1. Select Setup > Category.

2. Select the category, and then click Edit. If you need to create a new category, or add
new unit/filter combinations, see “Add and Edit Equipment Categories” on page 99.
3. Enter the category variables for the first unit/filter combination in the Category Vari-
ables table. You only need to fill in the category variables you will be using in Emon-
itor. However, if you use a category variable in an alarm and do not give it a value,
Emonitor ignores the alarm.
4. Click Next Unit and repeat step 3 for each unit/filter combination in the category that
you will need.
There are two things to note about category variables:
 The value of a category variable depends on the combination of category you select
for the location, the measurement filter, and the unit you select for the measurement
definition.
 You do not have to select Tools > Generate Alarm Statistics after you change the
value of a category variable. Category variables in alarms are automatically updated,
and are not part of the alarm statistics generated by Emonitor.

To use category variables in an alarm

1. Select Window > Database. Select the Alarms view in the Select View dialog.
2. Select the category for the location if you have not already done so.
3. Select a measurement definition.
4. Move to the Alarm pane, and create a new alarm for the measurement definition. You
can also edit an existing alarm instead of adding a new alarm. See “Setting Up
Alarms” on page 131 and “Fill in the Information for a Machine” on page 70 for
details
5. Select the alarm method from the list in the Method column. The alarm method is the
type of alarm. You can use category variables in most alarms.

139
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

6. Move to the Definition column, and double-click the column or press Enter to dis-
play the alarm definition dialog.
In magnitude and spectrum alarms, you can select a category variable for the following in
many alarm definitions:
 Constant upper or lower value for the alarm
 Percentage above or below the peak measurement
 Percentage above or below the average of measurements
 Percentage above or below the baseline measurement
 Percentage of change in a measurement
 Cutoff amplitude value for the alarm

Use Band Sets and Band Variables in Alarms

Band variables allow you to have much greater control over the levels of band alarms in
Emonitor. These variables allow you to do two important things:
 Set different alarm levels in each band in a band set.
 Change the band alarm levels for an entire equipment category.
For example, assume that you have set up band constant alarms for spectrum measure-
ment definitions for thirty identical motors. Initially, you decide to use a value of 0.2 ips
for your warning alarm, and 0.3 ips for your danger alarm. Assume you use the Standard
Motor category for all locations for the motors.
After using Emonitor for several months, you discover that the band constant alarm levels
are too high. You also decide to set different alarm levels in each band. If you did not use
band variables, you would have to change the alarm levels for all the band constant alarms
for each motor. This could take a significant amount of time. In addition, you could not set
different alarm levels in the different bands without using band variables.
Suppose, instead, you use band variables in the band constant alarms. To change the alarm
levels in any band, you simply change the value of the band variables for the desired com-
bination of units and measurement filter. Emonitor then automatically changes all band
alarms in that category using those band variables.

To create a new band set

1. Select Setup > Band Sets.
2. Click New to display the New Band Set dialog.

140
 • • • • •
8 • Using Alarms

3. Enter a name for the band set, and define the frequency bands in the Band Sets
spreadsheet.

To edit a band set

1. Select Setup > Band Sets.
2. Select the band set you want to edit.
3. Click Edit.
4. Enter or select the new frequency bands for the band set in the Edit Band Set dialog.
Note that you cannot change the name of the band set.

To copy a band set

1. Select Setup > Band Sets.
2. Select the band set you want to copy.
3. Click Copy.
4. Enter a new name for the band set, then enter or select the new frequency bands for the
band set in the Copy Band Set dialog. Note that you cannot save the new band set
with the same name as the original band set.

To delete a band set

Once you delete a band set, you cannot bring it back.

1. Select Setup > Band Sets.

2. Select the band set you want to delete.
3. Click Delete to delete the highlighted band set. Note that you cannot delete a band set
that is used in an existing category.

Creating Alarm Statistics

One of the features of Emonitor is the ability to generate statistics from archive data for
peak alarms and statistical alarms. This allows you to create alarms based on statistical
analysis of the data you collect from your machines. The statistics include the minimum,
maximum, average, and standard deviation (sigma) for all measurement definitions and
categories in the current list.
For example, suppose you collect data on a category of identical machines. If the levels
from the machines are within a safe operating range, you could use the average and stan-
dard deviation of the measurements to create alarms for all the machines in the category.

141
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

This way, you do not have to guess at the correct alarm levels. You can use the statistics
generated from the actual data.
Emonitor sorts the category alarm statistics into groups.
 For each magnitude and process measurement definition in the current list, Emonitor
generates separate sets of statistics for each combination of measurement filter and
unit.
 For each spectrum measurement definition in the current list. Emonitor generates sep-
arate sets of statistics for each combination of measurement filter, units, category, and
collection specification.
You can use secondary sorting to further sort the category alarm statistics by location
position, location direction, and up to four associated process measurements. You can also
remove abnormal data from statistical calculations by excluding outliers from the data
used for calculations.
Generating the statistics of the measurements in the current list may require some time.
Use Tools > Generate Alarm Statistics to generate the statistics for the current list at a
time when the computer is not in use (for instance, during lunch or overnight).
You can also limit the archive data Emonitor uses to generate the statistics with the
archive filter. For example, this allows you to limit the statistical calculations to only the
data collected after the baseline measurement, or for a particular period of time.

Use Secondary Sorting for Alarm Statistics

Emonitor automatically sorts category alarm statistics into groups based on the type of
measurement and the combination of measurement filter and unit, and collection specifi-
cation (for spectrum measurement definitions). The result is that the alarms statistics
applied to a measurement are derived from similar kinds of measurements.
You can refine the alarm statistics by using secondary sorting. This allows you to group
category alarm statistics based on the following:
 Position
 Direction
 Up to four associated process measurements
Without secondary sorting, Emonitor ignores position, direction, and conditions such as
load, speed, and temperature when calculating alarm statistics for a category. With sec-
ondary sorting, alarm statistics can be calculated using only measurements with the same
position, direction, and other operating conditions.
1. Select Setup > Category. Select the category, then click Edit.

142
 • • • • •
8 • Using Alarms

2. Click Configure to display the Category Configuration dialog. Click the Secondary
Sorting tab.
3. Select the desired secondary sort conditions. You can select up to four process mea-
surements, as well as Position and Direction. You must select the Numeric Unit
before selecting the Measurement Name. The available measurement definitions can
be numeric, enumerated, or calculated data type.

The list for Numeric Units includes all the units in Emonitor, not just the ones for which data
exist. If you select a unit for which there are no measurements in the database, Emonitor
does not calculate category statistics for that measurement definition.

4. Click OK to return to the Edit Category dialog.

The process measurement definition must be located in a correct place in the database.
 It can be a measurement definition under the same location.
 It can be a measurement definition under a parent to the same location.

For example, suppose the drawing above represents your database structure, and you
have set up secondary sorting based on a process measurement for load. When calcu-
lating category alarm statistics for measurement definition 1, Emonitor looks for a
measurement definition with units of load in this order:
5. First, it looks under the same location (location 4, measurement definitions 2–4).
6. Next, it looks at measurement definitions under the same parent in the Hierarchy Tree
(Machine1, locations 2–3).
7. Then it looks at measurement definitions under locations directly under the grandpar-
ents in the Hierarchy Tree (Train, location 1). This continues until it reaches the root
(Plant in this case).
The program continues in this way until it finds a measurement definition with units of
load, but it only looks up the Hierarchy Tree. For example, it does not look for load mea-
surement definitions under Machine2. If Emonitor cannot find a measurement definition

143
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

with units of load, it does not generate separate category statistics for that measurement
definition.

Limit Data for Alarm Statistics with the Archive Filter

You can limit the archive data Emonitor uses to generate alarm statistics with the archive
filter. For example, you may have five years of data in your database, but want to generate
alarm statistics only from data collected in the last six months.
1. Select Tools > Archive Filter Settings.
2. Define the setting for the archive filter. You can choose to include only data after the
baseline measurement, or after a certain date. You can also use a date range to select
the data. If you select Since baseline, and there is no baseline measurement for the
measurement definition, the archive filter excludes all data for that measurement defi-
nition.
You can also include the baseline measurement, even if it would otherwise be
excluded.
3. Select Tools > Archive Filter to activate the archive filter. The archive filter is active
when there is a check mark by the command from the Tools menu.

Exclude Data Outliers from Alarm Statistics

You can exclude any abnormally high or low data (known as outliers) from statistical cal-
culations. Emonitor can use either the Grubb’s method or the Median of Absolute Devia-
tion (MAD) method to find the outliers in a data set. When Emonitor finds a data outlier, it
changes the archive storage flag for that measurement to No Stat. Emonitor ignores
archive data with a storage flag of No Stat when generating alarm statistics.
1. Create or recall a list for which you want to generate alarm statistics. Emonitor can
exclude outliers only for the current list.
2. Select Tools > Exclude Data Outliers.
3. Select the number of outliers to exclude, and the detection method. You can also use
the archive filter to exclude data.
 Grubb’s Method: This method calculates how far away the suspected outlier is
from the other data. This is done by calculating the ratio, Z, which is the difference
between the suspected outlier and the mean divided by the standard deviation. The
mean and standard deviation are calculated from the archive data.

Once the Z value has been calculated, it is compared to a Critical Z value in a

table. If an outlier is detected, it is excluded, and the Grubb’s Method is again cal-
culated over the remaining data points. The mean, standard deviation, and Z value

144
 • • • • •
8 • Using Alarms

are all recalculated. This process is repeated until there are no more outliers
detected.
 Median of Absolute Deviations: This method calculates all the outliers in one
pass. An M value is calculated for each data point. The median of the absolute
deviation is calculated by finding the median of the data set
|Xi - ~X | where i = 1 to n.
If |Mi| is greater than the critical value then the data is an outlier.

Generate Alarm Statistics

Emonitor can generate the statistics used in peak and statistical alarms at a time when the
computer would otherwise be idle. The statistics include the minimum, maximum, aver-
age, and standard deviation (sigma) for all measurement definitions and categories in the
current list.
You may not need to re-generate the statistics after a change to the alarms. For example,
you do not need to generate statistics after changing these characteristics of an alarm:
 Type of peak (minimum or maximum)
 Percent from average
 Sigma from average
 Value of a category
You do need to generate statistics for a list of measurement definitions if you:
 Want to change the set of archive data Emonitor uses to generate the alarm statistics,
or you want to use new data. For example, when you redefine your equipment catego-
ries, or when you change the archive filter to include different archive data.
 Want to generate statistics for a new or modified alarm for which statistics were not
generated in the past.

Emonitor uses the current list to determine which categories and measurement definitions to
use when generating statistics.

Emonitor generates alarm statistics only for the categories and measurement definitions in
the current list. Emonitor does not combine categories when generating alarm statistics.
You can still include two or more categories in the current list, and Emonitor generates
alarm statistics for each category. To generate the alarm statistics, follow these steps.
1. Create or recall the list of measurement definitions for which you want to generate
alarm statistics.

145
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

2. Set the archive filter if you want to restrict the archive data Emonitor uses in the statis-
tical calculations.
3. Select Tools > Generate Alarm Statistics.
4. Emonitor generates the minimum, maximum, average, and standard deviation (sigma)
for each of the categories and measurement definitions in the current list. Emonitor
uses the archive data for the categories and the measurement definitions to generate
the statistics. A dialog with a progress bar keeps you informed about the process.

Emonitor does not include data from inactive measurement definitions or measurement defi-
nitions with Tier set to Yes in calculating category statistics. Tiered data is most often used in
online systems, so it may not be applicable for your application. Nor does it use archive data
with the storage flag of Inactive or No Stat.

How Emonitor Calculates Alarm Statistics

You can use alarm statistics to set alarm levels for your equipment based on the statistical
analysis of your existing data. Emonitor calculates two types of alarm statistics:
 Individual measurement definition statistics: Emonitor applies the calculated statis-
tics in alarms that use the average, maximum, minimum, or standard deviation as part
of the alarm definition.
 Category statistics: Emonitor applies the calculated statistics in alarms that have
Include from Category selected, and use the average, maximum, minimum, or stan-
dard deviation as part of the alarm definition.
In calculating alarm statistics, Emonitor ignores:
 Archive data excluded by the archive filter
 Archive data from inactive measurement definitions
 Archive data from measurement definitions with Tier set to Yes
 And archive data with a storage flag of Inactive or No Stat.

Individual measurement definition statistics

The measurement definition statistics allow you to set alarms based on the archive data
for the individual measurement definition. For example, you could set an alarm at 50%
above the average data for the measurement definition.
Emonitor calculates alarm statistics for each active measurement definition in the current
list when you select Tools > Generate Alarm Statistics. The alarms statistics are the fol-
lowing:
 Minimum value in the archive data for the measurement definition

146
 • • • • •
8 • Using Alarms

 Maximum value in the archive data for the measurement definition

 Sum(x) is the sum of all the measurements in the archive data for the measurement
definition.
 Sum(x2) is the sum of the square of all the measurements in the archive data for the
measurement definition.
 n is the number of measurements in the archive data for the measurement definition
 Arithmetic mean is the average of the values in the archive data for the measurement
definition
 Standard deviation is the measure of the scatter of the values around the mean in the
archive data for the measurement definition
For magnitude alarms, Emonitor calculates a single value for each of the above statistics
for each measurement definition. For spectrum alarms, Emonitor calculates the value for
each of the above statistics at each spectral line for each measurement definition. For band
alarms, Emonitor calculates the value for each of the above statistics for each frequency
band in the band set.

Category statistics
The category statistics allow you to set alarms based on the archive data for the measure-
ment definitions in the category. For example, you could set an alarm at 50% above the
average value for the measurement definitions in the category.
Emonitor calculates alarm statistics for each category in the current list when you select
Tools > Generate Alarm Statistics. Emonitor then uses the updated category statistics
when creating category alarms for measurement definitions in the category.
Within each category, Emonitor groups individual measurement definitions before calcu-
lating the statistics. The reason for grouping the measurement definitions is that a cate-
gory may contain measurements with different units (g’s, ips, mils, …), different
measurement filters (none, high frequency, overall, …), or other characteristics.
For example, it does not make sense to calculate statistics that combine measurements in
g’s and in mils. If you have set up secondary sorting, then Emonitor uses that as well. See
“Use Secondary Sorting for Alarm Statistics” on page 142 for more information.

Emonitor uses all the measurement definitions in the category, not just the measurement defini-
tions in the current list. This includes measurement definitions from other plants in the database
with the same category and relevant characteristics.

147
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

Emonitor does not include data from inactive measurement definitions or measurement defini-
tions with Tier set to Yes in calculating category statistics. Tiered data is most often used in
Emonitor online systems, so it may note be applicable for your application. Nor does it use
archive data with a storage flag of Inactive or No Stat.

Emonitor groups measurement definitions in a category.

 Process and magnitude measurement definitions are grouped by units and measure-
ment filter.
 Spectrum measurement definitions in a category are grouped by measurement defini-
tion units, measurement filter, minimum frequency, maximum frequency, number of
spectral lines, and frequency units (cpm or Orders).
The category alarms statistics are the following:
 Minimum value in the measurement definition statistics
 Maximum value in the measurement definition statistics
 Sum(x) is the sum of Sum(x) for all the measurement definitions
 Sum(x2) is the sum of Sum(x2) for all the measurement definitions
 n is the number of measurements in the archive data for all the measurement defini-
tions
 Arithmetic mean is the average of the values in the archive data for all the measure-
ment definitions
 Standard deviation is the measure of the scatter of the values in the measurement
definition standard deviations around the category mean
For magnitude and process measurements, Emonitor performs these calculations on the
measured value.
For spectrum measurements, Emonitor performs these calculations on the measured
amplitude at each spectral line.

Example: magnitude and process measurements

For this example, assume there are two active measurement definitions in the list. Both
are magnitude measurements with the same units and measurement filter, and both belong
to the same category. Assume that the archive filter is either turned off, or set so that it
allows the following measurements:
 The archive data for the first measurement definition is 4, 6, 2, 8
 The archive data for the second measurement definition is 5, 5, 9, 3

148
 • • • • •
8 • Using Alarms

The calculated measurement definition statistics are:

For the first measurement definition:

Minimum = 2 Maximum = 8
Sum(x) = 20 Sum(x2) =120
n=4 Mean = 5
Standard deviation = 2.582
For the second measurement definition:
Minimum = 3 Maximum = 9
Sum(x) = 22 Sum(x2) = 140
n=4 Mean = 5.5
Standard deviation = 2.517
For the category containing both measurement
definitions:
Minimum = 2 Maximum = 9
Sum(x) = 42 Sum(x2) = 260
n=8 Mean = 5.25
Standard deviation = 2.375

Example: magnitude and spectrum measurements

For this example, assume there are 10 measurement definitions in the database with the
characteristics listed below. All measurement definitions belong to locations with the
same category, and all measurement definitions are active.

Category
Item Tag Data Type Units Filter Fmin Fmax #Lines Alarm?
1 no magnitude ips Overall n/a n/a n/a no
2 no spectrum ips None 0 60,000 400 no
3 yes magnitude ips Overall n/a n/a n/a no
4 yes spectrum ips None 0 60,000 400 no
5 yes magnitude g’s Overall n/a n/a n/a yes

149
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

Category
Item Tag Data Type Units Filter Fmin Fmax #Lines Alarm?
6 yes spectrum g’s None 0 60,000 400 yes
7 yes magnitude ips 1x n/a n/a n/a yes
8 yes spectrum ips None 0 12,000 400 yes
9 yes magnitude ips Overall n/a n/a n/a yes
10 yes spectrum ips None 0 60,000 400 yes

When you select Tools > Generate Alarm Statistics, Emonitor does the following:
 Calculates the individual measurement definition alarm statistics for items 3 - 10.
Items 1 and 2 are not tagged for the current list, so Emonitor does not calculate mea-
surement definition statistics for them.
 Calculates the category alarm statistics for the measurement definitions with magni-
tude data type. There are three unique combinations of units and measurement filter:
g’s, Overall: Emonitor calculates alarm statistics using data from item 5.
ips, 1x: Emonitor calculates alarm statistics using data from item 7.
ips, Overall: Emonitor calculates alarm statistics using data from items 3 and 9. If
individual measurement definition statistics had been generated for item 1 in the past,
they would be used in the calculations as well. Note that item 3 is included, even
though it does not have a category alarm.
 Calculates the category alarm statistics for the measurement definitions with spectrum
data type. There are three unique combinations of units, measurement filter, Fmin,
Fmax, and number of lines:
g’s, 400 lines, 0-60,000 cpm: Emonitor calculates alarm statistics using data from
item 6.
ips, 400 lines, 0-12,000 cpm: Emonitor calculates alarm statistics using data from
item 8.
ips, 400 lines, 0-60,000 cpm: Emonitor calculates alarm statistics using data from
item 4 and 10. If individual measurement definition statistics had been generated for
item 2 in the past, they would be used in the calculations as well. Note that item 4 is
included, even though it does not have a category alarm.

Additional notes on alarm statistics

Please note the following about alarm statistics.

150
 • • • • •
8 • Using Alarms

 There must be a measurement definition with a category alarm in the current list to
generate category alarm statistics for that category. Otherwise, Emonitor does not gen-
erate alarm statistics for that category.
 Category alarm statistics are generated from the individual measurement definition
alarm statistics. You must generate individual measurement definition alarm statistics
at least once before you can generate category alarm statistics. This applies if you
want to use alarm statistics from measurement definitions not in the current list when
calculating the category alarm statistics.
 Category alarms for measurement definitions not in the current list are updated if a
measurement definition in the list has a category alarm, and is in the same category.
However, the individual alarm statistics are not updated for the measurement defini-
tions not in the current list.

Using Alarms
Alarms in Emonitor alert you to changes in the operating conditions of monitored equip-
ment in your Predictive Maintenance program. You can create and use a variety of alarms
with spectrum, time, magnitude and process measurements. Once you have created alarms
for a measurement definition, you can use the alarms in these ways:
 In data collection: Emonitor can include alarms in the load file that it loads into the
data collector. Many data collectors can alert you when a measurement exceeds an
alarm.
 In reports: Emonitor can create a report of measurements that exceed an alarm. You
can create this kind of report at any time, or automatically after you unload the data
collector as in an unload report.
 With plots: Emonitor allows you to select the alarm type and alarm severity that you
want to display on a plot. This also controls the alarms that appear on a plot when you
print the plot, or when you run a report that includes plots.

Use Alarms in Reports

There are two kinds of reports in Emonitor that include information on the alarm status of
measurements. Both reports include the alarm severity. If the measurement exceeds more
than one alarm for that measurement definition, the report lists only the greatest alarm
severity. The report uses the current alarms for the measurement definitions in the list,
regardless of whether you used different alarms at the time you collected the data.
The four types of reports that include alarms are:
 Exception reports: These include the measurements in a list or the database where
the last measurement exceeds an alarm.

151
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

 Alarm status reports: These include the alarms for the measurement definitions in
the list, including the last alarm status.
 History reports: These include the archive data for the measurements definitions in
the list or the database, and include the last alarm status.
 Reports with plots: These can show the current alarms on the plots. For example, you
can display alarms on the plots in reports. To do this, you change the default character-
istics of the view that Emonitor uses to create the plots in the report. For more infor-
mation, see “Change the Appearance of Plots in Reports” on page 250.
For more on reports, refer to the section on “Using Reports”.

Use Alarms with Plots

Emonitor allows you to select the alarm type and alarm severity you want to display on
plots. A printout of a plot contains all the alarms displayed on the plot. Once you have
selected the alarms, you can save the plot characteristics so that particular plot type
always displays the selected alarms. Alarms appear on plots in the same color as the alarm
severity indicator.

To display alarms on the plots in the active Plot window

Tip: The easiest way to change the appearance of a plot is to right-click an unused
area of the Plot window and select the desired option from the menu that appears.
1. Click the Plot window to make it the active window.
2. Select Plot > Options.
3. Select one or more Alarm Types to display.
4. Select one or more Alarm Severities to display.
5. Select Fill Alarms if you want Emonitor to cross-hatch the area of the alarm on the
plot.

152
 • • • • •
8 • Using Alarms

To save the display of alarms on a plot

Select Plot > Save as Default. Note that this saves the appearance of alarms only on that
particular plot type (trend, XY, …).
For more on Plots, refer to the section on “Using Plots”.

Use Alarms in Data Collection

When you load a list into a data collector, Emonitor creates a load file that contains the
information about the measurement definitions in the list. The load file may also include
the alarms for the measurement definitions in the list. You can select the alarms you want
to load to the data collector with the Trigger column in the Alarm pane. Many data collec-
tors have the ability to alert you when a measurement is in alarm.
Many data collectors cannot handle the complexity of alarms in Emonitor. In these cases,
Emonitor does two things:
1. Simplifies and combines the alarms to create an alarm or alarms within the ability of
the data collector. Since each data collector has different capabilities, the alarm(s)
loaded into the data collector depend on the type of data collector. You can select the
alarms you want to load to the data collector by changing their trigger status (in the
Alarm pane).
2. Tests the measurements against the alarms when you unload the data collector. This
means that Emonitor always accurately indicates when a measurement is in alarm,
regardless of the number or complexity of the alarm(s). This is true for all active
alarms, regardless of their trigger status.
For more information on the ability of the data collector to handle alarms, refer to the
Data Collector User’s Guide for your data collector.

Update Alarm Severities

Updating alarm severities causes Emonitor to compare the latest data with the alarm levels
for the desired measurement definitions. You can update the alarm severities for a mea-
surement definition, location, item in the Hierarchy Tree, or all items in the Hierarchy
Tree. Updating the severities for a higher level (Hierarchy Tree or location) updates sever-
ities for all descendants (locations and measurement definitions).

In order to use the most recent data, you should update any calculated points, BEFORE updat-
ing alarm severities. “Update Calculated Measurement Definitions” on page 88.

You can update the alarms severities in several ways.

153
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

 Select Update calculations and alarm severities on unload in the Tools > Load /
Unload > Unload Options dialog. Emonitor automatically performs the update after
unloading data.
 Right-click an item in Hierarchy Tree, or a location, or a measurement definition, then
select Process > Update Alarm Severities.
 Select an item in the Hierarchy Tree, or a location, or a measurement definition. Select
Tools > Alarm Severities, then select either Update or Update All.
 Run the Severity Updater program. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar,
then select Programs > Rockwell Software > Emonitor > Utilities > Severity
Updater. This opens a dialog displaying the lists in Emonitor. Select one or more lists,
then click Update.
 Run the Severity Updater automatically with the Scheduler program. See “Scheduler”
on page 312.

Displaying Alarm Status

The alarm status shows both the current and the unacknowledged alarm severity for a
measurement definition. It indicates the degree of danger associated with an alarm. For
example, you might set up two alarms for a measurement definition. You might select a
“warning” severity for the lower alarm, and a “danger” severity for the higher alarm.
Emonitor allows you to use up to ten alarm severity levels. For more information on set-
ting the text and color associated with a severity level, see “Edit Severity Levels” on page
132.
You can display two types of alarm severity in the Database and List windows:
 The current alarm status. This is the highest alarm severity for the most recent mea-
surements for an item in the Hierarchy Tree, a location, or a measurement definition.
 The unacknowledged alarm status. This is the highest alarm severity for the measure-
ments for an item in the Hierarchy Tree, a location, or a measurement definition, since
the last time the alarms were acknowledged.
You can also display alarm statistics in the Database window. This is available only in the
Hierarchy pane. You can choose to display either the number of measurement definitions
in alarm, or an average alarm severity called the alarm index.

154
 • • • • •
8 • Using Alarms

Display the Current Alarm Status

Emonitor can display the current alarm severity in the Hierarchy Tree, and in an additional
column in the List window, Location, and Measurement Definition spreadsheets

Emonitor does not display the alarm status for measurement definitions with Tier set to Yes.
Tiered data is most often used in Emonitor online systems.

To display the alarm status in the Hierarchy Tree

1. Select Window > Database. Select a view that includes the Hierarchy pane.
2. Click in the Hierarchy pane to make the pane active.
3. Select View > Pane Options.
4. Select Show current alarm severity in the Pane Options dialog to display the cur-
rent alarm status indicators in the pane.
The current status indicators appear in the pane.

To display the alarm status in spreadsheets

These steps apply to the List window, as well as the Location and Measurement Definition
panes in the Database window.
1. Select Window > Database. Select the a view that includes the Location and Mea-
surement Definition panes.
2. Click in the Location or Measurement Definition pane to make the pane active.
3. Select View > Pane Options.
4. Select Show current alarm severity in the Pane Options dialog to display the current
alarm status indicators in the pane.

155
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

The current status indicators appear in the pane.

To display or clear individual alarm status indicators

You can display or clear alarm status indicators for items in the Hierarchy, Location, and
Measurement Definition panes.
1. Select Window > Database. Select the Measurement view in the Select View dialog.
2. Click in the Hierarchy, Location, or Measurement Definition pane to make the pane
active.
3. Right-click the desired hierarchy item, location, or measurement definition and select
one of the following:
 Process > Update Alarm Severities to display the alarm status indicator for the
hierarchy item, location, or measurement definition.
 Clear Current Alarm Status to hide the alarm status indicator for the hierarchy
item, location, or measurement definition.

In addition, clearing or updating the alarm status command hides or shows the alarm sta-
tus indicators for any items descending from the current item (for example, measurement
definitions associated with the selected location).

Display Alarm Statistics

Emonitor can display the current alarm severity statistics in the Hierarchy Tree pane. You
can choose to display:
 No statistics
 The number of measurement definitions in alarm

156
 • • • • •
8 • Using Alarms

 The average alarm severity level for the measurement definitions.

Emonitor only includes measurement definitions for which there are alarm status indicators.
You can turn the alarm status indicators for one or more locations or measurement definitions
on or off. If there are measurement definitions without alarm status indicators, those mea-
surement definitions are not considered in the statistics. See “Display the Current Alarm Sta-
tus” on page 155.

1. Select Window > Database. Select a view in the Select View dialog that includes the
Hierarchy pane.
2. Click in the Hierarchy pane to make the pane active.
3. Select View > Pane Options.
4. Select the desired type of statistics under Statistics.
The alarm statistics appear in the pane.

Display the Unacknowledged Alarm Status

Emonitor can display the unacknowledged alarm severity in the Hierarchy Tree, and by
coloring the rows in the List window, and the Location and Measurement Definition
panes. Once you display the unacknowledged alarm status, you can easily acknowledge
an alarm. See “Acknowledge an Alarm” on page 160.

Normally, the background color for a window in Microsoft Windows is white. The default color for
the lowest alarm severity in Emonitor is white. If you leave the lowest alarm severity color as
white, it is not possible to tell the difference between the “normal” alarm status indicator and an
acknowledged alarm status indicator. For this reason, you may want to change the color for the
lowest alarm severity with Setup > Options > Alarm Severity.

157
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

Emonitor does not display the alarm status for measurement definitions with Tier set to Yes.
Tiered data is most often used in Emonitor online systems.

To display unacknowledged alarms in the Hierarchy Tree

1. Select Window > Database. Select a view that includes the Hierarchy pane.
2. Click in the Hierarchy Tree pane to make the pane active.
3. Select View > Pane Options.
4. Select Show unacknowledged alarm severity in the Pane Options dialog.
The unacknowledged alarm status indicators appear in the pane.

To display unacknowledged alarms in spreadsheets

These steps apply to the List window, as well as the Location and Measurement Definition
panes in the Database window.
1. Select Window > Database. Select a view that includes the Location and Measure-
ment Definition panes.
2. Click in the Location or Measurement Definition pane to make the pane active.
3. Select View > Pane Options.
4. Select Show unacknowledged alarm severity in the Pane Options dialog.

158
 • • • • •
8 • Using Alarms

The unacknowledged alarm status indicators appear in the pane.

Update Alarm Status Indicators after Unload or Import

You can make Emonitor update the alarm status indicators after unloading data from a
data collector or importing data from a file. Updating the alarm status indicators can take
some time, so you may want to turn this option off if you do not use the alarm status indi-
cators. See “Display Alarm Statistics” on page 156 for more information on the alarm sta-
tus indicators.

To update alarm status after unloading data

You must select this option before unloading data.

1. Select Tools > Load / Unload.

2. Click Unload Options under Options in the Load / Unload dialog.
3. Select Update calculations and alarm severities on unload in the Unload Options
dialog.

To update alarm status after importing data

You must select this option before importing data.

1. Select Tools > Data Import.

2. Click Options in the Data Import dialog.
3. Select Update calculations and alarm severities on unload in the Data Import
Options dialog.

159
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

Acknowledge an Alarm
Emonitor can display the unacknowledged alarm status indicators in the Hierarchy Tree,
and by coloring the rows in the Location and Measurement Definition panes. Once you
display the unacknowledged alarm severity, you can easily acknowledge an alarm.

You can also acknowledge alarms in the Alarm Event Log pane. See “Acknowledge Alarms in
the Alarm Event Log” on page 162.

These steps assume that you have opened the Database window, and displayed the panes
showing the unacknowledged alarm severities. See “Display the Unacknowledged Alarm
Status” on page 157 for more information.

When you acknowledge the alarms for an item in the Hierarchy Tree, you acknowledge the
alarms for the locations and measurement definitions associated with that item. The same is true
for the measurement definitions attached to a location when you acknowledge the alarms at the
location.

1. Select the item in the Hierarchy Tree, or the row in the Location or Measurement Def-
inition pane. You can select multiple rows in the Location or Measurement Definition
spreadsheet to acknowledge multiple alarms at the same time.
2. Do either one of the following:
 Select Tools > Alarm Severities > Acknowledge Status.
 Right-click on the selected item or rows and select Acknowledge Alarm Status.
Acknowledging the alarms clears the alarm status color from the row or the item in the
Hierarchy Tree.

After you acknowledge the alarms, the unacknowledged alarm status for that item, location, or
measurement definition does not return to the current alarm status. Instead, Emonitor clears the
unacknowledged alarm status, which remains cleared until the alarm severity changes for that
item, location, or measurement definition.

You can also have Emonitor reset any acknowledged alarms after unloading or importing
data. See “Set Unload Options and Reports” on page 173 and see “Set the Import
Options” on page 191.

160
 • • • • •
8 • Using Alarms

Displaying Alarm Events in the Alarm Event Log

The Alarm Event Log is a pane in the Database window. It displays a log of alarms that
occur in the Emonitor system. In general, the Alarm Event Log is more useful when mon-
itoring an online condition monitoring configuration (Emonitor Online Applications).

Display the Alarm Event Log Pane

The Alarm Event Log is a pane in the Database window.

Emonitor automatically deletes alarm events from the Alarm Event Log after 60 days for online
systems. For systems that are used only with data collectors, you can run the Storage Limit
Updater program to clean out the old data. See “Remove Old Data from the Database” on page
308.

1. Select Window > Database. Select the Alarms view in the Select View dialog.
2. Do either of the following:
 Right-click the Alarm pane at the bottom, and then select Change Pane. Select the
Alarm Event Log in the Change Pane dialog.
 Right-click the Alarm pane at the bottom, and then select Split Horizontal or Split
Vertical. Select the Alarm Event Log in the Change Pane dialog.
You can then save the view containing the Alarm Event Log pane with View > Save View.

Select the Alarm Events and Columns to Display

You can select the types of alarms you want to see in the Alarm Event Log pane in the
Database window.

The Alarm Event Log pane must appear as one of the panes in the Database window. See “Dis-
play the Alarm Event Log Pane” on page 161.

1. Click the Alarm Event Log pane to select it.

2. Select View > Pane Options.
3. There are several ways to change the amount and type of information in the Alarm
Event Log pane.
 If you want to see more or less information on each alarm, use the spreadsheet to
change the displayed columns.
 If you want to see only the unacknowledged alarm events, select View unac-
knowledged alarms only.

161
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

 The Alarm Event Log uses the archive filter to select the time period for the dis-
played alarm events. If you want to change the time period without changing the
Archive filter settings, select Archive filter override and select the desired time
period.

Acknowledge Alarms in the Alarm Event Log

You can acknowledge alarms in the Alarm Event Log pane.

You can also acknowledge alarms in the Hierarchy, Location, and Measurement Definition
panes. See “Acknowledge an Alarm” on page 160.

1. The Alarm Event Log pane must appear as one of the panes in the Database window.
See “Display the Alarm Event Log Pane” on page 161.
2. Select a row to acknowledge in the Alarm Event Log pane. You can select multiple
rows to acknowledge several alarms at the same time.
3. Right-click the selected row or rows and select Change Acknowledge State.
4. To change the acknowledge status of the row back to the previous state, right-click the
row and select Change Acknowledge State again.

When you acknowledge an alarm, Emonitor refreshes the screen to reflect the acknowledged
alarm. It is possible that the measurement definition pane will still show the measurement defini-
tion with an unacknowledged alarm status. This occurs when the measurement has gone into
alarm twice in the past, and you acknowledge the older alarm event in the Alarm Event Log
pane.

You can toggle between acknowledged and unacknowledged states by double-clicking the row in
the Alarm Event Log pane.

You can also have Emonitor reset any acknowledged alarms after unloading or importing
data. See “Set Unload Options and Reports” on page 173 and see “Set the Import
Options” on page 191.

Add a Note to an Alarm Event

You can add a note to an Alarm Event in the Alarm Event Log pane.

These notes are the same as the notes you can add to a plot, and can appear on a plot. To dis-
play notes on a plot, see “Display Notes and Inspection Codes” on page 215.

1. The Alarm Event Log pane must appear as one of the panes in the Database window.
See “Display the Alarm Event Log Pane” on page 161.
2. Right-click the desired row in the Alarm Event Log pane and select Attach Note.

162
 • • • • •
8 • Using Alarms

3. Enter the note in the dialog.

Display the Data for an Alarm Event

You can display the data associated with an Alarm Event from the Alarm Event Log pane.
For example, you can jump to the correct measurement definition, location, and item in
the Hierarchy Tree. The same is true for data in Plot windows.
1. The Alarm Event Log pane must appear as one of the panes in the Database window.
See “Display the Alarm Event Log Pane” on page 161.
2. Right-click the desired row in the Alarm Event Log pane and select Set as Current.
Emonitor displays the matching information in the Database window, and in any open
Plot windows (if the Plot window is not unlinked).

Work with Alarm Events

The Alarm Event Log continuously stores alarm events in your Emonitor system. With the
Emonitor Online Applications, the Alarm Event Log may grow quite large as it records
every alarm in the system. To reduce the size of the Alarm Event Log, you can export and
then delete the events in the Alarm Event Log. Exporting the Alarm Event Log copies the
alarm events to a file. If necessary, you can later import this Alarm Event Log file back
into the Alarm Event Log.
Tip: Emonitor automatically deletes alarm events from the Alarm Event Log after 60
days.

To export and delete the events in the Alarm Event Log

1. Select Window > Database. Select a view that includes the Alarm Event Log pane in
the Select View dialog.
2. Select the Alarm Event Log pane in the Database window by clicking in that pane.
3. Select View > Pane Options.
4. Click the Export button.
5. Enter a name for the Alarm Event Log file in the Export to Log File dialog.
6. If you want to delete the alarm events from the Alarm Event Log after exporting them
to the file, select Remove events from the log.
7. Click Save.

163
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

To import events into the Alarm Event Log

You can import the alarm events stored in an Alarm Event Log file. When you import
alarm events, they are added to the existing events in the Alarm Event Log. The import
process does not duplicate any alarm events that already exist in the Alarm Event Log.
1. Select Window > Database. Select a view that includes the Alarm Event Log pane in
the Select View dialog.
2. Select the Alarm Event Log pane in the Database window by clicking in that pane.
3. Select View > Pane Options.
4. Click the Import button.
5. Select or enter the name of the Alarm Event Log file to import.
6. Click Open.

164
9 Loading and Unloading a Data Collector
Overview of Loading and Unloading a Data Collector
The topics in this section are general, and not specific to any model of data collector. For
information about your specific data collector, refer to the Data Collector User’s Guide
for your data collector.
Emonitor makes loading and unloading a data collector as easy as pressing a button. From
the Load / Unload dialog, you can perform all the necessary functions:
 Set up the computer to communicate with the data collector.
 Select the current data collector and the communication options.
 Prepare the data collector, including loading the operating system, if necessary.
 Set the load options.
 Select the list(s) to load into the data collector.
 Load the list(s) into the data collector.
 Set the unload options, including automatic unload reports.
 Unload the data collector.
You do not have to close any open windows before loading or unloading the data collec-
tor. This allows you to continue to work in Emonitor with only minimal interruption when
loading or unloading a data collector. In addition, you can:
 Manually enter and edit magnitude and process measurement data.
 Manually edit the date and time for any archive data.
 Manually edit the machine speed for spectrum archive data.
 Import process data from a file into the database. For example, you can import the
analysis results from an oil analysis laboratory.

You can include calculated measurement definitions in a list, but Emonitor does not load
them to a data collector. You cannot use Tools > Manual Entry to add data for a calculated
measurement definition.

Loading a Data Collector

Emonitor allows you to perform all the functions of setting up and loading a list into a
data collector from the Load / Unload dialog. The rest of this section discusses these
steps in detail.

165
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

1. Select Tools > Load / Unload.

2. Select the current data collector.
3. Set up the computer for communication with the data collector.
4. Set up the data collector for communications with the computer.
5. Select the options for loading the data collector.
6. Prepare the data collector and connect it to the computer.
7. Select the list or lists and load the data collector.
You can review the list schedules to see which lists are due for collection with List > List
Scheduler. See “Review and Change List Schedules” on page 125.

Select the Current Data Collector

Emonitor allows you to use several different models of data collectors. However, you
must select one specific data collector before you load a list. The data collector you select
is called the current data collector. A picture of the current data collector appears on the
Set Up Collector button in the Load / Unload dialog.
1. Select Tools > Load / Unload.
2. Click the large Set Up Collector button in the Load / Unload dialog.

3. The Current column in the Set Up Data Collectors dialog shows the word Yes for
the current data collector.
4. To make a different data collector the current data collector, move to the Current col-
umn for the desired data collector. Press Enter or double-click in the column to
change the word from No to Yes. This also sets any other data collectors to No.

166
 • • • • •
9 • Loading and Unloading a Data Collector

5. Make sure the communication parameters for the data collector are correct before
closing the dialog box. They must match the communication parameters set in your
data collector.

If your data collector does not appear in the list of data collectors, or you want to change the
advanced communication parameters, see “Set Up the Data Collector” on page 167.

You can also select Setup > Data Collector to display the Set Up Data Collectors dia-
log.

Set Up the Computer

Before you can load a list into a data collector, you must first set up the computer and the
data collector communication options. Once you set these options for the computer, you
should not have to change them unless you re-configure your computer system or change
the phone number for the modem.
1. Select Tools > Load / Unload.
2. Click the large Set Up Computer button in the Load / Unload dialog.
3. Enter or select the communication options for your computer in the Set Up Computer
dialog.

This is also where you set the drive letter for a PCMCIA card reader if you have one in your
computer.

Set Up the Data Collector

After setting the computer communication options, you must set the data collector com-
munication options. Once you set up these options for a data collector, you should not
have to change them unless you change the corresponding options in the data collector
itself.
You can save the data collector set up information in a specification library. See “Save and
Restore Specification Libraries” on page 98 for more information.

167
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

To select and set up a data collector

1. Select Tools > Load / Unload.
2. Click the large Set Up Collector button in the Load / Unload dialog.

3. Enter or select the communication options for your model of data collector in the Set
Up Data Collectors dialog.
4. Click Advanced if you want to change any of the configuration options for the
selected data collector. You can also select a different version of the data collector
operating system.

Changing the configuration options for a data collector may prevent Emonitor from communicat-
ing with the data collector, or may cause the data collector to malfunction. Make sure you under-
stand a configuration option before you change it.

You can also select Setup > Data Collector to display the Set Up Data Collectors dialog.

To add a new data collector

You can add a new data collector by entering a name for the new collector and selecting
the type of data collector.
1. Select Setup > Data Collector.
2. In the Set Up Data Collectors dialog, go to the last (empty) row in the spreadsheet.
3. Enter a name for the new data collector, and then select the collector type and the
other parameters.

Set the Load Options

The load options allow you to override the storage specification for the measurement def-
initions in the list, and to initialize the data collector when loading. Overriding the storage
specification means that you always collect the measurements, even if the storage specifi-

168
 • • • • •
9 • Loading and Unloading a Data Collector

cation is set to Collect on alarm. For more information on storage specifications, see
“Edit Storage Specifications” on page 95. The load options also control other aspects of
loading, including initialization, frequency items, and inspection codes.
The steps below are intended to be general, and not specific to any data collector. For
information about your specific data collector, refer to the Data Collector User’s Guide
for your data collector.
1. Select Tools > Load / Unload.
2. Click Load Options under Options in the Load / Unload dialog.
3. Select the desired load options in the Load Options dialog. Emonitor indicates the
available options for the current data collector by coloring the options black. Options
that are not available for the current data collector are gray.
In addition, you can select whether to load the most recent measurement or the baseline
measurement into the data collector. The data collector uses this measurement for compar-
ison while collecting data.
1. Select Setup > Options > General.
2. Click the Load/Unload tab to select the measurement (most recent or baseline) to
load into the data collector.

Connect and Prepare the Data Collector

Once you have set up your computer and data collector, and have chosen one data collec-
tor to be the current data collector, you are ready to connect the data collector to the com-
puter. Depending on the state of the data collector, you may have to follow additional
steps to prepare the data collector. These may include initializing the data collector and
loading the data collector operating system.
The steps below are intended to be general, and not specific to any data collector. For
information about your specific data collector, refer to the Data Collector User’s Guide
for your data collector.

You can review the list schedules to see which lists are due for collection with List > List Sched-
uler.

To connect your data collector

1. Connect the data collector to your computer at the serial port you specified in the Set
Up Computer dialog (see “Set Up the Computer” on page 167).
2. Power on the data collector.
3. Set the data collector date and time if necessary.

169
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

4. Prepare the data collector to receive the load file containing the list(s) for data collec-
tion. This may involve pressing buttons on the data collector to select the correct
options. Refer to “Prepare the data collector”, later in this topic.
5. When the data collector is properly connected to the computer, the cable connection
icon in the Tools > Load / Unload dialog changes from not connected to connected:

Not connected Connected

To prepare the data collector

In some instances, you may need to perform one or more additional steps before loading a
list into the data collector. These include initializing the data collector, loading the data
collector operating system, and clearing or deleting lists already in the data collector.
1. Select Tools > Load / Unload.
2. Click D.C. Functions under Options in the Load / Unload dialog.
3. Select the desired function in the Data Collector Functions dialog. If the current data
collector does not support a particular function, the button is not available.

Select the Lists to Load

After you connect the data collector to your computer, you can load a list or lists into the
data collector with these two steps: select the list or lists, and click the Load button.
The steps below are intended to be general, and not specific to any data collector. For
information about your specific data collector, refer to the Data Collector User’s Guide
for your data collector. You can review the list schedules to see which lists are due for col-
lection with List > List Scheduler.
Emonitor may take some time to build load files for large lists. You can save time by using
Quickload lists and using Tools > Update Quickload Files to build the load files when
you are not using the computer. See “Use Quickload Lists” on page 126 for more informa-
tion.
1. Select Tools > Load / Unload.
2. Make sure the data collector and computer are connected. If not, see “Connect and
Prepare the Data Collector” on page 169. Make sure the data collector and Emonitor
are ready to communicate by checking the data collector.

170
 • • • • •
9 • Loading and Unloading a Data Collector

3. Select the list types to show in the list display by clicking Filter in the Load / Unload
dialog. See “Filter Lists by Type or Assignment” on page 121. Lists appear in order of
the next collection date.
4. Select one or more lists from the list display by clicking the list name
If the current data collector supports loading only one list, Emonitor combines the lists
into a single list before loading it into the data collector.

Load a List into the Data Collector

After connecting the data collector and computer and selecting one or more lists, you are
ready to load the data collector.
1. Make sure the data collector is connected properly to the computer. If the data collec-
tor is connected properly, the cable connection icon in the Load/Unload dialog shows
the connection.
2. Click Load in the Load / Unload dialog.

Emonitor then builds the load files if necessary. Building the load files may take some
time, depending on the size of the lists. If you have set up the lists as Quickload lists and
used the Tools > Update Quickload Files, then Emonitor uses the Quickload load file
instead. Using the Quickload load file is much faster than building new load files. See
“Use Quickload Lists” on page 126 for details on saving Quickload lists.
Emonitor attempts to load the load file into the data collector. If there is a problem with
the communications, Emonitor aborts the load process. A common problem is that the
baud rate set in the Set Up Data Collector dialog must match the baud rate in the data
collector.

171
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

Collecting Data
After you have loaded the data collector, you are ready to disconnect the data collector
and collect data. The steps below are intended to be general, and not specific to any data
collector. For information about your specific data collector, refer to one of the following:
 The Data Collector User’s Guide for your data collector.
 Your data collector manufacturer’s documentation.
To collect data with a data collector:
1. Disconnect the data collector from the computer.
2. Connect the transducer to the data collector.
3. Go to the first data collection point in the list.
4. Prepare the data collector to collect data for the first measurement definition in the list
(sometimes called a route in some data collectors) using the keys on the data collector.
5. Enter any inspection codes using the keypad on the data collector. Inspection codes
refer to the condition of the machine.
6. For measurements using a portable transducer, attach the transducer to the machine at
the correct location, making certain that the connection is secure. Collect the data and
then remove the transducer.
7. For manual entry measurements, enter the value using the keys on the data collector.
8. Go to the next collection point, and repeat steps 4 through 7 for each measurement
definition in the list.
When finished collecting data, return to the computer, and unload the data into the Emon-
itor database.

Unloading a Data Collector

Emonitor allows you to perform all the functions of unloading data from a data collector
in the Tools > Load / Unload dialog. The steps below are intended to be general, and not
specific to any data collector. For information about your specific data collector, refer to
the Data Collector User’s Guide for your data collector. You can also refer to the data col-
lector manufacturer’s documentation for more information on operating the data collector.
The rest of this section discusses these steps in detail.
1. Select Tools > Load / Unload.
2. Select the unload options, including the unload reports.

172
 • • • • •
9 • Loading and Unloading a Data Collector

3. Click Set Up Collector in the Load / Unload dialog to select the current data collec-
tor. See “Select the Current Data Collector” on page 166.
4. Prepare the data collector and connect it to the computer.
5. Select the list or lists to unload from the data collector.
6. Unload the data from the data collector.

Set Unload Options and Reports

The unload options control the functions Emonitor performs when you unload data from a
data collector. These include:
 Unload unscheduled measurements at the same time as the data from measurements in
the list.
 Clear the list in the data collector after unloading.
 Reset alarm acknowledgement status after unloading.
 Print selected unload reports after unloading.
1. Select Tools > Load / Unload.
2. Make sure the correct collector appears on the Set Up Collector button in the Load /
Unload dialog. If not, click Set Up Collector button and select the data collector. See
“Select the Current Data Collector” on page 166.

3. Click Unload Options under Options in the Load / Unload dialog.

4. Select the desired unload options in the Unload Options dialog. Emonitor indicates
the available functions for the current data collector by coloring the controls black.
Unavailable options are colored gray.

173
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

Unload Data from the Data Collector

The steps below are intended to be general, and not specific to any data collector. For
information about your specific data collector, refer to the Data Collector User’s Guide
for your data collector.
1. Select Tools > Load / Unload.
2. Make sure the correct collector appears on the Set Up Collector button in the Load /
Unload dialog. If not, click Set Up Collector button and select the data collector. See
“Select the Current Data Collector” on page 166.
3. Make sure the data collector is connected properly to the computer. If the data collec-
tor is connected properly, the cable connection icon shows the connection:

Not connected Connected

4. Select one or more lists to unload.

5. Click Unload.
Emonitor attempts to unload the data from the data collector. If there is a problem with the
communications, Emonitor aborts the unload process. A common problem is that the baud
rate set in the Set Up Data Collector dialog must match the baud rate in the data collec-
tor. If there is no problem, Emonitor unloads the data collector.
Emonitor then checks the unload options and performs any selected unload functions in
the Unload Options dialog. These include:
 Unload unscheduled measurements.
 Clear the list in the data collector after unloading the data.
 Print selected unload reports after unloading the data.
 Update calculated measurements, alarm severity, Intelligent Advisory assignments,
and unacknowledged alarm severity.

Unload Unscheduled Measurements

Some data collectors allow you to collect measurements that are not part of a list in the
data collector. For example, an operator may ask you to take a measurement on a piece of
equipment that is not scheduled for data collection.

174
 • • • • •
9 • Loading and Unloading a Data Collector

When you return to your computer, you can use either of the following methods for
unloading unscheduled measurements:
 Unload the unscheduled measurements along with the data from measurements on the
list.
 Unload only the unscheduled measurements.
Emonitor automatically stores unscheduled measurements in the database. You can
change the destination for the unscheduled measurements in the database. See “Change
the Destination for Unscheduled Measurements” on page 176.

To unload unscheduled measurements with list data

1. Select Tools > Load / Unload.
2. Make sure the correct collector appears on the Set Up Collector button in the Load /
Unload dialog. If not, click Set Up Collector button and select the data collector. See
“Select the Current Data Collector” on page 166.

3. Make sure the data collector is connected properly to the computer. If the data collec-
tor is connected properly, the cable connection icon shows the connection:
4. Click Unload Options under Options in the Load / Unload dialog.
5. Select the Also unload unscheduled measurements check box in the Unload
Options dialog.
6. If you want Emonitor to store the unscheduled data with the correct item in the Hierar-
chy Tree and location, select Unscheduled location smart mode (if available for the
current data collector). See “Change the Destination for Unscheduled Measurements”
on page 176.
When you unload the data from the data collector, Emonitor automatically unloads the
unscheduled measurements with the measurements from the list(s).

175
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

To unload only unscheduled measurements

1. Select Tools > Load / Unload.
2. Make sure the correct collector appears on the Set Up Collector button in the Load /
Unload dialog. If not, click Set Up Collector button and select the data collector. See
“Select the Current Data Collector” on page 166.
3. Click D.C. functions under Options in the Load / Unload dialog.
4. Click Unload Unscheduled Measurements in the Data Collector Functions dialog.
Emonitor then attempts to unload the unscheduled measurement data from the data collec-
tor. If there is a problem with the communications, Emonitor aborts the unload process. A
common problem is that the baud rate set in the Set Up Data Collector dialog must match
the baud rate in the data collector. If there is no problem, Emonitor unloads the unsched-
uled data from the data collector.
If Unscheduled location smart mode is selected in the Unload Options dialog, then
Emonitor attempts to store the unscheduled data with the correct item in the Hierarchy
Tree and location. See “Change the Destination for Unscheduled Measurements” on page
176.
Emonitor does not perform any of the other unload functions in the Unload Options dia-
log when unloading only unscheduled measurements.

Change the Destination for Unscheduled Measurements

When Emonitor unloads unscheduled measurements, it stores them in the database. Nor-
mally Emonitor stores the unscheduled measurements under an item in the Hierarchy Tree
called the “unscheduled destination”.
 For some data collectors, if Emonitor can match the unscheduled data with an item in
the Hierarchy Tree and a location, it stores the unscheduled data in measurement defi-
nitions under that location (Unscheduled location smart mode).

If Emonitor cannot match the unscheduled data to an existing location, it stores the
unscheduled data under the unscheduled destination in the Hierarchy Tree.
 For other data collectors, Emonitor can only store the unscheduled data under the
unscheduled destination in the Hierarchy Tree. Refer to the Data Collector User’s
Guide for your data collector for more information.

To unload unscheduled data to the correct machine

Some data collectors allow you to enter or select a machine and location for unscheduled
measurements. For these data collectors, Emonitor can then unload the unscheduled data

176
 • • • • •
9 • Loading and Unloading a Data Collector

to the correct machine and location. To see if your data collector supports this function, or
to enable the function, follow these steps when unloading unscheduled data.
1. Select Tools > Load / Unload.
2. Make sure the correct collector appears on the Set Up Collector button in the Load /
Unload dialog. If not, click Set Up Collector button and select the data collector. See
“Select the Current Data Collector” on page 166.
3. Make sure the data collector is connected properly to the computer. If the data collec-
tor is connected properly, the cable connection icon shows the connection:

Not connected Connected

4. Click Unload Options under Options in the Load / Unload dialog.

5. If you want Emonitor to store the unscheduled data with the correct item in the Hierar-
chy Tree and location, select Unscheduled location smart mode in the Unload
Options dialog. This option is not available for some data collectors.
6. Select Also unload unscheduled measurements, and then unload the data collector
as usual.

To change the unscheduled destination

Emonitor stores unscheduled data in the unscheduled destination if any of the following
are true:
 The data collector supports smart mode for unscheduled data, but you have turned the
option off.
 The data collector does not support smart mode for unscheduled data.
 Emonitor could not match the unscheduled data to an item in the Hierarchy Tree and a
location.

One easy way to change the unscheduled deIndent1stination is to right-click the new desti-
nation in the Hierarchy Tree and click Set Unscheduled Dest.

You can easily change the unscheduled destination.

1. Close the Load / Unload dialog if it is open.
2. Select Window > Database. Select a view that includes the Hierarchy pane.

177
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

3. Select Tools > Set Unscheduled Dest. The Set Unscheduled Measurement Destina-
tion dialog displays the current destination for unscheduled measurement data.
4. Move to the Hierarchy Tree, and click the new destination for unscheduled measure-
ments in the Tree.
5. Click Change in the Set Unscheduled Measurement Destination dialog. The dialog
now displays the name of the new destination for unscheduled measurements.
The next time you unload unscheduled measurements, Emonitor uses the new destination
when it stores the unscheduled measurement data.

Assign Collection Spec to Unscheduled Measurements

When Emonitor unload an unscheduled measurement, it automatically assigns a collec-
tion specification to the measurement. Emonitor assigns an existing collection specifica-
tion if it can match the information for the unscheduled measurement. Otherwise,
Emonitor creates a new collection specification. The name of the new collection specifi-
cation depends on the unscheduled measurement.
The new collection specification name has the form XXXXLMSWNNEp, where:

XXXX The maximum frequency*

L The number of lines*
M The transducer type
S The signal detection*
W The window type*
NN The number of averages*
E The average type*
p The phase measurement flag*

The fields in the collection specification name are explained below. Note that some of
these fields may not be used. In that case, the values that appear in those fields are depen-
dent on the data collector.

Maximum frequency
Displayed in Hz, up to four digits/characters. For example, 4000 and 40k and 100M are all
valid, where k is kilo and M is mega.

178
 • • • • •
9 • Loading and Unloading a Data Collector

Number of lines

0 25
1 50
2 100
3 200
4 400
5 800
6 1600
7 3200
8 6400
9 12800

Transducer type

A acceleration N none
V velocity m mass
D displacement t time
L voltage < angle
O other f frequency
T temperature F force
P pressure q flow
C current # amount

Signal detection

N None
R RMS
P Peak
K Peak-Peak

179
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

T True Peak
U True Peak-Peak
C Crest factor

Window type

R Regular / Rectangular / Uniform

H Hanning
F Flattop
K Kaiser-Bessel
M Hamming
N None
4 Cos^4

Number of averages

Average type

0 None
1 Linear
2 Synchronous linear
3 Exponential
4 Peak hold

Phase measurement flag

p if phase data was taken, blank if there was no phase data taken.

Store Unscheduled Measurements

Most data collectors that can take unscheduled measurements allow you to enter some sort
of identifier for the measurement. Emonitor attempts to store the unscheduled measure-

180
 • • • • •
9 • Loading and Unloading a Data Collector

ment using the name you entered into the data collector. For information about your spe-
cific data collector, refer to the Data Collector User’s Guide for your data collector.

Some data collectors allow you to store unscheduled measurements directly into the correct
location in the database. See “Unload Unscheduled Measurements” on page 174 for details of
the “smart mode” unload option.

Emonitor stores each unscheduled measurement in a different measurement definition.

Emonitor may create a new location for each unscheduled measurement as well, depend-
ing on the data collector.
There are two methods for storing unscheduled measurements.
 In the first method, you leave unscheduled measurements under the destination for
unscheduled measurements in the database. This means that you store all your
unscheduled measurements together.
 In the second method, you move the unscheduled measurements to the correct
machine in the database.

To store all unscheduled measurements together

You may want to leave all your unscheduled measurements in the UNSCHEDULED item
(or some other item you select) in the Hierarchy Tree. Emonitor uses the information from
the data collector when possible, and fills in the rest of the fields with default values. This
means you may want to edit some of the information for the unscheduled measurements.
This includes the location name, equipment category, as well as the measurement defini-
tion specifications such as the measurement filter and storage. For more on editing loca-
tions and measurement definitions, see “Fill in the Information for a Machine” on page
70.

To move an unscheduled measurement to the correct machine

You may take an unscheduled measurement on a machine that is already in your database.
After unloading, you may want to store the unscheduled measurement with the correct
machine, instead of leaving it with the other unscheduled measurements. Alternatively,
you may also want to add the machine to the database, and then store the unscheduled
measurement as the first measurement for that machine.
If you want to add the machine to the database first, see “Adding Machinery to Your Data-
base” on page 63. Follow these steps to store the unscheduled measurement with the cor-
rect machine:
1. Select Window > Database. Select the Data History view in the Select View dialog.

181
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

2. Find the unscheduled measurement you want to copy.

Note the Unscheduled storage flag appears in the Archive Data pane for unscheduled mea-
surements.

 Use the mouse or the arrow keys to select the correct item in the Hierarchy Tree,
and then select the location, measurement definition, and archive data in the corre-
sponding spreadsheet.
 Use Edit > Find to find and display the measurement definition. Then find the
correct measurement in the Archive Data pane.
3. Select the row or rows in the Archive Data pane by dragging across the entire row, or
by pressing Shift+Spacebar. You can extend the selection by dragging the mouse
pointer down across two or more rows, or by pressing the Down Arrow key.
4. Select Edit > Copy, or press Ctrl+C to copy the measurement(s) to the Clipboard.
5. Move to the Measurement Definition pane, then click the measurement definition
where you want to paste the measurement.
6. Move to the Archive Data pane.
7. Select Edit > Paste, or press Ctrl+V to paste the measurement(s) into the Archive
Data pane.
8. Edit the pasted measurements(s) if necessary. You may want to change the storage
flags for the unscheduled measurement(s) from Unscheduled to Archive.

Some of the fields in a spreadsheet may not appear in the current view. You can do one of
the following to show all the fields:

 Change to a different view that shows all the columns.

 Select View > Pane Options to display all the columns.
 Select Setup > Location or Setup > Measurement Definition to edit a location
or a measurement definition. The dialog shows all the fields for the current loca-
tion or measurement definition.
9. You may want to go back and delete the original unscheduled measurements after you
have copied them to the correct machine.
If you want to move locations or measurement definitions instead of individual archive
data, you can use either of the following techniques:
 Select the locations, or measurement definitions, and then select Edit > Copy with
Data. This copies all the archive data along with the selected items.

182
 • • • • •
9 • Loading and Unloading a Data Collector

 Create a location or a measurement definition template that includes the unscheduled

data. Location and measurement definition templates allow you to copy the archive
data as part of the template. You can then paste the template into the correct machine.
See “Working with Templates” on page 76 for more information.

Manually Adding and Editing Archive Data

Emonitor allows you to manually enter and edit archive data in two ways:
 Select Tools > Manual Entry to add data for a list of measurement definitions. You
cannot edit archive data with Manual Entry.
 Use the Archive Data pane in the Database window to add or edit archive data for
individual measurement definitions.
For example, you can add data for magnitude, numeric, and enumerated measurement
definitions, and you can edit the date, time, quality stamp, and storage flag for all types of
measurement definitions. You can also copy and paste archive data, and create and paste
archive data templates.

You cannot manually add data for calculated measurement definitions.

The following situations may require you to manually edit the data:
 The date or time was incorrect in the data collector or computer when you collected
data. You want to change the date or time of the archive data so that the data appears
in the correct order in plots and reports.
 You have magnitude or process data from the past on paper records. You want to
include that historical data in your database so that you can view long term trends of
the data.
 You want to change the storage flag for a particular measurement in the Archive Data
pane to indicate that it is the baseline measurement, or an inactive measurement, or a
measurement you want to keep permanently.
 You want to change the quality stamp for a particular measurement in the Archive
Data pane.
 You have a very good baseline measurement for one machine, and you want to copy
that measurement and use it as the baseline for other machines of the same type.
 You have archive data image files you want to associate with an image measurement
definition.

183
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

Manually Enter Data for a List

You can add data for a list of measurement definitions with Tools > Manual Entry. This
is useful when you have a list of magnitude, numeric, or enumerated measurement defini-
tions, and want to add data for many or all of the measurement definitions in the list. You
cannot, however, edit archive data with Tools > Manual Entry.

You cannot manually add data for calculated measurement definitions. Nor can you select
archive data images with this command.

1. Select Tools > Manual Entry.

2. To change the displayed lists, click Filter to select the list types and list assignments.
3. Select one list by clicking the list name. Emonitor highlights the list you select.
4. Click Enter Data.
5. Enter the new data for the displayed measurement definition in the Manual Entry
dialog. The Next button changes to Accept when you make any change in the New
value group. Click Accept to store the new data and display the next measurement
definition in the list. You can also move through the list with the other buttons in the
dialog. When you move to a different measurement definition, Emonitor saves the
data you entered.
6. After entering and accepting data for the last measurement definition in the list, click
Close to close the dialog.

Enter and Edit Archive Data in the Archive Data Pane

You can edit and add archive data in the Archive Data pane. Emonitor allows you to
change:
 The date and time of the measurement
 The storage flag of the measurement
 The quality stamp for a measurement
 The value for a measurement
 The phase for magnitude measurements
 The machine speed for spectrum and time measurements

184
 • • • • •
9 • Loading and Unloading a Data Collector

In addition you can manually add data for a magnitude, numeric, or enumerated measure-
ment, definition, and delete any data.

You cannot manually add or edit data for calculated measurement definitions.

To edit archive data

If you want to make many changes to archive data, you may find it easier to use Edit > Replace.

1. Select Window > Database. Select the Data History view in the Select View dialog.
2. Move to the measurement definition in the Measurement Definition pane that has the
archive data you want to edit.
3. Move to the measurement you want to edit in the Archive Data pane.
4. Edit the desired fields:
 For magnitude or process measurements, you can edit the date, time, phase, and
maximum amplitudes. You can also select a different quality stamp or storage flag.
See “Select the Quality Stamp” on page 189 and see “Select Archive Data Storage
Flags” on page 189.
 For spectrum and time waveform measurements, you can edit the date, time, and
machine speed. You can also select a different quality stamp or storage flag.
5. When you move off the measurement, Emonitor saves the changes to the measure-
ment.

To manually add data

1. Select Window > Database. Select the Data History view in the Select View dialog.
2. Move to the measurement definition in the Measurement Definition pane for which
you want to add archive data.
3. Move to the first row in the Archive Data pane. Notice that the first row is blank, so
that you can easily add data.
4. Enter the information for the measurement and select a storage flag and quality stamp
for the measurement.
When you move to a different measurement or measurement definition, Emonitor saves
the new measurement.

185
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

To delete archive data

Unless you have selected Enabled for Undo Capacity in the Setup > Options > General dia-
log, you will not be able to bring back archive data after you delete it. See “Undo Changes to the
Database” on page 55.

If you want to delete a lot of data from the archive data, you may find it easier to use Edit >
Delete.

1. Select Window > Database. Select the Data History view in the Select View dialog.
2. Move to the measurement definition in the Measurement Definition pane that has the
archive data you want to delete.
3. Move to the measurement you want to delete in the Archive Data pane.
4. Select the row in the spreadsheet by doing one of the following:
 Drag over two or more cells in the row to highlight the row. To select two or more
rows, drag over two or more cells in the first row, then drag down the column.
When you release the mouse button, Emonitor highlights the row or rows.
 Hold down the Shift key and press the Spacebar to highlight all the cells in the
row. Continue to hold down the Shift key and press the up or down arrow key to
select multiple rows.
5. Press Delete to delete the selected archive data.

Store Archive Image Data

You can add archive data images in the Archive Data pane.

Emonitor does not store the actual image in the database. Instead, it stores a reference to the
image file. If you delete the image from the Archive Data pane, it does not delete the actual
image file stored on your computer. However, Emonitor can not display the image if you move or
delete the image file itself.

1. Select Window > Database. Select the Data History view in the Select View dialog.
2. Move to the measurement definition in the Measurement Definition pane for which
you want to add an archive data image. The measurement definition Data Type must
be Image.
3. Move to the first row in the Archive Data pane. Note that the first row is blank.
4. Double-click in the Date column to display the Image Data dialog.
5. Select an image file in the dialog.

186
 • • • • •
9 • Loading and Unloading a Data Collector

6. Select Use file time stamp if you want to store the image file date and time with the
image.
7. Click Open to store the selected image.
8. You may want to change the storage flag for the image. See “Select Archive Data
Storage Flags” on page 189 for more information.
9. When you move to a different measurement or measurement definition, Emonitor
saves the reference to the image.
To view an archive data image, open a Plot window with an Archive Data Image pane. For
more information, see “Displaying Plots and Images in Plot Windows” on page 202.
You can also change the date or time for an archive data image by double-clicking in the
Date or Time columns in the Archive Data pane. You can delete an archive data image by
selecting two or more columns in a row and pressing Delete. See “Enter and Edit Archive
Data in the Archive Data Pane” on page 184 for details.

If you want to change the image file, double-click in the Image File column.

Store ActiveX Documents

You can store ActiveX documents and links to ActiveX documents in the Archive Data
pane. This allows you to access information created by other programs that support
ActiveX, such as thermographic imaging. You can also store ActiveX documents such as
MSDS sheets, word processor documents or spreadsheets. There are two ways to store an
ActiveX document. The first is selecting the document in Emonitor. The second is using
drag and drop.

To select the ActiveX document to store

1. Select Window > Database. Select the Data History view in the Select View dialog.
2. Move to the measurement definition in the Measurement Definition pane for which
you want to add archive data. The measurement definition Data Type must be
ActiveX.
3. Move to the first row in the Archive Data pane. Note that the first row is blank.
4. Double-click in the Date column to display the Insert Object dialog.
5. You can create a new document or select an existing one in the dialog.
 Select Create new to create a new document. Then select the program to create
the document from list of ActiveX programs

187
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

 Select Create from file to select an existing document. Then click Browse to
select an existing ActiveX document.
6. Select Link if you want to store a link to the document.
 If you select Link, you store a link to the ActiveX document in the Emonitor data-
base. If you then change the document using the link, you make changes to the
original document
 If you do not select Link, you store a copy of the ActiveX document in the Emon-
itor database. If you then change the copy stored in Emonitor, it does not change
the original document.
7. You may want to change the storage flag for the ActiveX document. See “Select
Archive Data Storage Flags” on page 189 for more information.
8. When you move to a different measurement or measurement definition, Emonitor
saves the reference to the document.

To drag and drop an ActiveX document

1. Select Window > Database. Select the Data History view in the Select View dialog.
2. Move to the measurement definition in the Measurement Definition pane for which
you want to add the document. The measurement definition Data Type must be
ActiveX.
3. Click the file in the Windows Explorer, and without releasing the mouse button, drag
the file to the first row in the Archive Data pane. Note that the first row is blank.
4. Release the mouse button to store a copy of the file in the Emonitor database.
You can also select a file in the Windows Explorer, then select Edit > Copy in the
Explorer. Then move to the Archive Data pane and select Edit > Paste Special in Emoni-
tor. This allows you to copy either the file, or a link to the file into Emonitor.

To view or edit the stored ActiveX document

To view or edit an ActiveX document, open a Plot window with an ActiveX pane. For
more information, see “Display ActiveX Documents” on page 228.
You can also change the date or time for an ActiveX document by double-clicking in the
Date or Time columns in the Archive Data pane. You can delete an ActiveX document by
selecting two or more columns in a row and pressing Delete. See “Enter and Edit Archive
Data in the Archive Data Pane” on page 184 for details.

188
 • • • • •
9 • Loading and Unloading a Data Collector

Select the Quality Stamp

The quality stamp for a measurement indicates the quality of the data. It is used when
evaluating a constraint on a calculated measurement definition. See “Create Calculated
Measurement Definitions” on page 85. You can manually change the quality stamp in the
Archive Data pane.
1. Display the Archive Data pane in the Database window.
2. Double-click in the Quality Stamp column and select a different quality stamp.
See the Emonitor online help for the list of quality stamps.

Select Archive Data Storage Flags

The storage flag for a measurement indicates how you want to use the measurement. You
can manually change the storage flag in the following ways:
 Display the Archive Data pane in the Database window. Double-click in the Storage
Flag column and select a different storage flag.
 Display a plot and move the cursor to the desired measurement (if necessary). Select
Plot > Storage Flag, then select the storage flag.
See the Emonitor online help for the list of archive storage flags.

In general, the storage specification for the measurement definition controls how long Emonitor
stores the measurement. See “Remove Old Data from the Database” on page 308.

Copy and Paste Data in the Archive Data Pane

You can copy and paste archive data in the Archive Data pane. For example, you can copy
a good baseline measurement from one machine to another machine of the same type.
There are two ways to copy archive data in Emonitor:
 Select Edit > Copy and Edit > Paste to copy and then paste the selected measure-
ments back into the Archive Data pane. This allows you to quickly copy measure-
ments.
 Select Edit > Create Template and Edit > Paste Template to make an Archive Data
template and then paste the template back into the Archive Data pane. This allows you
to create a template that you can store and use at any time in the future. You can also
choose to include archive data in a Hierarchy, Location, or Measurement Definition
template. See “Working with Templates” on page 76.

To copy and paste archive data

1. Select Window > Database. Select the Data History view in the Select View dialog.

189
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

2. Move to the measurement definition that has the archive data you want to copy.
3. Move to the measurement you want to copy in the Archive Data pane.
4. Select the measurement(s) you want to copy. Select the entire row in the spreadsheet
by doing one of the following:
 Click one cell in the row to select the row. To select two or more rows, drag down
the column.
 Hold down the Shift key and press the Spacebar to highlight all the cells in the
row. Continue to hold down the Shift key and press the up or down arrow key to
select multiple rows.
5. Select Edit > Copy to copy the measurement(s) to the Clipboard, or press Ctrl+C.
6. Move to the measurement definition where you want to paste the copied archive data.
7. Move to the Archive Data pane, and select Edit > Paste, or press Ctrl+V.

To create and paste an Archive Data template

1. Select Window > Database. Select the Data History view in the Select View dialog.
2. Move to the measurement definition that has the archive data you want to store in a
template.
3. Select the archive data measurement(s) you want to store in a template. Select Edit >
Create Template. Name and save the Archive Data template.
4. Move to the measurement definition where you want to paste the archive data.
5. Move to the Archive Data pane. Select Edit > Paste Template. Select the template in
the Paste Template dialog.

Export archive data to Microsoft Excel Spreadsheet

You can export archive data for a measurement definition to a Microsoft Excel™ Spread-
sheet. The data appears in a plot in Excel.

This command is not available unless you have Microsoft Excel installed on your computer.

 For magnitude and process measurement definitions, Emonitor exports all the data for
the measurement definition.
 For spectrum and time waveform measurement definitions, Emonitor exports only the
data for the currently selected row in the Archive Data pane (closest to the target date
time).

190
 • • • • •
9 • Loading and Unloading a Data Collector

 This command is not available for other data types (Image, ActiveX).

To export data for individual measurement definitions

1. Select Window > Database. Select the Data History view in the Select View dialog.
2. Right-click the measurement definition that has the archive data you want to export,
then select Export to Microsoft Excel Spreadsheet.

The archive data appears in a Microsoft Excel plot.

To export data for the current list

1. Create or recall a list. See “Working with Lists” on page 117.
2. Select List > Export to Microsoft Excel Spreadsheet.

The archive data appears in a series of Microsoft Excel Spreadsheets, with one sheet
for each measurement definition in the list.

Importing Data
Emonitor allows you to import data from an external file into the Emonitor database. This
allows you to include other kinds of data in your Predictive Maintenance program, such as
oil contamination data from an oil analysis laboratory.
Emonitor stores most imported data as process measurement data. When you import the
data, Emonitor sets up the necessary items in the Hierarchy Tree, as well as the locations,
and the process measurement definitions.
After importing the data, you can:
 Set up alarms for the imported data
 View trend plots of the data
 Print reports of the data
Emonitor also tries to match any inspection codes in the imported data to those you create
using the Setup > Options > Inspection Codes. See “Using Inspection Codes” on page
101.

You can also set up Emonitor to import ActiveX documents, which are stored under ActiveX mea-
surement definitions. You cannot set alarms or view trends for ActiveX measurement definitions.

Set the Import Options

The data import options allow you to choose how to store invalid or zero-value data, as
well as to select the unload reports.

191
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

1. Select Tools > Data Import.

2. Click Options in the Data Import dialog.
3. Select the desired import options in the Data Import Options dialog.

Import the data

You can import data from one or more files either on your computer’s hard disk, a net-
work hard disk, a floppy diskette, or any other source that Windows can recognize. There
are two steps when importing data from a file:
1. Select the source file containing the data.
2. Import the data.
Emonitor tries to match any inspection codes in the imported data to those you create
using Setup > Options > Inspection Codes. If it finds a matching inspection code,
Emonitor stores it according to the hierarchy level that you set up for the inspection code.
If Emonitor does not find any matching inspection codes, it assigns the imported inspec-
tion codes at the location level. See “Using Inspection Codes” on page 101 for details.

To select the source file containing the data

1. Select Tools > Data Import.
2. Click the large Set Up Import button in the Data Import dialog.

3. Optional: Limit the type of data files, if possible, in the Browse Files for Data
Import dialog. You do this by selecting the oil analysis laboratory in the Files of type
box.
4. Select the file or files containing the data. You can use wildcards in the File name
field to display the desired type of files (*.oil for example). You can also select multi-
ple files for import at the same time.
5. Click Open.

192
 • • • • •
9 • Loading and Unloading a Data Collector

To import the data from the selected files

1. Select Tools > Data Import.
2. Click the Import button in the Data Import dialog.
Emonitor attempts to import the data from the file.
3. Emonitor then checks the import options in the Data Import Options dialog and per-
forms any selected functions. These include:
 Either store or ignore invalid and zero-value data.
 Print selected unload reports for the imported data.

Import ActiveX data

Emonitor can import ActiveX documents, either by linking to them or by embedding them
in the database. You can then display an ActiveX document within Emonitor, and make
changes using the program associated with the ActiveX document. For example, if the
ActiveX document is a bitmap, you can display the bitmap in an image Plot window. Then
you can double-click on the image to open the bitmap in the default bitmap editor.

A data import configuration file for ActiveX import must be present in the program directory.
Select Setup > Data Import > Daemon Configuration Utility to check for an [Link] data
import configuration file. If there is no [Link] file, and you have not manually created a con-
figuration file for ActiveX import, contact Technical Support for assistance (see “Contact Us” on
page 2).

1. Select Setup > Data Import > ActiveX Configuration Utility.

2. Click New to create a new configuration file, or select a configuration file to modify
and click Edit. Press F1 in any dialog to display the help topic for that dialog.
The Emonitor Scheduler program uses the EAX files to import ActiveX data. For more
information on the Scheduler program, refer to the Scheduler help (select Start > Pro-
grams > Rockwell Software > Emonitor > Help > Scheduler Help).

Edit EDI files

Emonitor uses EDI files to control how data is imported from an external program, as with
an Emonitor Online system. Normally, the default EDI files supplied with Emonitor are
sufficient for most systems. However, Emonitor provides a convenient way to change an
EDI file if necessary.
1. Select Setup > Data Import > Daemon Configuration Utility.
2. Select the EDI file to modify and click Edit. Press F1 in any dialog to display the help
topic for that dialog.

193
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

The Emonitor Scheduler program uses the EDI files to import data. For more information
on the Scheduler program, refer to the Scheduler help (select Start > Programs > Rock-
well Software > Emonitor > Help > Scheduler Help).

Schedule Data Import

You can schedule data import so that Emonitor regularly checks for, and automatically
imports, data files. Note that you must do two things before scheduling data import:
 Set the data import options. See “Set the Import Options” on page 191.
 Select the type of data file to import. See “Importing Data” on page 191.
Emonitor saves the import options and the type of data file with the schedule for data
import.

The Scheduler service must be running if you want to use scheduled data import. This service is
disabled by default, and must be manually enabled. For more information, refer to the Scheduler
help file (Start > Programs > Rockwell Software > Emonitor > Help > Scheduler Help).

To schedule data import

 You can use the Emonitor Scheduler to import data once or on a regular schedule.
Refer to the Help for the Emonitor Scheduler for more information (Start > Pro-
grams > Rockwell Software > Emonitor > Help > Scheduler Help). Use the Sched-
uler to view, edit, or delete schedules for data import.
To start the Scheduler, click the Start button on the Windows taskbar, then select Pro-
grams > Rockwell Software > Emonitor > Utilities > Scheduler.
 You can also set up multiple schedules for a data import with the Emonitor Scheduler
program.

To cancel data import

To cancel scheduled data import, you must run the Scheduler program.
1. Start the Scheduler program as described above.
2. In the Scheduler window, select the profile called Data Import Task. If there are two
or more Data Import Tasks, select the first one.
3. Click the Delete button.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you have deleted all the Data Import Tasks.
5. Close the Scheduler program.

194
 • • • • •
9 • Loading and Unloading a Data Collector

Displaying System Events in the System Event Log

The System Event Log is a special pane in the Database window. It displays a log of sys-
tem events generated by the Emonitor system. Typical system events include unloading
data from a remote instrument, importing data, deleting data, and so on. In general, the
System Event Log is more useful when monitoring and troubleshooting a Emonitor online
condition monitoring system.

Enable and Disable system event logging

You can enable and disable logging messages to the System Event Log. The messages that
are logged are listed in the Emonitor online help.

This also controls logging to the RSMACC™ or FactoryTalk® AssetCentre software if installed. If
the SOFTWARE is installed, but not running, Emonitor stores system event messages until it
detects that the RSMACC FactoryTalk AssetCentre application is running.

1. Select Setup > Options > General.

2. On the General tab, select Enable logging to start logging system event messages.
Clear Enable logging to stop logging messages.

Display the System Event Log Pane

The System Event Log is a pane in the Database window.

Emonitor automatically deletes system events from the Log after 7 days for online systems. For
systems that are used only with data collectors or other portable instruments, you must run the
Storage Limit Updater program to clean out the old data. See “Remove Old Data from the Data-
base” on page 308.

Select Window > Database. Select a view that includes the System Event Log pane in the
Select View dialog. If the view does not include the System Event Log pane, you can do
one of the following.

To change an existing pane

1. Select a pane in the Database window by clicking in the pane.
2. Select View > Change Pane.
3. In the Change Database Pane dialog, select System Event Log as the Pane type.

To open a new pane

1. Select the Database window or pane.
2. Select View > Split Horizontal or View > Split Vertical.

195
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

3. Select the System Event Log Pane type in the Change Pane dialog.
For more on windows, panes, and views, see “Working with windows and panes” on page
21.

Select the Events and Columns to Display

You can select the types of events you want to see in the System Event Log pane in the
Database window.
Tip: The System Event Log pane must appear as one of the panes in the Database win-
dow.
1. Select the System Event Log pane in the Database window by clicking the pane.
2. Select View > Pane Options.
3. There are four ways to change the amount and type of information in the System
Event Pane.
 If you want to see more or less information on each event, use the spreadsheet to
change the displayed columns.
 If you want to see more or fewer events, change the Status to display different lev-
els of events.
 If you want to see only the events produced by a certain module, select that mod-
ule for Filter on module.
 If you want to see events covering a longer or shorter time period, use Archive fil-
ter override to change the time period. Otherwise, the displayed events are deter-
mined by the archive filter settings.

Work with System Events

The System Event Log continuously stores events generated by your Emonitor system.
With the Emonitor Online Applications, the System Event Log may grow quite large as it
records every event in the system. To reduce the size of the System Event Log, you can
export and delete the events in the System Event Log. Exporting the System Event Log
copies the system event to a special file. If necessary, you can later import this System
Event Log file back into the System Event log.

Emonitor automatically deletes system events from the Log after 7 days for online systems. For
systems that are used only with data collectors or other portable instruments, you must run the
Storage Limit Updater program to clean out the old data. See “Remove Old Data from the Data-
base” on page 308.

196
 • • • • •
9 • Loading and Unloading a Data Collector

To export and delete the events in the System Event Log

The System Event Log pane must appear as one of the panes in the Database window.

1. Select the System Event Log pane in the Database window by clicking the pane.
2. Select View > Pane Options.
3. Click the Export button.
4. Enter a name for the System Event Log file in the File name box.
5. If you want to delete the system events from the System Event Log after exporting
them to the file, select Remove events from the log.
6. Click Save.

To import events into the System Event Log

You can import the events stored in a System Event Log file. When you import events,
they are added to the existing events in the System Event Log. The import process does
not duplicate any events that already exist in the System Event Log.
1. Select the System Event Log pane in the Database window by clicking the pane.
2. Select View > Pane Options.
3. Click the Import button.
4. Select or enter the name of the System Event Log file.
5. Click Open.

197
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

198
10 Using Plots
Overview of Plots in Emonitor
Plots provide a convenient, graphical way to examine your data. Emonitor displays plots
in panes in a Plot window. You can open multiple Plot windows, and save an arrangement
of Plot panes as a view. For example, you can create a view showing both an image and a
trend plot for the same location.
There are many different types of plots in Emonitor. You can customize each type of plot,
and then save those characteristics as the default for that type of plot. Each type of plot has
a specific use.

Trend plot types

 Trend plot - A graph of the amplitude of a measurement against time, usually display-
ing the trend in a magnitude or process measurement over days, weeks, or months. See
“Trend plot description” in the Emonitor online help.
 Average Trend plot - A trend plot that allows you to average different measurement
units together, and graph the average against time. See “Average trend plot descrip-
tion” in the Emonitor online help.
 XY plot - A graph of the amplitudes of two measurements plotted against each other.
See “XY plot description” in the Emonitor online help.
 Advisory plot - A plot that displays the changing status of advisories and work
requests over time (Factory and Enterprise bundles). See “Advisory plot description”
in the Emonitor online help for more on this plot type.
There are also two frequency trend plots:
 Frequency Trend plot - A graph of the amplitude of a particular frequency, band sum
or the band maximum amplitude against time. You can also plot the band sum or the
band maximum amplitude for a single band defined with the band cursors in a spec-
trum plot. See “Frequency trend and band frequency trend plot descriptions” in the
Emonitor online help.
 Band Frequency Trend plot - A graph of the amplitude of the band sum or the band
maximum amplitude for a band against time. The window contains one plot for each
band in a band set.

Spectrum plot types

 Spectrum plot - A graph of amplitude against frequency, displaying the data from a
spectrum measurement. See “Spectrum plot description” in the Emonitor online help.

199
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

 Spectrum Map plot - A three dimensional graph of amplitude against frequency

against time. Spectrum map plots show multiple spectrum plots over time, allowing
you to see the variations in individual frequencies. See “Spectrum map plot descrip-
tion” in the Emonitor online help.
 Spectrum Difference or Ratio plot - A line by line comparison of two spectra, either
as the difference between at each spectral line, or the ratio at each spectral line. The
resulting plot is also a spectrum plot. See “Spectrum difference/ratio plot description”
in the Emonitor online help.

Other plot types

 Time Waveform plot - A graph of amplitude against time, typically displaying the
displacement of a surface over periods of less than a second. See “Time waveform
plot description” in the Emonitor online help.
 Polar plot - A graph of amplitude against phase. Polar plots are graphed in polar coor-
dinates using degrees or radians. See “Polar plot description” in the Emonitor online
help.
 Orbit plot - A graph generated from the X and Y timebase values. It displays the two
forward and reverse vectors whose sum is the ellipse, or orbit. Orbit plots use data
from two transducers and provide additional information on the direction of preces-
sion and ellipticity of the orbit. See “Orbit plot description” in the Emonitor online
help.
 Shaft Centerline plot - A display of the changing position of a rotor in a pressure-fed
sleeve bearing. See “Shaft centerline plot description” in the Emonitor online help.
 Units plot - A plot that displays bar graphs showing the values for one or more mea-
surements for a list or a location, allowing you to compare the values of a set of mea-
surements with different units. See “Units plot description” in the Emonitor online
help.

Image and ActiveX plot types

 Hierarchy Image - A picture or image stored with an item in the Hierarchy Tree. See
“Hierarchy image plot description” in the Emonitor online help.
 Archive Data Image - A picture or image stored with the archive data associated with
a measurement definition. See “Archive data image plot description” in the Emonitor
online help.
 ActiveX plot - This is not a plot, but rather a window displaying an ActiveX docu-
ment. See “ActiveX plot description” in the Emonitor online help.

200
 • • • • •
10 • Using Plots

Combination plot types

There are two other plots that can show any of the above plot types:
 Measurement Definition ([Link]) plot - This plot automatically displays the cor-
rect plot type for the current measurement definition. When you select a magnitude or
process measurement, the measurement definition plot displays a trend plot of the
data. If you select a spectrum or time waveform measurement definition, the measure-
ment definition plot changes to display the data in the correct type of plot.
 Location plot - This plot automatically displays a pane for each active measurement
definition in the current location. Note that a location plot does not show inactive mea-
surement definitions.

Other features of plots

Plot features allow you to change the appearance and display of data in a plot.
 Display one or more alarms on many types of plots.
 Include a plot legend, and select the information you want to display in the legend.
 Interactively change the features of a plot, such as the axis scaling, the type and num-
ber of cursors, the plot colors, and the plot fonts.
 Print a copy of a Plot window, including all the panes in that window.
 Copy a plot to the Clipboard, allowing you to paste the plot into another Windows
application, such as a word processor.
 Unlink a Plot window from the database, allowing you to view plots from different
locations or machines at the same time.
 Overlay measurements on many plot types, either from the measurement definition’s
archive data, or from the current list.
 Lock a plot to a particular machine, location, unit/filter combination, or archive data
storage flag.

To get help for a plot

Press F1 when the Plot window or pane is active to display an explanation of the window
or pane.

201
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

Right-click menus on plots

You can activate many of the plot features described in this chapter by right clicking an
unused part of the plot, and selecting the command. The right-click menu includes many
of the same commands that appear on the View and Plot menus.

For information on viewing data in Emonitor Web, see the online help file for the Emonitor Web
Client.

Displaying Plots and Images in Plot Windows

Emonitor displays plots and images in panes in a Plot window. Each pane can contain a
different type of plot, and you can open two or more Plot windows at one time. You can
split a Plot window or Plot pane into two different panes. In addition, you can change the
type of plot in a pane, or change the view in a Plot window without closing the window.
Images are pictures stored in the database. You can display images using the same steps
you use to display plots. The steps in the following topics apply to both plots and images.
You can create a Plot window view that contains an arrangement of Plot panes in the win-
dow, save that view, and recall it later. The saved view includes all the Plot panes, as well
as their positions, and the specific plot options such as the cursor style and type. For
example, you can create, save, and later recall a Plot window view that contains an image,
a trend plot, and a plot legend.

Open a Plot Window

You display a plot by opening a Plot window and selecting the view or type of plot. Once
you open the Plot window, you can:
 Select a different view or plot.
 Split or close plot panes.
 Change many plot options, such as the plot colors, axis scaling, and plot appearance.
1. Select Window > Plots.
2. Select the view for the new Plot window in the Select Plot View dialog, or click New
to select the type of plot for the window.
3. If you click New, then select the type of plot in the Change Plot Pane dialog.

You can open a Plot window for each location in the current list by selecting Open a window
for each location in list in the Select Plot View dialog.

You can also assign a button on the Saved Views toolbar for a view, then click that button to
recall that view. See “Using Toolbars” on page 14.

202
 • • • • •
10 • Using Plots

Select Different Plots and Views

Once you open a Plot window, you can change the contents of the window by:
 Changing the type of plot.
 Splitting a plot pane into two or more panes.
 Selecting a different view for the Plot window.
For more information on windows and panes, see “Working with windows and panes” on
page 21.

To split a Plot window or pane into panes

1. Click the Plot window or pane you want to split.
2. Select View > Split Horizontal or View > Split Vertical.
3. Select a pane type for the new pane in the Change Plot Pane dialog.

To change a plot pane

1. Click the pane you want to change.
2. Select View > Change Pane.
3. Select a pane type in the Change Plot Pane dialog.

To close a plot pane

1. Click the pane you want to close. Note that you cannot close a pane if it is the only
pane in the window.
2. Select View > Close Pane.

To maximize and restore a plot pane

Maximizing a pane enlarges it to fill the Plot window.
1. Click the pane you want to maximize (zoom) or restore.
2. Select View > Zoom.
3. Select View > Zoom again to restore the pane to its previous size.

To save and recall a view in a Plot window

1. Select View > Save View to save an arrangement of panes as a view.

203
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

2. To recall a view into the active Plot window, select the view from the list of views at
the bottom of the View menu. The Plot window must be the active window.

You can also assign a button on the Saved Views toolbar for a view, then click that button to
recall that view. See “Using Toolbars” on page 14.

Save a Plot Definition as the Default

Once you have customized a plot’s appearance, you can save that plot as the default for
other plots of the same type. For example, suppose you change the axis scaling, the cursor
type, and the cursor function in a trend plot. You might not want to have to make all those
changes every time you display a trend plot.
Instead of making the changes every time you open a Plot window, you can save the char-
acteristics of that trend plot with Plot > Save as Default. When you open a new trend
plot, it will have the same characteristics and appearance as the default. Saving a plot as
the default, however, does not affect the appearance of plots that are part of an existing
Plot window view.
The characteristics of a plot that you store when you select Plot > Save as Default
include:
 All the plot options in the Plot > Options dialog, except for those on the Data tab
 Whether inspection codes are displayed on the plot
 The axis ratio for a spectrum map plot
The characteristics of a plot that are not included are:
 The plot options in the Plot > Options dialog on the Data tab
 Plot colors
 The state of the signal detection region. For a new plot, the signal detection defaults to
the signal detection defined in the collection specification for the measurement defini-
tion.

You cannot save a default definition for a location or a measurement definition plot. These
plots automatically use the current default definition for each plot type. In other words, a trend
that is part of a location plot uses the default characteristics for trend plots.

Copy Plots and Images to the Clipboard

You can copy a Plot window to the Clipboard and then paste the plot from the Clipboard
into another application. This allows you to include Emonitor plots in a Windows word
processor document. You can copy hierarchy and archive data images as well.

204
 • • • • •
10 • Using Plots

To copy only the plot or image to the Clipboard

1. Display the plot or plots in a Plot window.
2. If you want to copy only one pane from a Plot window with two or more panes, Select
View > Zoom to enlarge the pane to fill the Plot window.
3. Select Edit > Copy, or press Ctrl+C to copy the contents of the Plot window to the
Clipboard.

To include the Emonitor window title bar with the plot or image
1. Display the plot or plots in a Plot window.
2. If you want to copy only one pane from a Plot window with two or more panes, use
View > Zoom to enlarge the pane to fill the Plot window.
3. If you want the Plot window to fill the entire Emonitor workspace, maximize the Plot
window by doing one of the following:
 Click the maximize button in the upper right corner of the Plot window.
 Press Alt+hyphen to open the Control menu for the Plot window, and select
Maximize. Note that the Plot window must be the active window.
4. You can also hide the tool bars and the status bar with View > Toolbars and View >
Status Bar.
5. Press Alt+PrintScreen to copy the Emonitor window, including the title bar, to the
Clipboard. You can then paste it into another application, such as Paint or Word.

Print Plots and Images

You can print plots in Emonitor on any printer or plotter that is compatible with Windows.
This includes both black and white and color printers and plotters. The printed plot con-
tains the same elements you see on the screen, including the point markers, alarms, cursor,
and any text. You can print hierarchy and archive data images as well, either individually
or with other plots in a Plot window.

To select the printer or plotter for plots and images

1. Select File > Print Setup.
2. Select the printer or plotter.

To send a plot or image to a printer or plotter

1. Display the plot or plots in a Plot window.
2. If you want to print only one pane in a Plot window, instead of all the panes, select
View > Zoom to enlarge the pane to fill the entire Plot window.

205
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

3. Select File > Print to print the Plot window.

Displaying a Plot Legend

There are two types of plot legends in Emonitor.
 Plot pane legend - This legend appears to the right of a spectrum, trend or other plot
(in the plot pane). It displays the lowest item in the Hierarchy Tree, position, direction,
and archive storage flag for the data in the plot pane. It also shows whether the plot
pane is locked at any level.

 Plot Legend pane - This is a separate pane in a Plot window that displays information
about the data in the Plot window. You can select the information you want to see in
the Plot Legend pane, but the Plot Legend pane does not show whether a plot pane is
locked at any level.

For more information on plot locking, see “Use Pane Locking with Plots” on page 233.

Display a Plot Pane Legend

You can display a plot pane legend in most Plot window panes. The plot pane legend con-
tains the following information identifying a measurement:
 Item in the Hierarchy Tree

206
 • • • • •
10 • Using Plots

 Units (from the measurement definition)

 Position (from the location)
 Direction (from the location)
 Measurement filter (from the measurement definition)
The pane legend appears to the right of the plot.

If an asterisk appears by any of the levels in the plot pane legend, the plot pane is locked at that
level. See “Use Pane Locking with Plots” on page 233 for more information.

1. Click the plot pane to make it active.

2. Select Plot > Options.
3. Select Show legend on the Styles tab.

Display a Plot Legend Pane

You can display a plot legend in a Plot window, and select the information you want to
appear in the Plot Legend pane.

To display the Plot Legend Pane

1. Click the Plot window to make it active.
2. Open the Change Plot Pane dialog by either:
 Selecting a pane, and selecting View > Change Pane.
 Splitting the Plot window or a plot pane with View > Split Horizontal or View >
Split Vertical.
3. Select Legend in the Change Plot Pane dialog.

To select the information in the Plot Legend pane

This affects only the plot legend in the active pane.
1. Click the Plot Legend pane to make it active.
2. Double-click the Plot Legend pane, or press the Spacebar or Enter key.
3. Select the columns, the labels, and the placement for the information in the Plot Leg-
end pane in the Plot Legend Format dialog.

To save the Plot Legend pane in a view

1. Select the Plot window containing the plot legend.

207
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

2. Select View > Save View to save the plot view.

To recall the view in a new Plot window, select the view in the Select View dialog that
appears when you open the window. See “Saving and Recalling Panes in a View” on page
22.

To recall a view into an open Plot window, select the view from the list of views at the bottom of
the View menu.

To save a Plot Legend pane as the default

You can save the active plot legend definition as the default plot legend definition. When
you open a new plot legend pane, the new plot legend uses the default definition. Note
that this does not affect plot legend panes already saved as part of a view. See “Save a Plot
Definition as the Default” on page 204.
1. Move to the Plot Legend pane.
2. Select Plot > Save as Default.

Select colors and fonts for the Plot Legend Pane

This affects all plot legends in all plot windows.
1. Select Plot > Colors.
2. Select colors for the plot legend and click Apply to see the new color in an open Plot
window. The plot legend text color is the same as the color for the Axis Labels. The
plot legend background color is the same as the Outside Background color. See
“Change the Plot Colors and fonts” on page 211.
You can also change the fonts in the Plot Legend pane with Setup > Fonts > Plot Legend
Fonts.

Changing the Appearance of Plots

Emonitor provides you with powerful controls to change the appearance of a plot quickly
and easily. These features allow you to:
 Use plot regions to quickly change plot axis scaling.
 Interactively change the appearance and function of cursors and data markers.
 Experiment with changing the plot colors without leaving the plot.

208
 • • • • •
10 • Using Plots

Use Plot Regions to Change the Plot

Plot regions are areas on a plot that you can use to interactively change the appearance of
a plot without having to leave the plot. For example, you can use plot regions to change
the appearance of the plot axes or the cursor.

For more information on a specific plot, display the plot in Emonitor and press F1 to see the help
topic for that plot.

To activate a plot region

When you activate a plot region, you either toggle to the next option for the region, or dis-
play a dialog so that you can select the options for the plot. Do one of the following:
 Double-click the region.
 Press Tab (or Shift+Tab) to move the dashed box to the region and press the Space-
bar.

To get help for a plot or plot region

When you move the mouse pointer over a plot region, the status bar displays a short
description of the region. See “Emonitor Window” on page 6 for more on status bar mes-
sages. You can press F1 when a plot window is active to display an explanation of the plot
and its regions.

Change the Plot Axes

You can change the axis type and scaling using the plot regions. This lets you perform
tasks such as zooming in on a part of a plot and changing the units. Changing the plot axes
affects only the plot in the active pane.

209
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

To change the plot axis maximum and minimum

You can use any of three different ways to change the axis maximum and minimum.
 Draw the area - “Rubber band zoom” allows you to use the mouse cursor to zoom in
on a part of the plot. To zoom in on a part of the plot, right-click and drag across the
plot. When you release the mouse button, Emonitor zooms in on the selected area on
the plot.
 Define the axis values - Select Plot > Options. The Axis tabs in the Plot Options
dialog allow you to enter values for the axis minimum and maximum.
 Autoscale the axis - You can autoscale an axis by double-clicking with the right
mouse button on the axis options plot region. You can also autoscale both axes by
double-clicking the autoscale plot region, located in the lower left of the plot pane
above the cursor values. See “Use Plot Regions to Change the Plot” on page 209.

To change the plot axis units

The available units depends on the type of axis. In all cases, you toggle among the choices
by activating the axis units plot region. The region overlies the plot axis units text on the
plot.
 Frequency axis - Toggle between frequency (Hertz, CPM) and Orders.
 Amplitude axis - For spectrum and spectrum map plots, you can toggle to the next
preferred unit (integrate). You cannot change the amplitude (Y axis) units for other
plot types.
 Time axis - Toggle between seconds and revolutions per time interval. Note that this
is not available for a spectrum map plot.

To change the plot axis scale

The axis scale controls whether the axis units are in linear (Lin), logarithmic (Log), or
level (dB) values. You can use either of these two ways to change the axis scale:
 Toggle among the options - Toggle among the available options by double-clicking
the axis scale plot region, which overlies the axis scale text on the plot.
 Select the scale directly - Select Plot > Options. The Axis tabs in the Plot Options
dialog allow you to select the axis scale by entering the user defined axis minimum
and maximum.

To normalize the Y axis

Normalizing the Y axis allows you to overlay measurements with different units using a
relative amplitude axis. This may make it easier to compare measurements.
1. Select Plot > Options.

210
 • • • • •
10 • Using Plots

2. Select either % of default scale or % of baseline on the Axis tab in the Plot Options
dialog.

To change the plot axis signal detection type

The axis signal detection type applies to amplitude axes only. You can toggle among the
available options by activating the axis signal detection plot region (Peak, Peak-Peak,
RMS). The region overlies the amplitude (Y axis) signal detection text on the plot.

To change the plot axis coordinate plane

The plot axis coordinate plane applies to amplitude axes only. You can toggle among the
available options by activating the axis coordinate plane region (Magnitude, Phase, Real,
Imaginary). The region overlies the amplitude (Y axis) coordinate plane text on the plot.

Change the Plot Colors and fonts

You can customize the appearance of plots in Emonitor by selecting your own combina-
tion of colors for the plot. The process is interactive, so that you can select a color, and
immediately see that color in a plot. The colors you select apply to all plots in Emonitor,
as well as the Plot Legend pane.
To change the colors in all plots:
1. Select Plot > Colors.
2. Select a plot element, and a color for that plot element in the Plot Colors dialog.
3. Click Apply to see the new color on the plot.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each plot element.
5. You can also click Default to return to the original Emonitor plot colors. Note that
when you click OK you save the current plot colors. You cannot recall a previous set
of colors without recreating them.
You can also change the fonts in the Plot window with Setup > Fonts > Plot Window
Fonts.

Change the Plot Cursor Type and Display

You can change the appearance and function of the plot cursor, as well as the cursor val-
ues that Emonitor displays at the bottom of the plot. For example, you can select a Normal
cursor and Peak mode to move from peak to peak in a spectrum plot. You can also select a
specialized cursor, such as the Sideband cursor, for specific tasks.

211
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

To show the plot cursor

When you first open a Plot window or pane, the plot cursor is turned off. You can turn the
cursor on in any of the following ways:
 Click anywhere on the plot.
 Press the Left or Right Arrow keys.
 Select Plot > Options, then select Cursor on on the Cursor tab.

To hide the plot cursor

1. Select Plot > Options.
2. Select Cursor off on the Cursor tab in the Plot Options dialog.

To select the cursor function and appearance

1. Select Plot > Options.
2. Select the cursor options on the Cursor tab in the Plot Options dialog.

To move the cursor

You can move the primary cursor with either the Left or Right Arrow keys or by drag-
ging the cursor with the mouse pointer.
 Shift+Left or Right Arrow keys moves the primary cursor at fast speed.
 Ctrl+Left or Right Arrow keys or Ctrl+click and drag with the mouse moves the
secondary cursor(s).
 Shift+Ctrl+Left or Right Arrow keys moves the secondary cursor(s) at fast speed.

To select the cursor amplitude values to display

You can display additional amplitude values with multiple cursors. The amplitude values
at the cursor or cursors appear below the plot in the cursor options region.
1. Select Plot > Options.
2. Select the amplitude values under Y Extra on the Cursor tab.

Change the Plot Number Formats

You can change the format of floating point (real) numbers that appear on plots, including
selecting different formats for the axes, labels, and cursor values. The formats include
metric, scientific, engineering, and fixed formats. The number formats you select apply to
all plots in Emonitor.
1. Select Setup > Options > Number Formats.

212
 • • • • •
10 • Using Plots

2. Select the part of Emonitor for which you want to change number formats (Format
for):
 Plot Axes and Labels - Sets the number format for the values that appear on the
plot axes and plot labels.
 Plot Cursor Values - Sets the number format for the amplitude values at the cur-
sor.
3. Select the Type of value you want to change.
4. Select a Format style and the Format options. The examples in the dialog show you
how the new number format looks.
5. Repeat steps 2, 3, and 4 until you are satisfied with the number formats.

Change the Plot Point and Line Style

This affects only the point and point connectors on the plot in the active pane. You can
change the plot point and line style for any plot type.

1. Select Plot > Options.

2. Select the style for the Point Connector and the Point Marker on the Styles tab in
the Plot Options dialog. Note that the options in the dialog are different for each plot
type.

Change the Archive Data Storage Flag from a Plot

You can change the storage flag for an archive data measurement in the active Plot pane.
Note that for plots displaying multiple measurements (for example, trend and overlay) the
current measurement is the cursored measurement on the plot.
1. For plots displaying multiple measurements (such as trend and overlay plots), move
the cursor to the desired measurement.

213
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

2. Select Plot > Storage Flag. This displays a submenu of available storage flags. A
check mark appears next to the current storage flag.
3. Select the desired storage flag. This changes the storage flag for the archive data mea-
surement.
You can also change the storage flag in the Archive Data pane. See “Select Archive Data
Storage Flags” on page 189.

Display Alarms on a Plot

You can select both the alarm types and the alarm severities you want to display on plots.
This affects only the plot in the active pane. For more information on alarms, refer to the
section on “Using Alarms”.
1. Select Plot > Options.
2. Select one or more Alarm types you want to display on the Alarms tab of the Plot
Options dialog. The options in the dialog are different for each plot type.
3. Select one or more Alarm severities you want to display.
4. Select Fill alarms if you want Emonitor to color the area of the alarm on the plot.

The alarms appear on the plots in the same color as the alarm severity color. See “Edit
Severity Levels” on page 132.

If you do not select any Alarm Severities, Emonitor does not display any alarms on the plot.

Display and Hide the Plot Grid Lines

This affects only the grid lines on the plot in the active pane.

To show the grid lines on a plot

1. Select Plot > Options.

214
 • • • • •
10 • Using Plots

2. Select Grid lines on the Styles tab of the Plot Options dialog.

To hide the grid lines on a plot

1. Select Plot > Options.
2. Clear Grid lines on the Styles tab of the Plot Options dialog.

Pressing G toggles the grid lines on and off for the active plot.

Display Notes and Inspection Codes

Emonitor can display notes and inspection codes on a plot. The notes and inspection codes
appear on the plot, and can be printed with the plot. For information on entering and edit-
ing notes on a plot, see “Enter and Edit Notes on a Plot” on page 215.
Press N to display the notes and inspection codes on a trend plot. Press N again to hide the
notes and inspection codes.

Enter and Edit Notes on a Plot

You can enter text directly onto trend, spectrum, and time waveform plots. Any notes that
appear on the plot also appear when you print the plot. Depending on the plot type, you
can add text at two places:
 Above the data at the cursor on trend, spectrum, and time waveform plots.
 In the upper corner of the plot on spectrum and time waveform plots.

215
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

Any inspection codes stored with the data also appear on the plot. You can edit the inspec-
tion codes as well as the plot notes. To display and hide notes on a plot, see “Display
Notes and Inspection Codes” on page 215.

The cursor must be turned on before you can edit or enter notes on a plot. If the Inside Back-
ground and the Description Labels are set to the same color, the note will not be visible on the
plot. See “Change the Plot Colors and fonts” on page 211.

You can also enter notes that appear on a plot in the Alarm Event Log pane. See “Add a
Note to an Alarm Event” on page 162.

To enter notes at the cursor on a plot

1. Click the plot pane, and move the cursor to the desired measurement in the plot.
2. Select Plot > Notes.
3. Type in the note.
4. Click Add.

To enter notes in the upper corner of a spectrum or time

waveform plot
1. Move to the plot, and make sure the cursor is turned on.
2. Select Plot > Notes.
3. Select For measurement, and then type in the note.
4. Click Add.

To format the plot note

You can use HTML-style formatting tags to format the plot notes. The word “text” repre-
sents the text of the plot note.

Tag Purpose
<h1>text</h1> Heading - bold text, follow by a line break
<b>text</b> Bold text
<i>text</i> Italic text
<u>text</u> Underline text
<br> Add a line break (empty line). You can also press
the Enter key to add a line break.
<top>text Place the note above the cursored point.

216
 • • • • •
10 • Using Plots

Tag Purpose
<bottom>text Place the note below the point.
<right>text Place the note to the right of the point. This is the
default for plot notes.
<center>text Place the note above/below the point.
<left>text Place the note to the left of the point.

You can also use carriage returns (Enter key) to create multi-line notes. This is the same
as using the <br> tag.

To edit or delete notes and inspection codes on a plot

1. Click the plot pane, and make sure the cursor is turned on.
2. To edit a note or inspection code at a measurement, move the cursor to the point on the
plot.
3. Select Plot > Notes.
4. Select At cursor, or For measurement, depending on the location of the note or
inspection code you want to edit.
5. The note or inspection code appears in the dialog. Edit the note and click Replace. To
delete it, click Delete.

Working with Trend Plots

Trend plots are best for showing how measurements change over time. The plot is graph
of the amplitude of a measurement against time, usually displaying the trend in a magni-
tude or process measurement over days, weeks, or months. See “Trend plot description” in
the Emonitor online help.
Frequency trend plots work with a spectrum plot to show you the change in amplitude of a
particular frequency. Band frequency trend plots show the change in amplitude in a band.

Compare Trends in an XY Plot

You can plot two trends against each other in an XY plot. The plot shows you how the val-
ues in one trend vary with respect to the values in the other trend.
One use for an XY plot is to plot the change in vibration against the change in some other
parameter. For example, if you record the operating speed, load, or temperature, you could
plot the vibration against one of those parameters.

217
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

1. Display an XY plot in a Plot window.

2. Select Plot > Options.
3. On the X Axis tab of the Plot Options dialog, select the trend to be the reference.
Usually the data on the X-axis is the reference data. In the example of plotting vibra-
tion against temperature, choose the temperature trend for the X axis.

If you want to use the currently selected measurement definition for the X-axis, click the Lock
button.

4. On the Y Axis tab, select the trend to be plotted against the reference. Usually the data
on the Y-axis is the data that varies with respect to the data on the X-axis. In the exam-
ple of plotting vibration against temperature, choose the vibration trend for the Y axis.

Display Curve Fits on Trend Plots

You can display two types of curve fits on trend plots. A curve fit may help you estimate
the time until a machine’s component fails. Emonitor draws the curve fit by continuing the
trend of the data beyond the end of the data.
1. Display a trend plot in a Plot window.
2. Select Plot > Options.
3. Select the type of curve fit you want to see (Linear and/or Power) on the Styles tab of
the Plot Options dialog.
4. Enter the number of points you want Emonitor to use for the curve fit.

The power curve fit does not display if any of the Points to fit have a value that is less than
or equal to zero.

You can also use the following keys to display the curve fit:

Action Keys
Begin the curve fit from the cursored point F
Toggle the linear curve fit on/off C
Toggle the power curve fit on/off W
Move the cursor between the trend and the Ctrl+Up Arrow
curve fit lines
Move the cursor back to the trend line Ctrl+Down Arrow

218
 • • • • •
10 • Using Plots

Synchronize the X Axis in Trend Plots

You can force the X axis of the trend plots in a Plot window to match the active trend plot
X axis. This allows you to easily compare data in different plot panes over the same date
range, since the X axis would be the same in all the synchronized trend plot panes. You
can synchronize the X axis in trend, advisory, and average trend plots.

If the current plot X axis is set to autoscale, the X axis for other synchronized plots will match the
actual X axis limits. In other words, the other X axes do not autoscale to their own data.

1. Display two or more trend plot panes in a Plot window.

2. Select Plot > Options.
3. Select Synchronize on the X axis tab of the Plot Options dialog.

Use Frequency Trend and Band Frequency Trend Plots

The frequency trend and band frequency trend plots are similar to regular trend plots in
that they display the trend of a value over time.
 The frequency trend plot displays the trend of a single frequency from a spectrum plot
over time. It can also display the trend of either the band maximum amplitude or the
band sum over time for a single band defined in a spectrum plot.
 The frequency band trend displays the trend of either the band peak or the band sum
over time for all the bands defined in the band set for the location.

The Frequency Lock must be active in order to display the trend of the cursored frequency or
band in a frequency trend plot. See “Lock the Frequency Cursors Together” on page 226 for
more information.

To display a frequency trend plot

1. Select Window > Plots.
2. Click New to select the type of plot for the window, then select the Spectrum plot
type in the Change Plot Pane dialog.
3. Select Plot > Options. On the Cursor tab, select the Normal cursor for the Cursor
type. Then select Cursor on to turn on the cursor, and click OK.
4. Move the cursor to the frequency you want to trend in the spectrum plot.
5. Select View > Split Horizontal or View > Split Vertical to split the Plot window.
6. Select Freq. Trend for the Pane type in the Change Plot Pane dialog.
7. The frequency trend plot displays the trend of the frequency under the cursor in the
spectrum plot. You can move the cursor in the spectrum plot to a different frequency.

219
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

Emonitor automatically updates the frequency trend plot for the new frequency. The
frequency trend plot displays the same frequency units as the spectrum plot.

To sort the frequency trend by machine speed

You can sort the frequency trend by the machine speed stored with the archive data.

When you sort the data by machine speed, the X axis reflects the relative machine speed, not
the measurement dates. This option is only available if the overlay type is None, and not Cur-
rent list.

1. Display a frequency trend plot in a Plot window.

2. Select Plot > Options, or double-click on the X axis plot region on the plot.
3. On the X Axis tab, select Sort by machine speed.

To display a single band frequency trend from a spectrum plot

1. Select Window > Plots.
2. Click New to select the type of plot for the window, then select the Spectrum plot
type in the Change Plot Pane dialog.
3. Select Plot > Cursor Options, and select the Band cursor for the Cursor type. Then
select Cursor on to turn on the cursor, and click OK.
4. Move the band cursors to the define the band you want to trend in the spectrum plot.
5. Select View > Split Horizontal or View > Split Vertical to split the plot window.
6. Select the Freq. Trend for the Pane Type in the Change Plot Pane dialog.
 The frequency trend plot displays the trend of the band peak or the band sum for
the band that you define in the spectrum plot. You can move the cursors in the
spectrum plot to change the band. Emonitor automatically updates the frequency
trend plot for the new frequency band. The band frequency trend plot displays the
same frequency units as the spectrum plot.
 You can change the frequency trend plot to display either the band peak or the
band sum with Plot > Options.

To display a band frequency trend plot

The band frequency trend plot can contain multiple plots: one for each band defined in the
band set for the location. For example, if you define four frequency bands in the band set
for the location, then the band frequency trend plot displays four individual plot panes.
The band set definition also controls whether the band trend shows the band peak or the
band sum in each individual band trend plot.

220
 • • • • •
10 • Using Plots

The band set is defined as part of the category for the location. For more information on
band sets, see “Use Band Sets and Band Variables in Alarms” on page 140 and see “Add
and Edit Equipment Categories” on page 99.
1. Select Window > Plots.
2. Click New to select the type of plot for the window, then select the Band Freq. Trend
in the Change Plot Pane dialog.
3. The band frequency trend plot displays the individual band frequency trends for each
band defined for the location of the current measurement definition. The band fre-
quency trend plot displays the same frequency units as the spectrum plot. Note that if
there is no band set defined for the location of the current measurement definition,
then the band frequency trend plot is empty.

Working with Spectrum Plots

Spectrum plots display a graph of amplitude against frequency for spectrum measure-
ments. See “Spectrum plot description” in the Emonitor online help.
You can use the cursor in a spectrum plot to define the frequency you want to see in a fre-
quency trend plot or band frequency trend plot. See “Use Frequency Trend and Band Fre-
quency Trend Plots” on page 219.
In addition you can identify the machine components that may be generating specific
machine frequencies on a plot. See “Identify Frequencies in Plots” on page 266.

Display Bearing Cursors for a Particular Bearing

You can select a bearing manufacturer and model from the bearing database, and display a
set of bearing cursors for that bearing. This function is available for all spectrum plots
(including spectrum map plots) in Emonitor.
1. Make the spectrum plot pane active by clicking in the pane.
2. Press B to display the Bearing Selector dialog.
3. Select the bearing manufacturer and model. When you select the model, Emonitor dis-
plays the bearing cursors at the frequencies for that bearing.
4. You can hide or display the Bearing Selector dialog by pressing B again when the
plot pane is active.
You can also display the Bearing Cursor pane, and use that to select the bearing manufac-
turer and model.
1. Make the spectrum plot pane active by clicking in the pane.

221
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

2. Split the spectrum plot with View > Split Horizontal or View > Split Vertical.
3. Select the bearing manufacturer and model in the Bearing Cursor pane. When you
select the model, Emonitor displays the bearing cursors at the frequencies for that
bearing.

Change the Stored Operating Speed in a Spectrum

You can change the stored operating speed for a spectrum measurement while in the spec-
trum plot. This allows you to identify and store an operating speed by moving the cursor
to the peak at an order of operating speed, and then store that speed in the database.

This affects only the operating speed in the archive data, and does not change the machine
speed for the location.

To store the cursored operating speed

1. Move the primary cursor to the operating speed (1X) in the spectrum plot.
2. Press Ctrl+I. Emonitor performs a true peak calculation to identify the actual operat-
ing speed at the peak. Emonitor then stores the operating speed at the calculated peak
as the operating speed in the archive data.
3. If the plot X axis is in orders and uses automatic scaling, Emonitor redraws the plot
with the new X axis scaling.

To store the cursored operating speed using orders

1. Move the primary cursor to a peak representing a multiple of the operating speed in
the spectrum plot.
2. Press Ctrl+O, and enter the orders of operating speed in the dialog.
3. Click OK. Emonitor performs a true peak calculation to identify the actual operating
speed at the peak using the order number you entered. Emonitor then stores the operat-
ing speed at the calculated peak as the operating speed in the archive data for the spec-
trum.
4. If the plot X axis is in orders and uses automatic scaling, Emonitor redraws the plot
with the new X axis scaling.

Display and Hide the Band Overall Amplitude

Hiding the band overall amplitude gives you a small amount of additional space in a spec-
trum plot pane. This affects only the band limited overall amplitude on the plot in the
active pane.

222
 • • • • •
10 • Using Plots

To show the band overall amplitude on a plot

1. Select Plot > Options.
2. Select Band overall amplitude on the Styles tab.

To hide the band overall amplitude on a plot

1. Select Plot > Options.
2. Clear Band overall amplitude on the Styles tab.
See also “Spectrum plot description” in the Emonitor online help.

Change the Units in a Spectrum

You can change the units in a spectrum plot while in the spectrum plot. The preferred units
are those that appear in Emonitor. You determine the preferred units with Setup > Units >
Standard Units and Setup > Units > User Defined Units. See “Edit Measurement
Units” on page 62.
To change to the next preferred unit:
 Double-click the Y axis units plot region.
 Press Tab to move the highlight to the Y axis units plot region and press Spacebar.

Display Spectra in a Spectrum Map Plot

A spectrum map plot, also called a waterfall plot, is a three-dimensional plot containing
multiple spectrum plots. You can display a history of data for a single spectrum measure-
ment definition. You can also overlay the latest data for the spectrum measurement defini-
tions in a list. For more information on overlaying data from a list, see “Overlay data in a
Plot” on page 231.

To evenly space the spectra in the plot

The spectrum data for a measurement definition may not be spaced at even time intervals.
This can lead to a plot with a few spectra widely spaced out, and the rest of the spectra
bunched together. You can evenly space the spectra for better viewing.

When you evenly space spectra in a map plot, the Z (date) axis does not reflect the actual mea-
surement dates.

1. Display a spectrum map plot in a Plot window.

2. Select Plot > Options, or double-click on the Z axis plot region on the plot.
3. Select Evenly spaced data on the Styles tab.

223
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

To sort the spectra by machine speed

You can sort the spectra for a spectrum measurement definition by the machine speed
stored with the archive data.

When you sort the spectra in a map plot by machine speed, the Z (date) axis reflects the relative
machine speed, not the measurement dates. This option is only available if the overlay type is
Archive, and not Current list.

1. Display a spectrum map plot in a Plot window.

2. Select Plot > Options, or double-click on the Z axis plot region on the plot.
3. Select Sort by machine speed on the Z Axis tab.

To change the spectrum map plot axis orientation

You can change the orientation of the spectrum map plot axes by dragging the back right
corner to a new location. To change the orientation, double-click the back corner and drag
it to the new location.

224
 • • • • •
10 • Using Plots

See also “Spectrum Map plot description” in the Emonitor online help.

Compare Spectra in a Spectrum Difference/Ratio Plot

You can directly compare two spectra in a spectrum difference/ratio plot. The plot empha-
sizes the difference at each spectral line between the spectra. You can compare the spectra
in two ways:
 A spectrum difference plot subtracts one spectrum from the other. The result is a spec-
trum of the difference at each spectral line.
 A spectrum ratio plot divides one spectrum by the other. The result is a spectrum of
the ratio at each spectral line.
1. Display a spectrum difference/ratio plot in a Plot window.
2. Select Plot > Options command.
3. On the Data tab, select the spectrum to be the reference. For a difference plot, the dif-
ference spectrum is the current spectrum minus the reference spectrum. For a ratio
plot, the ratio spectrum is the current spectrum divided by the reference spectrum.

If you want to use the current spectrum as the reference, click Lock.

4. On the Styles tab, select either Difference or Ratio under Data operator to select the
type of plot.
5. In the Database window, move to the spectrum measurement that you want to com-
pare to the reference spectrum. The plot automatically displays the difference or ratio.

The date and time displayed on the plot is the date and time of the current spectrum, not the
reference spectrum.

225
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

Label a Frequency in a Spectrum

You can label the frequency in a spectrum plot. This displays the frequency at the cursor
directly on the plot. Any labeled frequencies that appear on a plot also appear when you
print the plot.
Press L to label the frequency at the cursor. To erase frequency labels, do one of the fol-
lowing:
 Move to a different measurement, then move back to the original measurement.
 Press P twice.

Label the Highest Peaks in a Spectrum Plot

Emonitor can display the frequencies of the highest peaks in a spectrum plot. This lets you
identify all peaks above a threshold value in the spectrum. Peak labels that appear on the
plot also appear when you print the plot.

To set the peak threshold

1. Display a spectrum plot in a Plot window.
2. Select Plot > Options.
3. Select the threshold on the Styles tab. Remember that Emonitor labels the peaks above
the threshold.

To label the highest peaks

Press P to label the frequencies for the highest peaks in a spectrum plot. Press P again to
erase the peak labels.

Lock the Frequency Cursors Together

You can lock the frequency cursors in a Plot window together so that moving one cursor
to a different frequency moves all the frequency cursors. For example, suppose you open a
plot window and split it into a spectrum and spectrum map plots. If the frequency lock is

226
 • • • • •
10 • Using Plots

on, then when you move the cursor to a different frequency in one plot, the cursor in the
other plot moves to the same frequency.
Select Plot > Frequency Lock to lock the frequency cursors together. Select the com-
mand again to unlock the cursors.

This only works for plot panes in the same Plot window.

Working with Image and ActiveX plots

You can store and view images and ActiveX documents in the Emonitor database. Emon-
itor displays images and ActiveX documents in plot windows.

Display Images
You can store images in the Emonitor database. Images are pictures or other graphical
information that is part of your Predictive Maintenance program. There are two types of
images in Emonitor:
 Hierarchy images - These are pictures associated with an item in the Hierarchy Tree.
For example, you might store a picture of a machine, or the location of the machine in
the plant.
 Archive data images - These are pictures stored with the archive data, and associated
with an image measurement definition. For example, you might store thermographic
images of a machine, documenting changes over time.
You display images in Plot windows, the same way that you display plots. You can think
of images as another type of plot. For more information on images in Emonitor, see “Edit
Information for a Hierarchy Item” on page 66 and “Store Archive Image Data” on page
186.

To enlarge an image (zoom in)

You can enlarge the image in steps of 5% by doing one of the following:
 Click the image. Emonitor continues to enlarge the image in steps of 5% as long as
you hold down the mouse button.
 Press + on the numeric keypad. Emonitor continues to enlarge the image in steps of
5% as long as you hold down the + key.

To reduce an image (zoom out)

You can reduce the image in steps of 5% by doing one of the following:

227
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

 Right-click the image. Emonitor continues to reduce the image in steps of 5% as long
as you hold down the mouse button.
 Press - on the numeric keypad. Emonitor continues to reduce the image in steps of 5%
as long as you hold down the - key.

To fit the image to the Plot window

You can make the image as large as possible while still showing all of the image in the
Plot window. Do one of the following
 Double-click the image.
 Press Enter.

To pan the image left, right, up, and down

You can pan the image when it is larger than the plot window by doing one of the follow-
ing:
 Use the scroll bars on the Plot window to scroll the image.
 Use the arrow keys to scroll the image.

Display ActiveX Documents

You can store ActiveX documents and links to ActiveX documents in the Emonitor data-
base. This allows you to access information created by other programs that support
ActiveX, such as thermographic images. You can also store ActiveX documents such as
word processor documents or spreadsheets.
 You can store a copy of the ActiveX document in the Emonitor database. If you then
change the copy stored in Emonitor, it does not change the original document.
 You can store a link to the ActiveX document in the Emonitor database. If you then
change the document using the link, you make changes to the original document.
For more information on storing ActiveX documents in Emonitor, see “Store ActiveX
Documents” on page 187.

To view an ActiveX document

You view ActiveX documents in Plot windows, although ActiveX documents are very dif-
ferent from plots.
1. Select Window > Plots.
2. Click New in the Select Plot View dialog.
3. Select ActiveX Document as the pane type in the Change Plot Pane dialog.

228
 • • • • •
10 • Using Plots

You can also save a view that includes an Active X pane. See “Saving and Recalling
Panes in a View” on page 22.

To make changes to an ActiveX document

You can view or make changes to the ActiveX document in Emonitor, using the program
that created the document. Note that the associated program must be available to your
computer.
1. Display the ActiveX document in a Plot window.
2. Double-click the document in the Plot window to start the program associated with
that type of ActiveX document. The program “takes over” the Emonitor window.
3. When done viewing or changing the document, exit the program associated with the
ActiveX document.
When you exit the program associated with the ActiveX document, the changes are saved
according to the way you stored the document in Emonitor.
 If you stored the document itself in Emonitor, then program saves the changes to the
document in the Emonitor database.
 If you stored a link to the document, then the program saves the changes to the origi-
nal document.

Selecting Data for Plotting

One of the most powerful parts of Emonitor is the ability to display and print a variety of
plots. However, your database may contain years of data for hundreds of measurement
definitions, and you may want to select specific data to display.
There are many ways to select the data you want to display on a plot:
 You can limit the data with the archive filter. This allows you to exclude archive data
before a certain date, or outside a certain date range.
 You can unlink a Plot window from the other windows, so that the Plot window does
not change when you move to a different measurement definition or location in the
Database or List window.
 You can overlay data in a plot, creating an overlay plot from the archive data for a
measurement definition, or from the current list.
 You can lock a plot pane to a particular unit/filter combination, or to a particular
machine, location, or direction. This defines a set of characteristics for a measurement
definition. When you move to a different location in the database, Emonitor displays
the measurement definition that matches the locked pane characteristics. For example,

229
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

you can move from location to location, viewing measurements with the same unit/fil-
ter combination without having to search for them in the database.
 You can select the data to display by selecting it in the Database window. This allows
you to find locations and measurement definitions for plotting by scanning through
the database.
 You can create or recall a list of measurement definitions to display from the List win-
dow.
 You can use the Remote Control toolbar to move to different measurements without
having to use the Database window.
In addition, you can use the same methods to select hierarchy or archive data images, and
ActiveX documents in Plot windows.

Limit Plot Data with the Archive Filter

You can limit the archive data for plotting by using the archive filter. This allows you to:
 Limit the number of points in a trend plot.
 Limit the number of points in an overlay plot.
 Limit the number of spectrum measurements in a spectrum map plot.
For example, you may have five years of data in your database, but want to see trends of
the data for only the last six months. You can use the same method to display hierarchy
and archive data images in Plot windows.
1. Select Tools > Archive Filter Settings.
2. Define the setting for the archive filter. You can choose to include only data after the
baseline measurement, or after a certain date. You can also use a date range to select
the data. Note that if you select Since baseline, and there is no baseline measurement
for the measurement definition, the archive filter excludes all data for that measure-
ment definition. You can also include the baseline measurement, even if it would oth-
erwise be excluded.
3. Activate the archive filter. Select Tools > Archive Filter. The archive filter is active
when there is a check mark by the command on the Tools menu.

Unlink a Plot from other Windows

When you open a Plot window, it is linked to the Database, List windows, and any Report
windows. This means that when you move to a different machine, location, or measure-
ment definition in one of the windows, Emonitor automatically updates the Plot window.

230
 • • • • •
10 • Using Plots

This can make it difficult to directly compare plots from two different machines or loca-
tions on a machine.
When you unlink a plot, Emonitor does not update the Plot window when you move to a
different location or measurement definition in other windows. This allows you to view
plots from two locations or machines at the same time. Note that the plotting shortcut keys
and the Remote Control toolbar continue to work with the unlinked plot, allowing you to
display different measurements from the database.

You can also “lock” a Plot pane to a machine, location, measurement definition, unit/filter combi-
nation, or storage flag. This allows you to view data from different machines or locations in the
same Plot window. For more information, see “Use Pane Locking with Plots” on page 233.

1. Select Window > Database. Select the Measurement view in the Select View dialog.
2. Select Window > Plots to open a Plot window. Select a view, or click New to select
the plot type.
3. Select Plot > Linked to unlink the plot from the Database window. Note that the title
bar for the plot window now contains the word Unlinked.
4. Move to different locations in the Database window. Note that the Plot window does
not change.

Minimizing a Plot window also unlinks the Plot window.

Overlay data in a Plot

You can overlay data on an overlay plot from several sources:
 The current list of measurement definitions
 The archive data for the current measurement definition
 The other measurement definitions at the same location (trend plots only).
This allows you to visually compare the data in several different plot types. You can also
overlay data for plots that are part of a location plot or measurement definition plot.
You can use the archive filter to limit the data that appears in an archive data overlay plot.
Otherwise, the overlay plot displays all the archive data for the measurement definition.
See “Limit Plot Data with the Archive Filter” on page 230.

If you try to overlay data from the current list, and the current list is empty, Emonitor does not dis-
play any data on the plot. Also, plot notes are not available on overlay plots from the current list.

231
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

To overlay the data on a plot

1. Select Window > Plots to open a plot.
2. Select Plot > Options.
3. Select the overlay type on the Data tab of the Plot Options dialog. Some plot types do
not support overlaying data.
 Select Current list to view an overlay of current data for the measurement defini-
tions in the current list.
 Select Archive to view an overlay of archive data for the current measurement
definition.
 Select Location to view an overlay of archive data for all the measurement defini-
tions at the current location. Note that overlaid trend plots keep their units, and are
plotted on a scale of amplitude (for example, measurements in ips are not con-
verted to g’s when overlaid with measurements in g’s).

To change overlay colors and markers

You can define up to eight unique colors and point markers for overlay plots.
1. Select Window > Plots to open a plot.
2. Select Plot > Options.
3. Select the overlay type on the Data tab of the Plot Options dialog. Some plot types do
not support overlaying data.
4. Select Plot > Colors.
5. Under Plot Elements, select colors for Active Data, Other Data, and Overlay Data 1–
6.
6. Select Plot > Options.
7. On the Styles tab in the Plot Options dialog, select Overlay for the Point marker

To display the overlay legend

You can display an Overlay Legend pane that shows the color and point marker used for
each overlay.
1. Click the overlay plot to make it active.
2. Select View > Split Horizontal or View > Split Vertical.
3. In the Change Plot Pane dialog, select Overlay Legend.
An asterisk indicates the current active measurement definition in the overlay plot.

232
 • • • • •
10 • Using Plots

Use Pane Locking with Plots

Locking allows you to fix certain attributes of the data displayed in a plot pane. For exam-
ple, you can lock the unit/filter combination for a plot pane. After locking to a unit/filter,
the plot pane shows only data from measurement definitions with that unit/filter combina-
tion.
Using pane locking allows you to move to different locations and see the same type of
measurement at each location. This means you do not have to find the matching measure-
ment definition each time you move to a new location. There are many ways to use plot
pane locking:
 A latest/latest-1 plot showing the latest measurement and the previous measurement
 An HVA plot showing the horizontal, vertical, and axial measurements for a location
 A current/previous plot showing the current measurement and the previous measure-
ment
 A baseline/current plot showing the current measurement and the baseline measure-
ment
 A plot of one particular measurement and any other measurement.
Plot pane locking is available with any plot type except location, measurement definition,
and XY plots.

If you move to a measurement definition or location in the Database or List window for which
there is no data matching the locked pane, then Emonitor leaves that plot pane empty.

To lock a plot pane

 Select Plot > Options. Then select the locking options on the Data tab of the Plot
Options dialog.
 Click the Lock button on the Plot toolbar. This locks the active plot pane to the cur-
rently displayed unit/filter combination.
<Linked> or <Target Date Time> in the dialog means that the plot pane is linked to the
Database and List windows at that level. Wherever <Linked> or <Target Date Time>
appears, the plot updates at that level when you move in the Database or List windows.

233
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

Note the asterisks (*) next to the unit and filter in the plot pane legend to the right of the
plot. They tell you the pane is locked at the measurement+filter level.
Leaving the plot pane linked at the archive level means the plot shows the data closest to
the target date time for the measurement definition.
For an HVA plot, you would split a plot window into three panes, then lock each pane to a
different direction.

You cannot lock an overlay plot. If any of the options under Overlay type in the Data tab of the
Pane Options dialog are selected, the locking options are not available.

To lock a plot at the archive level

You can use plot pane locking to lock a pane to the latest measurement, the previous mea-
surement, the baseline measurement, and so on. For example, this allows you to compare
the latest trend measurement with a baseline measurement. There are several ways to lock
a plot pane at the archive level:
 <Target Date Time> - Display the measurement closest to the target date time.
 <Target Date Time-1> - Display the measurement prior to the measurement closest
to the target date time.
 <Latest> - Display the latest measurement.
 <Latest-1> - Display the measurement prior to the latest measurement.
 Archive storage flags (New, Archive, Baseline, …) - Display the latest measurement
with the selected storage flag.

234
 • • • • •
10 • Using Plots

Plot Data from the Database Window

You can select the data to display in a Plot window simply by moving around in the Data-
base window. For example, to see a plot of a particular measurement definition, you can
select the machine in the Hierarchy Tree, then the location, then the measurement defini-
tion, and finally the archive data measurement. You can use the same method to display
hierarchy and archive data images, and ActiveX documents in Plot windows.

To open the Database window and a Plot window

1. Select Window > Database. Select the Measurement view in the Select View dialog.
2. Select Window > Plots to open a Plot window. Select a view in the Select View dia-
log, or click New and select a plot type from the Change Plot Pane dialog.
3. Select Window > Tile Horizontal or Window > Tile Vertical to tile the two win-
dows. This lets you see both windows at the same time.

To select a location or measurement definition to plot

 For a location plot - Select the machine in the Hierarchy Tree, and then select the
location in the Location pane of the Database window. Emonitor automatically
updates the Plot window, opening one pane for each active measurement definition for
the selected location. Note that a location plot does not show inactive measurement
definitions.
 For a measurement definition plot - Select the machine in the Hierarchy Tree, the
location in the Location pane, and the measurement definition in the Measurement
Definition pane. You can open the Archive Data pane in the Database window to
select the particular measurement you want to display. Emonitor automatically
updates the Plot window, changing the measurement definition plot so that it contains
the correct plot type for the selected measurement definition.
 For trend, spectrum, time waveform, and other plots - Select the machine in the
Hierarchy Tree, the location in the Location pane, and the measurement definition in
the Measurement Definition pane. You can open the Archive Data pane in the Data-
base window to select the particular measurement you want to display.
You can also lock a plot to make it display data from a particular machine, location, mea-
surement definition, or archive storage flag.
 Select Plot > Options and set the locking options on the Data tab of the Plot Options
dialog.

235
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

 Click the Lock button on the toolbar to lock the plot to the currently displayed unit/fil-
ter combination.

Locked plots do not automatically show the plot of the current measurement defini-
tion. Instead, Emonitor displays the data that matches the locking definition for the pane.
This allows you to move around in the database without having to select the correct mea-
surement definition each time you move. See “Use Pane Locking with Plots” on page 233 for
more information.

Plot Data from the Measurement Definition Pane

You can select the data to display in the Plot window by selecting a measurement defini-
tion in the Measurement Definition pane in the Database window. This allows you to dis-
play a plot of the measurement in alarm.

To plot data with alarms from the Measurement Definition pane, the pane must show the alarm
status indicators. Make the Measurement Definition pane active (click in the pane), and select
View > Pane Options. Select the Alarm Severity check boxes. For more information, see “Dis-
play the Current Alarm Status” on page 155.

To display a plot with the current alarm status

You can display a plot of the most recent data for a measurement definition. If the current
status indicator shows that the measurement definition is in alarm, the plot also shows that
alarm. Do either one of the following:
 Click the current alarm status indicator in the Measurement Definition pane. Select
Tools > Alarm Severities > Show Data.
 Right-click the current alarm status indicator in the Measurement Definition pane and
click Show Data.

To display a plot with the unacknowledged alarm status

You can display a plot of the data that caused an unacknowledged alarm for a measure-
ment definition. If the unacknowledged status indicator shows that the measurement defi-
nition is in alarm, the plot also shows that alarm. Otherwise, the plot shows the most
recent data for the measurement definition. Do either one of the following:
 Click the unacknowledged alarm status indicator in the Measurement Definition pane.
Select Tools > Alarm Severities > Show Data.

236
 • • • • •
10 • Using Plots

 Right-click on the unacknowledged alarm status indicator in the Measurement Defini-

tion pane and click Show Data.

Plot Data from the List Window

You can use a list to select the data you want to display in the Plot window. For example,
you can view plots of the measurement definitions in a list that you use for data collection.
This means you do not have to locate all the measurement definitions in the Database win-
dow. You can also open a Plot window for each location in the current list. You can use the
same method to display hierarchy and archive data images, as well as ActiveX documents
in Plot windows.
To open the List window and a Plot window
1. Recall or create a list of locations and measurement definitions. See “Working with
Lists” on page 117.
2. Select Window > List. Select a view in the Select View dialog.
3. Select Window > Plots. Select a view in the Select View dialog, or click New and
select a plot type from the Change Plot Pane dialog.
4. Select Window > Tile Horizontal or Window > Tile Vertical to tile the two win-
dows. This lets you see both windows at the same time.

To select a location or measurement definition to plot

For a list of navigation keys, see “Plotting Shortcut Keys” on page 12.
 For a location plot - Select the location in the List window. Emonitor automatically
updates the Plot window, opening one pane for each active measurement definition for
the selected location. Note that a location plot does not show inactive measurement
definitions.
 For a measurement definition plot - Select the location in the List window. Emoni-
tor automatically updates the Plot window, changing the measurement definition plot
so that it contains the correct plot type for the first measurement definition for the
selected location. You can view the other measurement definitions by pressing PgDn
to move to the next measurement definition for the location, or by using the Remote
Control toolbar.
You can also lock a plot to make it display data from a particular machine, location, mea-
surement definition, or archive storage flag.
 Select Plot > Options and set the locking options on the Data tab of the Plot Options
dialog.

237
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

 Click the Lock button on the toolbar to lock the plot to the currently displayed unit/fil-
ter combination.

Locked plots do not automatically show the plot of the current measurement defini-
tion. Instead, Emonitor displays the data that matches the locking definition for the pane.
This allows you to move around in the database without having to select the correct mea-
surement definition each time you move. See “Use Pane Locking with Plots” on page 233 for
more information.

To open a plot window for each location in a list

That this may take a long time if there are many locations in the current list.

1. Recall or create a list containing the desired locations.

2. Select Window > Plots.
3. Select the Open a window for each location in list check box in the Select View dia-
log.
4. Select a view in the Select View dialog, or click New and select a plot type from the
Change Plot Pane dialog.

Plot Data from the Report Window

You can use a report to select the data you want to display in the Plot window. For exam-
ple, you can view plots of the measurement definitions in a list that you use for data col-
lection. This means you do not have to locate all the measurement definitions in the
Database window. Instead, you could open a Report window with an exception report, and
use that report to select the data to display in a Plot window.

To open a Report window and a Plot window

1. Select Window > Report. Select a report source and a report description in the Print
Reports dialog, and then click Preview. This displays the report on the screen.
2. Select Window > Plots to open a Plot window. Select a view in the Select View dia-
log, or click New and select a plot type from the Change Plot Pane dialog.
3. Select Window > Tile Horizontal or Window > Tile Vertical to tile the two win-
dows. This lets you see both windows at the same time.

To select a measurement definition to plot

To display the data for a particular measurement definition, simply click the data in the
Report window. Note that the Report window cursor changes to a pointing hand when you
move it over “clickable” data.

238
 • • • • •
10 • Using Plots

Use the Remote Control with Plots

You can select the data Emonitor displays in a Plot window with the Remote Control tool-
bar. This allows you to move quickly through the database by clicking the buttons on the
Remote Control toolbar. For example, you can display the plot for the next or previous
item in the Hierarchy Tree, location, measurement definition, or archive data. You can
also display the plot for the next or previous measurement definition or location in the
current list. You can use the same method to display hierarchy and archive data images, as
well as ActiveX documents in Plot windows.

To display the Remote Control toolbar

Select View > Toolbars > Remote Control. A check mark appears next to the command
when the toolbar is displayed.

To close the Remote Control toolbar

Select View > Toolbars > Remote Control.

239
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

240
11 Using Reports
Overview of Creating and Printing Reports
You can use the powerful reporting capabilities in Emonitor to:
 Create custom reports, or use the pre-defined reports that come with Emonitor.
 Select the archive data to include in the report.
 Select the list of locations and measurement definitions to include in a report.
 Include tables of data, or plots, or both in a single report.
 Copy a report to the Windows Clipboard and paste it into another application.
 Print multiple reports with one command, to the screen or to a printer.
 Print reports to an RTF (Rich Text Format) file, or to an ASCII text file, allowing you
to import the report into another application such as a word processor or a spreadsheet
program.
You can preview a report on the computer screen in a Report window, and then print the
report directly from the window. This is useful when creating a new custom report, or
when you want to quickly view a report without having to print it out.

For information on viewing reports in Emonitor Web, see the online help file for the Emonitor
Web Client.

Printing and Viewing Reports

You can easily print or view reports of the data in your database using Window >
Reports. Emonitor comes with many pre-defined reports. You can also create you own
custom reports.
Here are the steps to create a report. The rest of this section discusses these steps in detail.
1. Use the archive filter to limit the archive data.
2. Change the report number format (optional).
3. Select the printer for the report (optional).
4. Select Window > Reports.
5. Select the report description and the report source.
6. Print the reports to the screen, or to a printer. Emonitor can also copy the reports to
ASCII text or RTF files so that you can import the reports into other applications.

241
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

Limit Report Data with the Archive Filter

You can limit the archive data in a report by using the archive filter. For example, you may
have five years of data in your database, but be interested in a report of only the data from
the last six months.

You can override the current archive filter settings when you print the report. See “Print or Dis-
play a Report” on page 242.

To limit the archive data for a report:

1. Select Tools > Archive Filter Settings.
2. Define the setting for the archive filter. You can choose to include only data after the
baseline measurement, or after a certain date. You can also use a date range to choose
the data. Note that if you select Since baseline, and there is no baseline measurement
for the measurement definition, the archive filter excludes all data for that measure-
ment definition.
You can also include the baseline measurement, even if it would otherwise be
excluded.
3. Activate the archive filter by selecting Tools > Archive Filter. The archive filter is
active when there is a check mark by the command from the Tools menu.

Change the Report Number Formats

You can change the format of floating point (real) numbers that appear in reports. The
number formats include metric, scientific, engineering, and fixed formats. The number
formats you select apply to all reports in Emonitor. To change the number formats on
reports:
1. Select Setup > Options > Number Formats.
2. Select the Report values in the Format for list.
3. Select the Type of value to change.
4. Select a Format style and the Format options. The examples in the dialog show you
how the new format looks.

Print or Display a Report

To print a report, you select one or more report descriptions and a report source. Then you
can print the reports to a printer, or view them in a Report window.

242
 • • • • •
11 • Using Reports

To select the printer or plotter for reports

1. Select File > Print Setup. Note that the Print Setup dialog may be different for dif-
ferent printers.
2. Select the printer or plotter, and the other page characteristics.

To print or display reports

You can also assign a button on the Saved Reports toolbar for a report description, then click that
button to display that report for the current list (or the entire database is the current list is empty).
See “Using Toolbars” on page 14.

1. Select Window > Reports.

2. Select one or more Report descriptions. The report description controls the contents
and the formatting of the report. You can select one or more report descriptions to
print or display.
For a listing of the report descriptions, see the Emonitor online help.
3. Select the report source in the Report from box. You can select a list, or report on the
entire database. Note that some reports take a long time if you select the database as
the report source.
4. The data in the report is controlled by the archive filter. The current setting for the
archive filter appears in the dialog. You can override the archive filter setting just for
these reports by selecting Manual and setting the date range.
5. Choose the destination for the report(s):
 Click Preview to display the report in a Report window. If you choose more than
one report description, Emonitor displays each report in its own Report window.
 Click Print to send the report or reports to the current printer or plotter.

To print the report in the active Report window

1. Click the desired Report window.
2. Select one of the following:
 File > Print > To Printer to print the Report window to the current printer.
 File > Print > To File to print the Report window to a file.

Automatic Reports after Unloading/Importing Data

You can set up Emonitor to automatically print one or more reports after you unload data
from a data collector. For example, you might want a report of the measurements in

243
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

exception (measurements that went beyond an alarm) after unloading a list. You can also
print automatic reports after importing data.

To select the reports to print after unloading data

1. Select Tools > Load / Unload.
2. Click Unload Options in the Load / Unload dialog.
3. Select Print reports in the Unload Options dialog, and select one or more report
descriptions. The next time you unload data, Emonitor prints the selected reports,
using the unloaded list as the report source.

To select the reports to print after importing data

1. Select Tools > Data Import.
2. Click Options in the Data Import dialog.
3. Select Print reports in the Data Import Options dialog, and select one or more
report descriptions. The next time you unload data, Emonitor prints the selected
reports, using a list of the imported data as the report source.

Use Reports to Navigate through the Database

Reports on the screen include links to the other windows in Emonitor. If you preview a
report in a Report window, you can click on any data in the body of the report to jump to
that item in the open Database, Plot, and List windows. Note that the mouse pointer
changes from an arrow to a hand when over “clickable” data in the Report window. This
allows you to immediately locate an the source for data that appears in a report.

Open a Report window and a Plot window, then select Window > Tile Horizontal or Window >
Tile Vertical to show both windows. You can then click on a measurement in the Report window
to display the plot for that measurement in the Plot window. This gives you a quick and easy way
to view plots of measurements that are in alarm. For more information, see “Plot Data from the
Report Window” on page 238.

Export a Report to Another Application

You can export an Emonitor report into other applications, such as a spreadsheet or word
processing program. There are three ways to get the data from a report into another appli-
cation: copy the report to the Clipboard, create an ASCII text file, and create an RTF file.

To copy a report to the clipboard

1. Display the report in a Report window. See “Print or Display a Report” on page 242
for more information.

244
 • • • • •
11 • Using Reports

2. Select Edit > Copy, or press Ctrl+C to copy the contents of the Report window to the
Clipboard.
3. Paste the report text into the other application.

This does not copy any plots in the report, and it does not preserve the formatting of the text.
The columns of the text are tab-delimited (separated by the tab character).

To create ASCII text files of reports

When Emonitor creates a report, it can also create an ASCII file containing the same
information as the report. It does not include any plots in the report, and it does not pre-
serve the formatting of the text. The columns in the report are tab-delimited (separated by
the tab character). The file is named [Link], where nn is replaced by a number
from 1 to 99. Emonitor can write up to 99 report files before overwriting existing report
files.
1. Select Window > Reports.
2. Select the desired report descriptions.
3. Select Write report to text file in the Print Reports dialog.
4. Click Print to print the reports to text files.

When you start Emonitor, it restarts the report file numbering at [Link], overwriting any
report files from a previous session.

If you want to save a particular report file, you must rename the file before restarting
Emonitor. You can save the file by doing one of the following:
 Select File > Rename in the Windows Explorer.
 Exiting to the DOS prompt and renaming the file with the RENAME or the COPY
command.
 Moving the report files to a different directory.

To create an RTF file of a report

Saving a report as an RTF file preserves the formatting of the text in the report. It also
includes any plots in the report.
1. Display the report in a Report window. See “Print or Display a Report” on page 242.
2. Select File > Print > To File.
3. Enter a name and select a directory for the RTF file in the Save As dialog.

245
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

Creating Custom Reports

Emonitor comes with a set of predefined report descriptions that allow you to view and
print many useful reports. You may, however, want to create a new report description that
exactly meets your own reporting needs. Emonitor includes a Report Builder that you can
use to make new report descriptions. You can do this in one of two ways:
 Create a new report description.
 Copy and then change an existing report. This is the quickest way to make a new
report description, particularly if the existing report description is close to what you
need.
The process of creating a new report description may seem complicated at first. Copying
and editing an existing report description is a good way to learn this process. In addition,
you can preview a new report on the computer screen to get immediate feedback. See
“Printing and Viewing Reports” on page 241 for details.

Create a New Report Description

You can create custom report descriptions to match your reporting needs. Once you create
the new report description, you can use it to view or print reports with Window >
Reports. You can also save the report descriptions in a specification library. See “Save
and Restore Specification Libraries” on page 98 for more information.

To create a simple report

1. Select Tools > Report Builder.
2. You can either copy an existing report description or create a new one:
 Select a report description and choose Copy to use an existing report description
as a template for the new one.
 Choose New to create a new report description.
3. Enter a Report name and select the Report type. The Emonitor database contains
hundreds of database columns, and the report type is necessary to limit the database
columns for the report. In general, you want to choose a report type that includes only
the level of detail you want in your report. For example, if you want to include archive
data for all the measurement definitions in a list, select the Measurement Def. report
type.
4. Enter the Margins between the edge of the page and the report text.
5. Continue to define the report. You do this by clicking the buttons for the parts of the
report. For example, click Condition to define the report conditions that limit the data.

246
 • • • • •
11 • Using Reports

6. Select Window > Reports to test the new report. Select the report you just created,
and select a report source. Then click Preview to display the report on the screen.
7. If you need to make changes to the report description, repeat the steps above until the
report description is correct.
There are multiple parts to a report description, including the report condition and sorting.
You do not need to define all the parts for every report. The best way to learn about report
descriptions is to study the standard report descriptions that come with Emonitor.

Parts of a report
A picture of a report, showing the different parts, appears below.

The report condition controls the data included in the report. For example, a report on
numeric measurements would use Active Flag = Yes and Data Type = Numeric to limit
the report to only active numeric measurements.

247
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

In addition, report sorting allows you to define the order of groups and information in the
report. If you use grouping in the report description, you must include the grouping col-
umns in the sorting to prevent duplicate information in the final report.

Report column wrapping

Some report columns will wrap to multiple lines if the information does not fit on one
line. These columns include:
 Advisory description
 Advisory information
 Advisory status
 Band group name
 Base type name
 Category name
 Component element name
 Component specification name
 Diagnosis description
 Diagnosis name (Setup / Diagnosis)
 Diagnosis severity name
 Diagnosis symptoms
 Frequency description
 Hierarchy notebook
 Measurement location type name
 Plot notes

Add Date-Time and Special Codes to Reports

You can add special codes to a report description to include the following when you print
a report:
 Current date and time
 Current user name
 Archive filter settings
 Page number

248
 • • • • •
11 • Using Reports

You can add these special codes to report header, page title, and footer. To add special
codes to these parts of a report description, follow these steps:
1. Create or open a report description. Select Tools > Report Builder. See “Create a
New Report Description” on page 246.
2. In the New Report or Edit Report dialog, click the button for the part of the report
you want to change (Header, Footer, …).
3. Press Enter or double-click the empty row at the bottom of the spreadsheet.
4. Click Append Code.
5. Select the desired code and click Use to add the special codes for that part of the report
description.

Edit a Report Description

You can edit an existing report description to change the appearance and the content of a
report. For example, you can add or remove columns in the body of the report, or change
the report page title or format. You can also save the report descriptions in a specification
library. See “Save and Restore Specification Libraries” on page 98 for more information.
To edit a report description:
1. Select Tools > Report Builder.
2. Select the report description you want to edit.
3. Click Edit.
4. Edit the report description in the Edit Report dialog.
See “Create a New Report Description” on page 246 for a description of the different parts
of a report.
The report type controls which database columns are available for use in a report. If you
want to include additional database columns in the edited report, you may need to change
the report type first. Also, if you change the report type, you may see a message telling
you that one or more columns are invalid for the report type. You can choose to delete the
invalid columns, or go back and select a different report type.

Delete a Report Description

Once you delete a report description, you cannot bring it back.

1. Select Tools > Report Builder.

249
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

2. Select the report description you want to delete.

3. Click Delete to delete the selected report description.

Change the Appearance of Plots in Reports

Some of the reports in Emonitor include plots. By default, most plots in reports do not
show any alarms.
Suppose that you want to display all the alarms with an alarm severity of Critical on the
plots in the report. Alternatively, you might want to change the appearance of the plot
point markers, or the color of the plot background in the report (if using a color printer).

To change the appearance of plots in a report

There are two ways you can change the appearance of the plots in a report:
 Edit the report description to make it use a different plot view. “Edit a Report Descrip-
tion” on page 249 for details.
 Edit the plot view used in the report description. This includes editing the report
description to find out the name of the plot view in the report. This process is
described below.
1. Select Tools > Report Builder.
2. Select the desired report description in the Define Report Description dialog, and
click Edit.
3. Click Plots in the Edit Report dialog.
For example, the Last Measurement w/Plots report uses the {auto View} view.
4. Write down the name of the view used in the report, then close the Report Builder dia-
logs.
5. If the view contains a measurement definition or location plot, skip down to the head-
ing “For views with measurement definition or location plots.” If the view does not
contain a location or measurement definition plot, continue with the next step.
6. Select Window > Plots to open a Plot window.
7. Select the same view used in the report from the list of views in the Select View dialog
({auto View} for example) and click OK.
8. Change the characteristics of the plot in the Plot window until it displays the appear-
ance you want in the report.

250
 • • • • •
11 • Using Reports

9. Select View > Save View to save the changed view using the same name. Select the
view name from the list of views in the dialog, then click OK.

The name of the view is case sensitive. This means you must use the same uppercase and low-
ercase letters and punctuation as the name of the view used in the report description.

10. Select Window > Reports to create the report. The plots in the report use the new set
of characteristics in the changed view.

For views with measurement definition or location plots

Measurement definition and location plots are special plots that can display different types
of data. A location plot has one pane of the correct plot type for each measurement defini-
tion in the current location. A measurement definition plot displays the correct plot type
for the current measurement definition.
Plots in a measurement definition or location plot use the default characteristics of the plot
type. This means that you must change the characteristics of the basic plot type (trend,
unit, spectrum, …). For example, a trend plot that is part of a location plot has the charac-
teristics of the basic trend plot.
1. Select Window > Plot to open a Plot window. Click New in the Select View dialog so
that you can choose the plot type.
2. Select the plot type in the Change Plot Pane dialog and choose OK.
3. Change the characteristics of the plot in the Plot window until it displays the charac-
teristics you want in the report.
4. Select Plot > Save as Default to save the changed plot. Note that this saves the char-
acteristics of that plot type as the default for ALL plots of that type that are not part of
an existing view. See “Save a Plot Definition as the Default” on page 204 for more
information.
5. Repeat steps 1 through 4 for the different basic plot types that you want to modify for
your reports (trend, XY, …).
6. Select Window > Reports to create the report. The plots in the report use the new set
of default characteristics.

251
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

252
12 Identifying Diagnostic Frequencies
Overview of Identifying Diagnostic Frequencies
Emonitor gives you the ability to identify a frequency in a vibration spectrum as coming
from a specific component of a machine. You can do this by creating frequency items that
model the vibration characteristics of your machinery. This can be a powerful tool in diag-
nosing problems that show up as vibration in your equipment. It also can help you learn
about the kinds of frequency outputs generated by the different parts of your machinery.

Frequency items are available in the Factory and Enterprise bundles.

With Emonitor, you can choose a frequency in a spectrum plot, and display the closest fre-
quency output. A frequency output is a calculated frequency generated by a frequency
item that you can compare to measured vibration. For example, a motor or a fan generates
a frequency equal to running speed, plus a number of harmonic frequencies.
Suppose you see a peak in a spectrum plot that is growing in amplitude over time. You can
move the cursor to that peak, and display the frequency output closest to that peak right on
the plot. You can also include the closest frequency output in a report.
In order to generate the frequency outputs, you must first enter the frequency items in the
Frequency Item pane. Each frequency item is the source for one or more frequency out-
puts. You can define one or more frequency items for any machine in the Hierarchy Tree.
For example, you can create a motor frequency item and a fan frequency item to model
the frequency outputs of a motor - fan combination.
As you add frequency items, you can connect them by selecting the frequency output from
one frequency item as the input to the next frequency item. Emonitor automatically gener-
ates and displays the frequency outputs from the frequency items in the Frequency Output
pane.
Finally, you can load frequency items when you load a list to a data collector that supports
frequency items. You can then use the frequency items to help identify vibration frequen-
cies while collecting data.

Setting Up Frequency Items

The first step in identifying the frequencies generated by a machine is to set up the fre-
quency items for that machine. Emonitor then uses the frequency items to generate the

253
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

frequency outputs for the machine. There are many types of frequency items, so Emonitor
can generate frequency outputs for a wide range of equipment.

Frequency items are available in the Factory and Enterprise bundles.

The following steps show how to create frequency items. These steps are explained in
more detail in the rest of this section.
1. Select Window > Database. Select the Frequency Setup view in the Select View
dialog.
2. Select the machine in the Hierarchy Tree for which you want to set up frequency
items.
3. Create new frequency items, copy existing frequency items, or paste frequency item
templates in the Frequency Item pane.
4. Connect the frequency items together, so that the output of one frequency item is the
input to the next frequency item in the machine. For example, the Motor frequency
item’s output speed would be the input to the Gearbox frequency item in a motor -
gearbox combination.
5. As you define frequency items, Emonitor displays the frequency outputs for the fre-
quency items in the Frequency Output pane.
For example, suppose that the machine consists of a motor and a fan, coupled by a belt
(e.g. PA FAN #1 in the POWER STATION demo plant). You might set up these frequency
items:

Frequency Item Type Frequency Item Description

Speed Reference Motor Speed
Harmonic Motor Harmonics
Belt Belt
Multiply Blade Pass
Harmonic Fan Harmonics
Bearing Mtr OB Bearing
Bearing Mtr IB Bearing
Bearing Fan IB Bearing
Bearing Fan OB Bearing

254
 • • • • •
12 • Identifying Diagnostic Frequencies

You can then use the frequency outputs to help you identify individual frequencies in a
vibration spectrum plot for the machine.

Add Frequency Items

The steps to add frequency items for a machine in the Hierarchy Tree are similar to those
for adding locations.

Frequency items are available in the Factory and Enterprise bundles.

There are three ways to add frequency items to a machine in the Hierarchy Tree:
 Manually add a new frequency item in the Frequency Item pane.
 Copy the existing frequency items from a different machine, and paste them into the
Frequency Item pane.
 Paste a frequency item template into the Frequency Item pane. Pasting templates is not
described in this topic. For more information, see “Working with Templates” on page
76.

To manually add a frequency item

1. Select Window > Database. Select the Frequency Setup view in the Select View
dialog.
2. Select the machine in the Hierarchy Tree for which you want to add frequency items.

3. Move to the Frequency Item pane by pressing F6 or by clicking the pane.

255
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

4. Select the frequency item type for the first frequency item in the Type column.
5. Edit the definition for the frequency item by displaying the frequency item definition
dialog:
 Double-click in the Definition column, or
 Use the arrow keys to move the to Definition column and press Enter.
6. Click OK to close the frequency item definition dialog when done.
7. Enter or select values for the rest of the columns for the frequency item.

Remember that you can change the columns and the column headers that appear in the Fre-
quency Item pane by selecting View > Pane Options. You could also change to a different
view by selecting the view from the View menu.

To change the frequency output labels

You can change the output labels for frequency outputs for a frequency item. For example,
the default frequency output labels for the Motor Frequency item are RPM, LF, PP, RBP.
You may want to change them to Motor Speed, Line Freq, Pole Pass, and Rotor Bar Pass.
Changing the labels also changes the text in the definition.
1. Open the frequency item definition dialog for the frequency item you want to change
by double-clicking in the Definition column.
2. Move to the Label control in the dialog.
3. Edit the labels. You can return to the default frequency output labels at any time by
clicking Default label. Note that clicking Default label overwrites any changes you
have made to the labels.

To copy existing frequency items

Emonitor only lets you copy the entire group of frequency items for a machine. This pre-
vents you from copying and pasting only part of a set of frequency items, which could
cause unexpected results.
1. Select Window > Database. Select the Frequency Setup view in the Select View
dialog.
2. Find the frequency item(s) you want to copy. You can do this in two ways:
 Use the mouse or the arrow keys to select the correct machine in the Hierarchy
Tree, and then select the frequency item in the Frequency Item pane.
 Select Edit > Find to find and display the frequency item.
3. Move to the Frequency Item pane.

256
 • • • • •
12 • Identifying Diagnostic Frequencies

4. Select Edit > Copy, or press Ctrl+C to copy all the frequency items to the Clipboard.
5. Move to the machine in the Hierarchy Tree where you want to paste the frequency
items.
6. Move to the Frequency Item pane. Select Edit > Paste, or press Ctrl+V.

Connect Frequency Items

Once you have set up the frequency items for a machine, you must connect them together.
You connect the frequency items by selecting the output of one frequency item as the
input to the next, in the same way that the components of the machine are connected
together. In the PA FAN #1 machine in the POWER STATION demo plant, the input to
the Harmonic frequency item (Motor Harmonics) is the output from the Speed Reference
(Motor Speed) frequency item.

Frequency items are available in the Factory and Enterprise bundles.

When the frequency items are connected correctly, the frequency output in the Frequency
Output pane should all be defined. If any of the frequency outputs displays the word
Undefined, it indicates one of three possible problems:
 You have not completely defined one or more frequency items. For example, if you do
not define the Line frequency in the Motor frequency item, frequency outputs
depending on the line frequency will be undefined. This is not a problem if you are not
interested in the undefined frequency outputs.
 You have not connected one or more frequency items. For example, if you do not
select an input to the Bearing frequency item, then all the bearing frequency outputs
will be undefined.
 You define a Speed Reference or Linear to Rotational frequency item to use a value
that does not exist in the database.
For example, suppose a machine is a motor and a fan, coupled with a belt (e.g. PA FAN #1
in the POWER STATION demo plant). You might set up these frequency items:

Frequency Item Type Frequency Item Description

Speed Reference Motor Speed
Harmonic Motor Harmonics
Belt Belt
Multiply Blade Pass

257
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

Frequency Item Type Frequency Item Description

Harmonic Fan Harmonics
Bearing Mtr OB Bearing
Bearing Mtr IB Bearing
Bearing Fan IB Bearing
Bearing Fan OB Bearing

Then you could connect the frequency items:

Input to the Frequency Frequency Item Outputs from the

Item Description Frequency Item
Motor Speed Motor Speed
Motor Speed Motor Harmonics Motor Harmonics
Motor Speed Belt Fan RPM, Belt
Fan RPM Blade Pass Blade Pass
Fan RPM Fan Harmonics Fan Harmonics
Motor Speed Mtr OB Bearing Bearing Frequencies
Motor Speed Mtr IB Bearing Bearing Frequencies
Fan RPM Fan IB Bearing Bearing Frequencies
Fan RPM Fan OB Bearing Bearing Frequencies

There are several things to note about this table:

1. The frequency output of the Motor Speed frequency item is used as the input to the
Motor Harmonics, Belt, Mtr OB Bearing, and Mtr IB Bearing frequency items.
2. One of the frequency outputs of the Belt frequency item (Fan RPM) is used as the
input to the Blade Pass, Fan Harmonics, Fan IB Bearing, and Fan OB Bearing fre-
quency items.
3. “Fan RPM” is not the default label for the frequency output of the Belt Frequency
item. The default label is “Output.” This shows how you can change the frequency
output label to better identify the frequency outputs.
4. There is no Motor frequency item. A Speed Reference frequency item provides the
input speed to the train of equipment. In the PA FAN #1 machine in the POWER STA-

258
 • • • • •
12 • Identifying Diagnostic Frequencies

TION demonstration plant, the Speed Reference uses the speed stored with the spec-
trum archive data in the database as the input speed (PA FAN #1, MTR-OB-HORIZ,
spectrum ips). See “Use the Speed Reference Frequency Item” on page 260 for details
on using the Speed Reference frequency item.

Types of Frequency Items

There are many different types of frequency items that you can use to model the frequency
generation characteristics of your machinery. Each frequency item generates one or more
frequency outputs that you can use when identifying frequencies in plots or reports.

Frequency items are available in the Factory and Enterprise bundles.

You can combine the different frequency item types to exactly fit your needs.

Frequency item Definition

Speed Reference Use to define either the input speed to a frequency
item, or the frequency output from a frequency item.
You can define a constant speed, use the machine
speed from the location, or get the speed stored with
the archive data. The uses of this special frequency
item are described in more detail in “Use the Speed
Reference Frequency Item” on page 260.
Constant Use to define a constant input speed to a frequency
item.
Linear to Rotational Use to generate the frequency outputs from a linear
speed input to a rotating component. For example, you
want to use the speed of a conveyor as the input to a
rotating bearing supporting the conveyor.
Multiply Use to find the frequency outputs from a multiple or
fraction of the input speed. For example, you want to
use the fan shaft speed as the input to find the fan
blade pass frequency.
Sum Use to find the frequency outputs from the sum or dif-
ference of two frequencies, such as a modulation or
beat frequency.
Harmonic Use to find the frequency outputs from harmonics
(multiples or orders) of the fundamental frequency.

259
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

Frequency item Definition

Sideband Use to find the frequency outputs from sidebands
around a center frequency.
Bearing Use to find the frequency outputs from a rotating bear-
ing (ball or roller bearing).
Belt Use to find the frequency outputs from a belt coupling
(belt between two pulleys).
Gearbox Use to find the frequency outputs from a single-stage
gearbox. You can connect gearbox frequency items to
model a multi-stage gearbox.
Planetary Gear Use to find the frequency outputs from a planetary
gearbox.
Motor Use to find the frequency outputs from a motor. Note
that you do not define the motor speed in this fre-
quency item; instead you use a Speed Reference or
Constant frequency item to define the motor speed.
Motor Stator Eccen- Use to find the frequency outputs characteristic of
tricity motor stator eccentricity.
Motor Rotor Eccen- Use to find the frequency outputs characteristic of
tricity motor rotor eccentricity.
Motor Rotor Problems Use to find the frequency outputs characteristic of
motor rotor problems.
Motor Loose Rotor Use to find the frequency outputs characteristic of
Bars loose rotor bars in a motor.
Motor Phasing Prob- Use to find the frequency outputs characteristic of
lems motor phasing problems.

Use the Speed Reference Frequency Item

The Speed Reference frequency item has two special functions that make it different from
the other frequency items:
 It can use a machine speed in the database as the input speed to another frequency
item. This is useful when you want to use a speed defined for a location, or a measured
speed from a spectrum or process measurement from the archive data.
 It can assign a speed to a frequency output from another frequency item. This allows
you to define the speed for a piece of equipment in the middle or end of a train of

260
 • • • • •
12 • Identifying Diagnostic Frequencies

machinery. Emonitor can then calculate back through the frequency items to find the
frequency outputs for all the frequency items in the machine.

Frequency items are available in the Factory and Enterprise bundles.

To select a machine speed from the database

If you want to use a machine speed from the database, you have four options. You select
the option you want under Source in the Speed Reference dialog. You must then define
the source in the database. The number of levels that you must define depends on your
selection in the Source group box:

To use Select
Machine speed defined for a location Machine speed column
Machine speed stored in a process mea- Process measurement
surement
Machine speed stored with a spectrum Current spectrum measurement
measurement in the archive data
Speed extracted from a spectrum mea- Extract from current spectrum
surement by Emonitor measurement

Note that the last three selections all use the current target date time to determine which
measurement in the archive data to use. This is useful when viewing a spectrum plot for a
variable speed machine. As you move through the archive data, Emonitor recalculates the
frequency outputs based on the machine speed from the archive data with the closest
date/time to the displayed spectrum.

To use the Speed Reference as an input

One way to use the Speed Reference frequency item is as the input to another frequency
item. For example, suppose you use the Motor frequency item for a variable speed motor.
If you enter a constant motor speed in the Motor Frequency item dialog, Emonitor can-
not update the frequency outputs when you view plots at different motor speeds. The
Speed Reference frequency item, however, allows you to use the machine speed stored
with the archive data in the database.
You can use a machine speed from the database to define either an input to a frequency
item, or the output from a frequency item. You can also directly type in a speed in the
Speed Reference Frequency dialog.

261
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

To assign the Speed Reference to a frequency output

One powerful feature of Emonitor is the ability to calculate back through frequency out-
puts for a set of frequency items. For example, you may know the fan blade pass but not
know the speed of a motor in a motor-belt-fan combination. You can set up the frequency
items, then use a Speed Reference frequency item to define the speed of the fan blade
pass. In the following example, the selection for Use to define speed for in the Speed
Reference Frequency dialog is the Blade Pass frequency output.

Input to the Frequency Frequency Item Outputs from the

Item Description Frequency Item
Motor Motor Speed
Motor Speed Belt Fan RPM, Belt
Fan RPM Blade Pass Blade Pass
Fan RPM Fan Harmonics Fan Harmonics
Motor Speed Mtr IB Bearing Bearing Frequencies
Motor Speed Mtr OB Bearing Bearing Frequencies
Fan RPM Fan IB Bearing Bearing Frequencies
Fan RPM Fan OB Bearing Bearing Frequencies
Speed Reference

In this example, the input for the Speed Reference frequency item could be either a con-
stant or a speed from the database.
In general, the relationships among frequency items for a machine are fixed. This allows
Emonitor to calculate all the frequencies when you assign a Speed Reference to a fre-
quency output. In the above example, Emonitor can calculate all the frequency outputs
after you define the Blade Pass frequency. You could also use the Speed Reference to
define any other frequency output, including the Motor Speed frequency output from a
Motor frequency item.

Edit Frequency Items

Emonitor allows you to edit frequency items for a machine after you have created and
connected them. There are three kinds of changes you can make in the Frequency Item
pane:

262
 • • • • •
12 • Identifying Diagnostic Frequencies

 You can change the machine speed when you use a Constant or a Speed Reference fre-
quency item as the input for the machine speed. This kind of change only affects the
values of the frequency outputs for the set of frequency items.
 You can change the speed for a frequency output when you use the Speed Reference
frequency item to define the speed of the frequency output. This kind of change only
affects the values of the frequency outputs for the set of frequency items.
 You can add or delete the frequency items. This kind of change may require that you
reconnect the frequency items. Otherwise, one or more frequency outputs may be
undefined.

Frequency items are available in the Factory and Enterprise bundles.

1. Select Window > Database. Select the Frequency Setup view in the Select View
dialog.
2. Find the frequency items you want to edit. You can do this in two ways:
 Use the mouse or the arrow keys to select the correct machine in the Hierarchy
Tree, and then select the frequency item in the Frequency Item pane.
 Select Edit > Find to find and display the frequency item.
3. Edit the frequency item information.

Remember that you can change the columns and the column headers that appear in the Fre-
quency Item pane by selecting View > Pane Options. You could also change to a different
view by selecting the view from the View menu.

When the frequency items are connected correctly, the frequency outputs in the Frequency
Output pane should all be defined. If any of the frequency outputs displays the word
Undefined, it indicates one of three possible problems:
 You have not completely defined one or more frequency items. For example, if you do
not define the Line frequency in the Motor frequency item, frequency outputs
depending on the line frequency will be undefined. This is not a problem if you are not
interested in the undefined frequency outputs.
 You have not connected one or more frequency items. For example, if you do not
select an input to the Bearing frequency item, then all the bearing frequency outputs
will be undefined.
 You define a Speed Reference or Linear to Rotational frequency item to use a value
that does not exist in the database.

263
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

Delete Frequency Items

Emonitor allows you to delete frequency items for a machine after you have created and
connected them.

Frequency items are available in the Factory and Enterprise bundles.

Unless you have selected Enabled for Undo capability in the Setup > Options > General dia-
log, you will not be able to bring back a frequency item after you delete it. For more information,
see “Undo Changes to the Database” on page 55.

When you delete a frequency item, you may need to reconnect other frequency items before
Emonitor can calculate all the remaining frequency outputs.

1. Select Window > Database. Select the Frequency Setup view in the Select View
dialog.
2. Find the frequency item(s) you want to delete. You can do this in two ways:
 Use the mouse or the arrow keys to select the correct machine in the Hierarchy
Tree, and then select the frequency item in the Frequency Item pane.
 Select Edit > Find to find and display the frequency item.
3. Select the frequency item by dragging across the two cells in the row, or by pressing
Shift+Spacebar to select the entire row. You can extend the selection by dragging the
mouse pointer down across two or more rows, or by holding down the Shift key and
pressing the Up or Down Arrow key.
4. Press Delete.

Use Frequency Outputs to Define Machine Speeds

You can use a frequency output to define the machine speed for a location. This allows
you to display the machine speed for a location based on data from a measurement.

Frequency items are available in the Factory and Enterprise bundles.

The frequency output cannot refer back to the machine speed. For example, suppose the fre-
quency output depends on a Speed Reference frequency item that gets the speed from the
Machine speed column (of the Location pane). That causes a circular reference, and the word
“Undefined” appears for the machine speed in the Location pane.

You must set up the frequency items before you can reference a frequency output. To
define the machine speed from a frequency output, use these steps.

264
 • • • • •
12 • Identifying Diagnostic Frequencies

1. In the Location pane, double-click in the machine speed column (usually labeled
“RPM”) to display the Machine Speed Setup dialog.
2. Select Frequency reference, then select a Frequency item and a Frequency output.
Emonitor displays the selected frequency output for the machine speed that appears in the
Location pane.

The machine speed that appears is based on the target date time. In other words, the displayed
machine speed may not reflect the latest data unless you set the target date time to “Latest”
(Tools > Set Target Date Time).

Identifying Frequencies in Plots and Reports

Emonitor includes the ability to identify specific frequencies in a spectrum plot by dis-
playing the frequency outputs directly on a plot or in a report. This can help you identify
the source of a particular vibration frequency, which can aid in diagnosing problems.

Frequency items are available in the Factory and Enterprise bundles.

On a spectrum plot, you can:

 Identify an individual frequency by displaying the frequency output closest to the cur-
sor.
 Display all the frequency outputs for the machine.
 Display only the frequency outputs that meet the conditions in the Plot > Options dia-
log for the spectrum plot.
In a report, you can:
 Include frequency items and frequency outputs.

265
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

 Include the frequency output closest to peaks in alarm in spectrum measurements.

Identify Frequencies in Plots

With Emonitor you can identify the sources for individual frequencies in a spectrum plot.
This can help you diagnose mechanical or electrical problems that show up in vibration
spectra for a machine. There are two ways to display frequency outputs on a spectrum
plot:
 Move the cursor to a frequency of interest, and then display the frequency output for
the machine that is closest to the cursor.
 Display all, or some, of the frequency outputs for the machine, current location, or
current frequency item.
The steps described below assume that you have already set up frequency items for the
machines of interest. See “Setting Up Frequency Items” on page 253 for details.

Frequency items are available in the Factory and Enterprise bundles.

To display the frequency output closest to the cursor

1. Move the cursor to the frequency you want to label. If you are using a specialized cur-
sor (dual, band, harmonic, sideband, or other), move the primary cursor to the fre-
quency you want to label in the spectrum plot.
2. Select Plot > Label Closest Frequency.
3. Emonitor displays the closest frequency output from the frequency outputs for the
machine. It does not check the frequency output restrictions in the Plot > Options dia-
log.

To display multiple frequency outputs for a machine

You can display all, or some of the frequency outputs for a machine on a spectrum plot.
The frequencies that appear depend on the settings in the Plot > Options dialog.
1. Make sure the spectrum plot pane is active.
2. Select Plot > Options. Select the group of frequency items for the plot on the Fre-
quencies tab.
3. Select the options you want under Frequencies. The options are described below
under “Select the frequency outputs for Show Frequencies”.

266
 • • • • •
12 • Identifying Diagnostic Frequencies

4. Select Plot > Show Frequencies.

You could also select the Show Frequencies check box in the Frequencies tab to show the
frequencies.

To select the frequency outputs for Show Frequencies

You select the frequency outputs that appear on the spectrum plot by choosing options in
the Frequencies tab of the Plot > Options dialog.
The table below lists the possible combinations of options under Frequency sets and Fre-
quencies in the dialog.

Frequencies
To Display Frequency Sets option option
All outputs for the machine Machine All
All outputs for the current loca- Location All
tion
All outputs for the current fre- Current frequency item All
quency item (in the Frequency
Item pane of the Database win-
dow)
All outputs for the machine in Machine In exception
alarm
All outputs for the current loca- Location In exception
tion in alarm
All outputs for the current fre- Current frequency item In exception
quency item in alarm

All outputs for the machine Machine Threshold

above a threshold
All outputs for the current loca- Location Threshold
tion above a threshold
All outputs for the current fre- Current frequency item Threshold
quency item above a threshold

If you choose Threshold under Frequencies, you must also set a threshold value as a per-
cent of the spectrum plot’s full scale. There are two things to note when using a threshold
value:

267
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

 The frequency outputs that appear are those for which the amplitude of the spectrum
at the frequency output is above the threshold. For example, suppose the full scale for
the plot is 100, and the threshold is set to 50%. The outputs that appear are those
where the amplitude of the spectrum at the frequency output is above 50. If the thresh-
old is set to 70%, only those outputs where the amplitude of the spectrum is above 70
appear.
 The threshold is a percentage of the current full scale for the Y axis of the plot. If you
set the threshold value to 50%, then the threshold is at 50 when the full scale is 100. If
you change the Y axis full scale for the plot to 80, the threshold changes to 40 (50% of
80)

Identify Frequencies in Reports

With Emonitor you can identify the sources for individual frequencies in a report. This
can help you diagnose mechanical or electrical problems that show up in vibration spec-
trum plots for a machine. There are three types of frequency information you can include
in a report:
 Frequency items for a machine
 Frequency outputs for a machine
 Frequency output closest to a peak in a spectrum

Frequency items are available in the Factory and Enterprise bundles.

This frequency information appears in three standard report descriptions that come with
Emonitor:
 Frequency Item: Lists the frequency items for the machines in the selected list.
 Frequency Output: Lists the frequency outputs for the machines in the selected list.
 Detailed Spectrum Exception: Lists the peak frequencies in alarm, along with the
closest frequency output within the search band. The search band is defined by the
Tolerance column for the frequency item in the Frequency Item pane.
You can also create custom report descriptions that include frequency information. See
“Creating Custom Reports” on page 246 for details.

268
13 Asset Health Management
Overview of Asset Health Management
Asset health management allows you to manually or automatically analyze problems with
your machines and processes.
 With manual analysis, you use the tools in Emonitor to review and examine the data
from your machinery and processes. These tools include alarms, reports, and plots.
You then manually create one or more advisories that describe the actions to take to
fix the problem.
 With automated analysis, you use the Intelligent Advisory™ feature. This feature
automatically creates the analyses and advisories for you when a measurement goes
into an alarm severity range. The Intelligent Advisory feature allows for unattended
operation of the Emonitor system, especially for faults that are relatively simple to
identify and diagnose.

Analysis and Intelligent Advisories are available in the Factory and Enterprise bundles.

After the advisories are created, Emonitor can send them out as work requests through
your email system (Factory and Enterprise bundles). You can also send work requests to
an external Computerized Maintenance Management System (CMMS) or Enterprise
Asset Maintenance (EAM) system (Enterprise bundle). You can track the progress of the
work requests in Emonitor. Finally, you can verify the solution to the problem by analyz-
ing data in Emonitor after the work request is completed.
This process involves the following steps, described in the rest of this section.
1. Set up one or more asset management gateways. A gateway is a software bridge that
allows you to track advisories in Emonitor and in some cases create work requests that
become work orders in external systems. There are three types of gateways:
 External or enterprise gateways are bi-directional software bridges that link
Emonitor to an external CMMS or EAM system (Enterprise bundle).
 The email gateway sends advisories out as email messages through a MAPI-com-
pliant email system such as Microsoft Outlook (Factory and Enterprise bundles).
 The Emonitor gateway allows you to track advisories even if you do not use one of
the other gateway types (Factory and Enterprise bundles).
2. Set up the components for the machines of interest in the Hierarchy Tree. Identifying
component and asset information allows you to diagnose problems for individual

269
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

components such as motors, gearboxes, fans, and so on. Asset information can include
data such as number of rotor bars, number of impeller vanes, nameplate information,
and so on.
3. Use either manual analysis or Intelligent Advisories assignments to identify problems
and create analyses and advisories.
4. Send the advisories to one or more gateways. Depending on the type of gateway, this
may create work requests that can become work orders. Emonitor stores the advisories
and the time and date of the work request.
5. Track the progress of work requests. As the work requests progress through your sys-
tem to completion, you can track their status. If connected to an external system
through an enterprise gateway, Emonitor can automatically update the work request
status. Otherwise, you can manually update the work request status. You can track
work request status in the Advisory pane (Database window), in an advisory plot, or
with the advisory report.
You may also be able to track work requests generated outside of Emonitor (in the
external system) if the enterprise gateway supports that feature.
6. Verify the solution in Emonitor. Once the work is completed, you can use Emonitor to
verify that the machine or process has been returned to a satisfactory condition.

Setting Up Gateways and Components

The first step in asset management is to set up one or more gateways in Emonitor. Gate-
ways allow you to send advisories out as work requests by email (Factory and Enterprise
bundles), and create work requests or work orders in your CMMS or EAM system (Enter-
prise bundle). You can also track the progress of the work requests in Emonitor.

If you have not set up work statuses in Emonitor, you must do so before setting up certain exter-
nal gateways. See “Set Up Work Status” on page 271.

The second step is to set up the components of your equipment. For each machine in your
Hierarchy Tree, you select the components and identify the asset information for each
component. This information may include a link to locations or equipment in an external
system, allowing Emonitor and your CMMS or EAM system to share information about
the component. Asset information can include data such as number of rotor bars, number
of impeller vanes, nameplate information, and so on.

Linking to an external CMMS or EAM system is available in the Enterprise bundle.

270
 • • • • •
13 • Asset Health Management

Once you have completed these two steps, you can analyze machine data in Emonitor,
create advisories based on your analysis, and create work orders from the advisories. See
“Manually Analyzing Data and Creating Work Requests” on page 274 and “Automati-
cally Analyzing Data and Creating Work Requests” on page 276 for more information.

Set Up Work Status

You can define your own work status names for work requests in Emonitor. Examples of
work status are Submitted, Approved, Started, and Completed. You use work status to
define the progress of a work request. See “Tracking Work Requests” on page 292.

Work status and work requests are available in the Factory and Enterprise bundles.

1. Select Setup > Options > Work Status.

2. Enter the desired terms for work status.

Configure Gateways
You can set up one or more gateways in Emonitor. Gateways are software bridges that
allows you to track advisories in Emonitor and in some cases create work requests using
external systems. There are two classes of gateways:
 The first class of gateways is included in Emonitor. The email gateway lets you send
advisories as work requests through a MAPI-compliant email system. The Emonitor
gateway lets you track work requests, even if you do not send them out through an
email, CMMS, or EPR gateway.
 The second class of gateways is an addition to Emonitor. These gateways let you send
advisories as work requests to external CMMS or EAM systems. Emonitor can also
retrieve information from the external systems allowing you to track the progress of
work requests from Emonitor.

The email and Emonitor gateways are available in the Factory and Enterprise bundles. Exter-
nal CMMS or EAM gateways are available in the Enterprise bundle.

You must be logged into Emonitor with Administrator rights to configure or delete gateways.

To configure the Emonitor gateway

1. Select Setup > Gateway, then click New.
2. Select Emonitor for the Gateway type in the New Asset Management Gateway dia-
log, then click Next.

271
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

3. Enter a name for the Emonitor gateway in the Setup Emonitor Gateway dialog, then
click Finish.
4. Click Close in the Define Asset Management Gateway dialog.

To configure the email gateway

1. Select Setup > Gateway, then click New.
2. Select Email for the Gateway type in the New Asset Management Gateway dialog,
then click Next.
3. Enter a name for the email gateway and fill out the rest of the default fields in the
Email Gateway Configuration dialog. The Insert field at cursor button allows you
to automatically copy information from the original advisory into the email text. Then
click Finish.
4. In the Define Asset Management Gateway dialog, click Close.
5. Set up your email program as the default MAPI (Mail Application Program Interface)
server. See “Set Up Your Email Software as the MAPI Server” on page 272.

If you send an advisory to the email gateway, then cancel sending the advisory in the email
program, Emonitor assumes the advisory was sent. Emonitor has no way of knowing that you
did not actually send the email advisory.

To configure an external system gateway

The software for Emonitor external system gateway must be installed on your computer before
you can configure the gateway. For more information, refer to the Gateway User's Guide for the
gateway.

1. Select Setup > Gateway, then click New.

2. Select the Gateway type for your external CMMS or EAM system in the New Asset
Management Gateway dialog, then click Next.
3. Enter a name for the gateway and fill out the rest of the fields in the Gateway Config-
uration dialog. Then click Finish.
4. Click Close in the Define Asset Management Gateway dialog.

Set Up Your Email Software as the MAPI Server

Emonitor uses a MAPI (Messaging Application Program Interface) server for sending
email notification. The messages are sent from the default email program installed on
your computer, if it is set up properly as a MAPI server. You should refer to your email
software user’s manual for specific instructions on using a MAPI server.

272
 • • • • •
13 • Asset Health Management

To set up Eudora
If you are using Eudora as your email client, follow these steps. You must shut down
Emonitor, and then restart your computer, before selecting this option.
1. To run the Eudora MAPI server, select Tools > Options in Eudora, and click the
MAPI category.
2. Under Use Eudora MAPI Server, select Always.

Please note that when you are running the Eudora MAPI server, Microsoft Exchange will not
work. If you need to use Exchange, turn off the Eudora server. Refer to your Eudora user
manual for technical details on the Eudora MAPI server.

To set up Microsoft Outlook, Mail, or Exchange

If you are using a Microsoft product as your default email client, you should not need to
change any settings.

To set up Netscape Messenger

If you are using Netscape Messenger as your default email client, follow these steps. You
must shut down Emonitor, and then restart your computer, before selecting this option.
Refer to your Netscape online help for technical details on the Netscape MAPI server.
These instructions are specifically for Netscape Messenger version 4.5.
1. Select Edit > Preferences.
2. Select Mail & Newsgroups.
3. Select Use Netscape Messenger from MAPI-based applications.

Set Up Components
For each machine of interest in your Hierarchy Tree, you select the components and iden-
tify the asset information for each component. This information may include a link to a
location or equipment in an external system, allowing Emonitor and your external system
to share information about the component.

Asset health features, including the email and Emonitor gateways are available in the Factory
and Enterprise bundles. External CMMS or EAM gateways are available in the Enterprise bun-
dle.

1. Select the machine in the Hierarchy Tree.

2. Select Setup > Hierarchy.
3. Click the Component tab in the Hierarchy dialog.

273
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

4. Select the components for the machine. Each component consists of a component
specification and a name. If you want to consider the machine in the Hierarchy Tree to
be a single component, select the hierarchy item name in angle brackets (<PA FAN
#1>). For example, the hierarchy item name can represent an entire machine train.
You can also change the name for each component.
If you want to create a new component specification, see “Edit Component Specifica-
tions” on page 90.
5. Identify the Asset information for each component. Asset information can include
data such as number of rotor bars, number of impeller vanes, nameplate information,
and so on. Select the type of information in the Information column. You can also
enter a new information type. Then enter the corresponding value in the Value col-
umn. For some types of asset information, you must also select the units for the infor-
mation.
If there is default asset information for the component specification, Emonitor dis-
plays the default information. You can change the default information to suit your
components. You can also save the current set of asset information as the default for
the component specification by choosing Set as Default.
6. If you have a gateway to an external CMMS or EAM system, select the name of the
gateway as one of the Asset information items. For most gateways, double-clicking
in the Value column displays a dialog that allows you to link this component to a
matching asset or location in the external system. For more information, refer to the
Gateway User's Guide for the gateway.
7. When you have entered all the information for the machine, move to the next machine
by doing one of the following:
 Click the machine in the Hierarchy Tree. You do not have to close the Hierarchy
dialog.
 Click Previous or Next in the Hierarchy dialog.

Manually Analyzing Data and Creating Work Requests

After you have set up gateways and components (see “Setting Up Gateways and Compo-
nents” on page 270), you can create analyses of problems with your machinery and pro-
cesses.
An analysis includes a description of the problem and advisories to fix the problem.
 You can send advisories as email messages using the Emonitor Email gateway.
 You can store the advisories in Emonitor (using the Emonitor gateway) and manually
update the status.

274
 • • • • •
13 • Asset Health Management

 If you have an enterprise gateway installed, you can create work requests that become
work orders in an external CMMS or EAM system.

Asset health features, including the email and Emonitor gateways are available in the Factory
and Enterprise bundles. External CMMS or EAM gateways are available in the Enterprise
bundle.

Manually Create an Analysis

You can analyze your data in a variety of ways using alarms, plots, reports, and other tools
in Emonitor. When you notice that the condition of a machine or a process appears to be
changing, you can create an analysis for the condition. An analysis consists of diagnoses
that describe the symptoms and causes of the problem, and advisories that describe the
action to take to fix the problem.

Asset health features, including the email and Emonitor gateways are available in the Factory
and Enterprise bundles. External CMMS or EAM gateways are available in the Enterprise bun-
dle.

1. Select the machine in the Hierarchy Tree.

2. Select Tools > Analysis.
3. Under Diagnoses, select the desired component for the equipment in the Component
column. For problems affecting the entire hierarchy item, select the hierarchy item
name in angle brackets (for example, <PA FAN #1>).
4. Select or enter the rest of the information for the diagnosis.
5. Under Advisories, select or enter a description of the action to take for the diagnosis,
then select a Priority. The State defaults to “Not Sent.” When you send the advisory
to a gateway, the state changes to “Sent.” You can also manually change the state to
“Never Send” if you do not want to send one or more of the advisories.
6. Enter additional advisories for the current diagnosis if desired.
7. Repeat steps 3–6 to enter additional diagnoses and advisories until you have com-
pleted the analysis.
When you have completed the analysis, you can save it (click Save), or you can immedi-
ately send the advisories to one or more gateways. If you send the advisory, Emonitor
saves the analysis before sending it. For more information, see “Manually Create Work
Requests” on page 276. If you save the analysis, you can send it to a gateway later.
You can review and edit an analysis later by selecting the machine in the Hierarchy Tree
and choosing Tools > Analysis again. However, changing an analysis has no effect on any
work requests already sent to a gateway.

275
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

Manually Create Work Requests

After you have created advisories as part of an analysis, you must send them to one or
more gateways to create work requests.
When you send an advisory to a gateway, Emonitor allows you to enter additional infor-
mation about the advisory before sending it. If you are not using the email gateway or an
enterprise gateway, you can still send advisories to the Emonitor gateway so that you can
track work requests in Emonitor. If you have just created an analysis for a machine and
have not closed the Analysis dialog, you can send the advisories by skipping to step 4
below.

Asset health features, including the email and Emonitor gateways are available in the Factory
and Enterprise bundles. External CMMS or EAM gateways are available in the Enterprise bun-
dle.

1. Select the machine in the Hierarchy Tree.

2. Select Tools > Analysis.
3. If there are multiple analyses for this machine, click Previous or Next to display the
one you want to send.
4. When the desired analysis is displayed in the dialog, click Send. This displays the
Send Advisory dialog. Note that Emonitor only sends the advisories with State of
“Not Sent.”
5. In the Send Advisory dialog, select the desired gateway or gateways. Click Sum-
mary to see all the advisories to be sent.
6. Click OK to send the advisories. For some gateways, this also creates the work
requests.
When you send the advisories to the selected gateways, Emonitor loops through each
gateway for each advisory and displays a dialog so you can enter the necessary informa-
tion for that gateway.
So if you create four advisories and send them to two gateways, Emonitor cycles through
a total of eight work requests.

If you send an advisory to the email gateway, then cancel sending the advisory in the email pro-
gram, Emonitor assumes the advisory was sent. Emonitor has no way of knowing that you did
not actually send the email advisory.

Automatically Analyzing Data and Creating Work Requests

Automatically analyzing data is similar in some ways to manually analyzing data as
described in “Manually Analyzing Data and Creating Work Requests” on page 274.

276
 • • • • •
13 • Asset Health Management

 For manual analysis, you create the analyses and advisories when you find a prob-
lem, (such as a measurement going into alarm).
 For automatic analysis, the Intelligent Advisory function in Emonitor automatically
creates the analyses and advisories for you when a measurement goes into an alarm
severity range.

Asset health features, including the email and Emonitor gateways are available in the Factory
and Enterprise bundles. External CMMS or EAM gateways and analysis using rule sets are
available in the Enterprise bundle.

You can use either a diagnosis specification or a rule set in an Intelligent Advisory assign-
ment.
 A diagnosis specification consists of an analysis and a single set of advisories. When
an Intelligent Advisory assignment using a diagnosis specification is triggered (by an
alarm), Emonitor sends the advisories to the gateways defined for the diagnosis speci-
fication. Diagnosis specifications are described below.
 A rule set consists of one or more rules that can be logically evaluated. When an Intel-
ligent Advisory assignment using a rule set is triggered (by an alarm), Emonitor eval-
uates the rule set. If the rule evaluates to “True”, Emonitor executes the diagnosis
specification for that rule. Rule sets are described in “Using Rule Sets” on page 281.

The Intelligent Advisory function is not a substitute for careful analysis of complex problems;
it works best for faults that are relatively simple to identify and diagnose.

To use the a diagnosis specification in an Intelligent Advisory assignment, follow these

steps.
1. Create the diagnosis specification that includes the analysis and advisories for a par-
ticular problem, as well as the gateways for the advisories.
2. Assign the diagnosis specification to an asset using an Intelligent Advisory assign-
ment. This includes specifying the measurement definitions and alarm severity levels
that trigger the Intelligent Advisory assignment.
3. Collect or import data for the asset. Refer to the section on “Loading and Unloading a
Data Collector”.
4. Evaluate any calculated measurement definitions if necessary. See “Update Calculated
Measurement Definitions” on page 88.
5. Update the alarm severities if necessary. See “Update Alarm Severities” on page 153.
6. Select Tools > Intelligent Advisories > Evaluate. When an alarm triggers the Intelli-
gent Advisory assignment, it automatically creates the analyses and advisories. It can
also send the advisories out to the gateways defined for the diagnosis specification.

277
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

Create a diagnosis specification

A diagnosis specification contains two parts.
 A description of a problem, symptoms, and problem severity (the analysis).
 One or more advisories to be automatically sent to one or more gateways when an
alarm triggers the Intelligent Advisory function.

You can also create a diagnosis specification when creating a rule set. Any diagnosis specifi-
cation is available to be assigned to an asset or used in a rule set. See “Using Rule Sets” on
page 281.

First you create one or more diagnosis specifications, and then you can assign them to
assets (described in “Assign a diagnosis specification to an asset” on page 279).

Asset health features, such as creating diagnoses, are available in the Factory and Enterprise
bundles.

To create a new diagnosis specification

Before setting up a diagnosis specification, make sure you have already defined the desired
components and gateways. See “Set Up Components” on page 273 and see “Configure Gate-
ways” on page 271.

1. Select Setup > Diagnosis.

2. Click New.
3. Enter a name for the new diagnosis specification, and then enter or select the other
characteristics in the New Diagnosis dialog.
Tip: The descriptions are the same ones available when you manually perform an
analysis.
4. Click New in the Advisories group to add a new advisory.
You can add as many advisories as desired for this diagnosis specification. Each advi-
sory is sent to the gateways for that advisory.
5. Select the first advisory. Then select the first gateway for the diagnosis specification,
and click Define. The dialog that appears depends on the gateway.
6. Select the next advisory and repeat the previous step until you have defined the gate-
ways for each advisory. You can define as multiple gateways for each advisory. When
you are finished selecting the information, click OK.

To edit an existing diagnosis specification

1. Select Setup > Diagnosis.

278
 • • • • •
13 • Asset Health Management

2. Select the diagnosis specification you want to edit in the Define Diagnosis Specifica-
tion dialog.
Tip: You can click the Assignments button to list the assets that have been assigned
this diagnosis specification. See “Assign a diagnosis specification to an asset” on page
279.
3. Click Edit.
4. Edit the characteristics for the diagnosis specification in the Edit Diagnosis dialog.

To copy a diagnosis specification

1. Select Setup > Diagnosis.
2. Select the diagnosis specification you want to copy.
3. Click Copy.
4. Enter a new name for the diagnosis specification, then enter or select the new charac-
teristics for the diagnosis specification in the Copy Diagnosis dialog.

You cannot save the new diagnosis specification with the same name as the original diagno-
sis specification.

To delete a diagnosis specification

Once you delete a diagnosis specification, you cannot bring it back.

1. Select Setup > Diagnosis.

2. Select the diagnosis specification you want to delete.
3. Click Delete to delete the selected diagnosis specification.

You cannot delete a diagnosis specification that is assigned to an existing asset.

Assign a diagnosis specification to an asset

After you have created a diagnosis specification, you can then assign it to an asset. This
creates an Intelligent Advisory assignment.

Asset health features, including diagnoses and Intelligent Advisory assignments, are available in
the Factory and Enterprise bundles. External CMMS or EAM gateways and analysis using rule
sets are available in the Enterprise bundle.

279
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

1. Select Window > Database. Select the Intelligent Advisory view in the Select View
dialog.
2. Select the desired asset in the Hierarchy Tree, then select Tools > Assign Intelligent
Advisory.
3. Select the characteristics for the Intelligent Advisory assignment in the Assign Intelli-
gent Advisory dialog. This includes the component, the alarm severity range, and the
action to take when the selected measurement definition goes into the alarm range.
Select Single diagnosis, then select the desired diagnosis.

You can select a location or an item in the Hierarchy Tree instead of a single measurement
definition for Trigger on. This allows you to use any measurement definition in alarm under
the location or item in the Hierarchy Tree to trigger the Intelligent Advisory assignment.

The Intelligent Advisory assignment appears in the Intelligent Advisory pane in the Data-
base window.

Evaluate an assigned diagnosis specification

Selecting Tools > Intelligent Advisories > Evaluate does the following for each Intelli-
gent Advisory assignment for the selected item in the Hierarchy Tree.

Asset health features, including diagnoses and Intelligent Advisory assignments, are available in
the Factory and Enterprise bundles. External CMMS or EAM gateways and analysis using rule
sets are available in the Enterprise bundle.

1. Checks the alarm severity for the measurement definition selected for the Intelligent
Advisory assignment.
2. If the alarm severity is in the alarm severity range selected for the assignment, Emoni-
tor creates the analyses and sends out the advisories defined for the diagnosis specifi-
cation in the Intelligent Advisory assignment.

Notes about evaluating Intelligent Advisory assignments

 The Intelligent Advisory assignment must be active; inactive assignments are not pro-
cessed.
 Emonitor does not send out the advisories if the alarm severity was in the selected
alarm severity range when last processed. The alarm severity for the measurement
definition must fall out of the selected alarm severity range to “reset” the Intelligent
Advisory assignment.
 Emonitor may not send out new advisories to some gateways if there is an open work
request for the Intelligent Advisory assignment. This depends on the gateway and the
setting for that gateway.

280
 • • • • •
13 • Asset Health Management

To evaluate Intelligent Advisory assignments

In order to use the most recent data, you should update any calculated measurements, then
update alarm severities for measurement definitions used in the Intelligent Advisory assignment
or rule sets BEFORE evaluating.

Emonitor can automatically evaluate Intelligent Advisory assignments after unloading or

importing data. Otherwise, you must do one of the following to evaluate Intelligent Advi-
sory assignments:
 Select an item in the Hierarchy Tree and then select Tools > Intelligent Advisories >
Evaluate. You can also select Tools > Intelligent Advisories > Evaluate All to eval-
uate all Intelligent Advisory assignments.
 Select one or more Intelligent Advisory assignments in the Intelligent Advisory pane.
Select Tools > Intelligent Advisories > Evaluate or Tools > Intelligent Advisories >
Evaluate All.

Selecting Evaluate All causes Emonitor to evaluate all active Intelligent Advisory assign-
ments for all assets in the database. This can take a long time for large databases.

 Run the Intelligent Advisory Evaluator program. Click the Start button on the Win-
dows taskbar, then select Programs > Rockwell Software > Emonitor > Intelligent
Advisory Evaluator. This opens a dialog displaying the lists in Emonitor. Select one
or more lists, then click Evaluate.
 Run the Intelligent Advisory Evaluator automatically with the Scheduler program. See
“Scheduler” on page 312.
You can also view the analyses and advisories for an asset. See “View Analyses and Advi-
sories” on page 290.

Using Rule Sets

An Intelligent Advisory assignment can automatically create analyses and send out advi-
sories when a measurement definition goes into alarm. The assignment can use either a
single diagnosis specification or a rule set to determine the action to take.

Asset health features, including diagnoses and Intelligent Advisory assignments, are available in
the Factory and Enterprise bundles. External CMMS or EAM gateways and analysis using rule
sets are available in the Enterprise bundle.

 With a diagnosis specification, the analyses and advisories are pre-defined by the
diagnosis specification and cannot be tailored to the situation.

281
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

 With a rule set, the analyses and advisories are based on one or more rules. For exam-
ple, you could create a rule set with rules for unbalance and mechanical looseness.
The rule set could have different analyses and advisories for each condition.

The Intelligent Advisory function is not a substitute for careful analysis of complex problems;
it works best for faults that are relatively simple to identify and diagnose.

Rule set example

For example, you could create an Intelligent Advisory assignment that uses the following
rule set of 2 rules.
1. If the vibration at 1xRPM dominates the spectrum in the radial direction AND 1xRPM
vibration in axial direction is less than 50% of 1xRPM vibration in radial direction
AND radial vibration is not highly directional (roughly the same in horizontal and ver-
tical directions) then the problem is probably Unbalance.
The diagnosis specification for this first rule might include an advisory about check-
ing the balance on the rotor.
2. If the vibration at 1xRPM in the Vert direction > 1.5 times the 1xRPM vibration in the
Horiz direction, then the problem is most likely Structural Looseness of machine feet,
baseplate, or foundation (Looseness Type A).
The diagnosis specification for this second rule might include an advisory about
checking for looseness.
Each rule in a set consists of inputs, logical operators (AND or OR), and an output. The
output is a diagnosis specification that is executed if the rule evaluates to “True”.

Rule Set window description

Analysis using rule sets is available in the Enterprise bundle.

The Rule Set window consists of the following parts.

Title bar
The title bar contains the name of the rule set.

Toolbar
The functions in the Rule Set window can be accessed by clicking on a toolbar button.
As you move the mouse over the toolbar buttons, a tool-tip appears to remind you of
the function of the button. For a description of toolbar buttons, see “Rule Set toolbar
buttons” on page 283.

282
 • • • • •
13 • Asset Health Management

Name block
The name block contains the name of the rule set. Double-click in the name block to
change the name of the rule set.

Workspace
The workspace contains the rules that you create for the rule set.
The workspace is larger than can be shown on the screen at one time. When there are
rules beyond the edge of the visible workspace, scroll bars appear. These scroll bars
let you view the rest of the workspace.

Change the size of the window

You can resize the Rule Set window by dragging any edge or corner.

Rule Set toolbar buttons

Analysis using rule sets is available in the Enterprise bundle.

Toolbar buttons appear on the Rule Set window toolbar.

Add an input object to the rule set.

Add an AND logical operator object to the rule set.

283
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

Add an OR logical operator object to the rule set.

Add an output object to the rule set.

Save the current rule set.

Print the current rule set.

Cut the selected objects to the Clipboard.

Copy the selected objects to the Clipboard.

Paste objects from the Clipboard into the rule set.

Delete the selected objects from the Rule set.

Snap objects to grid when moving.

Auto arrange objects in the rule set.

Zoom in one step.

Zoom out one step.

Current zoom setting.

Connect objects.

284
 • • • • •
13 • Asset Health Management

Disconnect objects.

Find an object in the rule set.

Display a plot of the data for the selected input object.

Only available in the Rule Set Symptoms window.

Display the measurement definitions matching the

selected input object. Only available in the Test Rule
Set Assignment window.
Close the Rule Set window.

Create a rule set

A rule set is a collection of rules that can be assigned to assets. You can create one or more
rules in a rule set by combining input objects, logical operator objects, and output objects.
A simple rule might have two inputs and one logical operator.

 A rule always has only one output.

 A rule set may have any number of rules.

Analysis using rule sets is available in the Enterprise bundle.

1. Select Setup > Rule Set.

2. Click New.
3. In the New Rule Set window, double-click in the name block (shaded block in upper-
left corner) to enter a name for the rule set.

285
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

Rule set objects and buttons

Object type Toolbar button Object

Input

Logical AND

Logical OR

Output (diagnosis
specification)

To add input objects

1. Click the input object button on the Rule Set window taskbar.
2. Click in the workspace to place the object. You can reposition the object later by drag-
ging the object. When you place the object, the Input Type dialog appears.
3. Select the input type for the object. When you select the input type, an Input Config-
uration dialog box appears.
4. Enter or select the other characteristics for the input object.
5. Repeat the process to add as many input objects as desired.

You may find it easier to select an existing input object, then use the copy and paste buttons
on the toolbar to create copies of the object.

To add logical operator objects

1. Click the AND or the OR button on the taskbar.
2. Click in the workspace to place the object.
3. Repeat the process to add as many logical operator objects as desired.

To add the output object

1. Click the output object button on the Rule Set window taskbar.

286
 • • • • •
13 • Asset Health Management

2. Click in the workspace to place the object. You can reposition the object later. When
you place the object, the Diagnosis Specification dialog appears.

You can use an existing diagnosis specification, or create a new one.

3. Select the diagnosis specification for the object, or click New to create a new diagno-
sis specification.
4. Enter or select the other characteristics for the diagnosis specification.

You may find it easier to select an existing output object, then use the copy and paste buttons
on the toolbar to create copies of the object.

To connect objects
1. Click the Connect Objects button on the Rule Set window toolbar. The button remains
selected until you click it again.
2. Click the first object you want to connect.
3. Click the second object for the connection. Emonitor draws a line between the two
objects.
4. Continue connecting objects until every object for the rule is connected.
5. Click the Connect Objects button again to stop connecting objects.

To disconnect objects
1. Select the object to disconnect.
2. Click the Disconnect Objects button on the Rule Set window toolbar. Emonitor
removes all connections to the selected object.

Deleting an object also removes all connections to the deleted object.

Assign a rule set to an asset

After you have created a rule set, you can assign it to an asset. This creates an Intelligent
Advisory assignment.

Analysis using rule sets is available in the Enterprise bundle.

You can also evaluate any rule set for any asset in the Emonitor database. See “Manually evalu-
ate a rule set for any asset” on page 290.

287
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

1. Select Window > Database. Select the Intelligent Advisory view in the Select View
dialog.
2. Select the desired asset in the Hierarchy Tree, then select Tools > Assign Intelligent
Advisory.
3. Select the characteristics for the assignment in the Assign Intelligent Advisory dia-
log. This includes the component, the alarm severity range, and the action to take
when the selected measurement definition goes into the alarm range. Select Evaluate
rule set, then select the desired rule set.
The Intelligent Advisory assignment appears in the Intelligent Advisory pane in the
Database window.

You can select a location or an item in the Hierarchy Tree instead of a single measurement
definition for Trigger on. This allows you to use any measurement definition in alarm under
the location or item in the Hierarchy Tree to trigger the Intelligent Advisory assignment.

Evaluate an assigned rule set

Selecting Tools > Intelligent Advisories > Evaluate does the following for each Intelli-
gent Advisory assignment.

Analysis using rule sets is available in the Enterprise bundle.

You can also evaluate any rule set for any asset in the Emonitor database. See “Manually evalu-
ate a rule set for any asset” on page 290.

1. Checks the alarm severity for the measurement definition selected for the Intelligent
Advisory assignment.
2. If the alarm severity is in the alarm severity range selected for the assignment, Emoni-
tor evaluates the rule set.
3. If a rule in the rule set evaluates to “True”, Emonitor executes the diagnosis specifica-
tion associated with that rule.
 Emonitor creates the analyses and sends out the advisories defined for the diagno-
sis specification.
 Emonitor stops evaluating the rules in a rule set when a rule evaluates to “True”.
 If none of the rules in the rule set evaluate to “True”, Emonitor creates an analysis
with a “No recommendation” description and no advisories.

288
 • • • • •
13 • Asset Health Management

Notes about evaluating Intelligent Advisory assignments

 The Intelligent Advisory assignment must be active; inactive assignments are not pro-
cessed.
 Emonitor does not send out the advisories if the alarm severity was in the selected
alarm severity range when last processed. The alarm severity for the measurement
definition must fall out of the selected alarm severity range to “reset” the Intelligent
Advisory assignment.
 Emonitor may not send out new advisories to some gateways if there is an open work
request for the Intelligent Advisory assignment. This depends on the gateway and the
setting for that gateway.

To evaluate Intelligent Advisory assignments

In order to use the most recent data, you should update any calculated measurements, then
update alarm severities for measurement definitions used in the Intelligent Advisory assignment
or rule sets BEFORE evaluating.

Emonitor can automatically evaluate Intelligent Advisory assignments after unloading or

importing data. Otherwise, you must do one of the following to evaluate Intelligent Advi-
sory assignments:
 Select an item in the Hierarchy Tree and then select Tools > Intelligent Advisories >
Evaluate. You can also select Tools > Intelligent Advisories > Evaluate All to eval-
uate all Intelligent Advisory assignments.
 Select one or more Intelligent Advisory assignments in the Intelligent Advisory pane.
Select Tools > Intelligent Advisories > Evaluate or Tools > Intelligent Advisories >
Evaluate All.

Selecting Evaluate All causes Emonitor to evaluate all Intelligent Advisory assignments for
all assets in the database. This can take a long time for large databases.

 Run the Intelligent Advisory Evaluator program. Click the Start button on the Win-
dows taskbar, then select Programs > Rockwell Software > Emonitor > Intelligent
Advisory Evaluator. This opens a dialog displaying the lists in Emonitor. Select one
or more lists, then click Evaluate.
 Run the Intelligent Advisory Evaluator automatically with the Scheduler program. See
“Scheduler” on page 312.
You can also view the analyses and advisories for an asset. See “View Analyses and Advi-
sories” on page 290.

289
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

Manually evaluate a rule set for any asset

You can manually evaluate any rule set for any asset in the Emonitor database.

Analysis using rule sets is available in the Enterprise bundle.

1. Select Window > Database. Select the Intelligent Advisory view in the Select View
dialog.
2. Select the desired item in the Hierarchy Tree, then select Tools > Evaluate Rule Set.
3. In the Evaluate Rule Set dialog, select the desired component and rule set.
4. Click Evaluate. Emonitor evaluates the rule set for the selected component. If a rule
in the rule set evaluates to “True”, Emonitor executes the diagnosis specification asso-
ciated with that rule.
 Emonitor creates the analyses and sends out the advisories defined for the diagno-
sis specification.
 Emonitor stops evaluating the rule set when a rule evaluates to “True”.
 If none of the rules in the rule set evaluate to “True”, Emonitor creates an analysis
with a “No recommendation” description and no advisories.
You can view the analyses and advisories for an asset. See “View Analyses and Adviso-
ries” on page 290.

View Analyses and Advisories

There are three ways that analyses and advisories are created in Emonitor.
 You can create them by manually analyzing data (as described in “Manually Create an
Analysis” on page 275).
 Emonitor can create them automatically by evaluating Intelligent Advisory assign-
ments (as described in “Evaluate an assigned diagnosis specification” on page 280 and
“Evaluate an assigned rule set” on page 288).
 You can create them by manually evaluating a rule set for an asset (as described in
“Manually evaluate a rule set for any asset” on page 290).

Asset health features, including analysis and Intelligent Advisory assignments are available
in the Factory and Enterprise bundles. External CMMS or EAM gateways and analysis using
rule sets are available in the Enterprise bundle.

290
 • • • • •
13 • Asset Health Management

To view analyses for an asset

1. Select Window > Database. Select a view that includes the Hierarchy Tree in the
Select View dialog (such as the Hierarchy Tree view).
2. Select the desired item in the Hierarchy Tree, then select Tools > Analysis.
The Analysis dialog displays the last analysis and associated advisories. Click Previ-
ous and Next to display other analyses and advisories for the asset.
A Description of “No recommendation” means that the advisory was created by evaluat-
ing a rule set, but that no rules in the set evaluated to “True”.
The Source column shows the source for the advisory.
 A user name (such as (default) or Admin) indicates that the advisory was created man-
ually using Tools > Analysis.
 A diagnosis specification name indicates that the analysis was created by a diagnosis
specification in an Intelligent Advisory assignment.
 A rule set name indicates that the analysis was created by a rule set in an Intelligent
Advisory assignment.
The Symptoms column contains an icon if there are any symptoms for the diagnosis. You
can double-click the icon to display the symptoms.

Symptoms icon
<none> No symptoms were entered for this diagnosis
The symptoms were created either from a manual
analysis, or from a diagnosis specification in an Intel-
ligent Advisory assignment.
No symptoms were created from evaluating a rule set
(in an Intelligent Advisory or manually). Double-click
the icon, then click Rule Set Symptoms to display the
rule set.
Symptoms were created from evaluating a rule set. (in
an Intelligent Advisory or manually). Double-click the
icon, then click Rule Set Symptoms to display the
rule set.

To view advisories for an asset

Every advisory, regardless of how it was created, is associated with an analysis. There are
two ways to view advisories for an asset.

291
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

 View the desired analysis as described above. The advisories for the selected analysis
are displayed in the bottom half of the Analysis dialog.
 View all the advisories for an item in the Hierarchy Tree.
a. Select Window > Database. Select the Advisory Panel view, or any view that
shows the Hierarchy Tree and the Advisory pane.
b. Select the desired item in the Hierarchy Tree.

The advisories for the selected item appear in the Advisory pane.

Tracking Work Requests

After you create a work request by sending an advisory to a gateway, Emonitor gives you
several ways to track the progress of that work request.
 If you have a gateway to a CMMS or EAM system, Emonitor gets the work request
status information from the external system if available. Emonitor may also be able to
get status information for work requests that originated in the external system (not in
Emonitor).
 Otherwise, you can manually update the work status in Emonitor.

Asset health features, including tracking work requests, are available in the Factory and
Enterprise bundles. External CMMS or EAM gateways and analysis using rule sets are avail-
able in the Enterprise bundle.

View Work Request Status

There are three ways to view work request status:
 The Advisory pane in the Database window displays a spreadsheet with data for each
of the advisories for the currently selected machine in the Hierarchy Tree.
 The advisory plot displays a trend showing when the status of the work request
changed (for example, from “Work Started” to “Work Completed”) plotted against
time.
 The advisory report type (in the Report Builder) displays a record of the status of work
requests.

Asset health features, including tracking work requests, are available in the Factory and
Enterprise bundles. External CMMS or EAM gateways and analysis using rule sets are avail-
able in the Enterprise bundle.

292
 • • • • •
13 • Asset Health Management

To view work request status in the Advisory pane

1. Select Window > Database. Select the Advisory Panel view in the Select View dia-
log.
2. Select the desired machine in the Hierarchy Tree. Emonitor displays the associated
advisories and work request status in the Advisory pane.
You can update the work request priority, work status, and time stamps (if the gateway
permits it). See “Manually Update Work Requests” on page 295. Note that you cannot edit
an advisory that has been sent to a gateway.

You can also display information for work requests that originated in an external CMMS or EAM
system. Make sure the Advisory pane in the Database window is active. Select View > Pane
Options and select Emonitor advisories, external system advisories, or both.

To view work request status in an advisory plot

1. Select Window > Plots.
2. Select the Work Tracking view for the new Plot window in the Select Plot View dia-
log.

The icons on the plot represent different stages in the history of the advisory. The plot
displays the status for the cursored marker.

Date the analysis was performed to create

the advisory

Date the work request was created for the

advisory

293
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

Date work was started

Date work was completed

Date of the current status if the status is

none of the above (for example, waiting
for parts)

The marker is grayed out if Emonitor is unable to connect to an outside CMMS or EAM
system (if otherwise available for this machine).

3. Move to the desired machine by doing one of the following:

 Open the Database window and click on the machine in the Hierarchy Tree.
 Use the Remote Control toolbar (select View > Toolbars > Remote Control).
 Create a report in a Report window, then click on a measurement in the report.
 Open a list in the List window, then click on a location in the list.
4. You can change the data on the plot in several ways.
 You can limit the data displayed on the plot. Select Plot > Options. Use the selec-
tions on the Data tab to select the data to display.
 You can double-click on the gateway plot region on the plot to change to the next
gateway for work requests for the selected machine.
 Pressing W displays a Work Information dialog. This contains the date and
description for the work action or actions from the original advisory. You can
leave this dialog open as you move through the data.

You can also display information for work requests that originated in an external CMMS or
EAM system. Select Plot > Options and on the Data tab select View external work.

To view work request status in a report

The “Asset Health” report description includes information for advisories and work
requests. You can also create a custom report description to suit your own needs, based on
the Advisory report type in the Report Builder. For more information, see “Creating Cus-
tom Reports” on page 246.

294
 • • • • •
13 • Asset Health Management

Manually Update Work Requests

Emonitor can track the status of advisories and work requests. If you have a gateway to a
CMMS or EAM system, Emonitor gets the work request status information from the
external system (if that feature is available for your system). You can also manually
update the advisory (work request priority, work status, and time stamps) if the gateway
type permits it.
If you are using the email or Emonitor gateways, manually updating the advisory is the
only way to track the work request progress.

Asset health features, including tracking work requests, are available in the Factory and Enter-
prise bundles. External CMMS or EAM gateways and analysis using rule sets are available in the
Enterprise bundle.

You cannot edit the other parts of an advisory that has been sent to a gateway.

1. Select Window > Database. Select the Advisory Panel view in the Select View dia-
log.
2. Select the desired machine in the Hierarchy Tree. Emonitor displays the associated
advisories in the Advisory pane.
3. Change the work request priority, status, and time stamps (if permitted by the gateway
type).

Verify the Completed Work Request

Once the work request is completed, you can verify that the original problems that
required the work are fixed. After new data is collected for the machine, you can use the
reports and plots available in Emonitor to analyze the data. If the problem is resolved, and
the gateway supports editing work request status in Emonitor, you can change the work
status to “Closed.”

Asset health features, including tracking work requests, are available in the Factory and Enter-
prise bundles.

If you want to enter additional notes, you can use the hierarchy notebook. Select Tools >
Notebook, then enter the information for the machine. These notes only appear in the
notebook, and in reports that include the notebook.

295
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

296
14 MIMOSA Import and Export
Overview of MIMOSA
MIMOSA stands for the Machinery Information Management Open Systems Alliance,
which is a non-profit corporation. Emonitor supports the MIMOSA goal of providing
ways to share machinery information through MIMOSA Compliant data transfer using
either MIMOSA Export Data (MED) files or direct ODBC database access. This gives
you an easy way to move data from your Emonitor database into any other application
that supports the same MIMOSA interfaces. You can also import data into Emonitor from
any other application that supports the same interfaces. This chapter describes how to set
up your database for MIMOSA, as well as exporting and importing MIMOSA Compliant
data.
Emonitor supports the following MIMOSA interfaces for MIMOSA version 1.1:
 MED file imports supporting the TREND-File & VIB-File Import for Service Seg-
ments Interfaces (#1110111, #1110211)
 MED file exports supporting the TREND-File & VIB-File Export for Service Seg-
ments Interfaces (#1120111, #1120211)
 ODBC access to TREND-SQL & VIB-SQL Server for Service Segments Interface
(#1320111, #1320211)

At the time of the creating of this help file, lubricant-specific interfaces for MIMOSA were not
supported in Emonitor, so this may not be useful when setting up for oil analysis. The infor-
mation is included so that you can set up your database for MIMOSA compliance from the
beginning.

An MED file is a MIMOSA data file with a specified file structure, created by exporting
data from a MIMOSA Compliant application. For more information on MIMOSA, includ-
ing a list of MIMOSA Compliant applications:
 Visit the MIMOSA website at [Link].
 Send email to info@[Link].

Setting Up the Emonitor Database for MIMOSA

The Emonitor database structure is easy to adapt for MIMOSA. Most of the work involves
identifying the key components of the database so they can be recognized by other
MIMOSA applications. Emonitor can automatically assign some of the identifiers for you
(segment ID and measurement location ID).

297
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

MIMOSA Terminology
This section describes the key MIMOSA version 1.1 terminology by relating it to familiar
Emonitor components.

Site ID
A site is a physical location somewhere in the world such as a plant or office. A site con-
tains sub-divisions called “segments”: areas, buildings, processes, and machinery that can
be monitored. At a site, you can have many databases of information about machinery. In
general, you can mark the location of a site on a map. For a for-profit business, your site
ID is the Data Universal Numbering System (D-U-N-S) number assigned by Dunn &
Bradstreet. This number is unique in the world, and is not reassigned if the location closes.
You can obtain your site's D-U-N-S number by calling Dunn & Bradstreet Information
Resources Customer Service at 1-800-333-0505. This is a free service.
For a not-for-profit or government location, the site ID is assigned by MIMOSA. To
obtain a site ID for your location, contact the MIMOSA Technical Director
([Link]).
A negative D-U-N-S number can be used temporarily, but should be replaced with the
correct number as soon as possible.
In Emonitor, a site usually corresponds to the highest level in the Hierarchy Tree (the
plant). If your database contains more than one plant, each plant will have its own unique
site ID. The ID is an integer number between -2,147,483,648 and 2,147,483,647.

Service Segment ID/Type

A service segment corresponds to items in the Hierarchy Tree in Emonitor (with the
exceptions of items that are identified as sites). A segment can be an area, a process, a
train of machinery, a machine, or a component. Each segment is a child of either a site, or
another segment. Each segment may have zero or more measurement locations assigned
to it. The segment type is a text field that describes the segment.
Emonitor automatically generates segment IDs the first time you export data for that loca-
tion, if you do not assign them manually. The segment IDs must be unique within a site. It
is an integer number between -2,147,483,648 and 2,147,483,647.

Measurement Location ID
A measurement location is a physical location on a machine or in a plant where a mea-
surement is taken. It corresponds to a Emonitor location. For MIMOSA purposes, it is
best if you limit the measurement definitions under a Emonitor location to a single type of
data. The MIMOSA location includes information about the type of measurement, the
direction, and the transducer. The location type is a text field that describes the segment.

298
 • • • • •
14 • MIMOSA Import and Export

As a general practice, do not mix vibration, process, and oil analysis measurement defini-
tions under the same Emonitor location. Instead, group the vibration measurements under
one location, the process measurement definitions under a second location, and the oil
analysis measurements under a third location. Other MIMOSA Compliant systems may
not recognize measurements which are associated with location types which are not prop-
erly matched, e.g., process data with a vibration location.
Emonitor automatically generates location IDs the first time you export data for that loca-
tion, if you do not assign them manually. Each location ID must be unique within a ser-
vice segment. It is an integer number between -2,147,483,648 and 2,147,483,647.

Database ID
Each database at a site must be assigned a unique identifier. Emonitor allows you to spec-
ify the ID that you want to assign the Emonitor database. It is an integer number between
-2,147,483,648 and 2,147,483,647.

Set Up the Database

It is easy to set up your Emonitor database in order to export and import MIMOSA data.
The steps are listed here for you. See “MIMOSA Terminology” on page 298 for descrip-
tions of the terms used in this list.
1. Obtain the site ID for your plant, either the D-U-N-S number or from MIMOSA. If
you have more than one site in your database (multiple plants), you need a site ID for
each site.
2. Enter the names and IDs for your site and database. Select Setup > Options >
Mimosa and enter the information.
3. When setting up the Hierarchy Tree, use Setup > Hierarchy to enter the site ID or IDs
for the highest level item(s). These items correspond to plants or offices.
4. When setting up the other items in the Hierarchy Tree, you may enter unique segment
IDs for each item (other than the sites identified in step 2). For each segment, select
the segment type. If you do not enter the segment IDs, Emonitor automatically gener-
ates them for you the first time you export data.
5. When setting up the locations, you may enter unique location IDs for each location.
For each location, select the location type (use Setup > Location). If you do not enter
the location IDs, Emonitor automatically generates them for you the first time you
export data.

299
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

Exporting and Importing Data

Emonitor allows you to both export and import MIMOSA Compliant data (MIMOSA ver-
sion 1.1). You can export to MED files, which you can then send to another plant or
office. You can also export the data to a set of MIMOSA tables in your database, using the
SQL Snapshot feature. Then you or another person can use any program that supports the
ODBC interface to query the MIMOSA tables for the information.

Set the MIMOSA Configuration Directory

The configuration directory stores the MIMOSA export and import configurations. A con-
figuration defines how MIMOSA Compliant data is exported or imported. It can also
define when and how often data is automatically exported or imported. To set the configu-
ration directory:
1. Select Tools > MIMOSA > Set Configuration Directory.
2. The dialog shows the current configuration directory. To change the configuration
directory, click Change.
3. Select a new directory and click OK.

Export Data to MED Files or MIMOSA Tables

Exporting MIMOSA Compliant data to an MED file creates a file on your computer con-
taining the selected information. Exporting using SQL Snapshot sends the data to a set of
tables in your Emonitor database. Before exporting data, you must create a MIMOSA
export configuration that defines how the data is exported.
1. Select Tools > MIMOSA > Export.
2. If you have already created the desired export configuration, skip to step 4. Otherwise,
click New to create a new export configuration. You could also click Copy if you
want to create an export configuration that is similar to an existing one.

What are the Export Configuration dialog tabs?

 General - General options, including the required name for the configuration.
 Source - The database and access information for the configuration.
 Target - The target for the exported information. This can be an MED file, a set of
database tables, or both.
 Table Category - The database tables and conditions to use to select the data to
export.
 Options - Other options, including continue on error, log messages, generate seg-
ment and location IDs, and a date constraint for the exported data.

300
 • • • • •
14 • MIMOSA Import and Export

3. When done creating the configuration, click OK.

4. After creating the export configuration, you can use it in these ways:
 You can export data immediately. Select the export configuration in the Export
dialog and click Export.
 You can schedule data export. Click Schedule and set up a Scheduler profile to
export data at some time in the future. You can schedule the export configuration
to run only once, or repeatedly at regular intervals. See “Create a Scheduled
Event” on page 312.
 You can set up multiple schedules for an export configuration. This can, however
cause some confusion, since there is no indication that an export configuration has
been scheduled more than once. You can use the Scheduler program to view, edit,
or delete schedules for export configurations. See “View and Edit Scheduled
Events” on page 313.

Import Data from MED Files

Importing MIMOSA Compliant data from an MED file copies the information from the
MED file into the Emonitor database on your computer. Before importing data, you must
create a MIMOSA import configuration that defines how the data is imported.
1. Select Tools > MIMOSA > Import.
2. If you have already created the desired import configuration, skip to step 4. Otherwise,
click New to create a new import configuration. You could also click Copy if you
want to create an import configuration that is similar to an existing one.

What are the Import Configuration dialog tabs

 General - General options, including the required name for the configuration.
 Source - The file name prefix and directory for the files to be imported.
 Target - The database and access information for the configuration.
 Options - Other options, including continue on error, log messages, create sites if
they do not exist, and overwrite duplicate hierarchy data.
3. When done creating the configuration, click OK.
4. After creating the import configuration, you can use it in these ways:
 You can import data immediately. Select the import configuration in the Import
dialog and click Import.
 You can schedule data import. Click Schedule and set up a Scheduler profile to
import data at some time in the future. You can schedule the import configuration

301
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

to run only once, or repeatedly at regular intervals. See “Create a Scheduled

Event” on page 312.
 You can set up multiple schedules for an import configuration. This can, however
cause some confusion, since there is no indication that an import configuration has
been scheduled more than once. You can use the Scheduler program to view, edit,
or delete schedules for import configurations. See “View and Edit Scheduled
Events” on page 313.

Resolve Problems
If you encounter a problem importing data, or there are problems importing an MED file
that you created, there are several things you can do to resolve the problem.
 Both the system that created the MED file and the system trying to import the MED
file must be compatible. In other words, they must both support the same MIMOSA
interfaces. See “Overview of MIMOSA” on page 297 for a list of interfaces supported
by Emonitor.
 Make sure that the import configuration has the Log messages checkbox selected.
Then examine the log file after trying to import data. The log file may contain mes-
sages indicating the source of the problem.
 Try to resolve the problem first with the vendor of the software that is having the prob-
lem.
 If you are unable to resolve the problem with the software vendors, MIMOSA can
review the issue. You can address the problem to the MIMOSA Technical Director.
For more information:
 Visit the MIMOSA website at [Link].
 Send email to info@[Link].

302
15 Using Emonitor Web
Loading and Unloading Data with Emonitor Web
Emonitor Web gives you the ability to perform many of the same data collection and anal-
ysis tasks available in the Emonitor. These include:
 Loading a data collector with a route (list) of data collection points
 Unloading collected data from a data collector
 Viewing data in different types of plots
 Viewing data in HTML-formatted reports
Emonitor Web allows you to perform all these tasks at a remote site, using the Internet for
communication. There are two parts to Emonitor Web:
 The Emonitor Web server, located on a web server computer running the Microsoft
Internet Information Server software. This computer is usually the same computer
hosting the Emonitor database, or is connected to the Emonitor database server com-
puter through a network. See the Emonitor Installation Guide for the steps to install
and set up the Emonitor Web server.
 The Emonitor Web client, located at a remote site. This can be any computer running
Microsoft Internet Explorer. This computer must have the correct FactoryTalk® Acti-
vation® installed for Emonitor Web. It must also be able to communicate with the
Emonitor Web server computer. In some cases, this may require special software or
hardware to get through your company’s firewall.
After the Emonitor Web server is installed and running, you can access the Emonitor data-
base from any computer connected to the Internet.
To get started with Emonitor Web, you perform the following tasks in Emonitor:
1. Add one or more Emonitor Web users.
2. Create an Emonitor Web list type.
3. Create and save the lists for data collection through Emonitor Web.
4. Update the Emonitor Web load files.
You can then perform the following tasks at the remote site through Emonitor Web:
1. Download any new or changed Emonitor Web load files (routes).
2. Load one or more routes into a data collector, and then collect data for the routes.

303
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

3. Unload the data collector, and then transfer the collected data back to the Emonitor
database.

Add an Emonitor Web User

The first step in using Emonitor Web is to set up one or more Emonitor Web users.

An Emonitor Web user is not the same as a regular Emonitor user. An Emonitor Web user can
only connect to the Emonitor database for these specific tasks.

 Download load files from the Emonitor database, or upload collected data to the
database.
 Download data from the Emonitor database for viewing in plots or reports.
To add, edit, or delete Emonitor Web users, select Setup > Web Load/Unload Users.

IMPORTANT: The Emonitor Web user at the remote site must be able to log into a Windows
domain controller, and the name of the domain must match the domain name set up with Setup
> Web Load/Unload Users.

You may also want to add a regular Emonitor user that corresponds to the Emonitor Web
user. This allows you to use list assignment and filter lists for that Emonitor Web user
name. To add a regular Emonitor user, see “Add a New User” on page 319.

Create an Emonitor Web List Type

List types allow you to organize your lists. When you save a list, you can give it a list
type. Then you can use the list filtering features in Emonitor to display only some types of
lists.
To create an Emonitor Web list type, select Setup > Options > List Types. See “Create
New List Types” on page 121 for more information.

Create and Save Emonitor Web Load Lists

Lists provide you with a powerful tool for organizing measurement definitions for many
purposes. You use lists with Emonitor Web for these tasks:
 Load selected measurement definitions into a data collector, using Emonitor Web
Webload files.
 Select data for reports, using any Emonitor list.
To save the current list as a Webload file, select List > Save, and then select Webload for
the Load file type. For more information, see “Save a New or Modified List” on page
124.

304
 • • • • •
15 • Using Emonitor Web

Update Emonitor Web Webload files

Webload lists are a special type of list. Emonitor must create a Webload file from a
Webload list before it can be loaded into a data collector at a remote site. Building the
Webload file may take some time, depending on the size of the list. Instead, you can build
load files from Webload lists anytime, then download them through Emonitor Web at a
remote site.
You can save any list as a Webload list. When you save the list, you simply select one or
more data collectors for the list. You can then build Webload files for each data collector
at any convenient time.

To create a Webload list

When you save a list with List > Save, simply select the Webload load file type. Emonitor
saves a separate Webload load file for each of the selected data collectors for that list.

To select the directory for Webload load files

You can select the directory in which Emonitor stores the Webload load files.
1. Select Tools > Update Web Load Files.
2. Click Browse to change the File destination.
3. Select the directory for the Webload files.

To build new load files for Webload lists

1. Select Tools > Update Web Load Files.
2. Select the data collectors and lists for which you want to update the Webload files.

You can filter the display of lists by clicking Filter. See “Filter Lists by Type or Assignment” on
page 121.

Emonitor builds new Webload files for each selected list for each selected data collector.
Note that this may take some time. You may want to do this while you are away from your
computer, or overnight, depending on the size of your lists.

Collect data with Emonitor Web

You use the following steps to collect data with Emonitor Web. These steps are described
in detail in the online help for Emonitor Web.
1. Upload one or more Webload files from the Emonitor Web server using Emonitor
Web.
2. Load the Webload files into a data collector.

305
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

3. Collect data with the data collector.

4. Unload the data from the data collector using Emonitor Web.
5. Download the data to the Emonitor Web server using Emonitor Web. You can use FTP
or e-mail.

Process Emonitor Web Unload files

After the technician at the remote site has collected data and downloaded the data using
Emonitor Web, the unload files must be processed to store the data in the Emonitor data-
base. The steps you take depend on how the unload files were downloaded.
 If the data was downloaded with FTP, the unload files are stored in the designated
directory.
 If the data was downloaded with e-mail, the unload files must be manually saved from
the e-mail and copied into the correct directory.
To process the unload files, select Tools > Process Web Unload Files. Click Browse to
select the directory containing the Web Unload files.

306
16 System Management
File Management
File management in Emonitor consists of backing up important database and program
files. Backing up your files is an essential part of your Predictive Maintenance program. It
is important to remember that the only way you can protect your data and program setup
is to back up the files to external diskettes, tape, or other storage media.
Emonitor can also execute SQL scripts to directly modify the database. The capability
allows you to run a set of commands to update your database or fix a problem diagnosed
by Customer Support.

Back up Emonitor Files

Backing up your Emonitor data and program files is the only way to protect your predic-
tive maintenance database from hardware failure or accidental damage. Note that Emoni-
tor does not include a function for backing up files. There are, however, a number of third
party backup programs that can perform this function. For assistance, please contact Tech-
nical Support. See “Contact Us” on page 2.

If you do not back up your files, you risk losing your entire database, your templates, and your
Emonitor setup information. Backing up your files is the ONLY way to protect your database from
a computer or hard disk failure.

These instructions apply only to Emonitor systems using the Gupta database, running on
a single machine. If you have a network system, or a different database server, see the data-
base software manufacturer’s documentation for instructions on backing up your database. Or
contact your Database or System Administrator.

The files that you must backup are listed below. This list assumes that you accepted the
default directories when you installed Emonitor.
 The Emonitor database files containing your data, as well as all your Emonitor setup
information. For Gupta SQLBase 9.0.1, these are all the files in the C:\PROGRAM
FILES\GUPTA\SQLBASE901\ENTEK directory and the C:\PROGRAM
FILES\GUPTA\SQLBASE901\ECONFIG directory, including any files with a file
name extension of .log.
 The Emonitor template files. These files are the templates used in setting up your data-
base. These include all the files in the sub-directories under the Emonitor program

307
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

directory. Once you have created and saved your own templates in another directory,
be sure to include that directory in your back up program.
 The custom setup files. These files contain your preferences for various data collec-
tion devices and data import settings. These files have a file name extension of INI
(such as [Link]), EDI, and EAX in the Emonitor program directory.

Execute Database Script Files

A database script file executes a pre-defined set of changes on the current database. For
example, some data collectors require additional fields in the database to store their data.
When you install the driver for the data collector, the installation may prompt you to run a
script to update the database.

File > Execute Script can erase data from your database. Use this command only under the fol-
lowing conditions:
Under the direction of Technical Support (see “Contact Us” on page 2).
As directed as part of the process of installing new Emonitor software.

To execute a database script file, follow these steps:

1. Select File > Execute Script.
2. Select the script in the Execute Script dialog. You may need to change the selection
in the Files of type box.
3. Click Open to execute the script.

Remove Old Data from the Database

A storage specification allows you to define the length of time a measurement stays in the
database. This lets you remove old data automatically, without having to manually clean
out your database. For more information on storage specifications, see “Edit Storage
Specifications” on page 95.
For Emonitor online systems, the system automatically removes old data once a day. It
also removes system events from the System Event Log and alarm events from the Alarm
Event Log that are out of date.
For Emonitor systems that are used only with data collectors or other portable instru-
ments, you must run the Storage Limit Updater program to clean out the old data. Depend-
ing on your system and the amount of data, you may want to run this program only once a

308
 • • • • •
16 • System Management

month or once a quarter. You can automate this process by using the Scheduler. See “Cre-
ate a Scheduled Event” on page 312.

Make sure you no longer need the data before running the Storage Limit Updater. You cannot
recover data after it has been deleted by the Storage Limit Updater. You may want to back up
your database before deleting old data. See “Back up Emonitor Files” on page 307.

1. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar, then select Programs > Rockwell
Software > Emonitor> > Utilities > Storage Limit Updater.
2. Under Update, select the parts of the database to update:
 Measurement data - Removes data that is older than the time limit in the mea-
surement definition storage specification.
 System Event Log data - Removes system events from the System Event Log
that are older than 7 days.
 Alarm Event Log data - Removes alarm events from the Alarm Event Log that
are older than 7 days.
3. If you select Measurement data under Update, select whether you want to update all
measurements, or only measurements from specific lists.
4. If you select Lists under Measurement data, select the lists to update.
5. Click Update to clean out old data from the database.

Remove Measurement Definitions from the Database

Your Emonitor license may limit the number of measurement definitions you can have in
your database.
If the number of measurement definitions in the database exceeds the number allowed by
your license, Emonitor warns you before it allows you to exit the program. When you
attempt to restart the program, Emonitor asks if you want to delete the extra measurement
definitions. If so, the Measurement Deleter program starts.
Tip: You must log in as the administrator to use the Measurement Deleter program.
You can also start the Measurement Deleter program by running [Link] from the
Emonitor program directory.
After you have deleted enough measurement definitions, close the Measurement Deleter
program. You can then start Emonitor.

309
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

Data Mover
The Data Mover program allows you to export part or all of your Emonitor database to a
binary file. The program also enables you to reimport the data to the same or another
Emonitor database, even if the other Emonitor is running on a different database platform.
Some of the benefits of exporting data are:
 Backing up just a part of the database, instead of the entire database.
 Creating an export file containing your machinery setup information (Hierarchy Tree,
locations, measurement definitions, alarms, …), archive data, or specifications (such
as collection or storage specifications). For example, you could create an export file of
new collection specifications for use in several plants.
 Importing data from a remote plant into a centralized database.

Export Emonitor Data

You can use the Data Mover program to export data, machinery setup information, or
specifications.
1. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar, then select Programs > Rockwell
Software > Emonitor > Utilities > Data Mover.
2. Select File > Export.
3. Click New to create a new export configuration.

What are the Export Configuration dialog tabs?

 General - General options, including the required name for the configuration.
 Source - The database and access information for the configuration.
 Target - The export file to hold the exported information.
 Hierarchy - Machinery setup information and data to export.
 Specification Library - Specification library information to export.
 Options - Other options, including continue on error, log messages, and a date
constraint for the exported data.
4. When done creating the configuration, click OK.
5. After creating the export configuration, you can use it in these ways:
 You can export data immediately. Select the export configuration in the Export
dialog and click Export.

310
 • • • • •
16 • System Management

 You can use the Emonitor Scheduler to export data once or on a regular schedule.
You can also set up multiple schedules for an export configuration with the Emon-
itor Scheduler program. Refer to the Help for the Emonitor Scheduler for more
information (Start > Programs > Rockwell Software > Emonitor > Help >
Scheduler Help). Use the Scheduler to view, edit, or delete schedules for export
configurations.

Import Emonitor Data

You can use the Data Mover program to import data, machinery setup information, or
specifications from a file exported by Data Mover.
1. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar, then select Programs > Rockwell
Software > Emonitor > Utilities > Data Mover.
2. Select File > Import.
3. Click New to create a new import configuration.

What are the Import Configuration dialog tabs?

 General - General options, including the required name for the configuration.
 Source - The export file that contains the information to be imported.
 Target - The database and access information for the configuration. The imported
data is stored in this database.
 Options - Other options, including continue on error, log messages, and ignore
duplicate data.
4. When done creating the configuration, click OK.
5. After creating the import configuration, you can use it in these ways:
 You can import data immediately by selecting the import configuration in the
Import dialog and clicking Import.
 You can use the Emonitor Scheduler to import data once or on a regular schedule.
You can also set up multiple schedules for an import configuration with the Emon-
itor Scheduler program. Refer to the Help for the Emonitor Scheduler for more
information (Start > Programs > Rockwell Software > Emonitor > Help >
Scheduler Help). Use the Scheduler to view, edit, or delete schedules for import
configurations.

311
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

Scheduler
The Emonitor Scheduler program allows you to schedule events to happen once or at reg-
ular intervals in the future. Some of the uses for the Scheduler program include:
 Scheduling data export and import tasks.
 Running the Storage Limit Updater program.
However, you can also schedule other tasks, such as backing up your files.
The Scheduler has two parts:
 The Scheduler service that runs in the background and launches (executes) the sched-
uled profiles. The Scheduler service must be running in order to execute Scheduler
profiles.
 The Scheduler program that allows you to create and edit profiles. Note that this pro-
gram does not have to be running for the Scheduler service to execute scheduled pro-
files.
The Emonitor Scheduler service is disabled by default. In order to launch (run) scheduled
tasks, including importing data, you must enable the Scheduler service.
To start the Scheduler service
1. Click Start > Control Panel > Administrative Tools > Services.
2. Select Services (local) in the left side of the Services window.
3. Select SchedulrSvc in the right side of the Services window.
4. The SchedulrSvc Startup Type should be Automatic. If it is Manual or Disabled,
right-click on SchedulrSve and select Properties. In the Properties dialog box, set
Startup Type to Automatic, and then click OK.
5. The SchedulrSvc Status should be Started. If it is Stopped, right-click on
SchedulrSvc and select Start.

We strongly recommend that you leave the Startup Type for the SchedulrSvc as “Automatic”
in the Services console. This starts the Scheduler service automatically when Windows
starts.

Create a Scheduled Event

You can create a scheduled event, called a Scheduler profile, to execute a task once, or at
regular intervals in the future. This topic uses two examples: scheduling data import (trig-
gered by file creation or change), and scheduling updating the archive data using the Stor-
age Limiter (triggered periodically).

312
 • • • • •
16 • System Management

1. Start Scheduler. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar, then select Programs
> Rockwell Software > Emonitor > Utilities > Scheduler.
2. Click Add, or select Edit > Add Profile.

What are the Profile dialog pages?

 Profile - General options, including the required name for the profile.
 Response - Options that define how the Scheduler launches the profile.
 Events - The actions the Scheduler takes for this profile.
 Frequency - When and how often to launch this profile.
For more information on the Scheduler, press F1 or click Help.

Manually Launch a Scheduled Event

You can manually launch (execute) a scheduled event.
1. Start Scheduler. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar, then select Programs
> Rockwell Software > Emonitor > Utilities > Scheduler.
2. Select the desired profile in the Scheduler window.
3. Click Launch, or select Edit > Launch Profile. The Scheduler immediately launches
the selected profile.

View and Edit Scheduled Events

After you have scheduled one or more events (called Scheduler profiles), you can view,
edit, or delete those events.

To view and edit scheduled events

1. Start Scheduler. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar, then select Programs
> Rockwell Software > Emonitor > Utilities > Scheduler. Press F1 to display the
online help for the Scheduler.
2. Select the desired profile in the Scheduler window.
3. Click Edit, or select Edit > Edit Profile.
4. Click the desired tab in the Edit Profile dialog. The Events tab contains the most
information about the scheduled event.
5. Select the event and click Edit Event to see the details of the event.
 Events with “[Link]” in the Executable file line are for importing data
(such as Emonitor Online system data, oil analysis, or ActiveX files).

313
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

 Events with “[Link]” in the Executable file line are scheduled Data
Mover export or import events. The Command line contains the name of the
export configuration or import configuration. Export configurations end in
“DEG”, while import configurations end in “DIG”.
 Events with “[Link]” in the Executable file line are for the Data Harvester.
The Command Line is the name of the configuration for the data import.
 Events with "[Link]" in the Executable file line are for importing data
(such as Online system data, oil analysis, or ActiveX files).
 Events with “[Link]” in the Executable file line are for the Storage Limit
Updater. The Command Line indicates the extent of the update.
 Events with “[Link]” in the Executable file line are for the Intelligent Advi-
sory Evaluator. The Command Line indicates the extent of the update.
 Events with “[Link]” in the Executable file line are for the Calculation
Updater. The Command Line indicates the extent of the update.
 Events with “[Link]” in the Executable file line are for the Alarm Severity
Status Updater. The Command Line indicates the extent of the update.

To delete scheduled events

You can delete a scheduled event.
1. Start Scheduler. Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar, then select Programs
> Rockwell Software > Emonitor > Utilities > Scheduler.
2. Select the desired profile in the Scheduler window.
3. Click Delete, or select Edit > Delete Profile. The Scheduler deletes the selected pro-
file.

Online Import Event parameters

These are the parameters to enter into the Scheduler profile for Online Import Events. The
following examples use the default Emonitor directories. If you have changed the default
program directory, substitute the Emonitor program directory path into the parameters.
 Executable file: C:\Program Files\Rockwell Software\
Emonitor\[Link]
 Command line: C:\Program Files\Rockwell Software\
Emonitor\[Link]

314
 • • • • •
16 • System Management

ActiveX Import Event parameters

These are the parameters to enter into the Scheduler profile for ActiveX Import Events.
The following examples use the default program directory. If you have changed the
default program directory, substitute the Emonitor program directory path into the param-
eters.
 Executable file: C:\Program Files\Rockwell Software\
Emonitor\[Link]
 Command line: C:\Program Files\Rockwell Software\
Emonitor\[Link]
Tip: The [Link] file contains the names of the ActiveX import configuration files
set up in Emonitor (*.eax). For information on editing ActiveX import configuration files,
contact Technical Support (see “Contact Us” on page 2).

XM/DYN Online Data Import Event parameters

These are the parameters to enter into the Scheduler profile for XM/DYN Online Data
Events and Enwatch/6600 Online Data Events. The following examples use the default
program directory. If you have changed the default program directory, substitute the
Emonitor program directory path into the parameters.
 Executable file: C:\Program Files\Rockwell Software\
Emonitor\[Link]
 Command line: C:\Program Files\Rockwell Software\
Emonitor\[Link]

Logix Online Data Import Event parameters

These are the parameters to enter into the Scheduler profile for Logix Online Data Events.
The following examples use the default program directory. If you have changed the
default program directory, substitute the Emonitor program directory path into the param-
eters.
 Executable file: C:\Program Files\Rockwell Software\
Emonitor\[Link]
 Command line: C:\Program Files\Rockwell Software\
Emonitor\[Link]

Storage Limit Updater parameters

These are the parameters to enter into the Scheduler profile for the Storage Limit Updater.
The following examples use the default Emonitor directories. If you have changed the

315
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

default program directory, substitute the Emonitor program directory path into the param-
eters.
Executable file: C:\Program Files\Rockwell Software\
Emonitor\[Link]

Command line: Enter one of the following:

/all: Remove all measurement data outside the storage limits.
/list “list name”: Remove measurement data which are saved to a list with
“list name” and are outside the storage limits. Note that the list name is case sensitive,
and must be enclosed in quotes if the list name contains a space.
/alarm: Remove alarm event log data outside the storage limits.
/system: Remove system event log data outside the storage limits.

Intelligent Advisory Evaluator parameters

These are the parameters to enter into the Scheduler profile for the Intelligent Advisory
Evaluator. The following examples use the default Emonitor directories. If you have
changed the default program directory, substitute the Emonitor program directory path
into the parameters.
Executable file: C:\Program Files\Rockwell Software\
Emonitor\[Link]

Command line: Enter one of the following:

/all: Evaluate all Intelligent Advisory assignments in the Emonitor database.
/list “list name”: Evaluate all Intelligent Advisory assignments for the list.
Note that the list name is case sensitive, and must be enclosed in quotes if the list
name contains a space.

Asset health features, including Intelligent Advisory assignments, are available in the Factory
and Enterprise bundles.

Calculation Updater parameters

These are the parameters to enter into the Scheduler profile for the Calculation Updater.
The following examples use the default Emonitor directories. If you have changed the
default program directory, substitute the Emonitor program directory path into the param-
eters.
Executable file: C:\Program Files\Rockwell Software\
Emonitor\[Link]

316
 • • • • •
16 • System Management

Command line: Enter one of the following:

/all: Update all calculated measurement definitions in the Emonitor database.
/list “list name”: Update all calculated measurement definitions in the list.
Note that the list name is case sensitive, and must be enclosed in quotes if the list
name contains a space.

Alarm Severity Status Updater parameters

These are the parameters to enter into the Scheduler profile for the Alarm Severity Status
Updater. The following examples use the default Emonitor directories. If you have
changed the default program directory, substitute the Emonitor program directory path
into the parameters.
Executable file: C:\Program Files\Rockwell Software\
Emonitor\[Link]

Command line: Enter the following:

/all: Update all alarm severities in the Emonitor database.
/list “list name”: Update alarm severities for all measurement definitions in
the list. Note that the list name is case sensitive, and must be enclosed in quotes if the
list name contains a space.

Data Harvester Import Event parameters

These are the parameters to enter into the Scheduler profile for Data Harvester Import
Events. The following examples use the default program directory. If you have changed
the default program directory, substitute the Emonitor program directory path into the
parameters.
Executable file: C:\Program Files\Rockwell Software\
Emonitor\[Link]
Command line for PI Harvester:
C:\Users\Public\Documents\Rockwell Software\Emonitor\
<config file name>.pii
Command line for RS Bizware:
C:\Users\Public\Documents\Rockwell Software\Emonitor\
<config file name>.rsi
Note that in the command line, <config file name> should be replaced with the name of
the Data Harvester configuration file.

317
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

Data Mover Event parameters

These are the parameters to enter into the Scheduler profile for Data Mover Events. The
following examples use the default program directory. If you have changed the default
program directory, substitute the Emonitor program directory path into the parameters.
Executable file: C:\Program Files\Rockwell Software\
Emonitor\[Link]
Command line for data export event:
C:\Users\Public\Documents\Rockwell Software\Emonitor\
<config file name>.deg
Command line for data import event:
C:\Users\Public\Documents\Rockwell Software\Emonitor\
<config file name>.dig
Note that in the command line, <config file name> should be replaced with the name of
the Data Mover export or import configuration file.

User Management
User management refers to setting up users and security. This determines who can operate
Emonitor. These are the steps in setting up security for your Emonitor system:
1. Setting up the Emonitor Administrator.
2. Adding a new user with a user name and password.
3. Requiring that users log in before using the program.
4. Changing passwords.
5. Removing a user.
The Emonitor Administrator is the person who has the responsibility for setting up users
and requiring that they log in before using Emonitor. You must first set up the Emonitor
Administrator before setting up any other users. Once you set up the Administrator, you
can then add other Emonitor users.
There are two main reasons for setting up users and requiring that they log in before oper-
ating Emonitor.
 To prevent unauthorized people from using the program and possibly damaging either
your Emonitor setup, or your database.
 To restrict access to some of the functions in the program. For example, you may not
want all users to be able to delete archive data, or to change the database setup. You
can set the individual user access rights to allow a user to create lists, load and unload

318
 • • • • •
16 • System Management

a data collector, and view reports and plots, but not allow them to modify the database
setup or delete data.

Network versions of Emonitor may require additional steps to manage users. Contact your
Database or System Administrator for assistance in user management.

Set Up the Emonitor Administrator

The first step in setting up security for Emonitor is setting up the Emonitor Administrator.
The Administrator is the person who is responsible for setting up other Emonitor users.
Emonitor includes a default Administrator. To set up the Administrator for your system,
you must first log in as the Administrator, and then change your password.

To log in as the Administrator

1. Start Emonitor. Initially, Emonitor may not require that you log in before you can
operate the program.
2. Select File > Log In.
3. Enter admin as the User name.

4. Enter password as the Password. Note that Emonitor does not show the pass-
word. You can change the password later, and then use the new password when you
log in as the Administrator.
You are now logged in as the Emonitor Administrator.

To change the Administrator password

1. Select File > Change Password.
2. Enter password as the Old password. Then enter your new password as the New
password. Your password can be up to 16 characters in length, and can contain letters,
numbers, or symbols. Note that the password is case-sensitive.
3. Enter your password again in the Repeat new password field. This ensures that you
did not make a mistake in typing your password.
The Administrator must now use the new password when logging in to use Emonitor. The
Administrator continues to use admin as the User name. You can create additional
users with Administrator rights if desired.

Add a New User

After you have set up the Emonitor Administrator, you can add other Emonitor users. You
can set up each user with his or her own access rights and password. This allows you to
control access to Emonitor, and to restrict the number of things a user can do in Emonitor.

319
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

The Administrator, or another user with Administrator access rights, is the only one who
can set up other users. Each user, after they log in to Emonitor, can only change his or her
own password.
Note that setting up users does not automatically require that a user log in before using
Emonitor. The Administrator, or another user with Administrator access rights, must
select Log in required for all users in the User Security dialog before users will be
required to log in.
If you do not require logging in before using the program, each user who does not log in
has the same access rights that you give to the default user. The default user allows you to
set the access rights for all users who do not log in to the single-user version of Emonitor
when logging in is not required.

To add a new user

1. Log in to Emonitor as the Administrator.
2. Select File > User Security.
3. Move to the first blank row in the User Security spreadsheet.
4. Enter the new user name in the User name column.
5. Double-click in the Access rights field, and select the access rights for the new user.
6. The default password for the new user is password. To change the password, dou-
ble-click in the Password field to display the New Password dialog. Note that the
password is case-sensitive.
7. Enter the new password as the New password. The password can be up to 16 charac-
ters in length, and can contain letters, numbers, or symbols. Then enter the password
again in the Repeat new password field. This insures that you did not make a mistake
in typing your password.
The new user must now log in to Emonitor using the new user name and password.

If you want to set up an Emonitor Web Load/Unload user, see “Add an Emonitor Web User” on
page 320.

Add an Emonitor Web User

Emonitor Web requires that you set up special Emonitor Web users (Setup > Web
Load/Unload Users).

When you set up an Emonitor Web user, it does not automatically create a regular Emonitor user.
You must set up a regular Emonitor user if you want to use list assignment and filter lists with that
Emonitor Web user name.

320
 • • • • •
16 • System Management

To add a regular Emonitor user, see “Add a New User” on page 319.

Require User Login

Once you have set up the Emonitor Administrator and other Emonitor users, you can
require that each user log in before running the program. Note that Emonitor does not
automatically require users to log in.
If you do not require logging in, each user who does not log in has the same access rights
that you give to the (default) user. The default user allows you to set the access rights for
all users who do not log in to the single-user version of Emonitor when logging in is not
required.
The Administrator, or another user with Administrator access rights, is the only one who
can require logging in.
1. Log in to Emonitor as the Administrator.
2. Select File > User Security.
3. Select Log in required for all users in the User Security dialog.
All users are now required to log in before running the program. You can turn this feature
off by clearing the Log in required for all users check box at any time.

This only controls the process of logging into Emonitor. There may be additional steps required
to log into the database, particularly for multi-user versions of Emonitor.

Use the Current Login when Changing Databases

You can set Emonitor to use your current user name and password when you change to a
different database. Depending on the database, this can save you from having to log in
each time you change databases.
1. Log in to Emonitor as the Administrator.
2. Select File > User Security.
3. Select Use current user login when changing databases in the User Security dia-
log.
Emonitor then uses the user’s current user name and password to log in when changing
databases. You can turn this feature off by clearing the Use current user login when
changing databases check box at any time.

321
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

Change Your Password

After the Emonitor Administrator sets up Emonitor users, each user can change his or her
own password. You must first log in to Emonitor before you can change your password.
1. Log in to Emonitor, using File > Log In.
2. Select File > Change Password.
3. Enter your password as the Old password. Then enter your new password as the New
password. Your password can be up to 16 characters in length, and can contain letters,
numbers, or symbols. Note that the password is case-sensitive.
4. Enter your password again in the Repeat new password field. This ensures that you
did not make a mistake in typing your password.
You must now use your new password when logging in.

Remove a User
The Emonitor Administrator, or another user with Administrator access rights, is the only
one who can remove a Emonitor user. There are two users you cannot remove:
 (default) - The default user allows you to set the access rights for all users who do not
log in to the single-user version of Emonitor when logging in is not required.
 admin - The default Emonitor Administrator. You can add and delete other users who
have the same rights as the Emonitor Administrator with other user names.
1. Log in to Emonitor as the Administrator.
2. Select File > User Security.
3. Move to the row in the User Security spreadsheet containing the user you want to
remove. Select the whole row by pressing Shift+Spacebar.
4. Press Delete to remove the selected row from the spreadsheet.
The user you remove can no longer log in to Emonitor. If the Emonitor Administrator
selects the Log in required for all users check box, that user can no longer operate
Emonitor under his or her old user name.

322
 • • • • •
Glossary

Glossary

absolute viscosity
Absolute viscosity is the ratio of shear stress to shear rate. The com-
mon unit of absolute viscosity is the centipoise (1/100th of a poise).
Absolute viscosity divided by fluid density equals kinematic viscosity.

access rights
The access rights of an individual user control which features of
Emonitor are available to that user. For example, a user with Supervi-
sor rights can access more features in the program than a user with
Operator rights.

active data collector

You can define one or more data collectors as active. Emonitor uses the
active collectors to determine the valid options when you set up mea-
surement definitions. Note that this is different from the current data
collector.

ActiveX document
A special data type that you can display in a Plot window pane. This
allows you to access information created by other programs that sup-
port ActiveX, such as thermographic imaging. You can also store
ActiveX documents such as word processor documents or spread-
sheets.

Administrator
The Administrator for the Emonitor system has the access rights to
add, delete, and modify user names, access rights, and passwords for
other Emonitor users.

advisory
An analyst’s recommendation for work to be done to correct a prob-
lem. Sending an advisory to some types of gateways creates a work
request (Factory and Enterprise bundles).

advisory plot
A plot that displays the changing status of an advisory over time (Fac-
tory and Enterprise bundles).

323
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

alarm
An alarm alerts you to a change in a measurement. For example, an
alarm can notify you when the temperature for a process exceeds a pre-
defined value. You can create one or more alarms for each measure-
ment definition.

Alarm Event Log

A table of alarm events that occurred in Emonitor. The Alarm Event
Log is more often used in online systems.

alarm index
A number representing the average alarm severity for the measurement
definitions associated with an item in the Hierarchy Tree. The alarm
index is the sum of the severity levels for all the measurement defini-
tions in alarm, divided by the total number of measurement definitions
in alarm.

alarm severity
Severity indicates the degree of danger associated with an alarm. An
example of a list of severities from mildest to the worst is: Low Warn-
ing, High Warning, Low Danger, High Danger, Critical.

alarm status indicator

Colored indicators in the Hierarchy Tree, Location pane, and Measure-
ment Definition pane. The current status indicator shows the highest
current alarm severity for the item. The unacknowledged status indica-
tor shows the highest unacknowledged alarm severity for the item.

analysis
An analyst’s observations and recommendations for a problem with a
machine or component. An analysis consists of a description of the
probable causes of the problem, and advisories describing the recom-
mended actions to take (Factory and Enterprise bundles).

archive data
The measurement data that you store in Emonitor. It includes all the
data that you have collected and unloaded or entered into the program.

archive data image

An image that is stored as part of the archive data associated with a
measurement definition. An example is a thermographic picture of a
motor.

324
 • • • • •
Glossary

archive filter
The archive filter restricts the amount of archive data available to
Emonitor operations. For example, you can use the archive filter to
limit the data to only the measurements collected within the past year.

archive offset
An increment or decrement to the current measurement in the expres-
sion for a calculated measurement definition. For example, a+a[-1]
adds the current value to the previous value. a+a[+1] adds the current
value to the next value. a+a[b] adds the current value to the baseline
value.

asset
A machine or a component of a machine.

average trend plot

A plot of the average of the data from the measurement definitions in a
list plotted against time. The plot can include data from measurement
definitions with different units.

ball pass inner race frequency

The frequency (BPIR) generated by a rolling element striking a defect
on the inner race of a bearing.

ball pass outer race frequency

The frequency (BPOR) generated by a rolling element striking a defect
on the outer race of a bearing.

ball spin frequency

The frequency (BSF) generated by a defect in a rolling element in a
bearing striking a bearing race.

band
A frequency range, such as the frequency range between 1,800 and
3,200 Hz. A band set consists of one or more bands. You can use bands
to define specific frequency ranges and values used (band maximum
amplitude or band sum) for a band alarm.

band alarm
An alarm that operates on defined frequency bands in a measurement.
Each band can have its own alarm levels. The band definition deter-
mines whether the alarm in each band is set on the band maximum
amplitude or the band sum.

325
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

band filter
A filter to use during data collection to help obtain high quality data.
You can use a band filter (high pass, low pass, or both) or a percentage
filter to remove specific frequency ranges from the measurement.

band filter specification

A specification that defines the filter to use during data collection to
help obtain high quality data. You can use a band filter (high pass, low
pass, or both) or a percentage filter to remove specific frequency
ranges from the measurement.

band frequency trend plot

A plot that contains one pane for each band in the band set defined for
the location by the category. The plot shows the trend of either the
band sum or the band maximum amplitude over time.

band limited overall amplitude

Also called band sum. This is the total energy in a spectrum between
two frequencies. If the band contains the entire spectrum, the band lim-
ited overall amplitude is the same as the overall magnitude value for
the spectrum.

band maximum amplitude

Also known as peak in band and band peak. The band maximum
amplitude is the highest amplitude at a spectral line in a band.

band pass filter

A band pass filter excludes frequencies below one frequency and
above a second frequency. It allows, or passes, frequencies between the
two frequencies. Useful for filtering out undesirable frequencies in a
measurement.

band set
One or more bands, each of which defines a specific frequency range.
A band set might contain three bands: from 500 to 1,200 Hz, from
2,000 to 3,800 Hz, and from 3,800 to 5,000 Hz. You can use a band set
to define specific frequency ranges for a band alarm. All band sets are
available to any category.

band sum
Also called band limited overall value. This is the total energy in a
spectrum between two frequencies. If the band contains the entire
spectrum, the band sum value is the same as the overall magnitude
value for the spectrum.

326
 • • • • •
Glossary

band variable
A value that you can apply in band alarms across all equipment in a
category. It allows you to set band alarm levels for all equipment in a
category without having to change each alarm individually.

baseline measurement
A reference measurement you identify from the archive data for a mea-
surement definition. It indicates the proper operating condition of a
piece of equipment. You can use it as a comparison to other measure-
ments, and in alarms.

bearing estimator
The bearing estimator calculates bearing frequencies based upon the
relationship between the shaft speed and the number of rolling ele-
ments. The equations used in the bearing estimator are:

Frequency Equation
shaft speed W
number of rolling elements n
ball pass outer race BPOR = W(.5n - 1.2)
ball pass inner race BPIR = W(.5n + 1.2)
ball spin frequency BSF = W(.2n - 1.2/n)
fundamental train frequency FTF = W(.5 - 1.2/n)

calculated measurement
A measurement whose value is found by performing mathematical
operations, usually on the values from one or more measurement defi-
nitions.

calibration number
The number located on the sensor screen or digital VISC-ALERT sen-
sor tube, which can be changed using the calibration validation pro-
gram.

calibration validation program

The digital CONTAM-ALERT screen validation program to ensure
accurate results with the sensor screen. CVP fluid is used for this pro-
cedure.

category
A grouping of similar equipment or a lubricant used for setting alarms.
For example, you can group all water pumps into a category called

327
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

Water Pumps. For each type of units (g’s, pressure, viscosity, …)

defined in the category, you can also define:
 Category variables used in warning and danger alarms.
 Band variables used in alarms for each band in the band set for the
category.

category variable
A value that you can apply in alarms across all equipment in a cate-
gory. Category variables allow you to change alarm levels for all
equipment in a category without having to change each alarm individu-
ally.

centipoise
(cP) The standard unit of absolute viscosity in the centimeter-gram-
second system. It is the ration of the shearing stress to the shear rate of
a fluid and is expressed in dyne seconds per square centimeter. One
centipoise equals 0.01 poise.

centistoke
(cSt) The standard unit of kinematic viscosity in the centimeter-gram-
second system. It is expressed in square centimeters per second. One
centistoke equals 0.01 stoke.

Clipboard
A temporary holding space in Microsoft Windows for text and graph-
ics. The Clipboard allows you to copy and paste information within a
program, or from one program to another program.

collection specification
The collection specification defines the parameters used when collect-
ing a measurement. This includes the type of transducer, windowing
factor, signal detection, resolution, and number and type of averages.

component
A component is a part of a machine. For example, a primary air fan
might consist of three components: a fan, a motor, and a gearbox.

component specification
The component specification defines the base type, default asset infor-
mation, and default name for a component.

328
 • • • • •
Glossary

constant alarm
A type of alarm. It allows you to set an alarm level at a constant value.
For a magnitude alarm, the alarm is a single value.

constraint
Constraints give you additional control over calculated measurements.
The constraint can be based on one of the operands, or it could be a
separate measurement definition. For example, you could add a con-
straint that the recorded machine speed must be within a set speed
range. In that case, the expression is only evaluated when the machine
speed falls within the constraint range.

criticality
A measure of the relative importance of a piece of equipment. This
may be based on cost of downtime, cost to repair, availability of spare
parts, danger to operators in case of failure, and so on.

current alarm severity

The highest alarm severity for the most recent measurements for an
item in the Hierarchy Tree, a location, or a measurement definition.

current data collector

Emonitor can communicate with only one data collector at a time. This
data collector is called the current data collector. You can select only
one current collector for load and unload operations. Note that this is
different from an active data collector.

current list
The most recently recalled or created set of measurement definitions
held in the computer’s memory or saved on the computer’s hard disk.
You can load the current list into a data collector for data collection.
You can also view plots or create a report from the data associated with
the current list.

curve fit
A projected trend through a number of data points, extending the trend
of the data beyond the end of the data. A linear curve fit projects a
straight line. A power curve fit projects an upward curving line (if the
trend of the data is rising).

data collector
A data collector is a device that measures and stores data. An example
of a data collector is the Enpac or the digital Contam-Alert. Data
includes numeric (process) measurements such as oil viscosity, pres-

329
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

sure, temperature, and operating hours. Vibration data may include

overall, spectrum, time waveform, and phase data.

data type
A data type defines the kind of data for a measurement. Examples of
data types are spectrum, time, magnitude, calculated, numeric, and
image.

database
One or more related files that contain information on a common topic.
The Emonitor database contains the hierarchical setup for the machin-
ery as well as the data collected from the machinery.

Database window
The Database window contains one or more displays of information
from the database. The Database window can be split into two or more
parts, called panes. Each pane shows you a different type of informa-
tion from the database.

dB reference
The dB reference is the value used in converting from linear values to
dB scale values. The equations for converting a value (X) are:

if X is a non-power dB scale value =

term 20*log10(X/dBref)
if X is a power term dB scale value =
10*log10(X/dBref)

dCA sensor
The digital CONTAM-ALERT sensor assembly used with the Portable
Condition Monitor (PCM) to measure particle counts. Contains the
sensor screen.

digital CONTAM-ALERT
The brand name for the portable particle count sensor, referred to as
the dCA or dCA sensor in this help file.

digital VISC-ALERT
The brand name for the portable viscosity sensor, referred to as the
dVA or dVA sensor in this help file.

default axis full scale value

The default axis full scale value depends on the units for the axis. The
values are set with Setup > Units > Standard Units and Setup >
Units > User Defined Units.

330
 • • • • •
Glossary

diagnosis specification
A diagnosis specification defines an analysis and the advisories to cre-
ate when an alarm triggers an Intelligent Advisory assignment. It also
defines the advisories to create when a rule set evaluates to “True”
(Factory and Enterprise bundles).

dVA sensor
The digital VISC-ALERT sensor that allows you to obtain viscosity
information in either centipoise or centistokes.

EAX file
An EAX file is a file that controls how ActiveX data is imported into
the Emonitor database from a directory on the computer’s hard drive;
for example, thermographic images. You can edit EAX files with the
[Link] program or from within Emonitor.

EDI file
An EDI file is a file installed with Emonitor that controls how data is
imported into the Emonitor database from an external program; for
example, data from an Emonitor Online system. You can edit EDI files
with the [Link] program or from within Emonitor.

Emonitor program
The software programs in the Emonitor family, such as Emonitor
Workstation, Emonitor Factory, and Emonitor Enterprise.

enumerated measurement
A measurement with an enumerated unit. Alarms, comparisons, and
calculations are performed on the integer values, not the descriptive
text strings for enumerated measurements.

enumerated unit
An enumerated unit is a unit defined as a series of integers (negative,
zero, or positive) with associated text strings (as in -1=UNKNOWN,
0=OFF, 1=ON).

enveloping
A technique for creating spectrum alarms that lets you allow for varia-
tions in the speed of your equipment. Enveloping widens the spectrum
alarm around the peaks in the spectrum, either by a constant amount or
by a percentage of the frequency. The advantage to using a percentage
of the frequency is that the width of the envelope increases with the
frequency.

331
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

exception report
A report containing a listing of measurements that exceeded one or
more alarms.

export configuration
(Data Mover program, used to export data from Emonitor) An export
configuration defines the source database, information to be exported,
name and directory for the export file, and so on. It can also include the
schedule for automated data export.

expression
A mathematical operation that is performed on one or more operands
in a calculated measurement or rule set. Some simple expressions are:
a+b, Sqrt(a), Max(a,b). An expression can also be a constant value (4
or Pi()).

fCA sensor
The attachment to the digital CONTAM-ALERT that allows you to
obtain a ferrous particle count.

ferrogram
A filter that has ferrous particles trapped on it which can be viewed
under a microscope for wear debris analysis.

ferrous CONTAM-ALERT
The brand name for the portable ferrous particle count sensor, referred
to as the fCA or fCA sensor in this manual.

file
A collection of information that you store on your computer’s hard
disk. Some examples of files include word processing files, program
(executable) files, data files, and template files.

file name extension

File names under Windows 98, NT, 2000, and XP have the form of one
to 255 characters. Usually file names consist of a name, followed by a
period, followed by the extension of zero or more characters. For
example, the file [Link] has the file name THISFILE and the
extension EXT. The file name extension usually indicates the type of
file.

332
 • • • • •
Glossary

flushing
The act of preparing a test port for testing by expelling a small amount
of the test fluid through the test port, clearing it of residue and contam-
inants.

frequency item
A model for a component of a machine that generates one or more fre-
quency outputs. Examples include motors, fans, belts, gears, and bear-
ings (Factory and Enterprise bundles).

frequency output
A calculated frequency generated by a frequency item that you can
compare to measured vibration. For example, a motor or a fan gener-
ates a frequency equal to running speed, plus a number of harmonic
frequencies (Factory and Enterprise bundles).

frequency trend plot

A graph of the amplitude of a particular frequency in a spectrum mea-
surement against time. The plot can also show the trend of either the
band sum or the band maximum amplitude of a user-defined band.

function
Functions are mathematical operations in calculated measurements. In
addition to the functions listed in the Expression Setup dialog, you can
use any of the standard math operators (+, -, /, *, ^). You can also use
parentheses to group parts of an expression. Note that function names
are case-sensitive.

fundamental train frequency

The frequency (FTF) generated by a defect in the bearing cage in a
rolling element bearing.

gateway
A gateway is a software bridge that allows you to track advisories in
Emonitor and in some cases create work requests using external sys-
tems. There are three types of gateways:
 External or enterprise gateways are bidirectional software bridges
that link Emonitor to an external CMMS or EAM system (Enter-
prise bundle).
 The email gateway sends advisories out as email messages through
a MAPI-compliant email system (Factory and Enterprise bundles).

333
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

 The Emonitor gateway allows you to track advisories even if you

do not use one of the other gateway types (Factory and Enterprise
bundles).

Grubb's Method
This statistical method calculates how far away the suspected outlier is
from the other data. This is done by calculating the ratio, Z, which is
the difference between the suspected outlier and the mean, all divided
by the standard deviation. The mean is calculated from the archive
data. The standard deviation is also calculated from the archive data.
Once the Z value has been calculated, it is compared to a Critical Z
Value in a table. If an outlier is detected among the sample, it is
excluded and the Grubbs’ Method is again calculated over the remain-
ing data points. This entails a recalculation of the mean, standard devi-
ation, and Z value. This process is repeated until there are no more
outliers detected. Any archive data item that is determined to be an out-
lier is set to “No Stat”.

hierarchy image
An image that is stored with an item in the Hierarchy Tree. An exam-
ple is a picture of a piece of machinery.

hierarchy level
The Emonitor database is set up as a hierarchy of plants and equip-
ment, with information arranged in levels. Each of these levels is
called a hierarchy level. In Emonitor, the hierarchy levels are num-
bered from the lowest level to the highest level. One possible set of
hierarchy levels is: Plant, Train, Machine. In Emonitor, this hierarchy
looks like:

Level Name
1 Machine
2 Train
3 Plant

hierarchy notebook
The hierarchy notebook holds information about machinery in the
Hierarchy Tree. For example, you can use the notebook to store infor-
mation on the condition and repair history of a machine.

334
 • • • • •
Glossary

Hierarchy Tree
A graphical illustration of the database hierarchy. It contains the
machines in your predictive maintenance system. You display the
Hierarchy Tree by opening the Hierarchy pane in the Database win-
dow.

high pass filter

A filter that excludes all frequencies below a defined frequency. It
allows, or passes, frequencies above the defined frequency. It is useful
for removing high vibration, low frequency signal components that
would dominate the signal.

icon
A small picture on the computer screen that represents a program or
some other object.

import configuration
(Data Mover program, used for importing data into Emonitor) An
import configuration defines the name and directory for the source data
file, information to be imported, target database, and so on. It can also
include the schedule for automated data import.

indicator alarm
A type of alarm based on statistical calculations on the values from a
user defined number of the most recent measurements. Emonitor auto-
matically recalculates indicator alarms whenever necessary.

inspection code
Some data collectors allow you to store an inspection code with a mea-
surement. Inspection codes, also called note codes, can be used to indi-
cate the operating condition of a piece of equipment (e.g. hot bearings,
stopped, etc.). They can also be assigned directly to an item in the
Hierarchy Tree or a location, or by importing data.

Intelligent Advisory assignment

An Intelligent Advisory assignment automatically creates analyses and
advisories when a selected measurement definition goes into a speci-
fied alarm range. The assignment uses either a diagnosis specification
(Factory and Enterprise bundles) or a rule set (Enterprise bundle) to
define the analyses and advisories to create.

335
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

interpolation
Allows you to predict an unknown value (pressure, distance …) if you
know at least two particular values (x, y pairs) and assume that the rate
of change is constant.

ISO Code
The International Standards Organization's system of indexing particle
count information to represent certain contaminant levels.

kinematic viscosity
The absolute viscosity in centipoise divided by the specific gravity of a
fluid, when both are at the same temperature. The unit of kinematic
viscosity is the stoke or centistoke (1/100 of a stoke).

list
A set of measurement definitions. You can create a list from locations,
individual measurement definitions, or from other lists. A list can be
saved in, and recalled from, the database. The most recently recalled or
created list is called the current list. You can load one or more lists into
a data collector, and you can plot or report on the data from the items in
a list.

list assignment
You can assign a list to a Emonitor user name. This allows you to
group and filter lists by assignment.

list type
List types allow you to group lists by their function. Note that the list
type does not affect how you use a list. You can use any type of list for
plotting, reporting, loading to a data collector, or entering data. For
instance, you might group lists like this:

Purpose List type

Everyday data col- Scheduled
lection
In-depth assessment Diagnostic
One-time collection Temporary

List window
A window that contains a display of locations in the current list. A list
is a set of measurement definitions. You can open only one List win-
dow, and the List window cannot be split into panes.

336
 • • • • •
Glossary

load file
When you load a list into a data collector, Emonitor first creates a load
file from the list. The load file contains all the measurement definitions
in the list, in a format that can be loaded into the data collector. You
can create load files ahead of time from Quickload lists. You can also
create Emonitor Web load files for remote data collection through
Emonitor Web.

location
A location can be a physical point in a plant, in an area, on an equip-
ment train, or on a machine. Each location is attached to an item in the
Hierarchy Tree, and is used to group measurement definitions.

location plot
A special kind of plot that contains one pane for each active measure-
ment definition in the current location. If the location includes two
numeric and one image measurement definitions, then the location plot
displays two trend plots and one image plot. Note that a location plot
does not show inactive measurement definitions.

low pass filter

A low pass filter excludes frequencies above a defined frequency. It
allows, or passes, frequencies below the defined frequency. It can be
useful as an anti-aliasing filter.

lubricant specification
The lubricant specification defines the type of lubricant used, and
stores viscosity data and other information about the lubricant. The
lubricant specification is also used as a category to define alarm values.
For the PCM, viscosity values stored in the lubricant specification are
loaded to the digital VISC-ALERT sensor.

magnitude alarm
An alarm that defines the safe operating boundary for data from a piece
of equipment, or a process. The data type can be magnitude, numeric,
calculated, or enumerated. Types of magnitude alarms include Con-
stant, Rate of Change, and Statistical.

master operand
This is the controlling data for the calculated measurement. The
expression is performed for each master operand archive data point. If
the expression can be evaluated for each data point, the number of cal-
culated points is equal to the number of master operand data points.

337
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

maximum frequency
The highest frequency used in taking a measurement. The maximum
frequency is set in the collection specification, which is part of the
measurement definition.

measurement
A measurement is a single reading collected from a location and con-
trolled by a measurement definition. Measurements are usually col-
lected (recorded) with a data collector, and stored in the database. The
measurement may be process data such as speed or viscosity, magni-
tude data such as an overall displacement value, spectrum data such as
a single acceleration spectrum, or some other kind of data.

measurement definition
A measurement definition is a set of parameters that controls the col-
lection of a measurement. It defines the type of measurement (numeric,
magnitude, spectrum, image, …). It also includes the collection and
storage specifications. Each measurement definition is attached to a
location.

measurement definition plot

A special kind of plot that automatically shows the correct type of plot
for the current measurement definition.

measurement filter
A filter that is applied when taking a measurement. It is specified as
part of a measurement definition.

median of absolute deviation method

This method calculates all the outliers in one pass. An “M” value is
calculated for each data point.
The median of the absolute deviation is calculated by finding the
median of the data set:

If |Mi| is greater than the critical value then the data is an outlier. Any
archive data item that is determined to be an outlier is set to “No Stat”.

micron
The unit of measure representing one millionth of a meter, approxi-
mately 0.000394 of an inch. Relatively speaking, a grain of salt is
about 60 microns and the eye can see particles to about 40 microns.

338
 • • • • •
Glossary

MIMOSA
A standardized method of transferring data between two MIMOSA-
compliant databases. MIMOSA stands for Machinery Information
Management Open Systems Alliance.

MIMOSA export configuration

A file containing the parameters controlling the way data is exported
from an Emonitor database to a MIMOSA export data file. Export con-
figuration file names have the form *.MEG.

MIMOSA import configuration

A file containing the parameters controlling the way data is imported
into an Emonitor database from a MIMOSA export data file. Import
configuration file names have the form *.MIG.

MIMOSA segment
A segment corresponds to items in the Hierarchy Tree in Emonitor
(except for items that are identified as sites). A segment can be an area,
a process, a train of machinery, a machine, or a component. Each seg-
ment is a child of either a site, or another segment.

MIMOSA site
A physical location somewhere in the world such as a plant or office. A
site contains sub-divisions called “segments”, representing areas,
buildings, processes, and machinery that can be monitored.

MSDS
A Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) is designed to provide both
workers and emergency personnel with the proper procedures for han-
dling or working with that substance. MSDS files include information
such as physical data (melting point, boiling point, flash point etc.),
toxicity, health effects, first aid, reactivity, storage, disposal, protective
equipment, and spill/leak procedures. MSDS information should be
available through the manufacturer.

NAS Code
The National Aerospace Society cleanliness code used for particle
count information to represent certain contaminant levels.

339
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

numeric measurement
A single value that indicates the general condition of a process or
equipment. Numeric measurements might be used to record any of the
following:

temperature pressure
flow valve position
operating speed operational hours

[Link] file
This file contains the parameters that the Emonitor Scheduler passes to
the Data Import applet for controlling data import from several data
sources in an Emonitor Online system. You can use a text editor to
change the DataFileDir and DataFiles parameters in this file to define
the unload file directory where Emonitor Data Import applet (didae-
[Link]) looks for unload files.
The [Link] file is created when you install Emonitor, and
includes the Emonitor database password in an encrypted form. This
means that you cannot import data from an Emonitor Online system if
you change the database password; nor can you import data from an
Emonitor Online system into a different database than the one you cre-
ated when you installed Emonitor. If you change the Emonitor data-
base password, you must reinstall Emonitor to create a new
[Link] file.

oil analysis
Oil analysis or fluid analysis is the process of determining the condi-
tion of lubricated equipment by examining the concentration of parti-
cles or other contaminants in a sample of the lubricant or hydraulic
fluid. Typically, increased particle concentration indicates increased
wear on the equipment.

oil sensor interface

The connector box used to interface your computer with a digital
CONTAM-ALERT, ferrous CONTAM-ALERT, or digital VISC-
ALERT, and collect data using the Labcon software. It must be
plugged in to a power supply and connected to the computer.

operand
Operands are placeholders for data in calculated measurements and
rule sets. They can be single letters, or single words. Usually an oper-
and is a measurement definition, although it can be a string, other type

340
 • • • • •
Glossary

of data, or even another function. For example, suppose “a” is a pro-

cess measurement definition in the expressions Max(a, 4, Pi( )). For
each archive data value in “a”, the expression returns the largest value
of (the archive data point, the number 4, and the number 3.14159...).
The only restriction on an operand is that it must contain the correct
data type defined by the parameters for the function. Operands can be
incremented.
 a+a[-1] adds the current value to the previous archive data value.
 a+a[1] adds the current value to the next archive data value.
 a + a[b] adds the current value to the baseline archive data value.

operand filter
A filter that defines the data for an operand in a rule set. The operand
filter may select only one measurement definition, or it may include all
measurement definitions or all locations for an item in the Hierarchy
Tree (Enterprise bundle).

orbit plot
A plot that is generated from the X and Y timebase values. It displays
the two forward and reverse vectors whose sum is the ellipse, or orbit.
Orbit plots use data from two transducers and provide additional infor-
mation on the direction of precession and ellipticity of the orbit.

order normalization
Order normalization allows you to take variations in machine speed
into account when making a spectrum measurement. The X-axis for
the resulting spectrum is in multiples of operating speed, instead of fre-
quency.

order
Multiples of the operating speed of a piece of equipment. The first
order is the operating speed. The second order is two times the operat-
ing speed, and so on.

outlier
An item of data that is situated away from a related set of data. It is a
statistical deviation from an expected result. In Emonitor, the Grubbs’
method or Median of Absolute Deviation method is used to determine
outliers. Emonitor sets the storage flag to “No Stat” for any archive
data item determined to be an outlier.

341
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

overlay legend pane

An information pane that shows a legend to help interpret the data on
an overlay plot. Contains machine name, location ID information, fil-
ter, and units settings for each measurement on an overlay plot. An
asterisk identifies the active measurement.

overlay plot
A plot displaying two or more trend, spectrum, or time measurements.
An overlay plot displays either:
 The data for each of the measurement definitions in the current list.
 All or some of the archive data for the measurement definition.
You can use the archive filter to limit the data.

pane
A pane is a part of a window. There are two types of panes: plot and
database. A plot pane contains a graphical display of data, like a trend
plot. A database pane contains either the Hierarchy Tree or a spread-
sheet showing the information saved in the database.

pane legend
A region in a plot pane that describes the contents of the plot pane. It
includes the item in the Hierarchy Tree, location, and measurement
definition units. The pane legend also shows if the pane is locked.

parent
In the Hierarchy Tree, item A is the parent of item B if item B descends
from item A.
In the picture below, Area 2 Level 3 is the parent of PA FAN #1.
POWER STATION is the grandparent of PA FAN #1 and MBFP S&S.

parameter
Parameters are placeholders for operands in a function (calculated
measurements). They show you the number and type of operands you
must use in a function. For example, the parameter for the square root
function (Sqrt()) is flt1, indicating that the first and only operand must
be a floating point number. The parameter types are:

342
 • • • • •
Glossary

(none) - the function does not take any parameters (Pi, for example)
avgtype - the averaging type for a spectrum
compspec - the function takes a complex spectrum
date - the function takes a date value
flt - the function takes a floating point number value
int - the function takes an integer value
spec - the function takes a spectrum
speclines- the number of lines in a spectrum
str - the function takes a text string in quotes
time - the function takes a time value
vect - the function takes a vector value
wave - the function takes a time waveform
window - the window function for a spectrum
Optional parameters are surrounded by curly braces {}.

particle count
The number of particles present at or greater than a particular micron
size, typically stated in particles greater than 10 microns per milliliter.

password
Emonitor can be configured for multiple users, each with their own
user name and password. A password is like a key that unlocks the
Emonitor program. A password can be up to 16 characters in length,
and may contain letters, numbers, symbols, and spaces.

PCM
The Portable Condition Monitor is a hand held computer used with the
digital CONTAM-ALERT, ferrous CONTAM-ALERT, or digital
VISC-ALERT sensor for particle count analysis.

Portable Condition Monitor

(PCM) The hand held computer used with the digital CONTAM-
ALERT, ferrous CONTAM-ALERT, or digital VISC-ALERT sensor
for particle count analysis.

peak alarm
An alarm based on the highest or lowest amplitude in a group of
archive data. The alarm may be based on the peak in the data for a
measurement definition, or based on the peak in the data for a category
of equipment.

343
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

phase
Measurement of the relationship between two signals, usually a timing
signal and position, vibration, or acceleration.

plot
A plot is a graphical display of data. Some examples are trend, spec-
trum, and XY plots.

plot legend
A separate pane in a Plot window that describes the contents of the plot
pane. Double-click the Plot Legend pane to select the contents of the
plot legend.

plot pane legend

A part of a pane in a Plot window that describes the plot in the same
pane.

plot region
An area on a plot that allows you to access the plot controls by either
double-clicking or pressing the Spacebar. The plot controls change the
plot characteristics such as cursor type, axis scaling, and axis range.

Plot window
A Plot window contains one or more graphical displays of data. Plot
windows can be split into two or more parts, called panes. Note that
minimizing a plot window unlinks the window from the Database win-
dow.

polar plot
A polar plot is a graphical display of magnitude and phase data for a
single measurement. It uses the polar coordinate system instead of the
Cartesian (X-Y) coordinate system.

process measurement
A single value that indicates the general condition of a process or
equipment. Process measurements can be numeric, calculated, or enu-
merated measurements.

quality stamp
A label for a stored archive data measurement, displayed in the
Archive Data pane in the Database window. The quality stamp indi-
cates the quality of the stored measurement (undetermined, good, bad,
under review), and is most often used in calculated measurements.

344
 • • • • •
Glossary

Quickload file
A load file of measurement definitions to be loaded into a specific type
of data collector. You can build Quickload files from Quickload lists at
a convenient time, so that the load files do not have to be rebuilt every
time before loading into the data collector.

Quickload list
A list of measurement definitions to be loaded into a data collector.
You can build Quickload files from Quickload lists at a convenient
time, so that the load files do not have to be rebuilt every time before
loading into the data collector.

rate of change alarm

A rate of change alarm is a magnitude or band alarm. Emonitor calcu-
lates the rate of change by finding the difference between the most
recent measurement and the previous measurement. The difference is
then divided by the number of days to find the rate of change per day.

report body
The body of a report contains the information for the report in col-
umns. For a report on spectrum measurements, you might want to
include the location, position, and direction, as well as the maximum
amplitude and the date of the measurement.

report description
Contains the formatting information for a report. It controls both the
contents and the appearance of the report.

report footer
The footer appears at the bottom of each page. For example, you might
include the page number in the footer.

report grouping
Grouping allows you to sort the contents of the reports into groups.
This can make a report much easier to scan for information. For exam-
ple, you might want to group measurements by the name of the item in
the Hierarchy Tree.

report header and page title

The header and the page title both appear at the top of the page, with
the page title below the header. For example, you can use the header
for the date in a small font, and the page title in a larger font for the title
of the report.

345
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

report plots
You can include plots and images in a report. To include plots in a
report, select a view containing the plots you want in your report.

report source
Controls the data Emonitor includes in a report. The report source can
be a list, or it can be the entire Emonitor database.

Report window
A window that contains a report of information from the database. You
can send the report in a Report window to the printer if you want a hard
copy of the report.

route
A list of measurement definitions that you can load into a data collec-
tor and use to collect data. You can then unload the data from the route
into the Emonitor database for storage and analysis.

rule set
A collection of rules that can be assigned to assets. A rule is a struc-
tured set of inputs, logical operators, and a single diagnoses specifica-
tion (executed if the rule evaluates to “True”). Rules assist in
automatically determining the cause and correction of specific
machine problems (Enterprise bundle).

Scheduler profile
A Scheduler profile defines a scheduled action or set of actions, as well
as when or how often to act. For example, you could create a profile to
perform data import every day at 5:00 PM. You create and edit these
profiles using the Scheduler program. Scheduler profiles are then exe-
cuted by the Scheduler service.

sensor screen
The calibrated screen used with the digital CONTAM-ALERT sensor
that comes in 5, 10, or 15 micron increments.

service
A Windows service is an application that starts when Windows starts
and runs in the background as long as Windows is running, or until it is
stopped manually.

shaft centerline plot

A shaft centerline plot is a display of the static position of a rotor in a
pressure-fed sleeve bearing. It is used to determine the mechanical

346
 • • • • •
Glossary

integrity of a rotating system. Baseline data identifies the reference

position. Note that you cannot use the Archive Filter on this plot since
Emonitor uses all measurements since the baseline measurement to
calculate the display points.

signal detection
Defines the method of conditioning or measuring a dynamic input sig-
nal. Peak (0 to the peak voltage), Peak-Peak (minimum peak to maxi-
mum peak), and RMS (square root of the mean of the square of the
values) are the most common methods of signal detection.

specification library
A file containing one or more sets of specifications (category, storage,
…). You can choose the types of specifications to include in a library,
or to restore from a library. The specification library contains all the
unique specifications in Emonitor when the library was created.

specific gravity
The ratio of the weight of a given volume of material to the weight of
an equal volume of water. Used to convert absolute viscosity to kine-
matic viscosity.

spectrum alarm
Also called narrowband alarm. It defines the safe operating boundary
for spectrum data from a piece of equipment. Some spectrum alarm
types are peak, baseline, and statistical alarms.

spectral line
A spectral line is an individual discrete frequency in a spectrum mea-
surement. A spectral line is sometimes called a “bin”, a “delta f”, a
“line”, or a “line of resolution”.

spectrum plot
A graph of amplitude versus frequency. Usually the amplitude is a
measure of the acceleration, velocity, or displacement at that fre-
quency.

spectrum map plot

A spectrum plot of multiple spectra arranged in a three-dimensional
format. Map plots allow you to see how all the frequencies in a spec-
trum vary with time.

347
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

spreadsheet
A display of information from the database that displays data in rows
and columns (like a table). Spreadsheets appear either in dialogs, or in
windows. You can add, edit, or delete information through spread-
sheets.

standard deviation
The standard deviation of a set of data is a measure of how closely the
data is clustered around the mean (average) value. Standard deviation
is also called sigma. The average of the data +/- one sigma should
include about 68% of the variation around the average if the data
shows normal (Gaussian) distribution. The average of the data plus two
sigma should include about 95% of the variation.

status bar
The status bar is located at the bottom of the Emonitor window. It gives
a brief description when a menu command is highlighted, or the when
mouse pointer is over a button or a plot region. It also shows the data-
base name, user name, and target date time. You can hide the status bar
to increase the size of the workspace.

statistical alarm
A statistical alarm is a calculated alarm level (magnitude, band, or a
spectrum alarm). Emonitor calculates the alarm level by finding the
average value of two or more previous measurements. A general statis-
tical alarm has this form:
The average of the measurements +/- one or more standard deviations
from the average +/- a percentage of the average.

storage flag
A label for a stored measurement in the Archive Data pane in the Data-
base window. The storage flag indicates the type of the stored measure-
ment (examples include baseline, archive, and no stat).

storage specification
Controls when to collect a measurement, and how long to store it on
the computer’s hard disk. You can use the storage specification to force
the collection and storage of a measurement if a measurement exceeds
an alarm. For online systems, it controls the storage interval. For porta-
ble data collector systems, it can be used with the Storage Limit
Updater to remove old data from the database.

348
 • • • • •
Glossary

synchronous energy
Refers to energy in a spectrum at the running speed and multiples of
running speed (orders) of equipment. Sub-synchronous refers to
energy in the spectrum below the running speed. Non-synchronous
refers to energy in the spectrum that is neither synchronous nor sub-
synchronous.

System Event Log

A table of system events that occurred in Emonitor. Possible system
events are importing data, unloading data from an instrument, manual
data acquisition, and so on. The System Event Log is more often used
in online systems.

target date time

The date and time of all of the following. The target date time appears
in the status bar. Changing the target date time in one changes it for the
following:
 The current archive data in the Archive Data pane
 The current spectrum in a spectrum or spectrum map plot
 The currently cursored measurement in a trend plot

template
A file containing database information that you can use in setting up
your database. There is one template type for each pane in the Data-
base window: hierarchy, location, measurement definition, alarm, fre-
quency item, diagnosis, and archive data.

tiered data
Duplicate data, usually stored at a longer time interval for online sys-
tems. For example, the same measurement may be collected and stored
in three different intervals: once per day, once per week, and once per
month. Tiered data is excluded from category alarm statistics and
alarm status indicator calculations.

time alignment
Time alignment controls whether a calculated expression is evaluated
based on the time between the master operand and another operand in
the expression.
For expressions with a single operand, the time alignment is ignored.

349
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

For expressions with an incremented operand (a+a[-1]), the incre-

mented data point (a[-1]) must fall within the time alignment of the
non-incremented operand (a).
For expressions with multiple operands, the master operand must fall
within the time alignment of each of the other operands.
For example, in the expression a+b, “a” is the Master operand, “b” is
the other operand. The timestamp for data for “a” is every hour (2:00,
3:00 …). The time alignment for “b” is +/-10 minutes. The program
can only evaluate the expression if the timestamp for data for “b” is
within the “window” (1:50-2:10, 2:50-3:10 …).

time waveform alarm

An alarm that defines the safe operating boundary for time waveform
data from a piece of equipment or a process. Types of time waveform
alarms include Time Constant and Time Hysterisis.

time waveform plot

A graphical display of amplitude versus time for a single measurement.

toggle
A toggle allows you to select between two or more states for a field or
region. To toggle among the choices in a spreadsheet do one of the fol-
lowing:
 Double-click in the field.
 Select the field with the arrow keys, and press Enter.
To toggle among options in a plot region, do one of the following:
 Double-click in the region.
 Move to the field with the Tab key, and press Spacebar.

toolbar
A set of buttons that execute commands, recall views, or display
reports. Each window in Emonitor has its own toolbar that can be cus-
tomized. You can “undock” and move toolbars to any location around
the Emonitor workspace or on your computer screen.

transducer
A transducer is a device for making measurements. These include
accelerometers, velocity pickups, displacement probes, and tempera-
ture sensors.

350
 • • • • •
Glossary

trend plot
A graph of the value of a measurement against time, usually displaying
the trend in a magnitude or process measurement over days, weeks, or
months.

true zoom measurement

A true zoom measurement is a measurement where the frequency span
of the measurement does not start at zero. Note that this is not the same
as reducing the frequency span using a filter. Most data collectors do
not support true zoom measurements.

unacknowledged alarm severity

The highest alarm severity for the measurements for an item in the
Hierarchy Tree, a location, or a measurement definition, since the last
time the alarms were acknowledged.

units plot
A plot that displays bar graphs showing the value for one or more mea-
surements for a list or a location, allowing you to compare the values
of a set of measurements with different units.

unload file
An unload file contains the data unloaded from a data collection instru-
ment. This data is collected by the Unload Station computer at defined
intervals. The Scheduler program imports the data from unload files
into the Emonitor database.

unload report
A report that Emonitor automatically creates after you unload data
from a data collector or import data from a file. The report uses the list
of measurement definitions unloaded from the data collector or
imported from the file.

Unload Station computer

This computer requests data from data collection instruments and
stores the data in unload files. The Scheduler program imports the data
from unload files into the Emonitor database.

unscheduled measurement
Unscheduled measurements are measurements you make that are not
part of a list in the data collector. Some data collectors allow you to
make unscheduled measurements that you can then unload into the
Emonitor database.

351
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

user name
Emonitor can be configured for multiple users, each with their own
user name and password. A user name identifies an individual user of
the Emonitor program. It can be up to 16 characters in length, and can
include letters, numbers, symbols and spaces.

view
A view is an arrangement of panes in either a Database window or a
Plot window. A view is also an arrangement of columns in the List
window. You can save a view by giving it a name. Once you save a
view, you can recall it to change the panes in the active window.

viscosity
The measurement of a fluid's resistance to flow. Usually measured in
centipoise (absolute viscosity) or centistokes (kinematic viscosity).
Since viscosity varies in inversely with temperature, its value is mean-
ingless unless the temperature of the fluid is also known.

Webload file
A load file of measurement definitions to be loaded into a specific type
of data collector through Emonitor Web. You can build Webload files
from Webload lists at a convenient time, so that the load files do not
have to be rebuilt every time before sending to Emonitor Web.

Webload list
A list of measurement definitions to be loaded into a data collector
through Emonitor Web. You can build Webload files from WebLoad
lists at a convenient time, so that the load files do not have to be rebuilt
every time before sending to the remote site.

Web unload file

A file of data collected with a data collector at a remote location, and
uploaded with Emonitor Web. Processing a Web unload file adds the
data from the unload file to the Emonitor database.

wildcard
Special characters that substitute for other characters. They are used in
find, replace, and tagging operations. The _ (underbar) and ? characters
substitute for any one letter, space, or number. The % and * characters
substitute for any number of letters, spaces, and numbers.

window
A window is an area on your screen containing a program or a view of
data. The Emonitor program runs in the Emonitor window. The win-

352
 • • • • •
Glossary

dows within Emonitor can contain reports, the current list, or one or
more panes showing a plot or a database view.

work request
A request for maintenance work to be done to correct a problem. A
work request may become a work order in some systems. A work
request is created by sending an advisory to a gateway (Factory and
Enterprise bundles).

work status
You use work status to define the progress of a work request. Examples
of work status are Submitted, Approved, Started, and Completed (Fac-
tory and Enterprise bundles).

workspace
The workspace is the open area in the Emonitor program window. It
can be larger than can be shown on the screen at one time. Emonitor
displays windows on the workspace, while messages and dialogs pop
up over the workspace. You can save and restore the arrangement of
windows on the current workspace.

XY plot
An XY plot is a graphical display of magnitude data from two mea-
surements. It uses Cartesian (X-Y) coordinate system. It allows you to
graph the values of two measurements against each other (such as tem-
perature against load).

353
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

354
 • • • • •
Index

Index

6600 monitors  29 Alarm pane

alarms, displaying  46, 47
A description  40
Alarm Severity Status Updater
acknowledging alarms  160, 162
scheduling  317
active pane
alarm statistics
maximizing  16
calculating  146
selecting  21
category statistics  147
ActiveX documents
changes that require regenerating  139,
displaying  200
145
import parameters  315
displaying in Hierarchy Tree  155
importing  193
examples  148
MSDS  107
excluding outliers  144
plotting  228
generating  134, 136, 137, 141
scheduling data import  193, 315
limiting data  144
storing  187
overview  141
Administrator
secondary sorting  142
entering password  319
alarm status
logging in  319
clearing current  156
overview  318
current  154
setting up  319
unacknowledged  154
advisories
alarm status indicators
creating  275
displaying  155
creating work requests  276
Hierarchy Tree  53
diagnosis specifications  280
List window  118
rule sets  288, 290
updating after importing data  159
sending to gateways  276
updating after unloading data  159
source  291
Alarm templates  76
symptoms icon  291
alarms
viewing  290
acknowledging  160, 162
Advisory pane  41, 293
adding  69, 70
advisory plots
Alarm Event Log pane  161
description  199
band variables, using  140
tracking advisory status  293
category alarms  99
Alarm Event Log
category variables, setting values  139
acknowledging alarms  162
category variables, using  99, 138, 139
adding notes  162
collecting data  151, 153
displaying  161
copying  71, 72
displaying data  163
current alarm status  236
importing and exporting events  163
data collectors, in  153
selecting events to display  161
definitions  133
Alarm Event Log pane  161
deleting  57, 73

355
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

alarms (continued) pasting data  189

displaying alarm status on a plot  236 plotting data  235
displaying on plots  214 storing ActiveX documents  187
editing  70 storing archive data images  186
editing alarm definitions  133 templates, including in  77, 79
finding  70 archive data images  200
finding and replacing  56 Archive Data pane  40, 47
in data collection  151 Archive Data templates  76, 189
in load files  153 archive filter
in the database  46 adding settings to reports  248
lubricant specifications  104 button  16
methods  133 limiting data for alarm statistics  142, 144
overview  131 limiting data for plotting  230
pasting  71 limiting data for reporting  242
plots, displaying on  152 toggling on and off  16
plots, using in  151 asset management
reports, using in  151 advisories  274, 275
severity level indicators  132 analyses  275
severity level, choosing  133 component specifications  274
severity level, editing  132 components, setting up  273
statistics, displaying in Hierarchy Tree diagnoses  275
 156 gateways  270, 271
status, displaying  154, 155, 157, 160 introduction  269
trigger  128, 153 updating work request status  295
unacknowledged alarm status  157, 236 verifying work requests  295
using  151 viewing work request status  292
analyses work requests  292
diagnosis specifications  280 work requests, creating  274, 276
No recommendation  288, 290 assigning a list  124
rule sets  288, 290 assigning diagnosis specifications  279
viewing  290 assigning rule sets  287
analyses, creating  275 autoscaling plot axes  210
AND object, rule sets  286 average trend plots
archive data description  199
adding data  185, 186, 187, 188
adding for a list  184 B
adding, overview  183
background refresh rate  7
copying data  189
backing up files  307
deleting  57
band alarms
deleting data  186
adding  136
editing data  184, 185
deleting  136
editing, overview  183
editing  136
entering data  184
indicator  137
finding and replacing  56
peak  137
in the database  47
statistical  137
overlaying in plots  231

356
 • • • • •
Index

band alarms (continued) copying  100

types  137 deleting  101
band filter specifications editing  100
adding  89 lubricant specifications  89, 94
copying  90 naming  100
deleting  90 statistics, secondary sorting  142
naming  89 using in locations  101
specification library  88 using lubricant categories  104
using in measurement definitions  90 category statistics
band frequency trend plots in alarms  99
description  199 secondary sorting  142
displaying  220 using in alarms  99
using  219 category variables
band sets setting values  100, 139
adding  140 using in alarms  99, 138, 139
copying  141 clearing current alarm status  156
deleting  141 Clipboard
editing  141 Copy button  16
naming  141 copying hierarchy notebook  75
band variables, using in alarms  140 copying plots  204
baseline measurement copying reports  244
copying  189 copying spreadsheet rows  20
effects of changing on load files  128 Cut button  16
Bearing Cursor pane  221 Paste button  16
bearing cursors  221 pasting hierarchy notebook  75
bearing database  221 pasting spreadsheet rows  20
bitmaps, adding to templates  78 collecting data
buttons, toolbars alarms  151, 153
program window  15 steps  172
Rule Set window  283 using lists  128
with Emonitor Web  305
C collection specifications
adding  92
cable connection icon  170, 171, 174
copying  93
calculated measurement definitions
deleting  93
creating  85
description  92
interpolation tables  86, 87
effects of changing on load files  127
loading  165
for unscheduled measurements  178
understanding  81
naming  92
updating  88
using in measurement definitions  93
Calculation Updater
colors
scheduling  316
Plot Legend pane, changing  208
calculator, lubricant  106
Plot windows, changing  211
categories
commands
adding  100
help  7
alarm statistics  99
shortcut keys  8

357
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

communication options collecting with a data collector  172

computer  167 manual entry  183
data collector  167 unloading from data collector  174
comparing data collectors
trends  217 adding new  168
comparing spectra  225 alarms  153
component specifications collecting data  172
adding  90 communication options  167
copying  91 connecting to computer  169
deleting  91 functions  170
editing  91 load options  168
for hierarchy items  67 loading lists  170
naming  91 loading overview  165
set as default  274 loading Quickload lists  127
specification library  88 preparing for loading  169, 170
using  91, 274 setting up  167
components unload options  173
asset information  274 unloading  174
component specifications  274 unloading overview  165
for hierarchy items  67 unscheduled measurements, unloading
setting up  273  174

computer Data Harvester

communication options  167 data import parameters  317
connecting to data collector  169 scheduling data import  317
serial port  169 data import button  16
configuration directory, MIMOSA  300 Data Mover
connecting objects, rule sets  287 export parameters  318
constraints, calculated measurements  81 import parameters  318
Copy button  16 scheduling data export  318
copying locations  28 scheduling data import  318
CPM  63 Data Mover program  310, 311
criticality Data Options command  223
editing  60, 61 data outliers, excluding  144
items in Hierarchy Tree  65 database
reviewing  60 alarms  46
current alarm status  154 archive data  47
current list  117 categories  59
Cursor Options command  219 creating  53
cursors, bearing  221 criticality, editing  65
cursors, plotting  211 deleting  57
curve fit in trend plots  218 files, backing up  307
Cut button  16 finding and replacing  56, 57
frequency items  48
D frequency outputs  48
hierarchy notebook  74
data
Hierarchy Tree  42

358
 • • • • •
Index

database (continued) unlinking from Plot and List windows

locations  43  231

locations, adding  26 date and time in reports  248

machinery, adding  25, 60, 63, 65, 67, 68 definitions  2
machinery, copying  68 deleting
machinery, criticality  68 measurement definitions  309
machinery, description  65, 68 scheduled events  314
machinery, naming  65, 68 diagnoses, creating  275
machinery, pasting  68 diagnosis specifications
machinery, recording information about adding  278
 74 advisories  280
measurement definitions  45 analyses  280
measurement definitions, adding  27 assigning  279
overview  39 copying  279
plants, adding  60, 63, 65, 195 deleting  279
POWER STATION demonstration plant description  278
 59 editing  278
removing old data  308 evaluating  280
setting up for MIMOSA  299 viewing assignments  279
setting up, overview  59 dialogs
specifications  59 changing font  22
understanding  40 spreadsheets  17
unscheduled measurements destination drive letter, PCMCIA card reader  167
 177 dVA sensor
Database dialogs lubricant specifications  104
Hierarchy dialog  50 new lubricant specifications  105
Location dialog  50
Measurement Definition dialog  50 E
undoing changes  55
EAX files  193
using  50
EDI files  193
database ID, MIMOSA  299
editing
database script files  308
ActiveX import configurations  193
Database window
data import configurations  193
button  15
editing scheduled events  115, 194, 313
deleting views  24
email gateway  269, 271, 272
fonts  58
email notification
linking to Plot and List windows  230
Eudora  273
moving around  54
Microsoft products  273
opening  15
Netscape Messenger  273
operations  49
setting up  272
plotting data from  235, 236
Emonitor
recalling views  23
database  39
selecting items  54
files, backing up  307
spreadsheets  17, 20
logging in  5
undoing changes  55
logging out  5

359
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

Emonitor (continued) enable logging  195

overview  1 ferrographic images  109
starting  5 file management
window  6 backing up files  307
Emonitor Administrator  318 executing script files  308
Emonitor gateway  271, 276 overview  307
Emonitor Online system  29 files
Emonitor Scheduler EAX  193
starting  30, 312 EDI  193
Emonitor Web Webload  304
adding users  304 fonts
collecting data  305 Database window  58
introduction  303 dialog spreadsheet  22
list type, creating  304 List window  118
lists  304 Plot Legend pane  208
Web unload files  306 Plot window  211
Emonitor Web client, installing  303 frequencies
Emonitor Web server, installing  303 identifying in plots  265
enumerated units  61, 63 identifying in reports  265, 268
Enwatch units  29 identifying, overview  253
Enwatch/6600 Online Data  29 labeling in plots  226
Enwatch/6600 Online Data Import Event locking frequency cursors  226
parameters  315 Frequency Item pane  48, 253
equipment criticality  61 Frequency Item templates  76
Eudora  273 frequency items
evaluating adding  253, 255
diagnosis specifications  280 changing frequency output labels  256
rule sets  288, 290 connecting  257
Excel, exporting data  190 copying  256
excluding statistical outliers  144 deleting  57, 264
export configuration  310 editing  262
exporting examples  254, 257, 262
list schedules  125 finding and replacing  56
plots  204 in the database  48
reports  244 overview  253
exporting data types  259
Data Mover program  310 using  253
MIMOSA  300 using the Speed Reference  260
scheduling  311 Frequency Output pane  48, 253
to Microsoft Excel  190 frequency outputs
expression, calculated measurements  79 changing labels  256
defining machine speed  264
F examples  258
identifying for a machine  266
FactoryTalk AssetCentre
identifying frequencies  253
disable logging  195
identifying in plots  266

360
 • • • • •
Index

frequency outputs (continued) naming  64

identifying in reports  268 setting number of  64
in the database  48 hierarchy notebook
labeling all in plots  17, 266 button  16
labeling closest to cursor  17, 266 copying  75
selecting for display on plots  267 copying to word processor  75
undefined  257, 263 cutting  75
frequency trend plots deleting  75
description  199 editing  75
selecting a frequency  219 opening  16, 74
selecting a frequency band  220 pasting  75
sort by machine speed  220 printing  75
using  219 recording machine information  64, 74
frequency units, selecting  63 Hierarchy pane  40
functions, calculated measurements  79 Hierarchy templates  67, 68, 76
Hierarchy Tree
G adding machinery  25, 67
adding plants  65
gateways
alarm status indicators  53
CMMS  272
changing item criticality  65
configuring  271
clearing current alarm status indicators
creating work requests  276
 156
EAM  272
component specifications  67
email  272
components  67
Emonitor  271, 276
copying items  68
external  272
criticality  66
sending advisories  276
deleting items  57
setting up  270
description  42, 66
graphic file formats  109
displaying alarm statistics  156
Grubb’s Method  144
displaying current alarm status indicators
 155
H displaying unacknowledged alarm status
help, online indicators  158
for commands  7 finding and replacing  56
for panes  7 hierarchy image  66
for plots  201 hierarchy notebook  74
for toolbars  7 in the database  42
for windows  7 item description  65
status bar  7 items, moving  65
Hertz  63 items, naming  66
hierarchy images items, selecting  54
associating with a machine  67 MIMOSA  67
description  200 moving items  65
hierarchy levels naming items  65, 66
adding  64 number of hierarchy levels  64
editing  42, 63, 64 pasting items  68

361
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

HVA plot  233 installing

Emonitor Web client  303
I Emonitor Web server  303
Intelligent Advisory Assignment pane  41
identifying frequencies
Intelligent Advisory assignments
in plots  266
deleting  57
in reports  268
diagnosis specifications  279
overview  265
evaluating  280, 288
images
finding  56
archive data  186, 227
rule sets  281, 287
associating with a machine  67
Intelligent Advisory Evaluator
enlarging  227
scheduling  316
ferrographic  109
Intelligent Advisory pane  280, 288
fitting to Plot window  228
Intelligent Advisory templates  76
hierarchy  67, 227
interactive reports  244
plotting  227
interpolation tables
reducing  227
adding  86
import configuration  311
copying  87
importing data
deleting  87
ActiveX documents  193
editing  86
Data Mover program  311
naming  86
editing import configurations  193
using  87
from a file  192
inspection codes  101, 192
MIMOSA  301 L
options  191 Label closest frequency output button  17
overview  191 Label frequency outputs button  17
scheduling  115, 194, 311 launching scheduled events  313
selecting source files  113, 192 list schedules
toolbar button  16 copying  125
updating alarm status indicators  159 displaying  125
importing oil data printing  125
from a file  113 List window
inspection codes  113 alarm status indicators  118
options  113 button  15
overview  111 clearing current alarm status indicators
input object, rule sets  286  156

inspection codes displaying current alarm status indicators

adding  102  155

deleting  102, 217 displaying unacknowledged alarm status

displaying on plots  204, 215 indicators  158
editing  60, 102, 217 fonts  118
importing data  101, 192 linking to Database and Plot windows  230
importing oil data  113 opening  15
recording  172 plotting from the current list  129
using in data collection  101 selecting data for plotting  237

362
 • • • • •
Index

List window (continued) tagging all for current list  119

spreadsheets  17 tagging for current list  119
unlinking from Plot and Database windows untagging from current list  120
 231 viewing  118
viewing lists  117 lists and measurement definitions
views, recalling  118 adding to current list  120, 122
views, saving  118 deleting from current list  120
lists tagging for current list  120
assignment  124 untagging from current list  120
assignments  124 lists, tagging
clearing  119 in Hierarchy Tree  16, 119
collection schedules  125 locations  16, 119
copying to multiple hierarchy items  72 measurement definitions  16, 119
copying to multiple locations  72 Tag button  16
creating new  119 using tag conditions  120
current list  119 lists, untagging
deleting  126 in Hierarchy Tree  16, 119
deleting a tag condition  121 locations  16, 120
due date and collection interval  124 measurement definitions  16, 119
editing  122 Untag button  16
Emonitor Web  304 using tag conditions  120
for data collection  128 load files
for manual entry  128, 183 alarms  153
for plotting  128, 237 building  127, 305
for reporting  128, 129 changes that require rebuilding  127
list type  124 loading  127
loading into data collectors  165, 170 Quickload lists  127
naming  124 Webload lists  305
overlaying current list in plots  231 Load/Unload button  15
overview  117 loading
plotting all locations in a list  238 calculated measurement definitions  165
Quickload lists  124, 126, 127 lists to data collectors  165, 170
recalling  122 load files  127
reviewing collection schedule  125 load options  168
saving  124 measurement for comparison  169
saving Quickload lists  126 Quickload lists  127
saving tag conditions  121 setting up computer  167
saving Webload lists  305 setting up data collector  167
scheduling collection  124 location ID, MIMOSA  298
selecting for loading  171 Location pane
undoing changes to current list  123 clearing current alarm status indicators
using  126  156

viewing locations  118 displaying current alarm status indicators

Webload lists  124, 305  155

lists and locations displaying unacknowledged alarm status

reordering  123 indicators  158

363
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

Location pane (continued) machine speed, defined by frequency output

in the Database window  40  264

locations  43 machinery
location plots adding  25, 60, 63, 65, 67, 68
description  201 copying  64, 68
in reports  251 hierarchy image  67
selecting location  235 pasting  68
using  237 pasting in Hierarchy Tree  64
Location templates  76 magnitude alarms
locations adding  134
adding  26, 70 category variables, using  138
and categories  101 deleting  134
copying  70, 71, 72 editing  134
copying to multiple locations in a list  72 indicator  135
deleting  57, 73 peak  134
editing  70 statistical  134
finding  70 types  134
finding and replacing  56 using  131
in the database  43 mail application program interface  272
lubricant specifications  89, 94, 95 manual entry
moving  69 adding archive data  183, 184
pasting  71 editing archive data  183
tagging for current list  16, 119 using Archive Data pane  183
untagging from current list  16, 120 using lists  128
locking plot panes  233 MAPI server  272
locking, using with plots  233 master operand, calculated measurements  81
logging in  5 Material Safety Data Sheet  107
Administrator  319 Measurement Definition pane
required  321 clearing current alarm status indicators
logging out  5  156

Logix controllers  29 displaying current alarm status indicators

Logix Online Data  29  155

Logix Online Data Import Event parameters displaying unacknowledged alarm status
 315 indicators  158
lubricant library  103 in the Database window  40
lubricant specifications measurement definitions  45
alarms  104 plotting data  236
dVA  104, 105 measurement definition plots
lubricant library  103 description  201
using in locations  95 in reports  251
viscosity and dVA  104 selecting measurement definitions  235
Measurement Definition templates  77
M measurement definitions
adding  27, 69, 70
machine notebook  74
adding to the current list  16, 119, 120
band filter  90

364
 • • • • •
Index

measurement definitions (continued) moving

collection specifications  88, 92, 93 locations  69
copying  70, 71, 72 measurement definitions  69
deleting  57, 73, 309 MSDS sheets  107, 187
editing  70, 71 multiple databases, creating  53
finding  70
finding and replacing  56 N
in lists  117
navigating database with reports  244
in the database  45
Netscape Messenger  273
moving  69
No recommendation analyses  288, 290
pasting  71
normalizing Y axis  210
plotting from List window  237
number formats
plotting from Report window  238
plots  212
selecting for plotting  237
reports  242
storage specifications  89, 97
number of points  309
tagging for current list  16, 120
untagging from current list  16, 119, 120
Measurement Deleter program  309 O
measurement filter, effects of changing on load Online Data Console  29
files  128 online systems
measurement units  62 data import parameters  314
MED file, MIMOSA  300, 301 scheduling data import  314
Median of Absolute Deviations  145 setting up  29
menu bar, program window  6 operands, calculated measurements  80
Microsoft Excel, exporting data  190 operating speed, changing stored  222
Microsoft Exchange  273 OR object, rule sets  286
Microsoft Mail  273 orbit plots, description  200
Microsoft Outlook  273 outliers, excluding  144
MIMOSA output object  286
configuration directory  300 Overlay Legend pane  232
database ID  299 overlay plots
database setup  299 colors  232
exporting data  300 legend  232
hierarchy items  67 overlaying archive data  231
importing data  301 point markers  232
information  297 overview
location ID  298 Emonitor  1
MED file  300, 301 Emonitor Web  303
overview  297
resolving problems  302 P
segment ID  298 page number in reports  248
site ID  298 pane types
SQL Snapshot  300
Advisory  41, 293
supported interfaces  297 Alarm  40, 47
terminology  298 Alarm Event Log  161
mouse, using in Database window  54 Archive Data  40, 47

365
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

pane types (continued) plants

Frequency Item  48 adding  60, 65, 195
Frequency Output  48 naming  65
Hierarchy  40 plot axes
Intelligent Advisory  280, 288 autoscaling  210
Intelligent Advisory Assignment  41 changing  209
Location  40, 119 changing coordinate plane  211
Measurement Definition  40 changing scale  210
Overlay Legend  232 changing signal detection  211
plot  199 changing spectrum map  224
Plot Legend  207 changing units  210
System Event Log  195 defining  210
panes plot cursors
Bearing Cursor  221 bearing cursor  221
changing  21 changing type and display  211
changing plot panes  203 displaying amplitude values  212
closing  22, 203 displaying cursor amplitude  212
help  7 locking  17
locking  233 locking frequencies  226
making active  21 moving  212
maximizing  22, 203 selecting type  212
overview  21 showing and hiding  212
resizing  22 plot data
restoring  22, 203 from the Measurement Definition pane
selecting  21  236

shortcut keys  11 selecting from a report  238

splitting  21, 203 selecting from the current list  129, 237
working with  21 selecting from the Database window  235,
zooming  16, 22 236
parameters selecting from the List window  128, 237
Enwatch/6600 Online Data Import Event selecting from the Report window  238
 315 selecting, overview  229
Logix Online Data Import Event  315 Plot Legend pane  206
XM/DYN Online Data Import Event  315 colors  208
parameters, calculated measurements  80 displaying  207
password fonts  208
Administrator  319 saving as default  208
changing  322 selecting information to display  207
requiring for login  321 views, saving  207
Paste button  16 plot locking button  16
Paste template button  16 plot notes
PCMCIA card reader  167 deleting  217
peak threshold  226 displaying on plots  215
phase units, selecting  63 editing  217
entering  215
plot pane legend  206

366
 • • • • •
Index

plot panes copying to Clipboard  16, 204

changing  203 deleting views  24
closing  203 displaying plots  202
locking  233 fitting images to window  228
maximizing  203 fonts  211
plot definitions, saving as default  204 hierarchy images  227
restoring  203 linking to Database and List windows  16,
splitting  203 230
plot regions number formats  212
activating  209 opening  15, 202
description  209 printing plots  16, 205
help  209 shortcut keys  12
interactively changing plots  209 unlinking from Database and List windows
plot types  16, 231

ActiveX  200 views, recalling  23, 202, 204

advisory  199, 293 views, saving  203
archive data image  200 Plot windows button  15
average trend  199 plots
band frequency trend  199 alarms, displaying  152, 214
frequency trend  199 alarms, using  151
hierarchy image  200 all locations in current list  238
location  201 archive data  235
measurement definition  201 band overall amplitude, showing and hiding
orbit  200  222

overview  199 changing units  223

polar  200 curve fit  218
shaft centerline  200 grid lines, showing and hiding  214
spectrum  199 HVA plot  233
spectrum difference  200 images, description  227
spectrum map  200 images, enlarging and reducing  227
spectrum ratio  200 in reports  250, 251
time waveform  200 inspection codes, deleting  217
trend  199 inspection codes, displaying  204, 215
units  200 inspection codes, editing  217
XY  199 labeling frequency at cursor  226
Plot window panes labeling frequency outputs closest to cursor
closing  203  17, 266

descriptions  199 labeling frequency outputs for a machine

maximizing  203  17, 266

restoring  203 labeling frequency outputs, overview  266

splitting  203 labeling frequency outputs, selecting
Plot windows frequency outputs  267
ActiveX documents  228 limiting data with the archive filter  230
archive data images  227 line style, changing  213
changing plot panes  203 locations, selecting  235, 237
colors  211 locking  233

367
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

plots (continued) Q
locking frequency cursors  17, 226
quality stamp
locking panes  233
archive data  189
locking to unit  16
changing  189
measurement definitions, selecting  235,
Quickload files  126
237
Quickload lists
operating speed, changing stored  222
building load files  127, 128
overlaying archive data in plots  231
changes that require rebuilding  127
overview  199, 208
rebuilding load files  127
peaks, labeling  226
saving  126
plot legend  207, 208
using  126
plot legend pane  207
point style, changing  213
printing plots  16, 205 R
Remote Control toolbar, using  239 recalling
rubber band zoom  210 lists  122
saving plot definitions as default  204 views  23
selecting printer or plotter  205 refresh rate  7
shortcut keys  12 regions, plots  209
storage flag, changing  213 Remote Control toolbar
synchronizing X axis  219 using with plots  239
working with  208 using with the current list  128
Y Extra  212 using with the Database window  54
polar plots removing old data  308
description  200 report descriptions
POWER STATION demonstration plant body  247
alarms  47 condition  247
frequency items  254 deleting  249
frequency outputs  258 editing  249
Hierarchy Tree  42 footer  247
locations  44 grouping  247
measurement definitions  45 header  247
Print button  16 page title  247
printing plots  247
list schedules  125 selecting for a report  243
reports  241, 242 sorting  248
processing Web unload files  306 special codes  248
profiles Report windows
editing  115 button  15
programs interactive  244
Data Mover  310, 311 linking to Database and Plot windows  230
Measurement Deleter  309 opening  15, 129
Scheduler  312 preview reports  243
[Link]  309 printing reports  243
selecting data for plotting  238
viewing reports  129, 241

368
 • • • • •
Index

[Link]  245 connecting objects  287

reports creating  285
alarms  151 evaluating  288, 290
archive filter settings  248 new  285
ASCII text file  245 objects  286
copying  16, 244 overview  281
creating a report description  246 using  281
custom reports, overview  246
date and time  248 S
exporting to another application  244
saving
for plotting  238
lists  124
frequencies, identifying  268
views  22
interactive  244
scheduled events
limiting data with archive filter  242
ActiveX document import  315
lists, using  129
Alarm Severity Status Updater  317
location plots  251
Calculation Updater  316
[Link]. plots  251
Data Harvester Events  317
navigating through the database  244
Data Mover  318
number formats  242
deleting  314
overview  241
editing  115, 194, 313
page number  248
Intelligent Advisory Evaluator parameters
plots, changing appearance  250
 316
preview  243
launching  313
printing  16, 241, 242
Online Import Events  314
printing report in Report window  243
scheduling  312
report description  243
Storage Limit Updater  315
[Link]  245
viewing  115, 194, 313
RTF file  245
Scheduler profiles
selecting printer or plotter  243
creating  312
unload reports after importing data  243
deleting  314
unload reports after unloading data  173
editing  115, 194, 313
user name  248
launching  313
viewing  129, 241
viewing  115, 194, 313
results, calculated measurements  80
Scheduler program  115, 194, 311, 312
RPM  63
Scheduler service, starting  30, 312
RSMACC application
scheduling
disable logging  195
data import  114, 194
enable logging  195
lists for collection  125
RTF file, reports  245
scheduling data export  311
Rule Set window
scheduling data import  115, 194, 311
buttons  283
scheduling events  312
description  282
screen refresh rate  7
rule sets  286
secondary sorting, category statistics  142
advisories  288, 290
segment ID, MIMOSA  298
analyses  288, 290
setting up data collectors  167
assigning  287

369
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

severity levels displaying  223

choosing for alarms  133 evenly spaced data  223
displaying current  155 sort by machine speed  224
displaying statistics  156 spectrum plots
displaying unacknowledged  157, 160 changing stored operating speed  222
editing  132 description  199
indicators  132 difference plot  225
shaft centerline plots, description  200 labeling peaks  226
shortcut keys peak pick  226
choosing commands  8 peak threshold  226
hierarchy notebook  75 ratio plot  225
Hierarchy pane  10 spectrum ratio plots
Location pane  11 comparing spectra  225
Measurement Definition pane  11 description  200
menu commands  8 Speed Reference frequency item
Plot windows  12 assigning to a frequency output  260, 262
spreadsheets  9 examples  262
windows and panes  11 machine speed from the database  261
site ID, MIMOSA  298 using  260
specification libraries, saving and restoring using as an input  260, 261
 98 spreadsheet columns
specifications changing  20
band filter  88, 89 changing width  18
collection  88, 92, 127 defining  20
component  88 picture  17
components  90 spreadsheet rows
editing  60, 88 adding  18
lubricant  89, 94 copying  19
overview  88 deleting  19
storage  89, 95, 128 pasting  20
transducer  89 picture  17
using  88 selecting  19
spectrum alarms spreadsheets
adding  135 Advisory  293
deleting  135 Alarm  46
editing  135 Archive Data  47
indicator  136 cursor, moving  17
peak  136 Database window  17, 20
statistical  136 dialog  17
types  135 entering values  18
spectrum difference plots font, changing  22
comparing spectra  225 Frequency Item  48
description  200 Frequency Output  48
spectrum map plots headers  17
changing axes  224 List window  17, 20, 118
description  200 lists  18

370
 • • • • •
Index

spreadsheets (continued) T
Location  43
tag conditions
Measurement Definition  45
deleting  121
overview  17
saving  121
selecting values  18
tagging items for current list  120
shortcut keys  9
Technical Support
text boxes  18
Technical Phone Support  3
SQL Snapshot, MIMOSA  300
Technical Support Website  3
standard units  61
telephone support  2
starting
templates
Emonitor Scheduler  30, 312
adding a bitmap  78
starting Emonitor  5
Alarm  71, 76
starting Scheduler service  30, 312
Archive Data  76, 189
Station demonstration plant
archive data, including  77, 79
alarms  47
creating  68, 77, 189
statistical outliers, excluding  144
description  76, 77
statistics  141
files, backing up  307
status bar
Frequency Item  76
description  7
Hierarchy  67, 68, 76
hiding and showing  7
Intelligent Advisory  76
storage flag
Location  71, 76
archive data  189
Measurement Definition  71, 77
changing  185, 189, 213
naming  77
Storage Limit Updater
overview  76
scheduling  315
pasting  16, 63, 67, 78, 189
Storage Limit Updater program  161, 195,
saving  77
196, 308
selecting  78
storage specifications
terms  2
adding  95
text boxes  18
copying  94, 96
text file, reports  245
deleting  96
time alignment, calculated measurements  81
editing  96
time and date in reports  248
effects of changing on load files  128
time waveform alarms
naming  96
adding  137
using in measurement definitions  97
deleting  137
synchronizing X axis in trend plots  219
editing  137
System Event Log pane  195
types  138
disable logging  195
time waveform plots
displaying  195
description  200
enable logging  195
title bar
exporting and importing events  196
program window  6
selecting events and columns  196
Rule Set window  282
system management
toolbars
file management  307
buttons, program window  15
user management, Emonitor  318
buttons, Rule Set window  283
user management, Emonitor Web  304

371
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

toolbars (continued) unload reports

customizing  15 after importing data  243
help  7 after unloading data  173
hiding  15 unloading
in Rule Set window  282 data from data collectors  165, 174
moving  15 setting up computer  167
overview, program window  14 setting up data collector  167
program window  6 unload options  173, 174
showing  15 unscheduled measurements  174, 177
transducer specifications updating alarm status indicators  159
base unit  97 unscheduled destination  176
calibration  97 unscheduled measurements
deleting  97 collection specification  178
naming  97 destination  176
using  98 destination in Hierarchy Tree  177
trend plots moving  181
curve fits  218 storing  180
description  199 unloading  174, 177
selecting data  235 user defined enumerated units  61
synchronizing X axis  219 user defined units  61, 62
trigger alarm  153 user management
trigger status, effects of changing on load files adding Emonitor users  319
 128 adding Emonitor Web users  304
Administrator  318, 319
U changing passwords  322
overview  318
unacknowledged alarm status  154
removing a user  322
units
requiring user login  321
changing in plots  223
user name, in reports  248
enumerated  61, 63
frequency  63
phase, selecting  63 V
preferred, selecting  62 variables
standard  61 band variables  140
standard units, editing  62 category variables  138
standard units, selecting  62 viewing scheduled events  115, 194, 313
user defined  61 views
user defined enumerated  61 deleting  24
user defined, creating  62 recalling  23
user defined, editing  62 recalling List window  118
user defined, entering  62 recalling Plot window  23, 202, 204
units plots, description  200 recalling, Database window  23
Unload button  15 saving Database window  22
unload files  306 saving List window  118
saving Plot window  22, 203, 207
viscosity calculator  106

372
 • • • • •
Index

W tracking  292
verifying  295
waterfall plots  221
viewing status  292
Web unload files, processing  306
work status, setting up  271
Webload files  305
workspace
creating  304
program window  6
Webload lists
restoring  7
building load files  305
Rule Set window  283
saving  305
saving  7, 22
using  305
windows
help  7 X
making active  21 XM modules  29
saving workspace  22 XM/DYN Online Data  29
selecting  21 XM/DYN Online Data Import Event
shortcut keys  11 parameters  315
splitting into panes  21 XY plots
views, recalling  23 comparing trends  217
views, saving  22 description  199
work requests
Advisory pane  293 Z
advisory plot  293 zooming panes  16, 203
creating from advisories  276
manually updating  295

373
• • • • •

EMONITOR USER’S GUIDE

374